Specifications WWTP Parshall Flume

CITY OF ARVIN
CALIFORNIA
Contract Documents
for
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

PARSHALL FLUME INSTALLATION
September 2018
4540 California Avenue, Suite 550

Bakersfield, CA 93309
661.328.6280
F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\TitlePage.doc

This page intentionally left blank
F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\TitlePage.doc

CANNON CORPORATION
CITY OF ARVIN
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT PARSHALL FLUME INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,

CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
PART I - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

00100 INVITATION TO BID
00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00410 BID FORM
00432 BID BOND
00434 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
00436 LIST OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
00438 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT LIST
00451A CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT FOR
ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION
00456 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
00458 CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGRAGATED FACILITIES
00460 NON-DISCRIMINATION CLAUSE
PART II - CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00520 AGREEMENT FORM
00602 ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF
RETENTION
00612 CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND
00614 LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND (CONSTRUCTION)
00618 GUARANTY BOND
00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00899 NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
2018 TOC-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\TOC.doc
CANNON CORPORATION
CITY OF ARVIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01110 SUMMARY OF WORK
01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01201 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01210 ALLOWANCES
01292 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01294 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01312 PROJECT MEETINGS
01324A PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
01329 SAFETY PLAN
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01350 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
01352 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
01354 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES
01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01424 ABBREVIATIONS
01450 QUALITY CONTROL
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01722 FIELD ENGINEERING
01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING
01756 TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02084 UTILITY STRUCTURES

02200 SITE PREPARATION
02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02300 EARTHWORK
2018 TOC-2 150407

CANNON CORPORATION
CITY OF ARVIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02312 CONTROLLED DENSITY BACKFILL

02318 TRENCHING
02360 SOIL TREATMENT
02581 ELECTRICAL MANHOLES
02722 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
02742 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
02952 PAVEMENT RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03071 EPOXIES
03072 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
03102 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03150 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03366 TOOLED CONCRETE FINISHES
03400 PRECAST CONCRETE
03600 GROUTS
03936 WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
NOT USED
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05140 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
06611 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS

06608 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC
2018 TOC-3 150407

CANNON CORPORATION
CITY OF ARVIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
NOT USED
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13410 BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

AND METHODS
13423 LEVEL FIELD INSTRUMENTS
13427 PANEL INSTRUMENTS
13442 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
13475 FIBER OPTIC (F.O.) CABLES AND LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
ACCESSORY
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15052 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15116 PLUG VALVES
15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES
15121 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
15251 DUCTILE IRON PIPING
15265 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
2018 TOC-4 150407

CANNON CORPORATION
CITY OF ARVIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
15268 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, TUBING, AND HOSE

15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16060 GROUNDING
16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
16133 CONDUITS
16134 BOXES
16135 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16144 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16212 METERING AND RELAYING
16500 LIGHTING
16950 ELECTRICAL TESTING
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2018 TOC-5 150407

DOCUMENT 00100
INVITATION TO BID
VEOLIA WATER
CITY OF ARVIN WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT (WWTP)
PO BOX 665
2401 EL CAMINO REAL
ARVIN, CA 93203
For completing the Wastewater Treatment Plant Parshall Flume Installation.
ARTICLE 1 - BID OPENING
1.01 Bids will be received at the office of Veolia Water (City of Arvin WWTP) at 2401 El Camino
Real, Arvin, CA 93203, and shall be date and time stamped before 11:00 am OCTOBER 2, 2018
local time, at which time they will be opened and read aloud.
1.02 Bidders are required to complete Document 00451A, Construction Contractor's Qualification
Statement, attached to the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 2 - DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
You are invited to bid on Work comprising the construction of a new Parshall Flume for the City of
Arvin Wastewater Treatment Plant. The work shall include construction of two new diversion boxes
in the existing headworks, a new concrete Parshall Flume structure with handrail, grating and
accessories, ductile iron piping and site electrical and instrumentation work as per the drawings and
specifications.
ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.01 A full set of Bidding Documents is available for examination at the City of Arvin WWTP, 2401
El Camino Real, Arvin, California 93203, and Cannon Corporation, 4540 California Avenue Suite
550, Bakersfield, California 93309.
Electronic copies of the Bidding Documents may be obtained online from Veolia Senior Program
Manager Chandrasekar Venkatraman (CV) at chandrasekar.venkatraman@veolia.com.
Contractor are instructed to provide detailed contact information to CV in order to be placed on the
Addendum distribution list.
There is no charge for these documents.
3.02 Bidding Documents may be examined at the following locations:
Veolia Water/City of Arvin WWTP

2401 El Camino Real
Arvin, CA 93203
(661) 854-2421
Contact: Dale Ducharme, Project Manager
2018 00100-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\00100.INV TO BID.ARVIN.docx
Cannon Corporation
4540 California Avenue, Suite 550
Bakersfield, California 93309
(661) 328-6280
Contact: Amando Garza, P.E.
3.03 Project Manager:
Chandrasekar Venkatraman (CV) is the Veolia Water West Operating Services, Inc. Project
Manager and the responsible person for design and construction services coordination
throughout the procurement and construction of this project. CV can be reached at (909)
820-3771 or at chandrasekar.venkatraman@veolia.com.
ARTICLE 4 - BID SECURITY
4.01 Each Bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier's check, or Bid Bond in the
amount of 10 percent of the total bid price, payable to the Veolia Water West Operating Services,
Inc.
ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE
5.01 A non-mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on September 12, 2018 at 10:00 AM, at
2401 El Camino Real, Arvin, California 93203 (Veolia Wastewater Treatment Plant).
ARTICLE 6 - OWNER'S RIGHTS (VEOLIA WATER)
6.01 Veolia reserves the right after opening Bids to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality
(non-responsiveness) in a Bid, or to make award to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder and
reject all other Bids, as it may best serve the interest of the Owner.
ARTICLE 7 - LAWS AND REGULATIONS
7.01 Prevailing Wage Rates. Pursuant to Section 1770, et seq. California Labor Code, the
successful Bidder shall pay not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by
the Director of California Department of Industrial Relations. A copy of such prevailing rate is on file
at the offices of the City of Arvin, which copy will be made available for examination during business
hours to any party on request.
7.02 Contractor's License Classification: In accordance with the provisions of California Business
and Professions Code, Section 7028, Owner has determined that Contractor shall possess a valid
Class A Contractor License at the time of Bid and for the duration of the contract. Failure to possess
the specified license shall render the Bid as non-responsive and shall act as a bar to award of the
contract to any Bidder not possessing said license at the time of Bid opening.
2018 00100-2 150407

7.03 The Contractors’ State License Board may be contacted at 9821 Business Park Drive,
Sacramento, CA 95827; P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, CA 95826; (800) 321-2752.
7.04 In accordance with California Civil Code, Section 3247, a payment bond is required.
ARTICLE 8 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
8.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be
submitted to VEOLIA PROJECT MANAGER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications
considered necessary by Project MANAGER in response to such questions will be issued by
Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties. Questions received less than 5 days prior to the
date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be
binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
8.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as
deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer.
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE
The Engineer’s estimate for this project work is $185,000.
BY ORDER OF
Date August 30, 2018
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00100-3 150407

DOCUMENT 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS
1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders
have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof:
A. Issuing Office -- The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and
where the bidding procedures are to be administered.
B. Successful Bidder -- The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom
Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award.
ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,
stated in the Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office pursuant to Article 3 of
Document 00100, Invitation to Bid.
2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms,
do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and does not confer a license or grant for
any other use.
ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.01 More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under the
same or different names will not be considered. If the Owner believes that any Bidder submits more
than one Bid for the Work contemplated, all Bids in which such Bidder is interested will be rejected.
If the Owner believes that collusion exists among the Bidders, all Bids will be rejected.
3.02 Pursuant to Section 4105, California Public Contract Code, Bidder may not circumvent the
requirement to list subcontractors by the device of listing one subcontractor, who in turn sublets
portions constituting the majority of the work covered by the contract.
3.03 No Contractor or Subcontractor may submit a Bid or perform Work on this Project who is
found in violation of California Labor Code Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1 by the Labor
Commissioner. Subcontractors who have been disbarred may not receive public funds pursuant to
California Public Contract Code §6109.
3.04 To demonstrate Bidder's qualifications to perform the Work, Bidder shall submit written
evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and such other data
as called for in Owner's Construction Contractor's Qualification Statement attached as Document
2018 00200-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\00200.docx
00451A, which must be completed in ink and attached to the Bid. Nothing indicated in this Article 3
shall deny the right of Owner to seek additional information as provided in paragraph 19.05.
3.05 The criteria which will be used to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder
are as follows:
A. Responsive Bidder: Means a Bidder who has submitted a Bid which conforms in all
material respects to the Bidding Documents.
B. Responsible Bidder: Means a Bidder who has the capacity and capability in all respects
to perform fully the contract requirements and who has the integrity and reliability to assure good
faith performance.
ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE
4.01 Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
A. The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to

the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.
2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and

subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that
Engineer has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.
B. Copies of reports and drawings of Subsurface and Physical Conditions will be made
available by Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the
Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely
as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in the
Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws
from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions or information contained in
such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.
4.02 Underground Facilities:
A. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to
existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based upon information and data
furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or
others. CONTRACTOR must contact underground service alert (USA) prior to any work.
4.03 Hazardous Environmental Condition:
A. The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings relating to

Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site, if any, that Engineer has used in preparing the
Bidding Documents.
B. Copies of reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions will be made

available by Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the
Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely
as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in the
Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws
2018 00200-2 150407

from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in
such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.
4.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and Underground Facilities,
and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated conditions appear
in paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities
for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to
any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or
indicated on the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the
scope of the Work appear in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.
4.05 On request, Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.
Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of
such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.
4.06 Reference is made to Article 7 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the
general nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities
and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work for which a Bid is to be submitted. On request,
Owner will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of contract documents (other
than portions thereof related to price) for such other work.
4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
A. Examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, including any Addenda and the
other related data identified in the Bidding Documents;
B. Visit the Site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local, and
Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
C. Become familiar with all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect
cost, progress, or performance of the Work;
D. Obtain and carefully study (or assume responsibility for doing so) all additional or
supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning
conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site, including
information known to Bidders or contractors doing business in the locality of the Site, which may
affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder,
including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction
expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto;
E. Agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of
the Work at the price bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Bidding Documents;
F. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;
2018 00200-3 150407

G. Correlate the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from
visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents;
H. Promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder; and
I. Determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work.
4.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is
premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and
applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that
may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given
Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has
discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are
acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.
ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE
5.01 A pre-Bid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m. on SEPTEMBER 12, 2018_, 2018 at 200
Campus Drive, Arvin, California 93203. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to
discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. Engineer
will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in
response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will
not be binding or legally effective.
ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS
6.01 The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto
required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. Easements
for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for
by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to
Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer
as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 5 days prior to the date
for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding.
Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by Owner or Engineer.
2018 00200-4 150407

Chandrasekar Venkatraman (CV) is the Veolia Water West Operating Services, Inc. Project
Manager and the responsible person for design and construction services coordination
throughout the procurement and construction of this project. CV can be reached at (909) 820-
3771 or at chandrasekar.venkatraman@veolia.com.
ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of ten
percent (10%) of Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of cash, a certified or cashier’s check,
or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02 of the
General Conditions.
8.02 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the
Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to
execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within [15]
days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default and annul the Notice of
Award and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom
Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner for
a reasonable length of time after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such
Bidders will be returned.
8.03 Bid security of other Bidders will be returned after execution of the Contract with Successful
Bidder.
ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) Substantially
Completed and (b) also completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in Article 4 of the Agreement.
ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE AND "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS
11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or
described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items.
Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or "or-equal" item
of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, the
procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is
set forth in paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
12.01 Pursuant to California Public Contract Code §4106, Subcontractors who will perform work or
labor or render services in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of Contractor’s total bid
shall be set forth on Document 00434, List of Subcontractors, and attached to Document 00410,
2018 00200-5 150407

Bid Form. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information
regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier,
individual, or entity if requested by Owner. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has
reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may,
before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute,
without an increase in price.
12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers,
individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for
forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed
and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of
Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions.
12.03 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity
against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
12.04 The quantities of work or material stated in unit price items of the Bid are supplied only to
give an indication of the general scope of the Work; the Owner does not expressly or by implication
agree that the actual amount of work or material will correspond therewith.
ARTICLE 13 - PREPARATION OF BID
13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. Additional copies may be obtained as
noted in paragraph 3.01 of Document 00100, Invitation to Bid.
13.02 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter and the Bid
signed. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternative, adjustment unit price
item, and unit price item listed therein, or the words "No Bid," "No Change," or "Not Applicable"
entered.
13.03 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate
address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature.
13.04 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner
(whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The
official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature.
13.05 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member
and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official
address of the firm must be shown below the signature.
13.06 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder's name and official address.
13.07 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner indicated on
the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture must be shown below the signature.
13.08 All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signatures.
2018 00200-6 150407

13.09 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which
shall be filled in on the Bid Form.
13.10 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown.
13.11 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder's authority and qualification to do business in
California. Bidder's state contractor license number shall also be shown on the Bid Form. Questions
concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors' State License Board, P.O.
Box 26000, Sacramento, CA 95826.
13.12 Pursuant to the provisions of Section 6707, California Labor Code, Bids shall contain, as a
Bid item, the cost for adequate sheeting, shoring and bracing, or equivalent method, for the
protection of life and limb in trenches and open excavation, which shall conform to applicable safety
orders.
13.13 Pursuant to the provisions of Section 7106 of the California Public Contract Code, Bidders
shall submit with their Bids, a Non-Collusion Affidavit, Document 00456.
13.14 Pursuant to Section 7105, California Public Contract Code, Bidder shall indicate, in the
appropriate space provided in the Bid Form, the cost of insurance premiums for earthquake and
tidal wave to indemnify Owner for damage to the Work caused by earthquake or tidal wave in an
amount of at least 50 percent of the contract price. The determination of whether to require
earthquake and tidal wave insurance will be made by Owner prior to award of contract.
ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BIDS
14.01 Lump Sum:
A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis for the base Bid and include a separate
price for each alternate described in the Bidding Documents as provided for in the Bid Form. The
price for each alternate will be the amount added to or deleted from the base Bid if OWNER selects
the alternate. EVALUATION OF BIDS will be based on the base bid EXCLUDING alternatives
14.02 The Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for overhead and
profit on account of allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents as provided in paragraph
11.02 of the General Conditions.
14.03 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words.
ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID
15.01 Each prospective Bidder is furnished one copy of the Bidding Documents. The Bid Form is
to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the following data:
A. Document 00410, Bid Form.
B. Document 00432, Bid Bond Form.
C. Document 00434, List of Subcontractors.
D. Document 00436, List of Equipment Manufacturers.
2018 00200-7 150407

E. Document 00438, Construction Equipment List.
F. Document 00451A, Construction Contractor’s Qualifications Statements.
G. Document 00452, Labor Code 1860 Certificate.
H. Document 00456, Non-Collusion Affidavit.
I. Document 00458, Certification of Non-Segregated Facilities.
J. Document 00460, Non-Discrimination Clause.
15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place
indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope plainly marked
with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is
submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and
other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope
containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate envelope plainly marked on the outside with the
notation "BID ENCLOSED."
ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
16.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the
manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior
to the date and time for the opening of Bids.
16.02 Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or modifications attached to the Bid will render it
informal and may cause its rejection as being non-responsive. The completed Bid Forms shall be
without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Any changes or corrections shall be initialed by the
Bidder. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless expressly called for in Document 00100,
Invitation to Bid. Oral, telegraphic, faxed or telephone Bids or modifications will not be considered.
16.03 In accordance with Sections 5101 and 5103, California Public Contract Code, withdrawal of
Bids may be permitted for mistakes made in filling out the Bid but will not be permitted for mistakes
resulting from errors in judgment or carelessness in inspecting the site of the work or in reading the
drawings, specifications, and other Contracts Documents.
16.04 In the event Bidder alleges that a clerical error has been made in the list of subcontractors,
the procedures for substitution shall be provided in accordance with Section 4107.5, California
Public Contract Code.
ARTICLE 17 - OPENING OF BIDS
17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or Invitation to Bid
and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base
Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.
2018 00200-8 150407

ARTICLE 18 - BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in paragraph 2.01 of
the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior
to the end of this period.
ARTICLE 19 - AWARD OF CONTRACT
19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation,
nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner further reserves the right to
reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to be non-
responsible. Owner may also reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in
the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder. Owner also reserves the right to
waive all formalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract
terms with the Successful Bidder.
19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different
names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in
more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of
all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest.
19.03 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed
requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form
or prior to the Notice of Award.
19.04 In evaluating Bidders, Owner will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider
the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities
proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers,
individuals, or entities to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
19.06 If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is in
the best interests of the Project.
19.07 Unless otherwise indicated, a single award will not be made for less than all the Bid Items of
an individual Bid Schedule. In the event the Work is contained in more than one Bid Schedule, the
Owner may award schedules individually or in combination. In the case of two or more Bid
Schedules which are alternative to each other, only one of such alternative schedules will be
awarded.
ARTICLE 20 - CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE
20.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions,
sets forth Owner's requirements as to performance and payment Bonds and insurance. When the
Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by such
Bonds and evidence of insurance as required.
2018 00200-9 150407

ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
21.01 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by
the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with the other Contract Documents
which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful
Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached
documents to Owner. Within 10 days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to
Successful Bidder with a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
ARTICLE 22 - SALES AND USE TAXES
22.01 Contractor shall pay all sales, use and other taxes as specified in paragraph 6.10 of the
General Conditions.
ARTICLE 23 - RETAINAGE
23.01 Provisions concerning Contractor's rights to deposit securities in lieu of retainage are set
forth in Document 00520, Agreement Form.
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00200-10 150407

DOCUMENT 00410
BID FORM
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:
City of Arvin / Veolia Water

Wastewater Treatment Plant Parshall Flume Installation
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED BY:
_______________________________________________________________________________
(Bidder)
_______________________________________________________________________________
(Bidder Address)
_______________________________________________________________________________
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO:

City of Arvin
City Hall
200 Campus Drive
Arvin, CA 93203
ARTICLE 1 - BID RECIPIENT
1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as
specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents within the specified time and for the price indicated
in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to
Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. The Bid will
remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time
that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
ARTICLE 3 - BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:
A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related
data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is
hereby acknowledged.
ADDENDA
No. _____________ Dated ________________
2018 00410-1 150407

No. _____________ Dated ________________
No. _____________ Dated ________________
B. Bidder has visited the site and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the
general, local, and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of
the Work.
C. Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Federal, state, and local Laws and
Regulations and Permits that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except
Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions
and which are described in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions as containing
reliable “technical data,” and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental
Condition, if any, which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions and
which are described in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions as containing reliable
“technical data.”
E. Bidder has carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional
or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or
contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or
which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly
required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto.
F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of
the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms
and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at
the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.
I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is
submitted.
J. In accordance with Section 1861, California Labor Code, the Bidder states the following
as its certification:
"I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the California Labor Code which require
every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake
2018 00410-2 150407

self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such
provisions before commencing the performance of the Work."
ARTICLE 4 - BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION
4.01 Bidder further represents that
A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any
group, association, organization or corporation;
B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a
false or sham bid;
C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding;
D. Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other
Bidder or over Owner; and
E. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in

competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this paragraph 4.01.E:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to

influence the bidding process to the Owner’s detriment, (b) to establish bid prices
at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free
and competitive bidding process;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders

to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm persons or their property.
ARTICLE 5 - BASIS OF BID
5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Lump
Sum Bid Price of:
$ __________________________
(Price in figures)
____________________________
(Price in words)
A. The Bidder declares that the costs for labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
necessary for the following work are included in the Lump Sum Bid and that such costs
are as indicated as follows:
2018 00410-3 150407

ARTICLE 6 - TIME OF COMPLETION
6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed, and, completed and ready
for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07.B of the General Conditions on or before the
dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in Article 4, Document 00520, Agreement.
6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event
of failure to complete the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in Article 4,
Document 00520, Agreement.
ARTICLE 7 - DEFINED TERMS
7.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters or all capital letters have the
meanings indicated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary
Conditions.
ARTICLE 8 - BID SUBMITTAL
SUBMITTED on _________________________, 2018.
State Contractor License Number _________________________. (If applicable)
If Bidder is:
An Individual
Name (typed or printed):
By:
(Individual's signature)
Doing business as:
Business address:
Phone Number: ( ) FAX Number: ( )
A Partnership
Partnership Name:
By:
(Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)
Business address:
2018 00410-4 150407

A Corporation
Corporation Name:
State of Incorporation:
Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):
By:
(Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign)
Title:
Attest:
(Signature of Corporate Secretary, Acting Secretary or other officer)
Business address:
Date of Qualification to do business is
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00410-5 150407

DOCUMENT 00432
BID BOND
PENAL SUM FORM

BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):

VEOLIA WATER WEST OPERATING SERVICES, INC.
601 CANAL BLVD
RICHMOND, CA 91804
BID
Bid Due Date: _____________________

Project: Parshall Flume Installation for the City of Arvin wastewater treatment plant.
BOND
Bond Number:
Date: (Not later than Bid Due Date):
Penal Sum:
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to
the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed
on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.
BIDDER SURETY
(SEAL) (SEAL)
(Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal) (Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal)
By: By:
(Signature and Title) (Signature and Title)
(Attach Power of Attorney)
Attest: Attest:
Note: (1) Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice.
(2) Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, OWNER or other party shall be considered plural where
applicable.
EJCDC No. 1910-28-C (1990 Edition)

2018 00432-1 150407
F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\00432.doc
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns to pay to OWNER upon default of Bidder the penal
sum set forth on the face of this Bond.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by
the Bidding Documents the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and
any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract
Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
a. OWNER accepts Bidder's Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by OWNER) the executed
Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment
bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents, or
b. All Bids are rejected by OWNER, or
c. OWNER fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the
Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if
applicable, consented to by Surety when required by paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30
calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from OWNER,
which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project
and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of and any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time
extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by OWNER and Bidder, provided
that the time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate
exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety's written consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the
notice of default required in paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no
case later than one year after the Bid due date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced in a court of competent jurisdiction
located in the state in which the Project is located.
8. Notice required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their
respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal
delivery, commercial courier or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt
requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party
concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney
evidencing the authority of the officer, agent or representative who executed this Bond on
behalf of Surety to execute, seal and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable
requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed

2018 00432-2 150407
to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of the Bond conflicts with any
applicable provision of any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern
and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and
effect.
11. The term "Bid" as used herein includes a bid, offer or proposal as applicable.
END OF DOCUMENT

2018 00432-3 150407
This page left intentionally blank.

2018 00432-4 150407
DOCUMENT 00434
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Pursuant to California Public Contract Code §4100 et seq., the Bidder shall list below the names
and location of place of business of each subcontractor who will perform Work or labor or who will
render service to the prime Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or improvement, or a
subcontractor duly licensed who, under subcontract to the prime Contractor, specially fabricates
and installs a portion of the Work or improvement according to detailed Drawings contained in the
Contract Documents, in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the prime Contractor's
total Bid or, in the case of Bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including
bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent of the prime Contractor's total Bid or $10,000,
whichever is greater. After the opening of Bids, no changes or substitutions will be allowed except
as otherwise provided by law. The listing of more than one subcontractor for each item of Work to
be performed with the words "and/or" will not be permitted. The Bidder's attention is directed to the
provisions of paragraph 6.06.B.1 of Document 00800, Supplementary Conditions, which stipulates
the percent of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces. Failure to comply with this
requirement may render the Bid as non-responsive and may cause its rejection.
2018 00434-1 150407

Subcontractor’s Name,
Contractor License Percent of Total Address, and Contact
Work to be Performed Number Contract Person
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Add additional sheets, if necessary.
BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00434-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00436
LIST OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
Bidder shall list the manufacturer or supplier that will furnish the respective item of equipment
for the Work. Bidder shall list only one manufacturer or supplier for each piece of equipment
identified.
In the event any listed manufacturer or supplier differs from those manufacturers or suppliers
specifically named in the specifications, Bidder shall submit complete information demonstrating
that such manufacturer or supplier is capable of providing equipment that meets the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Information shall be submitted pursuant to the time period stipulated in Document 00200,
Instructions to Bidders.
2. Information shall include data and documentation pursuant to paragraph 6.05 of

Document 00700, General Conditions, and Section 01330, Submittal Procedures,
Division 1, General Provisions.
3. Acceptance of a manufacturer or supplier listed by the Bidder shall not constitute a waiver of
any provision of the Contract Documents.
Where manufacturer's or supplier's names are listed by the Bidder next to the specific item of
equipment listed, this shall be interpreted to mean that such manufacturers and suppliers shall
not be changed by the Bidder after the Bid opening, except as follows:
1. The manufacturer or supplier cannot provide equipment that meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents, or
2. The manufacturer or supplier is unable to meet the delivery requirements necessary to

maintain progress of the Project based upon the accepted construction schedule.
In the event Bidder changes the listed manufacturer or supplier due to reasons outlined above,
Bidder shall propose an alternate manufacturer or supplier and submit complete information to
demonstrate the alternative equipment meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Failure by Bidder to list names of manufacturers or suppliers for every item of equipment in the
space provided may be cause for rejection of the Bid.
Detailed shop drawings shall be required for all items of equipment identified in the Contract
Documents.
Equipment Manufacturer, Model

1. FRP Flume
2. Ultra Sonic Devices
3.
4.
5.
2018 00436-1 150407

BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00436-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00438
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT LIST
Bidder shall list the equipment which will be used in the performance of the Work, including
location, ownership, and how the equipment will be obtained, if not already owned or controlled
by Bidder.
Number Capacity and Age and Current Date on

and Type Manufacturer Condition Location Work Site
BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00438-1 150407

DOCUMENT 00456
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
State of California )
) ss.
County of )
The undersigned states that this Bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any
undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the
Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or
solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly
colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any Bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or
that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the Bidder has not in any manner, directly or
indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price
of the Bidder or any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price,
or of that of any other Bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the
contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the Bid
are true; and, further, that the Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price
or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative
thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company, association,
organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or
sham bid.
BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on this __________ day of __________, 20__,
by _________________________, proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the
person(s) who appeared before me.
(seal)
(Signature of Notary Public)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00456-1 150407

DOCUMENT 00458
CERTIFICATION OF DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE REQUIREMENTS
I. The Bidder certifies that it will or will continue to provide a drug-free work place by:
A. Publishing a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,

distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in
the Bidder's work place and specifying the actions that will be taken against
employees for violation of such prohibition;
B. Establishing an ongoing drug-free awareness program to inform employees about:
1. The dangers of drug abuse in the work place;
2. The Bidder's policy of maintaining a drug-free work place;
3. Any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance

programs; and
4. The penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations
occurring in the work place;
C. Making it a requirement that each employee to be engaged in the performance of the

contract be given a copy of the statement required by Paragraph A;
D. Notifying the employee in the statement required by Paragraph A that, as a condition

of employment under the Contract, the employee will:
1. Abide by the terms of the statement; and
2. Notify the employer in writing of his or her conviction for a violation of a criminal
drug statute occurring in the work place no later than five calendar days after
such conviction;
3. Notify the employee that in the event of a major accident/incident resulting in

loss of life, injury or damage to the facility, or equipment, all personnel involved
shall be required to submit to substance testing as soon as possible after the
incident, but not more than 4 hours after the incident.
E. Notifying the Owner in writing within 10 calendar days after receiving notice under
subparagraph D.2 from an employee or otherwise receiving actual notice of such
conviction.
F. Taking one of the following actions, within 30 calendar days of receiving notice under
subparagraph D.2, with respect to any employee who is so convicted:
1. Taking appropriate personnel action against such an employee, up to and

including termination, consistent with the requirements of Federal and State
law; or
2018 00458-1 150407

2. Requiring such employee to participate satisfactorily in a drug abuse
assistance or rehabilitation program approved for such purpose by a Federal,
State or local health, law enforcement, or other appropriate agency;
G. Making a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free work place through
implementation of Paragraphs A, B, C, D, E, and F.
II. The Bidder may insert in the space provided below the site(s) for the performance of work
done in connection with this Contract:
Place(s) of Performance: (Street address, city, county, state, zip code)
BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00458-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00460
NON-DISCRIMINATION CLAUSE
1. During the performance of this contract, contractor, and its subcontractors shall not
unlawfully discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of
sex, race, religion, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability (including HIV and
AIDS), mental disability, medical condition (cancer), marital status, age (over 40 years) or
denial of family care leave. Contractors and subcontractors shall insure that the
evaluation and treatment of their employees and applicants for employment are free of
such discrimination and harassment. Contractors and subcontractors shall comply with
the provisions of the Fair Employment and Housing Act (Government Code,
Section 12900 et seq.) and the applicable regulations promulgated thereunder (California
Administrative Code, Title 2, Section 7285.0 et seq.). The applicable regulations of the
Fair Employment and Housing Commission implementing Government Code,
Section 12900 (a-f), set forth in Chapter 5 of Division 4 of Title 7 or the California
Administrative Code are incorporated into this contract by reference and made a part
hereof as if set forth in full. Contractor and its subcontractor shall give written notice of
their obligations under this clause to labor organizations with which they have a collective
bargaining or other agreement.
2. This contractor shall include the nondiscrimination and compliance provisions of this
clause in all subcontracts to perform work under the contract.
THE UNDERSIGNED CERTIFIES THAT THE CONTRACTOR WILL COMPLY WITH THE
ABOVE REQUIREMENTS.
CONTRACTOR OR
SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ________________________________________________
CERTIFIED BY: ___________________________________________________________
NAME: ___________________________________ TITLE: _________________________
SIGNATURE: _____________________________ DATE: __________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00460-1 150407

This page left intentionally blank.
2018 00460-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00520
AGREEMENT FORM
THIS AGREEMENT is by and between VEOLIA WATER WEST OPERATING SERVICES, INC.
601 CANAL BLVD, RICHMOND, CA 94804 (hereinafter called Owner)
and
(hereinafter called Contractor).
Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as
follows:
ARTICLE 1 - THE PROJECT
1.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a
part is generally described as follows: The work shall include construction of two new diversion
boxes in the existing headworks, a new concrete Parshall Flume structure with handrail, grating and
accessories, ductile iron piping and site electrical and instrumentation work as per the drawings and
specifications .The project consists of a new Parshall Flume, a new headworks diversion box,
excavation and paving, and associated piping for a complete facility. This project also includes City
of Arvin.
ARTICLE 2 - WORK
2.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for
completion of the Project.
ARTICLE 3 - ENGINEER
3.01 Cannon Corporation is to act as Owner's representative, assume all duties and
responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents
in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise modified in the Supplementary Conditions.
ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time of the Essence:
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and
readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.02 Days to Achieve Substantial Completion and Final Payment:
A. The Work will be substantially completed within 150 days after the date when the
Contract Times commence to run as provided in paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and
completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General
Conditions within 180 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
2018 00520-1 150407

4.03 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment:
A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before _______________, 2019, and

completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General
Conditions on or before _______________, 2019.
B. The construction periods listed above shall run concurrently and shall apply regardless
of the number of sections awarded to a Bidder.
4.04 Liquidated Damages:
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that
Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph
4.02, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions.
The parties also recognize that it will be impracticable to determine actual damages which Owner
will sustain in the event of or by reason of the delay. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such
proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty)
Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the specified time in paragraph
4.02 for substantial completion until the Work is substantially complete. After substantial
completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the
contract time or any proper extension thereof granted by Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner $500
for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 4.02 for completion and readiness for
final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. It is further agreed that the
amount stipulated for liquidated damages per day of delay is a reasonable estimate of the damages
that would be sustained by Owner, and Contractor agrees to pay such liquidated damages as
herein provided. In case the liquidated damages are not paid, Contractor agrees that Owner may
deduct the amount thereof from any money due or that may become due to Contractor by progress
payments or otherwise under the Agreement, or if said amount is not sufficient, recover the total
amount.
ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to
paragraph 5.01.A below:
A. For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a Lump Sum of:
_______________________________________________________ $___________________
(Use Words) (Figure)
All specific cash allowances are included in the above price and have been computed in
accordance with paragraph 11.02 of the General Conditions.
2018 00520-2 150407

ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments:
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the
General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the
General Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage:
A. Pursuant to Section 20104.50 of California Public Contract Code, Owner shall make
progress payments within 60 days after receipt of Contractor's undisputed and properly submitted
Application for Payment less amounts which are authorized to be reserved or retained by state law
and in accordance with paragraphs 6.02.A.1 and 6.02.A.2 below and paragraph 14.02.D of the
General Conditions. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in
paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the
number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the
General Requirements:
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal

to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may
withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions:
a. 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has
been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and
progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, Owner, on
recommendation of Engineer, may determine that as long as the character and progress
of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no retainage on account of Work
subsequently completed, in which case the remaining progress payments prior to
Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Work completed
less the aggregate of payments previously made; and
b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with
the balance being retainage).
2. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner may pay an amount sufficient to increase total
payments to Contractor to 95 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts as
Engineer shall determine in accordance with paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General
Conditions.
3. Upon final completion, Owner may pay an amount sufficient to increase total
payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts as
Engineer shall determine in accordance with paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General
Conditions and less up to 150 percent of Engineer's estimate of the value of Work to be
completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
attached to the certificate of completion or alternatively, in dispute.
2018 00520-3 150407

6.03 Final Payment:
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of
the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the
General Conditions.
ARTICLE 7 - INTEREST
7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear
interest at the legal rate unless otherwise specified according to California law.
ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS
8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement Contractor makes the following
representations:
A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other
related data identified in the Bidding Documents.
B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the
general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground
Facilities) which have been identified in paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions as
containing reliable “technical data” and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental
Condition, if any, at the Site which has been identified in paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary
Conditions as containing reliable “technical data.”
E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly

known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations
obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings
identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations,
and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, including
any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly
required by the Contract Documents; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs.
F. Contractor does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within
the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents.
G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
2018 00520-4 150407

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution
thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.01 Contents:
A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:
1. This Agreement, Document 00520;
2. Performance Bond, Document 00612;
3. Labor and Materials Bond, Document 00614;
4. Guaranty Bond, Document 00618;
5. General Conditions, Document 007000;
6. Supplementary Conditions, Document 00800;
7. Specifications;
8. Drawings; Headworks Upgrade, sheets 1 to 31;
9. Addenda (numbers _____to _____, inclusive);
10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. Contractor's Bid Form, Document 00410, (page 1 to 6);
11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto:
a. Work Change Directives;
b. Change Order(s).
B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.
C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided

in paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.
2018 00520-5 150407

ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS
10.01 Terms:
A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions.
10.02 Assignment of Contract:
A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be
binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and,
specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not
be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be
limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an
assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility
under the Contract Documents.
10.03 Successors and Assigns:
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract
Documents.
10.04 Severability:
A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under
any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be
reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision
that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
10.05 Contractor’s Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 10.06:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the
Contract execution;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to

influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b)
to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive
Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,

with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at
artificial, non-competitive levels; and
2018 00520-6 150407

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the
execution of the Contract.
10.06 In accordance with Section 1775, California Labor Code, Contractor shall forfeit to Owner,
as a penalty, not more than $50 for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid,
either by Contractor or any subcontractor, less than the prevailing rates as determined by the
Director of California Department of Industrial Relations for the Work.
10.07 In the performance of the Work, a day’s work shall be eight (8) hours of labor in any workday
and forty (40) hours in any work week and any other work as required by Section 510, California
Labor Code, and Contractor shall further conform to the requirements of Section 1813, California
Labor Code, or forfeit to Owner, as a penalty, the sum of $25 for each worker employed in the
execution of the Work by Contractor or any subcontractor, for each day during which any worker is
required or permitted to labor more than eight (8) hours in any workday or more than forty (40)
hours in any one calendar week in violation of Section 510.
10.08 Contractor shall carry workers' compensation insurance and require subcontractors to carry
workers' compensation insurance as required by Section 3700, California Labor Code.
10.09 Pursuant to California Labor Code Section 6705, excavation of any trench or trenches 5 feet
or more in depth, involving estimated expenditures in excess of $25,000 shall require, in advance of
excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be
made for worker protection prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer.
10.10 Pursuant to Section 1770 et seq., California Labor Code, the successful Bidder shall pay not
less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of California
Department of Industrial Relations. A copy of such prevailing rate is on file at the offices of the
Owner, which copy will be made available for examination during business hours to any party on
request.
10.11 Contractor, by signing this Agreement, certifies the following: "I am aware of the provisions
of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for
workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that
code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Work of
this Contract."
10.12 Nothing in this Agreement shall prevent Contractor or any Subcontractor from employing
properly registered apprentices in the execution of the Agreement. Contractor shall have
responsibility for compliance with California Labor Code Section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable
occupations.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One
counterpart each has been delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract
Documents have been signed or identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf.
2018 00520-7 150407

This Agreement will be effective on _________________________, 2018 (which is the Effective
Date of the Agreement).
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
VEOLIA WATER WEST OPERATING
SERVICES, INC. RICHMOND, California
By: By:
Attest: Attest:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
License No.
(Where applicable)
Agent for service of process:
Designated Representative: Designated Representative:
Name: Name:
Title: Title:
Address: Address:
Phone: Phone:
Facsimile: Facsimile:
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00520-8 150407

DOCUMENT 00602
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR

SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
This escrow agreement is made and entered into by and between

whose address is hereinafter called “OWNER,”
whose address is hereinafter called “CONTRACTOR,” and
whose address is hereinafter called
“Escrow Agent.”
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and Escrow Agent
agree as follows:
(1) Pursuant to Section 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California,
the CONTRACTOR has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for
retention earnings required to be withheld by the OWNER pursuant to the construction contract
entered into between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR for in the amount
of dated (hereafter referred to as the "contract").
Alternatively, on written request of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER shall make payments of the
retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When the CONTRACTOR deposits the securities
as a substitute for the contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the OWNER within ten days
of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least
equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the contract
between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Securities shall be held in the name of the
and shall designate the CONTRACTOR as the beneficial owner.
(2) The OWNER shall make progress payments to the CONTRACTOR for those funds
which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the contract provision,
provided that the Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
(3) When the OWNER makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow
Agent, the Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR until such time as
the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The CONTRACTOR may direct the
investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this Agreement and the
rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the OWNER
pays the Escrow Agent directly.
(4) The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses
incurred by the Escrow Agent in administering the escrow account. These expenses and payment
terms shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR and Escrow Agent.
(5) The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow
and all interest earned on the interest shall be for the sole account of CONTRACTOR and shall be
subject to withdrawal by CONTRACTOR at any time and from time to time without notice to the
OWNER.
(6) The CONTRACTOR shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal
in the escrow account only by written notice to the Escrow Agent accompanied by written
authorization from the OWNER to the Escrow Agent that the OWNER consents to the withdrawal of
the amount sought to be withdrawn by CONTRACTOR.
2018 00602-1 150407

(7) The OWNER shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default
by the CONTRACTOR. Upon seven days' written notice to the Escrow Agent from the OWNER of
the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute
the cash as instructed by the OWNER.
(8) Upon receipt of written notification from the OWNER certifying that the contract is
final and complete, and that the CONTRACTOR has complied with all requirements and procedures
applicable to the contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to the CONTRACTOR all securities and
interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the escrow account. The escrow shall be
closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of
fees and charges.
(9) The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the OWNER and the
CONTRACTOR pursuant to Sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this Agreement and the OWNER and
CONTRACTOR shall hold the Escrow Agent harmless from the Escrow Agent's release,
conversion, and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.
(10) The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to
receive written notice on behalf of the OWNER and on behalf of the CONTRACTOR in connection
with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:
On behalf of the OWNER: On behalf of the CONTRACTOR:
Title Title
Name Name
Signature Signature
Address Address
On behalf of the Escrow Agent:
Title
Name
Signature
Address
2018 00602-2 150407

At the time the escrow account is opened, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall deliver to
the Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers
on the date first set forth above.
OWNER CONTRACTOR
Title Title
Name Name
Signature Signature
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00602-3 150407

DOCUMENT 00612
CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND
______Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable._____
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):

601 CANAL BLVD
RICHMOND, CA 91804
CONTRACT: City of Arvin Parshall Flume Installation at Wastewater Treatment Plant
Effective Date of Agreement:

Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth
below, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer,
agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
(SEAL)
Contractor’s Name Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
2018 00612-1 150407

By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name Print Name
Title Title
Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature
Title Title
Note: Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
2018 00612-2 150407

Whereas, the City Council of the City of Arvin, State of California, and __________
(hereinafter designated as "Principal") have entered into an Agreement whereby Principal
agrees to install and complete certain designated public improvements, which said
Agreement, dated __________, 20__, and identified as Project ____, is hereby referred to
and made a part hereof; and
Whereas, said Principal is required under the terms of said Agreement to furnish a bond
for the faithful performance of said Agreement.
Now, therefore, we, the Principal and __________, as Surety, are held and firmly bound
unto the City of Arvin (hereinafter called "__________"), in the penal sum of __________
dollars ($____) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and
truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, successors, executors and administrators,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
The condition of this obligation is such that if the above bounded Principal, his or its
heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide
by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and provisions in the said
Agreement and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on his or their part, to be
kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects
according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless City of
Arvin, its officers, agents, employees, and professional consultants, as therein stipulated,
then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force
and effect.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified
therefor, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including
reasonable attorney's fees, incurred by City in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to
be taxed as costs and included in any judgment rendered, including a sum to complete
construction according to the Contract Documents.
The Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the
Specifications accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligations on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications.
In witness whereof, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and Surety
above named, on __________, 20__.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY — (Name, Address and Telephone)
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owner’s Representative (Engineer or other party):
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00612-3 150407

DOCUMENT 00614
(ON SURETY LETTERHEAD)

LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND
(CONSTRUCTION)
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that City of Arvin (“Owner”) a

municipal corporation located in the County of Kern, State of California, by Resolution No.
_____, has awarded a Contract to and has entered into an Agreement with
____________________, hereinafter designated as “Contractor” whereby Contractor agrees to
complete the improvements more particularly described in all documents forming the complete
Contract entitled “[_________________________],” which said Agreement is hereby referred to
and made a part hereof; and
WHEREAS, said Contractor is required to furnish a bond in connection and with said
Contract, provided that if said Contractor, or any of his/her/its contractors, shall fail to pay for
any materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or teams used in, upon, for or about the
performance of the Work contracted to be done, or for any Work or labor done thereon of any
kind, the Surety of this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth.
NOW, THEREFORE, we the Contractor and ____________________________, as

Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Owner in the penal sum of $__________, lawful
money of the United States, being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated
Contract cost of the Work, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if said Contractor, his/her/its

heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, or its Subcontractors, shall fail to pay
any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code, or to pay for any materials,
provisions, provender, or other supplies or teams used in, upon, for or about the performance of
the Work contracted to be done, or for any Work or labor thereon of any kind or for amounts due
under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such Work or labor, then said Surety
will pay the same in or to an amount not exceeding the amount hereinabove set forth, and also
will pay in case suit is brought upon this bond a reasonable attorney’s fee in such suit, which fee
shall be fixed by the Court.
AS FURTHER TERMS OF THIS BOND, IT IS UNDERSTOOD AS FOLLOWS:
1. This bond and all its provisions shall inure to the benefit of and all persons
named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code so as to give a right of action to such persons or their
assigns in any suit brought upon this bond.
2. This bond is given to comply with the provisions of Civil Code Sections 3247-
3252. The liability of the Contractor and Surety hereunder is governed by the provisions of said
Sections, all acts amendatory thereof, and all other statutes referred to therein.
And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be
performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its
2018 00614-1 150407

obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time,
alteration or addition to the terms of this Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Contractor and
Surety above named, on __________, 2018.
(SEAL)
Contractor’s Name Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name Print Name
Title Title
Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature
Title Title
The above bond accepted and approved this _______ day of ________________________, 2012.
City Attorney
Note: Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00614-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00618
GUARANTY BOND
______Any singular reference to CONTRACTOR, Surety, OWNER or other party shall be considered plural where applicable._____
GUARANTEE FOR [CONTRACTOR]
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):

601 CANAL BLVD
RICHMOND, CA 91804
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date:
Amount:
Project (Name and Location): City of Arvin Parshall Flume Installation at Wastewater Treatment
Plant
(SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY)
(Corp. (Corp.
Company: Seal) Company: Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and Title: Name and Title:
2018 00618-1 150407

(Corp. (Corp.
Company: Seal) Company: Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and Title: Name and Title:
We hereby guarantee that all Work performed for the Contract Documents entitled:
(Description of Work)
which we have constructed, have been done in accordance with the Contract Documents, and
that the work as constructed will fulfill the requirements of CONTRACTOR's general warranty
and guaranties included in the Contract Documents. We agree to perform all work necessary to
correct deficiencies, errors or omissions in the workmanship or materials within a period of one
(1) year from the date of final acceptance of the above-named work by the OWNER, pursuant to
paragraph 13.07.A of Document 00700, General Conditions, without any expense whatsoever
to said OWNER, ordinary wear and unusual abuse excepted.
As part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefor,
there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable
attorney's fees, incurred by OWNER.
The Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the
specifications accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the
terms of the agreement or to the work or to the specifications.
In the event of our failure to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within ten (10)
calendar days after being notified in writing by the OWNER, we collectively or separately, do
hereby authorize the OWNER to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our
expense and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. When
correction work is started, it shall be carried through to completion.
DATED:
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00618-2 150407

DOCUMENT 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract

Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with
respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances
of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Prepared by
ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE
and
Issued and Published Jointly by
AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

______________________
ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA

______________________
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS

_______________________
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

A Practice Division of the
NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS
Endorsed by
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE
These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement
Between Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are
interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning


their usage are contained in the Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC
C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to
the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition).
Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
(703) 684-2882
www.nspe.org
American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005
(202) 347-7474
www.acec.org
American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org
Associated General Contractors of America

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308
(703) 548-3118
www.agc.org
The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four
EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.


STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology .................................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.02 Terminology............................................................................................................................ 5
Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................................. 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ......................................................................... 6
2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed .......................................................... 6
2.04 Starting the Work .................................................................................................................... 6
2.05 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................... 6
2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives............................... 7
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................. 7
Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ...................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8
3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ............................................................... 9
3.05 Reuse of Documents .............................................................................................................. 9
3.06 Electronic Data ..................................................................................................................... 10
Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental

Conditions; Reference Points ............................................................................................... 10
4.01 Availability of Lands .............................................................................................................. 10
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions..................................................................................... 10
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ......................................................................... 11
4.04 Underground Facilities .......................................................................................................... 12
4.05 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 13
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.......................................................................... 13
Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................ 15

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ............................................................................ 15
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ............................................................................................ 16
5.03 Certificates of Insurance ....................................................................................................... 16
5.04 Contractor’s Insurance.......................................................................................................... 16
5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance ................................................................................................... 18
5.06 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 18
5.07 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 19
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................................................... 20
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ...................................................... 20
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ........................................................ 21
Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................. 21

Page i

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ........................................................................................ 21
6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........................................................................................................... 21
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment...................................................................................... 21
6.04 Progress Schedule ............................................................................................................... 22
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”.................................................................................................. 22
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .............................................................. 24
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 25
6.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 26
6.09 Laws and Regulations .......................................................................................................... 26
6.10 Taxes ................................................................................................................................... 27
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 27
6.12 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 28
6.13 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 28
6.14 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 29
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ........................................................................................ 29
6.16 Emergencies ........................................................................................................................ 29
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples................................................................................................ 29
6.18 Continuing the Work ............................................................................................................. 31
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ..................................................................... 31
6.20 Indemnification ..................................................................................................................... 32
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 32
Article 7 – Other Work at the Site ........................................................................................................... 33

7.01 Related Work at Site ............................................................................................................. 33
7.02 Coordination ......................................................................................................................... 34
7.03 Legal Relationships .............................................................................................................. 34
Article 8 – Owner’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................................... 34

8.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................. 34
8.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 34
8.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 34
8.04 Pay When Due ..................................................................................................................... 35
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ........................................................................... 35
8.06 Insurance.............................................................................................................................. 35
8.07 Change Orders ..................................................................................................................... 35
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 35
8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ................................................................................ 35
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................ 35
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 35
8.12 Compliance with Safety Program .......................................................................................... 35
Article 9 – Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................. 36

9.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 36
9.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 36
9.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 36
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work............................................................................................... 36
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 37
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments.................................................................... 37
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 37
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work .................... 37
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 38
9.10 Compliance with Safety Program .......................................................................................... 38
Page ii

Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims .............................................................................................. 38
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work .......................................................................................... 38
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ...................................................................................... 39
10.03 Execution of Change Orders................................................................................................. 39
10.04 Notification to Surety............................................................................................................. 39
10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................. 39
Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ................................................................... 40

11.01 Cost of the Work ................................................................................................................... 40
11.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 43
11.03 Unit Price Work..................................................................................................................... 43
Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times ......................................................... 44

12.01 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44
12.02 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45
12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................. 45
Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ................... 46
13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................. 46
13.02 Access to Work..................................................................................................................... 46
13.03 Tests and Inspections ........................................................................................................... 46
13.04 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................. 47
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................... 47
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................. 48
13.07 Correction Period.................................................................................................................. 48
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work .............................................................................................. 49
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work ...................................................................................... 49
Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion ............................................................................. 50

14.01 Schedule of Values ............................................................................................................... 50
14.02 Progress Payments .............................................................................................................. 50
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................... 53
14.04 Substantial Completion ......................................................................................................... 53
14.05 Partial Utilization ................................................................................................................... 53
14.06 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 54
14.07 Final Payment....................................................................................................................... 54
14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................... 55
14.09 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 55
Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination .................................................................................. 56

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ................................................................................................... 56
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause .......................................................................................... 56
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience .............................................................................. 57
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate............................................................................... 58
Article 16 – Dispute Resolution .............................................................................................................. 58

16.01 Methods and Procedures ...................................................................................................... 58
Article 17 – Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................... 59

17.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 59
17.02 Computation of Times........................................................................................................... 59
17.03 Cumulative Remedies........................................................................................................... 59
Page iii

17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................... 59
17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................... 59
17.06 Headings .............................................................................................................................. 59

Page iv

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial
capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to
both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,
correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner

and Contractor covering the Work.
3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by

Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and
which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Contract Documents.
4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is
releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United
States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the Work to be performed.
6. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.
7. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents

(including all Addenda).
8. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid

security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.
9. Change Order—A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor

and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment
in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
10. Claim—A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract

Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A
demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and
Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,
representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.

Page 1 of 60
12. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard
copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop
Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and
physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
13. Contract Price—The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).
14. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve
Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that
it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final
payment.
15. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.
16. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition.
17. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by
Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so
defined.
18. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it
becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the
Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
19. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
20. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the
Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
21. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications.
22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs,

Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances
that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.
23. Hazardous Waste—The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in
Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from
time to time.
24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies,
authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
25. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or
personal property.
26. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an

intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

Page 2 of 60
27. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon
timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein,
Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.
28. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which
the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform
the Work under the Contract Documents.
29. Owner—The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement
and for whom the Work is to be performed.
30. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls.
31. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at
standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7
pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse,
gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.
32. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the
sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the
Work within the Contract Times.
33. Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole, or a part.
34. Project Manual—The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and
constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be
bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.
35. Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the

Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.
36. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer who may be

assigned to the Site or any part thereof.
37. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are

representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which
such portion of the Work will be judged.
38. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required

submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
39. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating

portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for
reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
40. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and
submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

Page 3 of 60
41. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner
upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for
access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the
use of Contractor.
42. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements

for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work,
and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.
43. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any
other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
44. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part
thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part
of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
45. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an
award.
46. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or

supplements these General Conditions.
47. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having

a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or
equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.
48. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,

manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any
encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases,
steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television,
water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control
systems.
49. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
50. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required
to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of
performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such
construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into
such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.
51. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen
subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to
emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract
Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a
Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order

Page 4 of 60
following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or
Contract Times.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when
used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:
1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as
directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment
by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,”
“satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or
determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional
judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for
compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of
the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
(unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or
adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or
authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to
undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other
provision of the Contract Documents.
C. Day:
1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight.
D. Defective:
1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test,
or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless

responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some
other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
Page 5 of 60
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection with services,
materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide”
is implied.
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor
shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.
B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall
each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which
either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner
respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project
Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the
Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day
after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement,
whichever date is earlier.
2.04 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to
run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times
commence to run.
2.05 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless
otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for
timely review:

Page 6 of 60
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for
starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified
in the Contract Documents;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices
of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of
overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor,
Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among
the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A,
procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for
Payment, and maintaining required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual
to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under
the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive
information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each
respective party.
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended
by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to
Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A.
Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to
complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until
acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression

of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on
Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or
progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full
responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a

workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance

if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.

Page 7 of 60
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if

required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the
Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce
the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost
to Owner.
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as

provided in Article 9.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations
1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,

organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be
specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the
Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the
Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a

Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor,
or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those
set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to
assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or
direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies:
1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking

each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract
Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field
measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and
shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with
any Work affected thereby.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the
performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a)
Page 8 of 60
any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c)
any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in
writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an
emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual
knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies:
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions
of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any
Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract
Documents); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would
result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions
in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work
Change Directive.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations
and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:
1. A Field Order;
2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph

6.17.D.3); or
3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or
its consultants, including electronic media editions; or
2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on

extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and
Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer.

Page 9 of 60
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
3.06 Electronic Data
A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or
Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are
limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of
text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving
party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at
the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies,
the hard copies govern.
B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently
or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files
agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the
receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors
detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting
from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware
differing from those used by the data’s creator.
ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which
Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay
for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If
Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any
delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor
as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of
record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed
and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or
construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

Page 10 of 60
1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the Site; and
2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the
Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may
not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or
revealed either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled
to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the
subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in
an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about
such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in
connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer
will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining
additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy
to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions.
C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

Page 11 of 60
1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent
that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or
decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject,
however, to the following:
a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph
4.03.A; and
b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a
final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or
b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as
a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and
contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be
conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such final commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent,
if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be
made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or
any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained
by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
4.04 Underground Facilities
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on
information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground
Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any
such information or data provided by others; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall
have full responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;

Page 12 of 60
c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including
Owner, during construction; and
d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Not Shown or Indicated:
1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was

not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before
further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection
therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of
such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and
Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the
extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility.
During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such
Underground Facility.
2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work

Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such
consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any
Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and
could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner
and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of
any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make
a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
4.05 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which
in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the
established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or
relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer
whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for
the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by
professionally qualified personnel.
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings
known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at
the Site.
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the
Page 13 of 60
Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may
not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or
revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or
identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be
responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to
the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is
responsible.
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor
shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in
connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as
required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter
confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the
necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective
action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are
necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the
written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any
affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and
delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area
is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special
conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot
agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract
Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special
conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a
Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based
on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such
special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected
by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to
entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a
Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the
Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.

Page 14 of 60
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from
and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration
or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or
indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be
included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to
indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or
entity’s own negligence.
H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by
Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H
shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the
consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to
the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s
obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year
after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period
specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or
Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as
are required by the Contract Documents.
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided
otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in
the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal
Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by
the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury.
All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of
that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is
effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.
C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent
or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or
it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify
Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification,
Page 15 of 60
provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of
Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02.
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and
maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that
are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds
or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance
companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be
provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.03 Certificates of Insurance
A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to
purchase and maintain.
B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to
purchase and maintain.
C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance
with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance
from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to
maintain such insurance.
D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.
E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.
5.04 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being
performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the
Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or
Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee
benefit acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
Contractor’s employees;
3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
other than Contractor’s employees;
Page 16 of 60
4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage
which are sustained:
a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment

of such person by Contractor, or
b. by any other person for any other reason;
5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage
arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:
1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be

written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary
exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals
or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as
additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such
additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide
primary coverage for all claims covered thereby;
2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability
provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever
is greater;
3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under

Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;
4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled,
materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been
given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the
certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so
provide);
5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor
may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph
13.07; and
6. include completed operations coverage:
a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued,
evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of
such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.

Page 17 of 60
5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance
A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04,

Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own
liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under
the Contract Documents.
5.06 Property Insurance
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and
maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement
cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of
each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be
listed as a loss payee;
2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for
physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and
equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:
fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake,
collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,
water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss
as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including
but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to
in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials
and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by
Engineer;
5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;
6. include testing and startup; and
7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing
by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee
to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.
B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional
property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and
Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and
Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and
the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable
interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.

Page 18 of 60
C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be
purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or
renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and
Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued
and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.
D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance
specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or
others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the
Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be
borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them
wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase
and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.
E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property
insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such
insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor
whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner.
5.07 Waiver of Rights
A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06
will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused
by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to
the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights
of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses
and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss
covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in
addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals
or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each
and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above
waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the
proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so
issued.
B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each
and any of them for:
1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending
beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising
out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

Page 19 of 60
2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or
resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property
insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial
utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to
Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.
C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss
referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of
payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of
them.
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted
with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests
may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph
5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute
it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special
agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so
received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an
appropriate Change Order.
B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one
of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to
Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall
adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest,
Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace
A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other
provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other
party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract
Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after
receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner
and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of
insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or
maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents,
such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of
the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without
prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or
insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required
to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price
accordingly.

Page 20 of 60
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer
A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or
occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to
Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in
coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent
by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or
permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible
for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor
shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification
of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is
shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer
except under extraordinary circumstances.
6.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the
Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all
times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at
the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all
Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit
the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written
consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume
full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water,
sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not
specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall
expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish

Page 21 of 60
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of
materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected,
used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier,
except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
6.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph
2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph
2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the
Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General
Requirements applicable thereto.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall
be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract
Times may only be made by a Change Order.
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract

Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the
specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality
required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that
no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or
equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for
review under the circumstances described below.
1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment

proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that
no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an
“or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in
Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the
requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this
Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered
functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,

strength, and design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;
and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

Page 22 of 60
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
2. Substitute Items:
a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by

Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be
considered a proposed substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to

determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to
that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed
substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from
anyone other than Contractor.
c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d,
as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is
appropriate under the circumstances.
d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed

substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The
application:
1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the
general design,
b) be similar in substance to that specified, and
c) be suited to the same use as that specified;
2) will state:
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
prejudice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time,
b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change
in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct
contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the
proposed substitute item, and
c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with

the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;
3) will identify:
a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and

Page 23 of 60
b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services;
and
4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims
of other contractors affected by any resulting change.
B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,

sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents,
Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient
information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute
proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The
requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate
each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may
require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will
be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or
utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the
case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise
Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a

special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a

substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B.
Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor,
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each
such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges
of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute
or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
(including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as
a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be
required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or
perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or

other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by
a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted
a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in
writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or
objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor,

Page 24 of 60
Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable
objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the
rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be
adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier,
or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of
any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work.
C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in
the Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other individual or entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the
payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.
E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.
F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall
not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating
the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an

appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which
specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is
with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance
provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or
Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights
against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any
of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance
applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to
be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same.
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in
the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,

Page 25 of 60
process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If
a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract
Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner
or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any
license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the
Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or
relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as
being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or
copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights
incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the
Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract
Documents.
6.08 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay
for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall
pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.
6.09 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws
or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and
all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.
However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor
of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

Page 26 of 60
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective
Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of
performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
6.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment,
and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and
Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with
construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant
thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work.
2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of
the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or
otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.
3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or
action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor’s performance of the Work.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work
Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other
debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the
Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor
shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and
surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for
alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be
loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of
the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
Page 27 of 60
6.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written
interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during
construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart
of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of
the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to
Engineer for Owner.
6.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance
of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor
shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage
on or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for
removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other
utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them
in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any.
The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to
the Work.
D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s
safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must
comply while at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier,
or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any
of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to
the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole
or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
Page 28 of 60
F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
6.14 Safety Representative
A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site
whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and
supervising of safety precautions and programs.
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets
or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged
between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.
6.16 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury,
or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any
significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused
thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the
Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to
such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in
accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each
submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to
show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide
and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by
Paragraph 6.17.D.
2. Samples:
a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.
b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog
numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to
enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by
Paragraph 6.17.D.

Page 29 of 60
B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of
Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the
pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Submittal Procedures:
1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:
a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings
and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified

performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog
numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;
c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the
indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and
installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for

means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety
precautions and programs incident thereto.
2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has
satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal.
3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any
variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the
Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the
Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each
Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such
variation.
D. Engineer’s Review:
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be
only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents
and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning
whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method,
technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for
by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The
review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly
in which the item functions.
3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has
Page 30 of 60
complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written
approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not
relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph
6.17.C.1.
E. Resubmittal Procedures:
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required
number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for
review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other
than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.
6.18 Continuing the Work
A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and
Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on
representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than

Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom
Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that
is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by Engineer;
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related

thereto by Owner;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a
notice of acceptability by Engineer;

Page 31 of 60
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.
6.20 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any
such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss
of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable .
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor
or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or
type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the
liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors arising out of:
1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings,
opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the
injury or damage.
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services
are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such
services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide
professional services in violation of applicable law.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,

materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must
satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly
licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
Page 32 of 60
specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such
professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by
such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when
submitted to Engineer.
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness
of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided
Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that
such services must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and
design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except
design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph
6.17.D.1.
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
7.01 Related Work at Site
A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or
through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such
other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:
1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent,
if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed
as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each
utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper
and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage
of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the
Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be
required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly
integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,
excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or
alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be
affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit
of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions
for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners
and other contractors.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and
promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work
Page 33 of 60
that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s
Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit
and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
7.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at
the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:
1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various contractors will be identified;
2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized;
and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority
and responsibility for such coordination.
7.03 Legal Relationships
A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.
B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other
contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption
costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s wrongful actions or inactions.
C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner
for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a
result of Contractor’s wrongful action or inactions.
ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all
communications to Contractor through Engineer.
8.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to

whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract
Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.
8.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

Page 34 of 60
8.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs
14.02.C and 14.07.C.
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering
surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph
4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
8.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and
property insurance are set forth in Article 5.
8.07 Change Orders
A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
Paragraph 13.03.B.
8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible
for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not
be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set

forth in Paragraph 4.06.
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents.
8.12 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed
pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

Page 35 of 60
ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.
9.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and
qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various
aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and
observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is
proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of
confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On
the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress
of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a
result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise,
direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods,
techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
9.03 Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to
assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and
responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will
be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to
represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the
responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be
as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work
A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times
and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole
as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and
will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved
promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement
to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor
as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
Page 36 of 60
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work
A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that
Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract
Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project
as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04,
whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and
Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.
B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and
design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any,
see Paragraph 6.21.
C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed
by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations
on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an
Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and
binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more
accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and
judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters
between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the
acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in
writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If
Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The
date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced
for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.
C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and
Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

Page 37 of 60
D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show
partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or
decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of
the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not
exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any
authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract,
tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other
individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply
with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by
Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the
results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also
apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.
9.10 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been
informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.
ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a
Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if
any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed

Page 38 of 60
as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in
the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work
as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.
10.03 Execution of Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer
covering:
1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii)
required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s
correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties,
including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in
accordance with a Work Change Directive; and
3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any
written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu
of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere
to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.
10.04 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not
limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any
such change.
10.05 Claims
A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09,
shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a
condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either
may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of
such Claims.
B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the
claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than
30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a
Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim,
with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract
Page 39 of 60
within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for
claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an
adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of
Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by
claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the
claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any
response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last
submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).
C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the
last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the
following actions in writing:
1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;
2. approve the Claim; or
3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole
discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further
resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.
D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim
shall be deemed denied.
E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs

10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or
Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of
such action or denial.
F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
11.01 Cost of the Work
A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those
excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper
performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a
Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the
costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs
required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no
higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs
itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such
employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel
employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the
Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall
Page 40 of 60
include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which
shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes,
workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and
holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular
working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to
the extent authorized by Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including
costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in
connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits
funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts
shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of
surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make
provisions so that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.

If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors
acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then
determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any
subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work
plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same
manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically
related to the Work.
5. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of

Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,

machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not
owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost,
less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of
Contractor.
c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether
rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by
Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading,
assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with
the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or
parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them
may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

Page 41 of 60
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with
the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible
amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D),
provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the
negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include
settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses,
damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of
determining Contractor’s fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service
at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection
with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the
Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of
partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers,
architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting
agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor,
whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration
of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications
referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of
which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the
Site.
3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital

employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including
but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment
wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.
C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee
shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a
Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis
of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.
D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined
pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records
Page 42 of 60
thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form
acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
11.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in
the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums
and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances:
1. Contractor agrees that:
a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade
discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at
the Site, and all applicable taxes; and
b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included
in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment
on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Contingency Allowance:
1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to
cover unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by

Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
11.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal
to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the
estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of
the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be
made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate
to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance
with Paragraph 10.05 if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and
significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and

Page 43 of 60
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and
3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result

of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a
decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any
such increase or decrease.
ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in
the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to
the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of
Paragraph 10.05.
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,
by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for
overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on
the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as
follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee
shall be 15 percent;
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five
percent;
c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a
fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and
12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier,
will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under
Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and

Page 44 of 60
Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower
tier Subcontractor;
d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4,
11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;
e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost
plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net
decrease; and
f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in
Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with
Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.
12.02 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in
the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim
to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of
Paragraph 10.05.
B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this
Article 12.
12.03 Delays
A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract
Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in
an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited
to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing
other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather
conditions, or acts of God.
B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as
contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to
an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being
essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic,
abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under
the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and
Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if
such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract
Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays
described in this Paragraph 12.03.C.

Page 45 of 60
D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses,
or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)
sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for
delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a
Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Notice of Defects
A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be
given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in
this Article 13.
13.02 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection,
and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and
advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply
therewith as applicable.
13.03 Tests and Inspections
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required
inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to
facilitate required inspections or tests.
B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:
1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;
2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to

Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and
3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part
thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other
representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging
and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and
furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in
connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s
Page 46 of 60
acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of
materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase
thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed
by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by
Engineer, uncover such Work for observation.
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless

Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and
Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer

or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.
C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs,
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation,
inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in
the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work
will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or
any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of
Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this
right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or
entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

Page 47 of 60
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or
not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove
it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all
claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but
not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,
Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty
and guarantee, if any, on said Work.
13.07 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be
defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s
use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is
found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance
with Owner’s written instructions:
1. repair such defective land or areas; or
2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace
it with Work that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the
work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced.
All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal
and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
others) will be paid by Contractor.
C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service

before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to
run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or
removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with
respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such
correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

Page 48 of 60
E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or
warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or
a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and,
prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner
may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and
all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as
to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid
by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s
recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so
accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a
Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such
recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in
accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the
Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or
remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials
and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees,
Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to
enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies
under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the
Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include
but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

Page 49 of 60
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in
the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and
remedies under this Paragraph 13.09.
ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14.01 Schedule of Values
A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis
for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment
acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed.
14.02 Progress Payments
A. Applications for Payments:
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment
(but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed
as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials
and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site
or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be
accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has
received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the
materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other
arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to
Owner.
2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of
the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
B. Review of Applications:
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate
in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return
the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections
and resubmit the Application.

Page 50 of 60
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will
constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of
the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on
Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and
schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon
Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract
Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work
under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation);
and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to

have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress,
or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically
assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle
Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to
Contractor.
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending

payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will
impose responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the

safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s
performance of the Work, or
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used
the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to
Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s
opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in
Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or,
because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or
Page 51 of 60
tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such
extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or
replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance
with Paragraph 13.09; or
d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraph 15.02.A.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s
recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph
14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
D. Reduction in Payment:
1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer
because:
a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or

furnishing of the Work;
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and
discharge of such Liens;
c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or
d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.
2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner
will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons
for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the
amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any
adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the
reasons for such action.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the
amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by
Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

Page 52 of 60
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered
by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner
no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.
14.04 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items
specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of
Substantial Completion.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider
the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial
Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed
or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative
certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the
certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the
Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the
tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after
consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete,
Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive
certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified
after consideration of any objections from Owner.
D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will
deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities
pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation,
safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and
guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer
in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion,
Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final
payment.
E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the tentative list.
14.05 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents,
or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and
usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant

Page 53 of 60
interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the
following conditions:
1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy
any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and
substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is
substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of
Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work.
2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers
any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and
request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall
make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If
Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer
will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer
considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph
14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the
Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.
14.06 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will
notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary
to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.07 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment:
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record
documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered)
by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and
Page 54 of 60
d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien
rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as

approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of
Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and
equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment
bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way
be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's
property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral
satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:
1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final
Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and
present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will
also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for
Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application for Payment.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum
Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to
liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
14.08 Final Completion Delayed
A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment
(for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without
terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds
have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of Claims.
14.09 Waiver of Claims
A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

Page 55 of 60
1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled
Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06,
from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special
guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and
2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in
accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in
writing as still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer
which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on
the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if
Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established
under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);
2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or
4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving
Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of
Contractor:
1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s
tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to
the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass
or conversion);
2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner
has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and
3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to

receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract
Page 56 of 60
Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration
or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing
the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages
exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims,
costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their
reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When
exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain
the lowest price for the Work performed.
D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be

terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to
correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than
30 days of receipt of said notice.
E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of
Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of
Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case,
Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit
on such expenses;
3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or
other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and
4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

Page 57 of 60
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90
consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii)
Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii)
Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then
Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner
or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract
and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,
or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,
Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until
payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The
provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a
Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or
otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as
permitted by this Paragraph.
ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a
decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The
mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American
Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for
mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other
party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph
10.05.E.
B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process
shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the
mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.
C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a
denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days
after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:
1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the
Supplementary Conditions; or
2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or
3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of
competent jurisdiction.

Page 58 of 60
ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will
be deemed to have been validly given if:
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the

corporation for whom it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business
address known to the giver of the notice.
17.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed
to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period
falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable
jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.
17.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any
way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are
otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or
by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as
effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each
particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
17.04 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or
given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations
indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance
of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of
Contractor.
17.05 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
17.06 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts
of these General Conditions.

Page 59 of 60
DOCUMENT 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SUBJECTS
ARTICLE 1 — DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

SC-1.01.A Defined Terms: Change definitions of Contractor, Engineer, Liens, and
Owner; and added definitions
ARTICLE 2 — PRELIMINARY MATTERS

SC-2.02.A Copies Of Documents: Changed number
SC-2.05.A Before Starting Construction: Added preliminary schedule of payments
SC-2.06.A Preconstruction Conference: Changed time of conference and allowed for
optional attendance by Owner.
SC-2.07.A Initial Acceptance of Schedules: Added schedule of payments
ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

SC-3.01.A Intent: Added order of precedence
ARTICLE 4 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

SC-4.01.D Availability of Lands: Added Work in right-of-ways
SC-4.02.A.1 Subsurface Conditions: Added Not Used
SC-4.02.A.2 Physical Conditions: Added Not Used
SC-4.02.B Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Added
definition
SC-4.04.B Underground Facilities, Not Shown or Indicated: Added for Pipeline Projects
SC-4.06.A.1 Reports of Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Added None
SC-4.06.A.2 Drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Added None
SC-4.06.B Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Added
definition
ARTICLE 5 — BONDS AND INSURANCE

SC-5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers: Added B. Insurance Rating
SC-5.03 Certificates of Insurance: Added F. requirement for insurance certificates
SC-5.04.B Contractor's Insurance: Added Severability and Waiver of Subrogation
Against Owner and Engineer
SC.5.06 Property Insurance: Deleted and added A. Workers' Compensation and
Employers' Liability Insurance, B. Comprehensive Automobile Liability
Insurance, C. Commercial General Liability Insurance, D. Umbrella Liability
Insurance, and E. Property Insurance
ARTICLE 6 — CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

SC-6.02.B Labor; Working Hours: Added Hours of Operation
SC-6.03 Service, Materials, and Equipment: Added D. Interfaces to Equipment,
E. Protection of the Work, F. Correction of Damage to Work, G. Best Quality
Requirement, H. Delivery and Inspection
SC-6.04.A Progress Schedule: Added Procedure for When Work Falls Behind Schedule
SC-6.06.B Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others: Added List of
Subcontractors Requirement and Percentage of Contractor Work
2018 00800-1 150407

SC-6.07.A Patent Fees and Royalties; Evidence of Indemnification and Owner to pay
certain license fees and royalties
SC-6.08 Permits: Added list of Owner provided permits
SC-6.09 Laws and Regulations: Added Subcontract Compliance, reference to exhibits,
employment requirements, payroll records, trenches and excavations, and
assignment of causes of action
SC-6.10.A Taxes: Added optional paragraph regarding use tax
SC-6.13 Safety and Protection: Added Safety Plan and Contractor Enforcement
SC-6.15 Hazard Communication Programs: Added requirements regarding hazardous
waste
SC-6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples: Changed Engineer’s approval to comment
SC-6.22 Assignment of Procurement Contracts
ARTICLE 7 — OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

SC-7.01.A Related Work at Site: Added Reference to Section 01110
SC-7.02 Coordination: Added Coordinating Contractor
ARTICLE 8 — OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

SC-8.02.A Replacement of Engineer: Removed Contractor’s ability to object to
replacement Engineer
ARTICLE 9 — ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION — No Modifications
ARTICLE 10 — CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS

SC-10.05.B Claims: Written notice due no later than 5 days after event.
ARTICLE 11 — COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

SC-11.01.A Cost of the Work: Added Rental Rates, Guide and Application of Guide
SC-11.02.A Allowances: Added Reference to Section 01210
SC-11.03.D Unit Price Work: Added when claims may be made
ARTICLE 12 — CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

SC-12.02 Change of Contract Times: Added Use of Float
ARTICLE 13 — TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK
SC-13.03.B Tests and Inspections: Changed from Owner to Contractor Payment of
Testing Service
SC-13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work: Added new subparagraph C
regarding system startup.
SC-13.07 Correction Period: Changed start of correction period in subparagraphs A and
C.
ARTICLE 14 — PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

SC-14.02.A Applications for Payments: Changed Time of Submittal, Procedure for Stored
Products, Updated Schedules Requirement, Payment for Stored Products,
Additional Retention, and Subcontractor Payment
SC-14.02.B Review of Application: Changed time of Engineer’s review to conform to
California law
SC-14.02.C Payment Becomes Due: Changed Payment Due Time
SC-14.04.A Substantial Completion: Expanded definition of Substantial Completion
SC-14.07.C Payment Becomes Due: Added reference to California Public Contract Code
2018 00800-2 150407

ARTICLE 15 — SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
SC-15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause: Changed Stipulations
SC-15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate: Deleted
ARTICLE 16 — DISPUTE RESOLUTION

SC-16.02 Claims under $375,000 to be resolved pursuant to California law
ARTICLE 17 — MISCELLANEOUS - No Modifications
END OF SUBJECTS
2018 00800-3 150407

DOCUMENT 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions, Document 00700.
All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated
below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
SC-1.01.A.15 Delete paragraph 1.01.A.15 and insert the following in lieu thereof:
15. Contractor; CONTRACTOR--Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement
and the Contractor's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number.
19. Engineer; ENGINEER--Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and the
Engineer's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if
singular in number.
SC-1.01.A.26 Add the following sentence to paragraph 1.01.A.26:
Also referred to as Stop Notices.
29. Owner; OWNER--The individual, entity, public body or authority identified as such in
the Agreement and the Owner's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number.
SC-1.01.A.52 Award--The formal acceptance of the Bid by Owner.
SC-1.01.A.53 Bid Guarantee (Bid Bond)--The security furnished with a Bid to guarantee that the
Bidder will enter into the Contract if Bidder's Bid is accepted by Owner.
SC-1.01.A.55 Design Engineer – CANNON CORPORATION.
SC-1.01.A.56 Equipment--(Construction)--All machinery and equipment, together with the
necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, including tools and apparatus necessary for the
proper construction and acceptable completion of the Work contemplated. (Installation) — All
material or articles used in equipping a facility or apparatus required to fulfill a functional design.
SC-1.01.A.57 Execution--Field or site performance, workmanship, installation, erection, application,
field fabrication, quality control, and protection of installed products on the site.
SC-1.01.A.58 Materials--All materials incorporated into the Project, including equipment and all
other materials consumed or to be consumed in the performance of the Work contemplated.
SC-1.01.A.59 Procurement Contractor--The corporation, company, partnership, firm, or individual
who has entered into a contract with Owner outside the scope of these Contract Documents, to
furnish materials and equipment for this Project.
SC-1.01.A.60 Product Data--Type of Shop Drawing comprised of standard illustrations, schedules,
performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, catalog cuts, and other information
assembled by or for the Contractor and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate materials or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
2018 00800-4 150407

SC-1.01.A.61 Products--Materials, equipment, systems, shop fabrications, mixtures, and source
controls.
SC-1.01.A.62 Utility--Any public or private fixed works for the transportation of fluids, gases,
electricity, signals, or communications.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
SC-2.02.A Copies of Documents: Delete the first sentence of paragraph 2.02.A and insert the
following in lieu thereof:
Owner shall furnish Contractor up to 5 copies of the Contract Documents.
SC-2.05.A Before Starting Construction: Add the following to paragraph 2.05.A:
4. A preliminary schedule of payments showing projected cash flow.
SC-2.06.A Preconstruction Conference: Delete paragraph 2.06.A and insert the following in lieu
thereof:
A. Before the Contract Times start to run, but after Notice to Proceed is given, a
conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to
establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules
referred to in paragraph 2.05.B, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals,
processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records.
SC-2.07.A Initial Acceptance of Schedules: Add the following to paragraph 2.07.A:
4. Contractor's schedule of payments will be acceptable if it provides a reasonable
projection of payments in relationship to the progress schedule and schedule of values.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
SC-3.01.A Add the following sentence and subparagraphs to paragraph 3.01.A:

In the event of a conflict that cannot be resolved by interpreting the Contract Documents
as a single, integrated document and giving effect to each provision therein, the Contract Document
higher in precedence shall control and supersede the Contract Documents lower in precedence in
accordance with the following listing arranged from the highest to the lowest in precedence:
1. Addenda, if any; Supplemental Agreements; and Change Orders; the one dated later
having precedence over another dated earlier.
2. Agreement.
3. General Requirements.
4. Other Specifications (DIVISION 2 and other DIVISIONS following it).
5. Drawings.
6. Supplementary Conditions, if any.
7. General Conditions.
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
SC-4.01.D Availability of Lands: Add the following paragraph 4.01.D:
2018 00800-5 150407

D. Any Work performed in public rights-of-way, in addition to conforming to the Contract
Documents, shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the permit issued by the public
agency in whose right-of-way the Work is located.
SC-4.02.A.1 Subsurface Conditions: Delete paragraph SC-4.02.A.1 and insert the following in lieu
thereof:
1. The following reports of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the site have been used by Design Engineer in preparing the Contract
Documents.
a. Updated Geotechnical Investigation Report, Arvin WWTP Improvements,
dated December 15, 2018________________________
SC-4.02.A.2 Physical Conditions: Delete paragraph 4.02.A.2 and insert the following in lieu
thereof:
2. The following drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) have been used
by Design Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. Drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) are available
for review at City of Arvin, upon 48 hours' notice to Owner.
a. WWT and Disposal Facilities, dated October 1983 (Boyle)______________
b. WWTF, dated 1998 (Orbal) (US Fitter) ________________________
3. Contractor's interpretation of the character and condition of the materials between
test hole locations.
SC-4.04.B Underground Facilities, Not Shown or Indicated: Add the following subparagraphs to
paragraph 4.04.B:
4. Generally, service connections are not indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall
be responsible for discovery of existing underground installations, in advance of excavating or
trenching, by contacting all local utilities and by prospecting.
5. All information relative to Underground Facilities shall be recorded and incorporated
into the record documents required by paragraph 6.12.
6. Contractor will be held responsible for any unauthorized interruption in the operation
of Underground Facilities as a result of Contractor's operations. Unless the owner of the damaged
facility elects to perform the repair and restoration work, Contractor shall repair and fully restore any
damaged Underground Facility to a condition at least equal to that which existed just prior to the
time of damage. All repair and restoration work shall be done to the satisfaction of the facility owner
and Engineer.
7. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for any inspection of repaired or reconditioned Utility
facilities required by authorities having jurisdiction. All inspection fees shall be paid by
CONTRACTOR. If the facility owner elects to perform the repair and restoration work,
CONTRACTOR shall render all assistance required. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all just
and reasonable expenses incurred by the facility owners for such work.
8. Pursuant to California Government Code Section 4215, Contractor shall be
compensated for the costs of locating, repairing damage not due to the failure of the Contractor to
exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such Utility facilities not indicated in the plans
and Specifications with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the Project necessarily idled
during such Work. Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of
2018 00800-6 150407

the Project, when such delay was caused by the failure of the public agency or the owner of the
Utility to provide for removal or relocation of such Utility facilities.
SC-4.06.A Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site: Delete paragraph 4.06.A and insert the
following in lieu thereof:
4.06.A Reports and Drawings
4.06.A.1 No reports of exploration and tests of hazardous environmental conditions at or
contiguous to the site have been used by Design Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents.
SC-4.06.A.2 Physical Conditions: Add the following optional paragraph after 4.06.A.1.
4.06.A.2 No drawings of hazardous environmental conditions at or contiguous to the site have
been used by Design Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents.
SC-4.06.B Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Delete "Such 'technical
data' is identified in the Supplementary Conditions" and insert "Technical data is limited to data
provided in the reports and drawings listed in paragraph SC-4.06.A.1.”
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
SC-5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers: Add the following paragraph immediately after
paragraph 5.02.A:
B. Insurance Rating: Contractor shall maintain at all times during the life of this Contract
policies of insurance from an insurance company that has a rating of or equivalent to A-:VIII by A.M.
Best & Company.
SC-5.03 Certificates of Insurance: Add the following paragraph immediately after
paragraph 5.03.E:
F. Deliver all certificates of insurance required by the Contract Documents to Owner
with executed Agreement.
SC-5.04.B Contractor's Insurance: Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 5.04.B:
7. contain a cross liability or severability of interest clause or endorsement. Insurance
covering the specified additional insureds shall be primary insurance, and all other insurance
carried by the additional insureds shall be excess insurance; and
8. with respect to workers' compensation and employer's liability, comprehensive
automobile liability, commercial general liability, and umbrella liability insurance, Contractor shall
require Contractor's insurance carriers to waive all rights of subrogation against Owner, Engineer,
Engineer's Consultants, and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, and agents.
SC-5.06 Property Insurance: Delete paragraph 5.06 in its entirety and insert the following in lieu
thereof:
5.06 Insurance Limits and Endorsements:
A. Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance: This insurance shall
protect Contractor against all claims under applicable state workers' compensation laws. Contractor
shall also be protected against claims for injury, disease, or death of employees which, for any
reason, may not fall within the provisions of a workers' compensation law. This policy shall include
an "all states" or "other states" and waiver of subrogation endorsements. The liability limits, as
required by state law shall be not less than:
1. Workers' compensation: Statutory
2. Employer's liability: $1,000,000 each occurrence
2018 00800-7 150407

B. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance: This insurance shall be occurrence
type written in comprehensive form and shall protect Contractor, Owner, and Engineer, and any
other persons or entities identified by Owner and Engineer as additional insureds, against all claims
for injuries to members of the public and damage to property of others arising from the use of motor
vehicles, either on or off the project site whether they are owned, nonowned, or hired. The liability
limits for bodily injury and property damage shall be not less than:
1. Combined Single Limit
for each occurrence: $1,000,000
C. Commercial General Liability Insurance: This insurance shall be occurrence type
written in comprehensive form and shall protect Contractor, Owner, and any other persons or
entities identified by Owner and Engineer as additional insureds, against claims arising from
injuries, sickness, disease, or death of any person or damage to property arising out of performance
of the Work. The policy shall also include personal injury liability coverage, contractual liability
coverage, completed operations and products liability coverage, and coverage for blasting,
explosion, collapse of buildings, and damage to underground property. The liability limits for bodily
injury and property damage shall be not less than:
2. General aggregate: $1,000,000
D. Umbrella Liability Insurance. This insurance shall protect Contractor, Owner,
Engineer, and any other persons or entities identified by Owner and Engineer as additional
insureds, against claims in excess of the limits provided under workers' compensation and
employer’s liability, comprehensive automobile liability, and commercial general liability policies.
The umbrella policy shall follow the form of the primary insurance, including the application of the
primary limits. The liability limits for bodily injury and property damage shall be not less than:
2. General aggregate: $4,000,000
E. Property Insurance. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance
coverage for the Work at the site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof. This insurance
shall:
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, and any other
persons or entities identified by Owner and Engineer, each of whom is deemed to have
an insurable interest and shall be listed as a named insured;
2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy
form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work,
temporary buildings, falsework, Work in transit including ocean transit, and Work in
storage at the project site or at another location acceptable to Owner, and shall insure
against at least the following perils: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism
and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by
enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and damage caused by frost and
freezing;
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-6.02.B Labor; Working Hours: Add the following subparagraphs immediately after paragraph
6.02.B:
2018 00800-8 150407

1. No Work shall be done between 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. without permission of
Owner. However, emergency work may be done without prior permission.
2. Night Work may be undertaken as a regular procedure with the permission of Owner;
such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by Owner if Contractor fails to maintain
adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the Work at night.
SC-6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment: Add the following paragraphs immediately after
paragraph 6.03.C:
D. Interfaces to Equipment, Instruments, and Other Components:
1. The drawings, specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary

information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a minimum scope of
supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments,
control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment
provided with mechanical systems.
2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to
the work, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual
equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance in
accordance with the General Conditions.
4. Review the complete set of drawings and specifications in order to ensure that
all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include
any such items that appear on drawings or in specifications from another discipline in the scope of
Work.
E. Until Substantial Completion of the Work is acknowledged by Owner, Contractor

shall have the responsible charge and care of the Work and of materials to be used herein,
including materials for which Contractor has received partial payment or materials which have been
furnished by Owner, and shall bear the risk of injury, loss, or damage to any part thereof by the
action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the
nonexecution of the Work.
F. Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries, losses, or
damages to any portion of the Work or the materials occasioned by any cause before the Work's
completion and acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. Where necessary to protect the
Work or materials from damage, Contractor shall, at Contractor's own expense, provide suitable
drainage and erect such temporary structures or rent such structures as are necessary to protect
the Work or materials from damage. The suspension of the Work or the granting of an extension of
time from any cause whatever shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's responsibility for the Work
and materials as specified herein.
G. When the quality of a material, process, or article is not specifically set forth in the
Contract Documents, the best available quality of the material, process, or article shall be provided.
H. Delivery and Inspection:
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label.
2018 00800-9 150407

SC-6.04.A Progress Schedule: Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 6.04.A:
3. If, in the opinion of Engineer, Contractor falls behind the accepted Construction
Schedule due to actions or neglect of Contractor or Contractor's agents, servants, employees,
officers, subcontractors, directors, or any party contracting to perform part or all of the Work or to
supply any equipment or materials, Contractor shall take steps, including, but not limited to,
increasing the number of personnel, shifts, and/or overtime operations, days of work, and/or
amount of construction equipment until such time as the Work is back on schedule. Contractor shall
also submit for review not later than the time of submittal of the next request for partial payment,
such supplementary schedule or schedules as may be necessary to demonstrate the manner in
which the acceptable rate of progress will be regained, all without additional cost to Owner.
SC-6.06.B Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others: Delete the first sentence of the
paragraph 6.06.B and insert the following in lieu thereof, and add subparagraph 6.06.B.1:
B. Pursuant to California Public Contract Code Section 4106, Contractor shall submit to
the Owner a list of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities who perform work,
labor or render services to the Contractor in excess of one-half of one percent of the Contractor's
total Bid together with the portion of the work or services provided which will be done by each such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity.
1. Subcontracting: Contractor shall perform with Contractor's own organization work
amounting to not less than 51 percent of the combined value of all items of the Work
covered by the Contract.
SC-6.07.A Patent Fees and Royalties: Add the following subparagraphs immediately after
paragraph 6.07.A:
1. Contractor shall furnish to Owner at the time of initial submittal, satisfactory evidence
that Suppliers of proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes to be furnished or used in
the performance of the Work do indemnify, keep, and save harmless Contractor from all liabilities,
judgments, costs, damages, and expenses which may arise from the use of such proprietary
materials, equipment, devices, or processes, furnished to Contractor for incorporation in or use in
performance of the Work and their operation by Owner after acceptance of the Work. Such
satisfactory evidence shall consist of patent licenses or patent releases covering proprietary
materials, equipment, devices, or processes.
SC-6.08 Permits: Add the following paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.08.A:
B. Owner will provide the following permits:
1. NONE
SC-6.09 Laws and Regulations: Delete the first sentence of paragraph 6.09.A and insert the
following in lieu thereof. Add paragraphs 6.09.D, 6.09.E, 6.09.F, and 6.09.G.
A. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable
to furnishing and performance of the Work and shall cause all Contractor's agents, employees,
Subcontractors, and Suppliers to observe and comply with all such laws, ordinances, and
regulations.
D. Employment Requirements shall be as specified herein and in the attachments at the
end of the Supplementary Conditions.
E. Pursuant to Section 1776, California Labor Code, Contractor shall keep an accurate
payroll record showing the name, address, Social Security number, work classification, straight time
and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each
journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by Contractor for the performance of
the Work.
2018 00800-10 150407

1. A certified copy of payroll records shall be submitted to Owner and shall be made
available for inspection or furnished upon request to a representative of the California
Division of Labor Standards Enforcement and Division of Apprenticeship Standards.
2. In case of non-compliance with Section 1776, and after a 10-day period following
receipt of a written notice, Contractor shall forfeit $25 for each calendar day, or portion
thereof, for each worker in non-compliance, until compliance is effectuated.
F. Section 7104, California Public Contract Code includes procedures when the Work
involves excavation that extends deeper than four feet below the surface.
G. Pursuant to California Public Contract Code Section 7103.5(b), Contractor or
Subcontractor shall offer and agree to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in
and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or
under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the
Business and Professions Code).
SC-6.10.A Taxes: Delete the word “use.”
SC-6.13 Safety and Protection: Add the following paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.13.F:
G. Contractor shall prepare, implement, and maintain a safety and health program or
plan in accordance with Section 01329 of the General Requirements.
H. Contractor shall make reasonable efforts to detect and abate any violations of safety
standards of which Contractor is aware and to which Contractor's employees are exposed, despite
the fact that Contractor did not commit the violation.
SC-6.15 Hazard Communication Programs: Add the following paragraphs immediately after
6.15.A:
B. Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify
Owner and Engineer, in writing, of any:
1. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as
defined in Section 25117, California Health & Safety Code, that is required to be removed
to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing
law.
2. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated in
the Contract Documents.
3. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially
from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the
character provided for in the Contract Documents.
C. Owner will promptly investigate the conditions, and where Owner finds the conditions
do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in the
Contract Price, or in the Contract Time, or both, a Change Order will be issued in accordance with
Document 00700, General Conditions.
D. In the event a dispute arises as to whether the conditions materially differ, or involve
hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or both,
Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided in the Contract
Documents, but shall proceed with the Work.
SC-6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples: In all subparagraphs, delete the word “approval” and
insert “comment” in lieu thereof, delete the phrase “approval of” and insert the phrase “comment
concerning” in lieu thereof, and make other non-substantive, grammatical changes as required by
2018 00800-11 150407

the foregoing replacement. In subparagraph 6.17.E.1, delete the phrase “and approve” in the first
sentence.
SC-6.22 Assignment of Procurement Contracts: Add the following paragraphs immediately after
paragraph 6.21:
6.22 Assignment of Procurement Contracts
A. Following award of the general construction contract, Owner will assign all or part of
the procurement contract(s) to the general construction contractor as stipulated in the Agreement.
B. Contractor’s Continuing Obligation: Contractor’s obligation to perform services in
connection herewith will be in accordance with California Commercial Code §1101 et seq. and free
from defects.
C. Remedying Defects: If at any time before expiration of the correction period under
6.22.E, Owner determines that the goods are defective, Contractor shall either correct the defects
or remove the goods and replace them with non-defective goods.
D. Owner May Remedy: If Contractor fails to take action as required by Owner in
accordance with paragraph 6.22.C, Owner may, after ten days’ written notice to Contractor, remedy
any such deficiency instead of requiring removal or replacement. In an emergency where delay
would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may take such action without notice to or
waiting for action by Contractor.
E. Correction Period: Contractor’s responsibility for remedying defects will extend for a
period of one year after date of final acceptance, or for such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by law or by provisions of manufacturer’s warranty or guarantee in conformance with the
Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
No modifications.
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-8.02.A Replacement of Engineer: Delete the following text: “to whom Contractor makes no
reasonable objection,.”
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
No modifications.
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
SC-10.05.B Notice: Delete “30” in the first sentence of 10.05.B and replace it with “5.”
ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
SC-11.01.A Cost of the Work: Insert the following after paragraph 11.01.A.5.c:
1) Rental rates will be determined as follows:
a) The base rates shall be those established in the cost guide, entitled “CALTRANS
Labor Surcharges and Equipment Rental Rates," and revisions thereto. The hourly rate to
be paid shall be the sum of the weekly rate divided by 40 plus the estimated operator's
cost per hour shown therein.
2018 00800-12 150407

b) Attachments (e.g., tractor with ripper and dozer or tractor with loader and backhoe)
will be included in the hourly rental rate only when deemed essential to the Work as
determined by Engineer.
c) The total established rental rate per hour shall be rounded to the nearest $0.10.
d) Rental rates shall not be adjusted for regional differences.
e) No compensation shall be allowed for shop tools having a daily rental rate less than
$10.00 as set forth in the cost guide.
2) If deemed necessary by Engineer to use equipment not listed in the aforementioned
publications, a suitable rental rate for such equipment will be mutually established by Contractor
and Engineer. Contractor may furnish any cost data that might establish a suitable rental rate for
such equipment. Rental payment will be made for the actual time that such equipment is in
operation on the Work and for 20 percent of the actual standby time on the Work.
SC-11.02.A Allowances: Delete "allowances so named in the Contract Documents" in the first
sentence of 11.02.A and insert "allowances so named in Section 01210 of the General
Requirements" in lieu thereof.
SC-11.03.D Unit Price Work: Delete paragraph 11.03.D.1 and insert the following in lieu thereof:
1. The quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by more
than 25 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
SC-12.02 Change of Contract Times: Add the following paragraphs 12.02.C and 12.02.D:
C. Use of Float:
1. A claim for an adjustment of Contract Times (or Milestones), otherwise allowable
under the Contract Documents, shall be granted only when the time lost or gained
exceeds the float for the activity at the time of the event giving rise to the claim. Float, the
amount of time between the early start date and the late start date, or the early finish date
and the late finish date, is jointly owned by both Owner and Contractor whether expressly
disclosed or implied in any manner.
2. Contractor shall not use float suppression techniques (including, but not limited to,
preferential sequencing caused by late starts of follow-up trades, unreasonably small
crews, extended durations, or imposed dates) in information provided to Engineer.
D. The Contract Time includes a weather day allowance of 20 working days. No
extension in Contract Time will be allowed for the first 20 working days lost due to weather
conditions.
ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE WORK
SC-13.03.B Tests and Inspections: Insert "Contractor" in lieu of "Owner" to designate the payor
of independent testing laboratory services. Insert “including but not limited to the following” in lieu of
“except.”
SC-13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work: Add the following paragraph 13.06.C:
C. System Startup
2018 00800-13 150407

1. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements:
a. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional

testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance
from the Engineer.
SC-13.07.A Correction Period: Delete “Substantial Completion” and insert “final acceptance” in
lieu thereof.
SC-13.07.C Correction Period: Delete “Substantial Completion” and insert “final acceptance” in
lieu thereof.
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
SC-14.02.A Applications for Payments: Delete "At least 20 days before the date established in
the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more than once a month)" in paragraph
14.02.A.1 and insert "On the last day of each calendar month" in lieu thereof and add the following
subparagraphs at the end of 14.02.A.1:
a. Stored Materials and Equipment: Payments for stored materials and equipment shall
be based only upon the actual cost of the materials and equipment to Contractor and shall not
include any overhead or profit to Contractor. Partial payments will not be made for undelivered
materials or equipment, except for payments associated with procurement contracts initiated by
Owner and assigned to Contractor.
b. Schedules and Data: During the progress of the Work, each Application for Payment
shall be accompanied by Contractor's updated schedule of operations, or progress report, with such
shop drawings schedules, procurement schedules, value of material on hand included in
application, and other data specified in Section 01330 or reasonably required by Engineer.
c. Payment for material delivered to the work site or stored under Owner's control will
be based on the vendors' paid invoices or the bill of lading showing date of delivery and the work
site where the delivery took place, a copy of which shall be furnished by Contractor to Engineer with
each request for progress payment. Only those materials which have been incorporated into the
Project or are stored under Owner's control may be included in the progress payment as material
stored.
d. In addition to the amounts which Owner may retain as provided elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, Owner may withhold a sufficient amount or amounts from any payment
otherwise due Contractor as in Owner's judgment may be necessary to cover:
1) Payments which may be due and payable for properly filed claims against Contractor
or any Subcontractor for labor or materials furnished in or about the performance of the
Contract.
2) Estimated or actual costs for correcting defective work not remedied.
3) Amounts claimed by Owner as forfeiture due to delays or other offsets. Owner may
apply such withheld amount or amounts to the payment of such claim at Owner's
discretion. In doing so, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any
payments so made by Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract
by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for such payment
made in good faith. Such payments may be made without prior judicial determination of
the claim or claims. Owner shall render to Contractor a proper account of any such funds
disbursed in or on behalf of Contractor.
2018 00800-14 150407

e. Contractor shall disburse money paid to him, including any interest Contractor
receives, to Subcontractors and Suppliers within 15 days after Contractor receives the money, in
direct proportion to the Subcontractors' and Suppliers' basis in the total Contract between
Contractor and Owner. Any money which is payable to a Subcontractor pursuant to this section
accrues interest at the legal rate. Contractor may withhold 10 percent from the amount of any partial
payment under a subcontract which is made before 50 percent of the Work has been completed
under the subcontract. Thereafter Contractor shall pay any additional funds if, in the opinion of
Contractor, satisfactory progress is being made in the work under the subcontract, and the payment
must be equal to that paid by Owner to Contractor for the Work performed by the Subcontractor.
1) The Contractor may retain the amount withheld under the subcontract until the
subcontract is satisfactorily completed.
2) The amount withheld under the subcontract is due within 15 days after the
acceptance of the subcontract work by Contractor.
3) Whenever Contractor receives a payment of interest earned on the amount withheld
from the Contract, Contractor shall within 15 days pay to each Subcontractor that portion
of the interest received from the state which is attributable to the amount of money
withheld from the Subcontractor.
SC-14.02.B Review of Application: Delete the first sentence of 14.02.B.1 and insert in lieu thereof
the following sentence:
1. ENGINEER will, within 7 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either
indicate in writing a recommendation for payment and present the Application to Owner or return
the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend
payment, in accordance with Section 20104.50, California Public Contract Code.
SC-14.02.C Payment Becomes Due: Delete paragraph 14.02.C.1 and insert the following
paragraph in lieu thereof:
1. Owner shall make progress payments within 30 days after receipt of Contractor’s
undisputed and properly submitted Application for Payment less amounts which are authorized to
be reserved or retained pursuant to paragraph 6.02 of Document 00520, Agreement.
SC-14.04.A Substantial Completion: Add the following subparagraphs immediately after
paragraph 14.04.A:
1. The Work shall be Substantially Complete when the Work can transmit water in the
quantity in accordance with the Contract Documents. All process and transmission equipment shall
be installed and operational, or temporary arrangements satisfactory to Owner shall have been
made. All performance testing need not be completed prior to the date of Substantial Completion.
SC-14.07.C.1 Payment Becomes Due: Add the following text to the end of the sentence: “according
to California Public Contract Code Section 7107.”
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
SC-15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause: Delete paragraphs 15.02.A and 15.02.B and insert
the following in lieu thereof and insert new paragraphs 15.02.G and 15.02.H immediately following
paragraph 15.02.F:
A. If Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work or any separable part thereof with
such diligence as will ensure the completion of the Work within the Contract Times, or any
extension thereof, or fails or refuses to complete such Work within such extension, or if Contractor
should be adjudged bankrupt, or if Contractor should make assignment for the benefit of
Contractor's creditors, or if Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or if a
2018 00800-15 150407

receiver should be appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency, or if Contractor or any
Subcontractor should violate any provision of the Contract, or if Contractor should persistently
refuse or should fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials to complete the
Work in the time specified, or if Contractor should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or
for materials or labor, or if Contractor should disregard laws, ordinances, or instructions given by
Owner, Engineer, or Owner's Operating Agent or disregard in any substantial way any provisions of
the Contract Documents; Owner may without prejudice to any other right or remedy, serve written
notice upon Contractor and Contractor's surety of Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. Such
notice will contain the reasons for Owner's intention to terminate the Contract and unless such
violations shall cease and satisfactory arrangements for the corrections thereof have been accepted
by Owner in writing within 10 days after the service of such notice, the Contract shall upon the
expiration of said 10 days cease and terminate. In the event of such termination, the Owner shall
immediately serve written notice upon the Surety and Contractor, and Contractor shall be liable for
all costs necessary to complete the Work.
B. The Surety shall, after receipt of notification from Owner of termination of the
Contract, take over and perform the Work, utilizing a contractor which qualified under the
prequalification criteria and which is acceptable to Engineer. The Surety shall, within 10 days after
receipt of the notice of termination, provide Owner with written notice of Surety's intent to take over
and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall commence the Work
within 10 days thereafter.
C. If the Surety does not reply to the notice of termination, or fails to perform the Work
in compliance with the Contract Documents, or provides the Owner with written notice that Surety
does not intend to take over and perform the work to completion, Owner may without prejudice on
the part of the Surety, take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion by any method
Owner may deem advisable for the account at the expense of Contractor, and the Surety shall be
liable to Owner for any excess cost or other damage occasioned Owner thereby. In such event
Owner may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing the Work such
materials, appliances, plant, and other property belonging to Contractor that may be on the work
sites and be necessary therefor. Contractor shall turn over to Owner's Operating Agent all materials
and equipment in Contractor's possession that is to be incorporated into the Project, and shall make
arrangements with Owner to turn over any materials or equipment in which Owner has made
payment or partial payment but is not in Owner's possession.
D. Upon completion of the Work, if the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds
the direct and indirect cost of completing the Work, including, but not limited to, all costs incurred by
Owner from professional services and attorneys' fees and all costs generated to insure or bond the
Work of substituted contractors or subcontractors used to complete the Work, such excess shall be
paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to
Owner within 30 days upon demand; on failure of Contractor to pay, the Surety shall promptly pay
the difference to Owner upon written notice of Contractor's failure of payment. Such difference or
any portion thereof not paid by the Contractor or the Surety within the 30 days following the date of
mailing of the demand for payment, shall earn interest at the rate of 10 percent per annum or the
maximum rate authorized by state law, whichever is lower.
SC-15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate: Delete paragraph 15.04 in its entirety.
ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION
No modifications.
2018 00800-16 150407

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
No modifications.
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00800-17 150407

DOCUMENT 00899
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
OWNER's Project Number:______________________________
Project: City of Arvin Wastewater Treatment Plant Parshall Flume Installation
CONTRACTOR:
Contract For Construction of:
Project or Specified Part Shall Include:
Contract Date:___________________, 2018
The Work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of
the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER, and the Project (or specified part of the Project,
as indicated above) is hereby accepted by the OWNER and declared to be substantially
completed on the above date.
1) Final completion of the Work shall be the date of such acceptance of the Work by the
OWNER.
2) Final completion shall mean full performance of the Contract requirements.
A list of all items remaining to be completed or corrected has been sent to the CONTRACTOR
in the OWNER's letter dated ____________________, ____. All such work shall be completed
or corrected to the satisfaction of the OWNER prior to the release of the CONTRACTOR's
retention and within 30 calendar days following the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion.
ENGINEER
(Signature)
(Date)
2018 00899-1 150407

The CONTRACTOR hereby accepts the above Notice of Substantial Completion and agrees to
complete and correct all of the items as outlined in the OWNER's letter to the CONTRACTOR
dated _________________________, _____.
CONTRACTOR
(Signature)
(Date)
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially completed and
will assume full possession of the Project or specified area of the Project at ______ (time), on
______ (date). The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract
Documents will be assumed by the OWNER after that date.
CITY OF Arvin
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00899-2 150407

SECTION 01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Identification and summary description of the Project, the Work,
location, OWNER-furnished products, activities by others, coordination, and early
occupancy by OWNER.
1.02 THE WORK [THE PROJECT]
A. The project consists of installation of new Parshall flume and installation of

ultrasonic device and indication, a new headworks diversion box, piping to establish
connection to existing system and abandonment of mag meter and associated
existing piping (extension of electrical and signal wires must be included).
B. Except as specifically noted otherwise, provide and pay for:

1. Insurance and bonds.
2. Labor, materials, and equipment.
3. Tools, equipment, and machinery required for construction.
4. Utilities required for construction.
5. Temporary facilities including sheeting and shoring.
6. Traffic control and dust control measures.
7. By-pass pumping facilities.
1.03 LOCATION OF PROJECT
A. The Work is located at 2401 El Camino Real, CA 93203.
1.04 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. OWNER will:
1. Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and samples
to CONTRACTOR.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site in accordance with construction
schedule.
3. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to CONTRACTOR.
4. Inspect deliveries jointly with CONTRACTOR.
5. Submit claims for transportation damage.
6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
7. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service, and inspections.
B. CONTRACTOR's responsibility for OWNER-furnished products:

1. Designating delivery date for each OWNER-furnished product.
2. Reviewing shop drawings, product data, and samples.
3. Submitting notification of discrepancies or anticipated problems.
2018 01110-1 150407

4. Receiving and unloading products at site.
5. Promptly inspecting products jointly with OWNER and recording shortages,
and damaged or defective items.
6. Handling products at site, including uncrating and storage.
7. Protecting products from damage.
8. Installing, including assembly, connections, adjustments, tests, and finish
products in accordance with Contract Documents.
9. Providing operating oils, lubricants, and incidental materials required for
complete installation.
10. Repairing or replacing items damaged after receipt until date of Substantial
Completion of the Work by OWNER.
C. When OWNER fails to deliver products in accordance with approved Construction

Schedule, adjustments will be made to Contract Times and Contract Price as
stipulated in General Conditions.
1.05 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS
A. OWNER, utilities, and others may perform activities within Project area while the
Work is in progress.
1. Schedule the Work with OWNER, utilities, and others to minimize mutual
interference.
B. Cooperate with others to minimize interference and delays.

1. When cooperation fails, submit recommendations and perform Work in
coordination with work of others.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from each subcontractor, and require each

subcontractor to maintain schedules and coordinate modifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01110-2 150407

SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work

affected by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between
construction operations and plant operations.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is
as binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section.
This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not
intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to
see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Section 01110 - Summary of Work.
b. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures.
c. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Wastewater Projects:
1. The Arvin Wastewater Treatment Plant is the City of Arvin’s only means of
treating domestic and industrial wastewater prior to discharging, Impairing
the operational capabilities of this treatment plant will result in serious
environmental damage and monetary fines.
2. Conduct work in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of
essential elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the
entire treatment plant below levels sufficient to treat the quality of raw
wastewater to the water quality limitations specified in the discharge permit.
3. The status of the treatment plant shall be defined as “operational” when it is
capable of treating the entire quantity of wastewater received to the water
quality limits specified in the discharge permit.
B. Work sequence and constraints:

1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Section as a
guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.
2. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting
completion of the Work, but are intended to describe critical events
necessary to minimize disruption of the existing facilities and to ensure
compliance with waste discharge permit requirements.
1.03 SHUTDOWN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS
A. Execute the Work while the existing facility is in operation as specified in Section
01352.
2018 01140-1 150407

B. Indicate required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing
operations on Progress Schedule. Shutdowns will be permitted to the extent that
existing operation of the plant will not be jeopardized and identified constraints
are satisfied.
1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH WASTE DISCHARGE REQUIREMENT PERMIT
A. The existing facility is operating under the terms of a Waste Discharge

Requirement Order No. R5-2008-0072 and General Waste Discharge
Requirements Order No. 2006-0003 for collection systems. This permit specifies
the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of effluent. A
copy of the existing permit is on file for review at the City of Arvin.
B. Perform work in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving
the finished water quality requirements established by regulations.
C. Bear the cost of penalties imposed on the OWNER for discharge violations
caused by actions of the CONTRACTOR.
1.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide safe, continuous access to process control equipment for City

personnel.
1.06 UTILITIES
A. Provide advance notice to and utilize services of Undergound Services Alert

(U.S.A.) for location and marking of underground utilities operated by utility
agencies other than the OWNER.
1.07 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from subcontractors and suppliers, and assume

responsibility for correctness.
C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress

Schedule to plan for and comply with sequencing constraints.
1.08 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and
promptly report discrepancies and defects.
1.09 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Outline of a Possible Work Sequence for the Design ENGINEER: This possible
sequence is included for informational purposes only:
1. By-Pass pumping and piping will be required while building the headworks
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic distribution boxes and while excavating and
installing the inlet piping into the existing Oxidation Ditch. Contractor to
supply the pumping and piping to direct all the flows to the Orbil Ditch. The
estimated required for the pumping is 2 weeks. The flows vary from a low
of 0.3 million gallons per day (mgd) up to a peak of 2.0 mgd. Contractor is
responsible for providing by-pass pumping and piping during the entire time
2018 01140-2 150407

of the headworks distribution boxes installation and the Ditch inlet piping
penetration.
1.10 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
A. As specified in Section 01500.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01140-3 150407

SECTION 01201
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Procedures for submitting applications for payment and means
used as a basis for Progress Payments, including:
1. Cost Summaries.
2. Payment for Mobilization.
3. Start-Up.
4. Demobilization.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.03 BASIS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Base Application for Payment on the breakdown of costs for each scheduled activity
in the Progress Schedule and the Percentage of Completion for each activity.
Generate Application for Payment by downloading cost data from the Progress
Schedule to a spreadsheet type format. Identify each activity on the Progress
Schedule that has a cost associated with it, the cost of each activity, the estimated
Percent Complete for each activity, and the Value of Work Completed for both the
payment period and job to date.
1.04 PAYMENT REQUESTS
A. Prepare progress payment requests on a monthly basis. Base requests on the

breakdowns of costs for each scheduled activity and the percentage of completion
for each activity.
B. Indicate total dollar amount of work planned for every month of the project. Equate
sum of monthly amounts to Lump Sum Contract Price.
C. Generate Progress Payment request forms by downloading cost data from the
schedule information to a spreadsheet type format. Identify each activity on the
Progress Schedule that has a cost associated with it, the cost for each activity, the
estimated percent complete for each activity, and the value of work completed for
both the payment period and job to date.
D. Prepare summary of cost information for each Major Item of Work listed in the
Schedule of Values. Identify the value of work completed for both the payment
period and job to date.
E. Submit progress payment requests at progress meetings.
2018 01201-1 150407

1.05 COST SUMMARIES
A. Prepare Summary of Cost Information for each Major Item of Work listed in the
Schedule of Values. Identify the Value of Work Completed for both the payment
B. Cash flow summary: Prepare cash flow summary, indicating total dollar amount of
work planned for each month of the project. Equate sum of monthly amounts to
Lump Sum contract price.
1.06 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION
A. Limit amounts included under mobilization to the following items:

1. Moving on the site any equipment required for first month operations.
2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
3. Establishing fire protection plan and safety program.
4. Developing construction water supply.
5. Providing field office trailers for the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER,
complete with all specified furnishings and utility services including telephones.
6. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified.
7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
8. Obtaining all required permits, licenses, and fees.
9. Developing construction schedule.
10. Submit preliminary schedule of values of the Work.
11. Post all OSHA, (state agency), Department of Labor, and all other required
notices.
12. Limits of construction and clearing have been located and flagged.
13. Have CONTRACTOR’s project manager and/or general superintendent on job
site full-time.
14. The ENGINEER is satisfied that responsive and responsible progress on the
Contract Work is under way.
B. Furnish data and documentation to substantiate the amounts claimed under

mobilization.
C. Limit price for mobilization to no more than 5 percent of Contract Price.
D. No payment for mobilization, or any part thereof, will be recommended until all
mobilization items listed above have been completed.
1.07 PAYMENT FOR START-UP AND DEMOBILIZATION
A. Total Price for start-up and demobilization shall not be less than 3 percent of
Contract Price.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2018 01201-2 150407

Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01201-3 150407

SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Listing of allowance items.

1. Related responsibilities of ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, and procedures.
C. Related Documents:
1. Document 00410 - Bid Form.
1.02 ALLOWANCE AMOUNTS
Not Used.
1.03 COSTS INCLUDED AND EXCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES
A. Costs included in Allowances for Furnishing Products Only:

1. Net cost of product.
2. Delivery and unloading at site.
3. Applicable taxes.
B. Costs included in Contract Price, but not included in Allowances for Furnishing
Products Only:
1. Handling at site, including uncrating and storage.
2. Protection from elements, theft, and damage.
3. Labor, installation, testing, and finishing.
4. Other expenses required to complete installation.
5. Overhead and profit.
C. Costs included in Allowances for Furnishing and Installing products:

1. Net cost of product.
2. Delivery and unloading at site.
3. Applicable taxes.
4. Handling at site, including uncrating and storage.
5. Protection from elements and from damage.
6. Labor, installation, testing, and finishing.
7. Other expenses required to complete installation.
1.04 DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR IN PROVIDING PRODUCTS BY ALLOWANCE
A. Advise ENGINEER at least 60 days in advance of purchase date necessary to avoid

impacts to Progress Schedule.
B. Obtain Proposals from Suppliers, including:

1. Quantity.
2018 01210-1 150407

2. Unit Cost.
3. Total amount of purchase.
4. Taxes and delivery charges.
C. On notification of selection, enter into purchase agreement with designated supplier.
D. Arrange for delivery and unloading.
E. Install products in accordance with Contract Documents.
1.05 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS
A. When actual cost is more or less than amount of allowance, Contract Price will be
adjusted by Change Order.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01210-2 150407

SECTION 01292
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for preparation, format, and submittal of Schedule

of Values.
1.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare Schedule of Values identifying costs of Major Items of Work and other costs
shown in sample included at end of this Section.
B. Divide the Work into following Major Items of Work:

1. Mobilization.
2. Pipe Work.
3. Distribution Boxes in Headworks.
4. ByPass Pumping.
5. Flume Structure (Breakdown into logical components).
6. Piping penetration at Oxidation Ditch.
7. Earthwork.
8. Electrical.
9. Demobilization.
10. Bonds.
11. Asphalt Paving.
C. Assign prices to Major Items of Work which aggregate the Contract Price. Base
prices on costs associated with scheduled activities based on the Project Schedule
for each Major Item of Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit preliminary schedule of values in accordance with Document 00700, General

Conditions, Paragraph 2.05 B.3.
B. Submit corrected schedule of values within 10 days upon receipt of reviewed

Schedule of Values, but no later than 10 days prior to anticipated submittal of first
Application for Payment, in accordance with Document 00700, General Conditions,
Paragraph 2.07.
C. Upon request, support prices with data which will substantiate their correctness.
D. If activities are added or removed from the Progress Schedule revise the Schedule
of Values and resubmit.
1.04 SAMPLE SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Following is an acceptable form for Schedule of Values.
2018 01292-1 150407

SCHEDULE OF VALUES
No. Description of Item Lump Sum Cost

1. Mobilization
2. Pipework
3. Distribution Boxes
4. Flume Stucture (excavation, slab, walls, flume, grating,
guardrail, ultrasonic indicator and readout)
5. By-pass pumping
6. Oxidation Ditch Penetration
7. Earthwork
8. Electrical
9. Demobilization
10. Bonds
11. Asphalt Paving
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01292-2 150407

SECTION 01294
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for

Payment.
1.02 FORMAT
A. Develop satisfactory spreadsheet-type form generated by downloading cost data

from the Progress Schedule.
B. Fill in information required on form.
C. When Change Orders are executed, add Change Orders at end of listing of
scheduled activities:
1. Identify change order by number and description.
2. Provide cost of change order in appropriate column.
D. After completing, submit Application for Payment.
E. ENGINEER will review application for accuracy. When accurate, ENGINEER will
transmit application to OWNER for processing of payment.
F. Execute application with signature of responsible officer of CONTRACTOR.
1.03 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. Provide Substantiating Data with cover letter identifying:

1. Project.
2. Application number and date.
3. Detailed list of enclosures.
4. For stored products with item number and identification on application,
description of specific material, and proof of insurance coverage for offsite
stored products.
5. Submit “certified” payroll.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit [5] copies of Application for Payment and Substantiating Data with cover
letter.
1.05 PAYMENT REQUESTS
A. Prepare progress payment requests on a monthly basis. Base requests on the

breakdowns of costs for each scheduled activity and the percentage of completion
for each activity.
2018 01294 -1 150407

B. Indicate total dollar amount of work planned for every month of the project. Equate
sum of monthly amounts to Lump Sum Contract Price.
C. Generate Progress Payment request forms by downloading cost data from the
schedule information to a spreadsheet type format. Identify each activity on the
Progress Schedule that has a cost associated with it, the cost for each activity, the
estimated percent complete for each activity, and the value of work completed for
both the payment period and job to date.
D. Prepare summary of cost information for each Major Item of Work listed in the
Schedule of Values. Identify the value of work completed for both the payment
E. Submit progress payment requests at progress meetings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01294 -2 150407

SECTION 01312
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements for conducting conferences and meetings for the
purposes of addressing issues related to the Work, reviewing and coordinating
progress of the Work and other matters of common interest, and includes the
following:
1. Qualifications of Meeting Participants.
2. Preconstruction Conference.
3. Progress Meetings.
4. Pre-Installation Meetings.
5. Post Construction Meeting.
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This
list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to
excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the
completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF MEETING PARTICIPANTS
A. Representatives of entities participating in meetings shall be qualified and

authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.
1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable,

ENGINEER will arrange preconstruction conference in convenient place for most
persons invited, in accordance with the General Conditions.
B. Attending Preconstruction Conference: CONTRACTOR's superintendent, OWNER,

ENGINEER, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in
performance of the Work, and others necessary to agenda.
C. ENGINEER will preside at conference.
D. Purpose of conference: To establish working understanding between parties and to

discuss Construction Schedule, shop drawing and other submittals, cost breakdown
of major lump sum items, processing of submittals and applications for payment,
and other subjects pertinent to execution of the Work.
2018 01312-1 150407

E. Agenda will include:
1. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
2. Distribution and discussion of list of major subcontractors and suppliers.
3. Proposed progress schedules and critical construction sequencing.
4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5. Project coordination.
6. Designation of responsible personnel.
7. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
b. Proposal requests.
c. Submittals.
d. Change Orders.
e. Applications for Payment.
f. Record Documents.
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, construction, and storage areas.
b. OWNER's requirements.
9. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.
10. Temporary utilities.
11. Safety and first aid procedures.
12. Security procedures.
13. Housekeeping procedures.
F. ENGINEER will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within
7 days of meeting to participants and interested parties.
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Conduct progress meetings at least once every week in CONTRACTOR's field

office, or other mutually agreed upon place.
B. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda of each meeting
at least 4 days before meeting.
C. Require attendance of CONTRACTOR's superintendent and subcontractors who

are or are proximate to be actively involved in the Work, or who are necessary to
agenda.
D. Invite OWNER, ENGINEER, utility companies when the Work affects their interests,
and others necessary to agenda.
E. Complete and bring Application for Payment and Progress Schedule to progress
meeting.
F. Prepare and distribute agenda.
G. Preside at meetings.
H. Purpose of progress meetings: To expedite work of subcontractors or other

organizations that are not meeting scheduled progress, resolve conflicts, and
coordinate and expedite execution of the Work.
2018 01312-2 150407

I. Review progress of the Work, Progress Schedule, narrative report, Application for
Payment, record documents, and additional items of current interest that are
pertinent to execution of the Work.
J. Verify:
1. Actual start and finish dates of completed activities since last progress
meeting.
2. Durations and progress of activities not completed.
3. Reason, time, and cost data for Change Order Work that will be incorporated
into Progress Schedule and application for payment.
4. Percentage completion of items on Application for Payment.
5. Reasons for required revisions to Progress Schedule and their effect on
Contract Time and Contract Price.
K. Discuss potential problems, which may impede scheduled progress and corrective
measures.
L. ENGINEER will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within
7 days of meeting to participants and interested parties.
1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. General: Meet with manufacturers and installers of major units of construction,

which require coordination between subcontractors. Major units of construction
which require pre-installation meetings include:
B. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda of each meeting
at least 4 days before meeting.
C. Schedule meeting at least 7 days in advance of installation.
D. Conduct meetings in CONTRACTOR's field office or other mutually agreed upon

place.
E. Require attendance of Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of

major units of constructions, and affected subcontractors.
F. Invite OWNER and ENGINEER.
G. Preside at meetings.
H. Record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within 3 days of

meeting to participants and interested parties.
1.06 POST CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Meet with and inspect the Work 11 months after date of Substantial Completion with
OWNER and ENGINEER.
B. Arrange meeting at least 7 days before meeting.
C. Meet in OWNER’s office or other mutually agreed upon place.
2018 01312-3 150407

D. Inspect the Work and draft list of items to be completed or corrected.
E. Review service and maintenance contracts, and take appropriate corrective action
when necessary.
F. Complete or correct defective work and extend correction period accordingly.
G. Require attendance of Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of

major units of constructions, and affected subcontractors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01312-4 150407

SECTION 01324A
PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Preparation, submittal, and maintenance of computerized

progress schedule and reports, contract time adjustments, and payment requests,
including the following:
1. Preliminary Schedule.
2. Baseline Schedule.
3. Summary Schedule.
4. Weekly Schedule.
5. Schedule Updates.
6. Schedule Revisions.
7. Time Impact Analyses.
8. Final Schedule Submittal.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01292 - Schedule of Values.
2. Section 01294 - Applications for Payment.
3. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
4. Section 01770 - Close Out Procedures.
1.02 RESPONSIBLE PERSON
A. Designate, in writing and within five calendar days after Notice of Award, person
responsible for preparation, maintenance, updating and revision of all schedules.
B. Qualifications of Responsible Person:

1. Authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR.
2. Five years verifiable experience in preparation of complex construction
schedules for projects of similar value, size and complexity.
3. Knowledge of CPM scheduling utilizing Primavera Project Planner software.
C. References: Submit written reference of three project OWNERS who have personal
experience with this scheduler on previous projects. Identify name, address,
telephone number, project name and cost.
D. Scheduler shall be dedicated full time to this project, located on-site. All scheduling
software and hardware shall be located on-site. Scheduler shall attend all project
meetings called for under Section 01312, Project Meetings.
E. ENGINEER reserves the right to disapprove scheduler when submitted by

CONTRACTOR if not qualified. ENGINEER reserves the right to remove scheduler
from the project if found to be incompetent.
2018 01324A-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\01324A.doc
1.03 SCHEDULING FORMAT AND SOFTWARE
A. Schedule Format: Utilize critical path method (CPM) format.
B. Prepare computerized schedule utilizing Primavera Project Planner, most current

version. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one licensed copy of the scheduling
software to the ENGINEER, registered in the ENGINEER’s name, for the duration of
the project.
1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING MEETING
A. ENGINEER will conduct Preconstruction Scheduling Meeting with CONTRACTOR’s

Project Manager, General Superintendent and scheduler within 7 calendar days
after Notice To Proceed. This meeting is separate from the Preconstruction
Conference Meeting and is intended to cover schedule issues exclusively.
B. At the meeting, scheduling requirements shall be reviewed with CONTRACTOR.

These include schedule preparation, reporting requirements, manpower and
equipment loading, updates, revisions, and schedule delay analysis.
CONTRACTOR shall present their schedule methodology, planned sequence of
operations, resource loading methodology and present their proposed activity
coding structure.
C. Coding Structure: CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed coding structure,

identifying the code fields and the associated code values it intends to use in the
project schedule. The coding structure shall, at a minimum, include code fields for
Project Segment or Phase, Area of Work, Type of Work,
Submittal/Procurement/Construction and Responsibility/ Subcontractor. Refer to
paragraph 1.09H for listing of activity categories to be included in the schedule.
1.05 PREPARATION
A. Preparation and submittal of Progress Schedule represents CONTRACTOR's

intention to execute the Work within specified time and constraints. Failure to
conform to requirement may result in termination for cause under Article 15.02,
SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION, of the General Conditions.
B. CONTRACTOR's bid covers all costs associated with the execution of the Work in
accordance with the Progress Schedule.
C. During preparation of the preliminary Progress Schedule, ENGINEER will facilitate

CONTRACTOR's efforts by being available to answer questions regarding
sequencing issues, scheduling constraints, interface points, and dependency
relationships.
D. Prepare schedule utilizing Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM).
E. Prepare schedule utilizing activity durations in terms of working days. Do not exceed
15 working day duration on activities except concrete curing, submittal review and
equipment fabrication and deliveries. Where duration of continuous work exceeds
15 working days, subdivide activities by location, stationing, or other sub-element of
the Work. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate holidays to be observed with the
OWNER and incorporate them into the schedule as non-working days.
2018 01324A-2 150407

F. Failure to include an activity required for execution of the Work does not excuse
CONTRACTOR from completing the Work and portions thereof within specified
times and at price specified in Agreement. Failure of CONTRACTOR to include
required schedule constraints, sequences or milestones in schedule shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of obligation to conform to requirements of Contract. Acceptance of
schedule shall not waive Contract requirements. In event of conflict between
accepted schedule and Contract requirements, terms of Contract shall govern at all
times, unless requirements are waived in writing by the OWNER.
G. Reference schedule to working days with beginning of Contract Time as Day "1."
H. Baseline Schedule and Project Completion: Should CONTRACTOR submit a

Baseline Schedule showing project completion more than 20 working days prior to
Contract completion date, OWNER may issue Change Order, at no cost to
OWNER, revising time of performance of Work and Contract completion date to
match CONTRACTOR’s schedule completion date. Contract milestone dates, if any,
shall be adjusted accordingly.
I. Contract float is for the mutual benefit of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR.
Changes to the project that can be accomplished within this available period of float
may be made by OWNER without extending the Contract time, by utilizing float. No
time extensions shall be granted nor delay damages owed until Work extends
beyond currently accepted Contract completion date. Likewise, CONTRACTOR
may utilize float to offset delays other than delays caused by OWNER. Mutual use
of float shall continue until all available float shown by schedule has been utilized by
either OWNER or CONTRACTOR, or both. At that time, extensions of the Contract
time will be granted by OWNER for valid OWNER-caused or third party-caused
delays which affect the planned completion date and which have been properly
documented and demonstrated by CONTRACTOR.
J. Resource Loading and Leveling: CONTRACTOR shall input manpower and

equipment data on each schedule activity. Manpower data shall consist of the
manhours estimated to perform each task, categorized by trade. Equipment data
shall consist of equipment hours estimated to perform each task, categorized by
piece of equipment. CONTRACTOR shall optimize and level manpower and
equipment requirements. Resource leveling shall reflect a reasonable plan for
accomplishing Work. Individual activities may be sequenced within limits of
available float. Critical or near critical paths resulting from use of manpower or
equipment restraints shall be kept to a minimum. Near critical path identified as path
with 15 or less working days of float.
K. Schedule Logic: Schedule shall be assembled to show order in which

CONTRACTOR proposes to carry out Work, indicate restrictions of access,
availability of Work areas, and availability and use of manpower, materials and
equipment. The following criteria shall form basis for assembly of schedule logic.
1. Which activities must be completed before subsequent activities can be
started?
2. Which activities can be performed concurrently?
3. Which activities must be started immediately following completed activities?
4. What major facility, equipment or manpower restrictions are required for
sequencing these activities?
2018 01324A-3 150407

L. Non-sequestering of Float: Pursuant to float sharing requirements of Contract, use
of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special
lead or lag logic restraints, extended activity durations or imposed dates shall be
cause for rejection of any schedule submittal.
M. Major Subcontractor, Parallel Prime Contractor Sign Off: CONTRACTOR shall

provide written confirmation of concurrence from all major subcontractors and
independent prime CONTRACTORS on site with all schedule submittals. Term
“major subcontractor” as used in this Section means any subcontractor, at any tier,
with a subcontract worth 5 percent or more of the total cost of the Work.
N. Imposed Dates, Hidden Logic Prohibited: CONTRACTOR shall not use imposed
dates or hidden logic in preparation of schedule.
O. Interim Milestone Dates, Operational Constraints: In event there are interim

milestone dates and/or operational constraints set forth in Contract, CONTRACTOR
shall show them on schedule as specified in Contract. CONTRACTOR shall not use
Zero Total Float constraint or Mandatory Finish Date on such Contract
requirements.Schedule Windows for Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed
Equipment or Materials: Immediately after Award of Contract, CONTRACTOR shall
obtain from ENGINEER anticipated delivery dates of OWNER furnished equipment
or materials. These dates shall be shown on schedule in same manner indicated by
ENGINEER.
P. Cost Loading: All schedules shall be cost loaded. Only on-site construction activities
shall be cost loaded. The sum total of all cost loaded activities shall equal the
current value of the Contract, including change orders, at all times. Upon
acceptance by OWNER, the Baseline Schedule shall also be the Schedule of
Values required under Section 01292. The monthly Schedule Updates shall be the
monthly Payment Application required under Section 01294. Submittal and
acceptance of these schedules shall be a condition precedent to the making of any
payments under this Contract.
1.06 SUBMITTAL OF PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit preliminary and baseline schedule in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract as modified by this Section 01324.
B. Submit, on a monthly basis, updated schedules as specified. Submit final schedule

update as specified.
C. Submit revised schedules and time impact analyses as specified.
D. Submit schedules in the media and number of copies as follows.

1. Three (3) sets of the CPM network and/or barchart (as specified by the
OWNER) on D-size sheets. Color-coding to be specified by the OWNER.
2. Three (3) sets of Tabular reports listing all activities sorted numerically
identifying duration, early start, late start, early finish, late finish, total float, and
all predecessor/successor information.
3. Two (2) sets of CD’s containing the computerized CPM Schedule data.
4. Three (3) prints of the Summary Schedule.
2018 01324A-4 150407

1.07 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Preliminary Schedule within 10 calendar days after

Notice To Proceed. Preliminary Schedule shall contain detailed plan of operations
for first 90 calendar days of Work after receipt of Notice to Proceed.
B. ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall meet within seven calendar days after receipt
of Preliminary Schedule to review and make necessary adjustments.
CONTRACTOR shall submit revised preliminary schedule within five calendar days
after meeting.
C. CONTRACTOR shall submit schedule of manpower and costs for all activities on
revised Preliminary Schedule with revised Preliminary Schedule. Schedule of
manpower and costs shall be realistic and level so as not to have unusual
manpower requirements.
D. Schedule of costs shall be Schedule of Values required under Section 01292 for
first 90 calendar days of Work. Submittal and acceptance of Preliminary Schedule is
condition precedent to making of progress payments under Section 01294 and
payments for mobilization costs otherwise provided for in the Contract. No pay item
Work shall commence until Preliminary Schedule and schedule of costs have been
accepted by OWNER.
E. Accepted Preliminary Schedule shall be incorporated unchanged, as first ninety

calendar days of activity in CONTRACTOR’s Baseline Schedule.
F. Preliminary Schedule shall be updated monthly during first 90 calendar days after
Notice to Proceed. Updated Preliminary Schedule shall be the payment application
required under Section 01294.
1.08 BASELINE SCHEDULE
A. No more than 30 calendar days after Notice of Award, CONTRACTOR shall submit
the Baseline Schedule for all Work of the project. Baseline Schedule shall show
sequence and interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of
all Work, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed and concluding with date of final
completion of Contract.
B. Baseline Schedule shall conform to requirements of the following Article, "Network

Details and Graphical Output.”
C. Acceptance of the Baseline Schedule by the OWNER is a condition precedent to

making payments under Section 01294 after the first 90 calendar days after Notice
to Proceed.
1.09 NETWORK DETAILS AND GRAPHICAL OUTPUT
A. Produce a clear, legible, and accurate calendar based, time scaled, graphical
network diagram. Group activities related to the same physical areas of the Work.
Produce the network diagram based upon the early start of all activities.
B. Include for each activity, the description, activity number, estimated duration in
working days, total float and all activity relationship lines.
2018 01324A-5 150407

C. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence in which Work is
planned to be accomplished. Incorporate the basic concept of the precedence
diagram network method to show how the start of one activity is dependent upon
the start or completion of preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of
following activities.
D. Indicate the critical path for the project.
E. Delineate the specified contract duration and identify the planned completion of the
Work as a milestone. The time period between the planned and Contract completion
dates, if any, shall be shown on the schedule as an activity identified as project float
unless a Change Order is issued pursuant to paragraph 1.05.H.
F. Identify system shutdown dates, system tie-in dates, specified interim completion or
milestone dates and contract completion date as milestones.
G. Include, in addition to Construction Activities:

1. Submission dates and review periods for major equipment submittals, shoring
submittals, and indicator pile program.
a. Shoring Reviews: Allow a four-week review period for each shoring
submittal.
b. Pile Indicator Program: Allow a three-week review period for analysis of
program.
2. Any activity by the OWNER or the ENGINEER that may affect progress or
required completion dates.
3. Equipment and long-lead material deliveries over eights weeks.
4. Approvals required by regulatory agencies or other third parties.
H. Produce network diagram on 22 inch by 34 inch sheets with grid coordinate system
on the border of all sheets utilizing alpha and numeric designations.
I. Identify the Execution of the following, omitting items not applicable to the Work:
1. Mobilization.
2. All required submittals and submittal review times showing 30 calendar day
duration for such activities and equal amount of time for re-submittal reviews.
3. Equipment and materials procurement/fabrication/delivery.
4. Excavation.
5. Shoring design and submission of detailed shoring submittals. Identify
submission as a milestone.
6. Shoring review, shoring materials procurement, shoring installation and
shoring removal.
7. Piles.
8. Backfill and compaction.
9. Dewatering.
10. Grading, subbase, base, paving, and curb and gutters.
11. Fencing and landscaping.
12. Concrete, including installation of forms and reinforcement, placement of
concrete, curing, stripping, finishing and patching.
13. Tests for leakage of concrete structures intended to hold water.
14. Masonry.
15. Metal fastenings, framing, structures, and fabrications.
2018 01324A-6 150407

16. Wood structures, finish carpentry, architectural woodwork, and plastic
fabrications.
17. Waterproofing and dampproofing, insulation, roofing and flashing, and
sealants.
18. Doors and windows, including hardware and glazing.
19. Finishes including coating and painting, flooring, ceiling, and wall covering.
20. Building specialties including furnishings, laboratory equipment, and toilet and
bath accessories.
21. Process equipment, including identification of ordering lead time, factory
testing and installation.
22. Pumps and drives, including identification of ordering lead time, factory testing
and installation.
23. Conveying equipment including hoists and cranes, conveyor systems, and
materials handling equipment, including identification of ordering lead time and
installation.
24. Other mechanical equipment including fans and heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning equipment.
25. Trenching, pipe laying, and trench backfill and compaction.
26. Piping, fittings and appurtenances, including identification of ordering and
fabrication lead time, layout, installation and testing.
27. Valves, gates and operators, including identification of order lead time,
installation and testing.
28. Plumbing specialties.
29. Electric transmission, service, and distribution equipment, including
identification of ordering lead time, and factory testing.
30. Other electrical work including lighting, heating and cooling, and special
systems, including identification of ordering lead time.
31. Instrumentation and controls, including identification of ordering lead time.
32. Preliminary testing of equipment, instrumentation and controls.
33. Final testing, including preparation time.
34. Seven-day operational test.
35. Substantial Completion: Substantial completion activity shall meet all
requirements set forth in Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions.
36. Punch list work.
37. Operation and maintenance training.
38. Demobilization.
1.10 SUMMARY SCHEDULE
A. Provide Summary Schedule which consolidates groups of activities associated with

Major Items of Work shown on Baseline Schedule. Summary Schedule is intended
to give an overall indication of the project schedule without a large amount of detail.
B. Summary Schedule shall be updated and submitted monthly and after each
Schedule Update or Schedule Revision.
1.11 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWING AND SAMPLE SUBMITTALS
A. After Preliminary Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER,

CONTRACTOR shall submit a list of all shop drawings and sample submittals
anticipated in first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed using early start dates.
2018 01324A-7 150407

B. Submittal of this preliminary list shall be a condition precedent to making of progress
payments during the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
C. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER,

CONTRACTOR shall print out and submit list of all shop drawings and sample
submittals for all Work using early start dates. This listing will contain all submittals
required for the entire Work including those listed above.
D. Submittal of final list shall be a condition precedent to making of progress payments

after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
E. These schedules shall conform to the requirements of the General Conditions,

Article 2.05.
1.12 MANPOWER SCHEDULES
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER,

CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule histogram depicting total craft manpower
and craft manpower for CONTRACTOR’s own labor forces and those of each
subcontractor. This manpower schedule shall be submitted electronically on a
computer disk in Excel format, with one paper copy.
B. Submittal of this manpower data shall be a condition precedent to making of

progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
1.13 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by OWNER,

CONTRACTOR shall submit a tabular report listing each major piece of construction
equipment to be used in performing the Work. This report will list major equipment
for CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor. This tabular report of equipment shall
be submitted electronically on a computer disk in Excel format with one paper copy.
B. Submittal of this equipment data shall be a condition precedent to making of

progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.
1.14 WEATHER DAY ALLOWANCE
A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled

"Weather Days Allowance." Insert this activity at the end of the schedule.
B. Duration of Weather Days Allowance is specified in Conditions of the Contract.
C. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect weather day occurrences when weather
days are experienced and accepted by ENGINEER. Identify this activity as a
weather delay.
D. Reduce duration of Weather Days Allowance activity as weather delays are

experienced and inserted into the Schedule. Remaining weather days in Weather
Day Allowance at completion of project is considered float.
2018 01324A-8 150407

1.15 ALLOWANCE FOR OWNER-CAUSED DELAY
A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled

"Allowance for OWNER-Caused Delay.” Insert this activity at the end of the
schedule, following the Project Completion Milestone.
B. Duration of this activity is specified in Bid Form. The duration of this OWNER-
Caused Delay Allowance is in addition to the contractual time frame.
C. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect OWNER-caused delay occurrences when

OWNER-caused delay days are experienced and accepted by ENGINEER. Identify
this activity as an OWNER-caused delay.
D. Reduce duration of OWNER-Caused Delay Allowance activity as OWNER-caused

delays are experienced and inserted into the schedule. Remaining days in OWNER-
Caused Delay Allowance at completion of project is considered float.
1.16 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES
A. ENGINEER will review Baseline Schedules, Schedule Updates, Schedule Revisions

and Time Impact Analyses to ascertain compliance with specified project
constraints, compliance with milestone dates, reasonableness of durations and
sequence, accurate inter-relationships and completeness.
B. ENGINEER and OWNER will issue written comments following completion of review
of Baseline Schedule within 21 calendar days after receipt. Written comments on
review of Schedule Updates and Schedule Revisions and Time Impact Analyses will
be returned to CONTRACTOR within 14 calendar days after receipt by ENGINEER.
C. Revise and resubmit schedule in accordance with ENGINEER’s comments within

7 calendar days after receipt of such comments, or request joint meeting to resolve
objections. If a meeting is requested the CONTRACTOR and all major
subcontractors shall participate in the meeting with ENGINEER. Revise and
resubmit schedule within seven calendar days after meeting.
D. When schedule reflects OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's agreement of project

approach and sequence, schedule will be accepted by OWNER. Use accepted
schedule for planning, organizing and directing the work and for reporting progress.
Provide all items specified in Article, "Submittal of Project Schedules.”
1.17 UPDATING THE SCHEDULE
A. Update the schedule prior to monthly progress meeting. Submit a written report of
significant changes in progress meeting. A detailed written list of all changes to the
previous schedule submittal contained in the Schedule Update shall be submitted at
the monthly progress meeting.
B. Submit updated schedule and materials specified under Article "Submittal of

Progress Schedules,” five calendar days before the progress meeting.
C. Since monthly Schedule Update is the application for progress payment required
under Section 01294, Applications for Payment, submittal and acceptance of the
2018 01324A-9 150407

monthly Schedule Update is a condition precedent to the making of any progress
payments.
D. Prepare update using most recent accepted version of schedule. Include:

1. Actual start dates of activities that have been started.
2. Actual finish dates of activities that have been completed.
3. Percentage of completion of activities that have been started but not finished.
4. Actual dates on which milestones were achieved.
5. Activities shall not be updated by inputting percent complete figures only
without also inputting actual dates.
6. Retained logic shall be used in preparing Schedule Updates.
7. When necessary, input remaining durations for activities whose finish dates
cannot be calculated accurately with a percent complete figure only.
8. Revisions to the schedule may be included that have been previously
approved in under the following Article, "Revisions to Schedule.”
E. Submit written narrative report in conjunction with each Schedule Update. Describe:
1. Activities added to or deleted from schedule. Identify added activities in
manner distinctly different from original activity designations.
2. Changes in sequence or estimated duration of activities.
3. Current or anticipated problems and delays affecting progress, impact of these
problems and delays and measures taken to mitigate impact.
4. Assumptions made and activities affected by incorporating change order work
into the schedule.
5. Cost and other resource loading requirements shall be adhered to concerning
activities added to or deleted from the schedule.
F. Identify overall progress of each Major Item of Work in the Summary Schedule.
G. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion earlier than current
Contract completion date CONTRACTOR shall show early completion time as
schedule activity, identified as “Project Float.”
H. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion later than current
Contract completion date CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Schedule
Revision in accordance with the following Article, "Revisions to Schedule.”
1.18 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULE
A. Submit revised schedule within five days:

1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an
overrun of the contract time or milestone dates by 20 working days or
5 percent of the remaining duration, whichever is less.
2. When delays in submittals, deliveries, or work stoppages are encountered
making necessary the replanning or rescheduling of activities.
3. When the schedule does not represent the actual progress of activities.
4. When any change to the sequence of activities, the completion date for major
portions of the work, or when changes occur which affect the critical path.
5. When Contract modification necessitates schedule revision, submit schedule
analysis of change order work with cost proposal.
B. Submit revised schedule and materials as specified under Article "Submittals of

Progress Schedules."
2018 01324A-10 150407

C. Make revisions on most recently accepted version of schedule.
D. Schedule Revisions shall not be prepared or submitted with Schedule Updates.

They shall be separate submittals and shall be noted as Schedule Revisions.
E. Only upon acceptance of a revision by the OWNER shall it be reflected in the next
monthly Schedule Update.
F. Schedule Revisions submitted for the purpose of mitigating a CONTRACTOR-

caused project delay (Recovery Schedule) shall not be implemented until the
OWNER reviews and accepts the Schedule Revision.
1.19 PAYMENT REQUESTS AND CASH FLOW
A. After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by the OWNER, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit on a monthly basis, a tabular report showing
anticipated earnings each month of the contract period. This tabulation will be based
on the summation of the cost-loaded activities each month. CONTRACTOR shall
submit an updated payment schedule each month showing actual earned amounts
and anticipated remaining earnings.
B. Utilize cost loaded monthly Schedule Updates as the applications for payment
specified in Section 01294, Applications for Payment. Payment application shall be
a listing in Excel format of all schedule activities showing cost and percentage
completion during the current month for which payment is sought. Submittal of the
monthly Schedule Update shall be a condition precedent to the issuance of any
payment under this Contract.
1.20 WEEKLY SCHEDULE
A. Submit to ENGINEER, on the last working day of every week, a progress schedule
showing the activities completed during the previous week and the
CONTRACTOR's schedule of activities for the following two weeks.
B. The Weekly Schedule may be a CPM schedule or a bar chart but shall utilize the
logic and conform to the status of the current progress schedule. In the event that
the Weekly Schedule no longer conforms to the current schedule CONTRACTOR
may be required to revise the schedule in accordance with Article, "Revisions to
Schedule."
C. The activity designations used in the Weekly Schedule shall be consistent with
those used in the Baseline Schedule and the monthly Schedule Updates.
D. The format of the Weekly Schedule shall be as agreed upon between the
CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER.
1.21 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Requirements for Schedule of Values are specified in Section 01292, Schedule of

Values and Paragraph 1.05.Q, Cost Loading.
2018 01324A-11 150407

B. Submit, in conjunction with the Progress Schedule, a Schedule of Values identifying
costs of all on-site construction activities as generated by the cost loaded schedule.
Equate the aggregate of these costs to the Lump Sum Contract Price.
1.22 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES
A. Contract time will be adjusted only for causes specified in Contract Documents.
Adjustments in the Contract time shall be governed by the principles of this Article
and shall be made in accordance with the provisions of ARTICLE 12, "CHANGE OF
CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES,” of the General Conditions.
1. Non-excusable Delay: Actions or inactions of the CONTRACTOR, or events
for which the CONTRACTOR has assumed contractual responsibility
(including actions or inactions of subcontractors, suppliers or materialmen at
any tier) which would independently delay the completion of the Work beyond
the current Contract completion date shall be designated as non-excusable
delay. The CONTRACTOR shall not receive any time extension for such
delays.
2. Excusable Delay: Events which are unforeseeable, outside the control of, and
without the fault or negligence of either the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR (or
any party for whom either is responsible), which would independently delay the
completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date shall be
designated as excusable delay. The CONTRACTOR is entitled to a time
extension only and shall not receive any other damages.
3. Compensable Delay: Actions or inactions of the OWNER, or events for which
the OWNER has assumed contractual responsibility, which would
independently delay the completion of the Work beyond the current Contract
completion date shall be designated as compensable delay. The
CONTRACTOR is entitled to a time extension and delay damages.
4. Concurrent Delay: Concurrent delay is any combination of the above three
types of delay occurring on the same calendar date(s), except in cases where
the combination consists of two or more instances of the same type of delay
occurring on the same calendar date(s). When one cause of delay is OWNER-
caused or caused by an event which is beyond the control and without the
fault or negligence of either the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR and the other
CONTRACTOR-caused, the CONTRACTOR is entitled only to a time
extension and no delay damages.
B. If the CONTRACTOR believes that the OWNER has impacted its work, such that
the project completion date will be delayed, the CONTRACTOR must submit proof
demonstrating the delay to the critical path. This proof, in the form of a Time Impact
Analysis, may entitle the CONTRACTOR to an adjustment of contract time.
C. Time Impact Analysis:

1. The Time Impact Analysis submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall utilize the
accepted schedule update that is current relative to the time frame of the delay
event (change order, third party delay, or other OWNER-caused delay). The
CONTRACTOR shall represent the delay event in the schedule by 1) inserting
new activities associated with the delay event into the schedule, 2) revising
activity logic, or 3) revising activity durations.
2. If the project schedule’s critical path and completion date are impacted as a
result of adding this delay event to the schedule, a time extension equal to the
magnitude of the impact may be warranted.
2018 01324A-12 150407

3. The Time Impact Analysis submittal shall consist of 1) a fragment of the
portion of the schedule affected by the delay event, 2) a narrative explanation
of the delay issue and how it impacted the schedule, and 3) a diskette
containing the schedule file used to perform the Time Impact Analysis.
D. When a delay to the project as a whole can be avoided by revising preferential

sequencing or logic, and the CONTRACTOR chooses not to implement the
revisions, the CONTRACTOR will be entitled to a time extension and no
compensation for extended overhead.
E. Indicate clearly that the CONTRACTOR has used, in full, all project float available
for the work involved in the request, including any float that may exist between the
CONTRACTOR's planned completion date and the Contract completion date. Utilize
the latest version of the Schedule Update accepted at the time of the alleged delay,
and all other relevant information, to determine the adjustment of the contract time.
F. Float shall be for the mutual benefit of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR.
Adjustment of the Contract Times will be granted only when the Contract Float has
been fully utilized and only when the revised date of completion of the Work has
been pushed beyond the contract completion date. Adjustment of the Contract
Times will be made only for the number of days that the planned completion of the
work has been extended.
G. Actual delays in activities which do not affect the critical path work or which do not
move the CONTRACTOR's planned completion date beyond the Contract
completion date will not be the basis for an adjustment to the contract time.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to job-site or home office overhead beyond
the CONTRACTOR's originally planned occupancy of the site if completion of the
project occurs within the specified contract time.
I. Notify ENGINEER of a request for contract time adjustment. Submit request in

accordance with ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS, of the General
Conditions. In cases where the CONTRACTOR does not submit a request for
contract time adjustment for a specific change order, delay, or CONTRACTOR
request within the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the
particular change order, delay, or CONTRACTOR request has no time impact on
the Contract completion date and no time extension is required.
J. The ENGINEER will, within 30 calendar days after receipt of a contract time
adjustment, request any supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the
CONTRACTOR in writing.
K. The new Progress Schedule data, if accepted by the OWNER, shall be included in
the next monthly Schedule Update.
L. When the OWNER has not yet made a final determination as to the adjustment of
the contract time, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the
adjustment to be reflected in the Progress Schedule, reflect that amount of time
adjustment in the Progress Schedule as the ENGINEER may accept as appropriate
for such interim purpose. It is understood and agreed that any such interim
acceptance by the ENGINEER shall not be binding and shall be made only for the
purpose of continuing to schedule the Work, until such time as a final determination
2018 01324A-13 150407

as to any adjustment of the contract time acceptable to the ENGINEER has been
made. Revise the Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in accordance with the
final decision.
1.23 FINAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
A. As a condition precedent to the release of retainage, the final Schedule Update

shall be identified by the CONTRACTOR as the As-Built Schedule.
B. The As-Built Schedule shall reflect the exact manner in which the project was
constructed by reflecting actual start and completion dates for all activities
accomplished on the project.
C. The As-Built Schedule shall be signed and certified by the CONTRACTOR’s Project
Manager and scheduler as being an accurate record of the way in which the project
was actually constructed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01324A-14 150407

SECTION 01329
SAFETY PLAN
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Development and maintenance of a Construction Safety Plan.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. California Labor Code, Section 6401.7.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).
1.03 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN
A. Detail the Methods and Procedures to comply with California Labor Code Section
6401.7, NFPA 70E, OSHA, Federal, and Local Health and Safety Laws, Rules and
Requirements for the duration of the Contract Times. Methods and procedures must
also comply with the OWNER’s Safety Plan. Include the following:
1. Identification of the Certified or Licensed Safety Consultant, who will prepare,
initiate, maintain and supervise safety programs, and procedures.
2. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health
hazards expected to be encountered in the course of construction.
3. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to be
encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades, safety
equipment in public right-of-way and protected areas, safety equipment used
in multi-level structures, personal protective equipment (PPE) as required by
NFPA 70E.
4. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards
expected during construction.
5. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards.
6. Procedures to follow to correct a recognized safety and health hazard.
7. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses, and unusual
events that have occurred at the construction site.
8. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific
workstations.
9. Training for employees and workers at the jobsite.
10. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and
required personal protection equipment.
11. Procedures to protect workers from toxic or explosive gases.
12. Provide testing equipment and other special equipment that may be needed to
detect the presence of and remove such toxic or explosive gases found to
exist in any underground facilities involved in the work, whether these facilities
are newly constructed or existing.
2018 01329-1 150407

B. Assume responsibility for every aspect of Health and Safety on the jobsite, including
the health and safety of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons on the jobsite:
1. Forward available information and reports to the Safety Consultant who shall
make the necessary recommendations concerning worker health and safety at
the jobsite.
2. Employ additional health and safety measures specified by the Safety
Consultant, as necessary, for workers in accordance with OSHA guidelines.
C.
D. Transmit to OWNER and ENGINEER copies of reports and other documents

related to accidents or injuries encountered during construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01329-2 150407

SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for submittals.
a. Section 01294 - Applications for Payment.
b. Section 01324C - Progress Schedules and Reports.
c. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Certificates: Describe certificates that document affirmations by the CONTRACTOR

or other entity that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Extra stock materials: Describe extra stock materials to be provided for the
OWNER's use in facility operation and maintenance.
C. Maintenance material submittals: Use this article to categorize maintenance

materials submittals requiring no A/E action other than confirmation of receipt under
an explanatory heading.
D. Manufacturer's instructions: Instructions, stipulations, directions, and

recommendations issued in printed form by the manufacturer of a product
addressing handling, installation, erection, and application of the product;
manufacturers instructions are not prepared especially for the Work.
E. Product data: Product data usually consists of manufacturers' printed data sheets or
catalog pages illustrating the products to be incorporated into the project.
F. Samples: Samples are full-size actual products intended to illustrate the products to
be incorporated into the project. Sample submittals are often necessary for such
characteristics as colors, textures, and other appearance issues.
2018 01330-1 150407

G. Spare parts: Describe spare parts necessary for the OWNER's use in facility
operation and maintenance; identify the type and quantity here, but include the
actual characteristics of the spare parts in Product as part of the specification of the
product.
H. Shop drawings: Shop drawings are prepared specifically for the project to illustrate
details, dimensions, and other data necessary for satisfactory fabrication or
construction that are not shown in the contract documents. Shop drawings could
include graphic line-type drawings, single-line diagrams, or schedules and lists of
products and their application.
I. Submittals: Submittals are samples, product data, shop drawings, and others that
demonstrate how CONTRACTOR intends to conform with the Contract Documents.
J. Tools: Tools are generally defined as items such as special wrenches, gauges,
circuit setters, and other similar devices required for the proper operation or
maintenance of a system that would not normally be in the OWNER's tool kit.
1.03 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide submittals that are specified or reasonably required for construction,

operation, and maintenance of the Work.
B. Edit all submittals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment
furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not
apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only
applicable to the equipment being furnished.
C. Prepare submittals in the English language. Do not include information in other

languages.
D. Present measurements in customary American units (feet, inches, pounds, etc).
E. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers,

catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details.
F. Where multiple submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each
specification section.
1. In order to expedite construction, the CONTRACTOR may make more than
1 submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more
than 1 specification section:
2. The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section covers
the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section.
a. For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The
switchgear submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit
breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification
section.
G. Hardcopy submittals must be clear and legible, and of sufficient size for
presentation of information.
1. Minimum page size will be 8 1/2 inches by 11 inches.
2018 01330-2 150407

2. Maximum page size will be 11 inches by 17 inches.
1.04 SUBMITTAL CONTENTS
A. Submittal Transmittal Form is provided in Appendix A of this section.

1. Substitute forms require ENGINEER approval based on forms providing the
same information, statements, and certifications.
2. Required submittal numbering format: Section number-sequential number-
resubmittal number:
a. Example: 03200-002-1:
1) “03200” indicates the affected specification is Section 03200.
2) “002” indicates the second submittal under this section
3) “1” indicates the first re-submittal of the Submittal 03200-002.
b. CONTRACTOR may add a separate numbering scheme for
CONTRACTOR’s internal use. However, all correspondence with
ENGINEER must include the required submittal numbering.
3. Specification section: Include with each submittal a copy of the relevant
specification section, including relevant addendum updates.
a. Indicate in the left margin, next to each pertinent paragraph, either
compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive number (1, 2,
3).
b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and
reason for the deviation.
4. Drawings: Include with each submittal a copy of the relevant Drawing,
including relevant addendum updates.
a. Indicate either compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive
number (1, 2, 3).
b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and
reason for the deviation.
c. Provide field dimensions and relationship to adjacent or critical features of
the Work or materials.
5. Other information or materials as needed.
1.05 SUBMITTAL FORMAT
A. Fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component.
B. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections:

1. Submittals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered
pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review.
C. Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed,
and/or organized in the specification section.
D. For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same
specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area
where the device is used.
E. Consolidate electronic format submittals with multiples pages into a single file.
2018 01330-3 150407

1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. CONTRACTOR: Prepare submittal information in sufficient detail to show

compliance with specified requirements.
1. Determine and verify quantities, field dimensions, product dimensions,
specified design and performance criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and
similar data.
2. Coordinate submittal with other submittals and with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
3. Check, verify, and revise submittals as necessary to bring them into
conformance with Contract Documents and actual field conditions.
B. CONTRACTOR: stamp, sign and date submittals indicating review and approval:
1. Signature indicates CONTRACTOR has satisfied submittal review
responsibilities and constitutes CONTRACTOR's written approval of submittal.
2. Submittals without CONTRACTOR's signature will be returned to the
CONTRACTOR unreviewed. Subsequent submittal of this information will be
counted as the first resubmittal.
C. CONTRACTOR: Send submittal to ENGINEER.

1. Provide specified number of copies of submittal.
2. Delivery: Deliver submittals to ENGINEER, 5001 California Ave, Suite 120,
Bakersfield, CA 93309 unless another mutually agreeable place is designated.
3. Timeliness: Schedule and make submissions in accordance with the
requirements of the individual specification sections and in such a sequence
as to cause no delay in Work.
4. CONTRACTOR assumes risk of expense and delays when proceeding with
work related to required submittals without review and acceptance.
D. ENGINEER: Review submittal and provide response.

1. Review description:
a. ENGINEER will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of
designs, calculations, or certifications made by licensed professionals
accompanying a particular submittal whether or not a stamp or seal is
required by Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
b. ENGINEER's review of submittals shall not release CONTRACTOR from
CONTRACTOR's responsibility for performance of requirements of
Contract Documents. Neither shall ENGINEER's review release
CONTRACTOR from fulfilling purpose of installation nor from
CONTRACTOR's liability to replace defective work.
c. ENGINEER's review of shop drawings, samples, or test procedures will
be only for conformance with design concepts and for compliance with
information given in Contract Documents.
d. ENGINEER's review does not extend to:
1) Accuracy of dimensions, quantities, or performance of equipment
and systems designed by CONTRACTOR.
2) CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures except when specified, indicated on the Drawings, or
required by Contract Documents.
3) Safety precautions or programs related to safety which shall remain
the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
2018 01330-4 150407

e. ENGINEER can accept or reject any exception at their sole discretion.
2. Review timeframe:
a. Except as may be provided in technical specifications, a submittal will be
returned within 7 days.
b. When a submittal cannot be returned within the specified period,
ENGINEER will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the submittal,
give notice of the date by which that submittal will be returned.
3. Schedule delays:
a. No adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price will be allowed due to
ENGINEER’s review of submittals, unless all of the following criteria are
met:
1) ENGINEER has failed to review and return first submission within the
agreed upon time frame.
2) CONTRACTOR demonstrates that delay in progress of Work is
directly attributable to ENGINEER’s failure to return submittal within
time indicated and accepted by ENGINEER.
E. CONTRACTOR: Prepare re-submittal, if applicable.

1. Clearly identify each correction or change made.
2. Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER’s comments or
questions for submittal packages that are resubmitted in the order that the
comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal.
a. Acceptable responses to ENGINEER’s comments are listed below:
1) “Incorporated” ENGINEER’s comment or change is accepted and
appropriate changes are made.
2) “Response” ENGINEER’s comment not incorporated. Explain why
comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. Explain
how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change
requested by ENGINEER.
b. Any re-submittal that does not contain responses to the ENGINEER’s
previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal. No
further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a response for
previous comments has been received.
3. Review costs:
a. Costs incurred by OWNER as a result of additional reviews of a particular
submittal after the second time it has been reviewed shall be borne by
CONTRACTOR.
b. Reimbursement to OWNER will be made by deducting such costs from
CONTRACTOR's subsequent progress payments.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Number of copies: 4 minimum except where noted.
a. OWNER: 1 copy.
b. ENGINEER: 2 copies.
c. CONTRACTOR: Remaining copies.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. CONTRACTOR to field verify elevation, coordinates, and pipe material for pipe
tie-in prior to the preparation of shop drawings.
2018 01330-5 150407

2. Details:
a. Fabrication drawings: drawn to scale and dimensioned.
b. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all
dimensions.
c. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates.
d. Component layout and identification.
e. Weight.
f. Finish.
g. Temperature limitations, as applicable.
h. Nameplate information.
C. Product Information:
1. Product Data:
1) Details:
a) Supplier name and address.
b) Subcontractor name and address.
2) Include:
a) Catalog cuts.
b) Bulletins.
c) Brochures.
d) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: signed by product
manufacturer along with supporting reference data, affidavits,
and tests, as appropriate.
e) Manufacturer’s printed recommendations for installation of
equipment.
f) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from manufacturer’s
documents.
2. Samples:
a. Number of samples: 3 minimum.
1) OWNER: 1 copy.
2) ENGINEER: 2 copies.
3) CONTRACTOR: None.
b. Details:
1) Submit labeled samples.
2) Samples will not be returned.
3) Provide samples from manufacturer’s standard colors, materials,
products, or equipment lines.
a) Clearly label samples to indicate any that represent
non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and
that if selected, will require an increase in Contract Time or
Contract Price.
3. Minor or incidental products and equipment schedules:
a. Details:
1) Shop Drawings of minor or incidental fabricated products will not be
required, unless requested.
2) Submit tabulated lists of minor or incidental products showing the
names of the manufacturers and catalog numbers, with Product Data
and Samples as required to determine acceptability.
D. Design calculations:
1. Details:
2018 01330-6 150407

a. Defined in technical sections.
b. Calculations must bear the original seal and signature of a Professional
Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located and who
provided responsible charge for the design.
E. Qualifications Statements:
1. Details:
a. Defined in technical sections.
b. Licensing documentation.
c. Certification documentation.
d. Education documentation.
F. Quality assurance/control submittals:

1. Mill test reports:
a. Details:
1) Submit certified copies of factory and mill test reports.
2) Do not incorporate Products in the Work which have not passed
testing and inspection satisfactorily.
3) Pay for mill and factory tests.
2. Test reports:
a. Details:
1) Include the following information:
a) A description of the test.
b) List of equipment used.
c) Name of the person conducting the test.
d) Date and time the test was conducted.
e) Ambient temperature and weather conditions.
f) All raw data collected.
g) Calculated results.
h) Clear statement if the test passed or failed the requirements
stated in Contract Documents.
i) Signature of the person responsible for the test.
3. Factory Acceptance Test:
a. Details: Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during
test.
4. Certificates:
a. Details: Defined in technical sections.
5. Manufacturers’ field reports:
a. Details: Certificate of proper installation.
6. Field Samples:
7. Test Plans:
G. Project management submittals:

1. Applications for payment:
a. Details:
1) As specified in Section 01294.
2. Schedules:
a. Details:
1) Progress schedules: As specified in Section 01324C.
2018 01330-7 150407

2) Schedule of values: As specified in Section 01292.
3) Schedule of submittals: As specified in Section 01324C.
3. Progress reports and quantity charts:
a. Details: As specified in Section 01324C.
1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide closeout submittals as specified in Section 01770.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01330-8 150407

SECTION 01350
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Special procedures for locating and verifying concealed existing
facilities.
1.02 CONCEALED EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Verify locations of utilities and facilities which may exist by consulting with the
OWNER, utility companies, and Underground Services Alert (USA) or other service
available in area of Project.
1. Abide by easement and right-of-way restrictions.
B. Notify the OWNER, owners of facilities when the Work will be in progress. Make
arrangements for potential emergency repairs in accordance with requirements of
owners of utility facilities, including individual or residential facilities.
C. Assume responsibility for repair of facilities damaged by performance of the Work.
D. Expose sanitary and storm sewers, water, gas, electric, telephone utility lines, and
other underground facilities indicated to permit survey location prior to
commencement of Work in affected area.
1. Expose in ample time to permit relocation of interfering utilities with minimum
delaying effect on contract time.
E. Work required for raising, lowering, or relocating utilities not indicated will be
performed by affected utility owners or as part of the Work at option of affected
owners of utilities.
1. When part of the Work, perform work in accordance with standards of affected
utility owner, and adjustment to Contract Price and Contract Times will be
made as stipulated in conditions of contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01350-1 150407

SECTION 01352
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements and procedures for performing alterations to

existing facilities.
1. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
2. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
3. Section 01732 - Cutting and Patching.
4. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
5. Section 02222 - Building Demolition.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Alterations Schedule: Submit in accordance with requirements for Progress

Schedules.
1.03 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES
A. Perform Work in sequences and within times specified in Section 01140.
B. Submit separate detailed sub-schedule for alterations, coordinated with construction

schedules. Indicate:
1. Each stage of Work and dates of occupancy of areas.
2. Date of Substantial Completion for each area of alterations as appropriate.
3. Trades and Subcontractors employed in each stage.
1.04 WORK INVOLVED WITH EXISTING OPERATING FACILITIES
A. Perform the Work while existing facility is in operation.
B. Do not jeopardize operation or materially reduce efficiency of existing facility.
C. Coordinate the Work with operation of the facility.

1. Do not begin alterations of designated portions of the Work until specific
permission has been granted in writing by OWNER in each case.
2. ENGINEER will coordinate the planned procedure with facility manager.
3. Complete as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible,
connections to existing equipment and utilities, and other operations that
interfere with the operation of existing facility.
D. Operational functions of the facility that are required to be performed to facilitate the
Work will be performed by facility personnel only.
2018 01352-1 150407

E. Plant Manager will cooperate in every way practicable to assist in expediting the
Work.
F. When necessary for the proper operation or maintenance of portions of the facility,
reschedule Work operations so that the Work will not conflict with necessary
operations or maintenance of the facility.
1.05 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING, AND PROTECTION
A. Assign relocation, removal, cutting, and patching to trades qualified to perform in

manner which causes least damage and provide means of returning surfaces to
appearance of new construction.
B. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to

prevent damage to remaining existing and new construction.
C. Provide temporary enclosures as specified in Section 01500 to separate

construction areas from existing building and from areas occupied by OWNER, and
to provide weather protection.
1.06 SALVAGE MATERIALS
A. Salvage Materials: Materials removed from existing facility.
B. Materials Designated for Salvage:

1. Progressive Cavity Pumps in Secondary Sludge Pump Station.
1.07 PREPARATION
A. Identify existing materials which shall be patched, extended, or matched.
B. In addition to demolition specified in Section 02222, and Construction specifically

indicated on the Drawings, cut, move or remove items as necessary to provide
access or to allow alteration and new construction to proceed, including:
1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions.
2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as
abandoned piping, conduit and wiring.
3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such
as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood,
rusted metals, and deteriorated concrete.
4. Cleaning of surfaces and removal of surface finishes needed to install new
construction and finishes.
5. Disposal of items removed and not salvaged.
C. Cut and remove minimum amount of existing construction in manner which avoids
damage to adjacent work.
D. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster, and metals by methods which
terminate surfaces in straight line at natural points of division.
E. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section 01732.
2018 01352-2 150407

1.08 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK
A. When new construction abuts or finishes flush with existing construction, make
smooth transitions and match architecture of existing construction.
B. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings with finish materials
which match existing materials.
C. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors,
walls, and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
D. Where changes of plane exceed 2 inches, request instructions for making transition.
E. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors.
F. Match patched construction with adjacent construction in texture and appearance so

that patch or transition is invisible at 5 foot distance.
G. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition is impossible, terminate
existing surface in neat manner along straight line at natural line of division and
provide appropriate trim.
1.09 DAMAGED SURFACES
A. Patch and replace portions of existing finished surfaces which are damaged, lifted
and discolored with matching material.
B. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching finishes.
C. Refinish patched portion of painted or coated surfaces in manner which produces

uniform color and texture to entire surface.
D. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest
change of plane exceeding 45 degrees.
1.10 CLEANING
A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Sections 01500 and 01770.
B. Clean OWNER-occupied areas daily.
C. Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust in OWNER-occupied areas

immediately.
D. At completion of each portion of Work, clean area and make surfaces ready for
successive portions of Work.
E. At completion of alterations in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to
condition suitable for use by OWNER.
2018 01352-3 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01352-4 150407

SECTION 01354
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Procedures required when encountering hazardous materials at

the Work site.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. California Health and Safety Code, Section 25117.
B. State of California Code of Regulations (CCR).

1. Title 8. Industrial Relations.
a. Division 1. Department of Industrial Relations.
2. Title 22. Social Security
a. Division 4. Environmental Health.
b. Division 4.5. Environmental Health Standards for the Management of
Hazardous Waste.
C. United States Code of Federal Regulation (CFR), Title 29 and Title 40.
1. 29 CFR 1910.1000.
2. 29 CFR 1910.134.
D. Steel Structure Painting Council:

1. Guide 61 - Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal
Operations.
2. Guide 61 - Description of Methods and Systems.
3. Guide 71 - Guide for the Disposal of Lead-Contamination Surface Preparation
Debris.
4. PA Guide 3.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit laboratory reports, hazardous material removal plans, and certifications.
1.04 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES
A. Hazardous materials are those defined by California Health and Safety Code,
Section 25117.
B. When Hazardous Materials Have Been Found:

1. Prepare and initiate implementation of plan of action.
2. Notify immediately OWNER, ENGINEER, and other affected persons.
3. Notify such agencies as are required to be notified by Laws and Regulations
with the times stipulated by such Laws and Regulations.
2018 01354-1 150407

4. Designate a Certified Industrial Hygienist to issue pertinent instructions and
recommendations for protection of workers and other affected persons' health
and safety.
5. Identify and contact subcontractors and licensed personnel qualified to
undertake storage, removal, transportation, disposal, and other remedial work
required by, and in accordance with laws and regulations.
C. Forward to ENGINEER, copies of reports, permits, receipts, and other

documentation related to remedial work.
D. Assume responsibility for worker health and safety, including health and safety of
Subcontractors and their workers.
1. Instruct workers on recognition and reporting of materials that may be
hazardous.
E. File requests for adjustments to Contract Times and Contract Price due to the
finding of Hazardous Materials in the Work site in accordance with paragraph 4.06,
General Conditions.
1. Minimize delays by continuing performance of the Work in areas not affected
by hazardous materials operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01354-2 150407

SECTION 01410
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Regulatory requirements:

1. Building code.
2. Greenbook Specifications.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Building code:
a. International Building Code.
b. California Building Code.
2. Greenbook Specifications:
a. ”Greenbook” Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 2006
Edition and current supplements thereto, published by BNi Publications,
Inc..
b. Greenbook specifications are referred to in these Technical
Specifications, and such reference are incorporated herein as though set
forth in full.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01410-1 150407

SECTION 01424
ABBREVIATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Abbreviations and meanings.
1.02 INTERPRETATIONS
A. Interpret abbreviations by context in which abbreviations are used.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations used to identify reference standards:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AGC Associated General Contractors
AI Asphalt Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASTM ASTM International
AWSC American Welding Society Code

AWWA American Water Works Association
Caltrans California Department of Transportation

Cal-OSHA California Occupational Safety and Health Administration
CCR California Code of Regulations
CFR United States Code of Federal Regulations
CSI Construction Specifications Institute

EPA United States Environment Protection Agency
FS Federal Specifications
ICC International Code Council

NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association
NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
2018 01424-1 150407

B. Abbreviations used in Specifications and Drawings:
bhp brake horsepower
CIPP Cured-in-Place Pipe
cm centimeter or centimeters
CO carbon monoxide
Co. Company
CO2 carbon dioxide
COD chemical oxygen demand
Corp. Corporation
cu ft cubic foot or feet

cu ft/sec cubic feet per second
cu yd cubic yard or yards
day day (English units)

db decibels
diam diameter
DO dissolved oxygen
DS dissolved solids
F degrees Fahrenheit
ft feet or foot
ft/sec feet per second
gal gallon or gallons

gpd gallons per day
gpd/ac gallons per day per acre
gph gallons per hour

gpm gallons per minute
gps gallons per second
hp high point
hp horsepower
hr hour or hours (English units)
ID inside diameter
Inc. Incorporated
inch inch
inches inches
k kips
ksi kips per square inch

kW kilowatt or kilowatts
kWh kilowatt hour
2018 01424-2 150407

L liter or liters
lin linear, lineal

lin ft linear foot or feet
max maximum
mgd million gallons per day
Mil 0.001 inch (used for coating thickness)
mile mile
mil. gal million gallons
miles miles
min minimum
min minute or minutes
mm millimeter or millimeters
mph miles per hour
No. number
Nos numbers
NRC noise reduction coefficient
oc on center
OD outside diameter
pl plate or property line

pm post meridiem (afternoon)
psi pounds per square inch

psia pounds per square inch absolute
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PVC polyvinyl chloride
R radius
rpm revolutions per minute
rps revolutions per second
s second (metric units)

sec second (English units)
SI International System of Units
sp static pressure
sp gr specific gravity
sp ht specific heat
sq square
US United States
V volt or volts
VA volt-ampere or volt-amperes
wg water gauge
2018 01424-3 150407

wk week or weeks
wt weight
yd yard or yards
yr year or years (English unit)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01424-4 150407

SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Quality control requirements and procedures for products and
workmanship and includes the following:
1. Sampling and testing of materials.
2. Testing of equipment.
3. Requirements for testing laboratories.
4. Procedures and limitations of inspection.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO Accreditation Program (AAP) for Testing Laboratories.
B. ASTM International (ASTM).
1.03 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR
A. OWNER's representative or inspector employed or retained by OWNER or

ENGINEER is authorized to inspect the Work.
B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the work and to preparation, fabrication,
and manufacture of products for the Work.
C. Deficiencies or defects in the work which have been observed will be called to
CONTRACTOR's attention.
D. Inspector will not:

1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Inspect CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures for construction.
3. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract
Documents, or act as foreman for CONTRACTOR.] [Supervise, control, or
direct CONTRACTOR's safety precautions or programs; or inspect for safety
conditions on work site, or of persons thereon, whether CONTRACTOR's
employees or others.
E. Inspector will:
1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENGINEER in
determining when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with
Contract Documents.
2. Report to ENGINEER whenever inspector believes that work is faulty,
defective, does not conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or
whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever inspector
believes the work should be uncovered for observation or requires special
testing.
2018 01450-1 150407

1.04 INSPECTION
A. Material and equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection.

ENGINEER can reject material, equipment, and workmanship not in conformance
with Contract Documents.]
B. Remove defective work and products from work site, whether in place or not, and
replace or renew with work, material, or equipment in conformance with Contract
Documents.]
C. Facilitate inspection by maintaining proper facilities and providing safe access to the
Work, to shops where products are in preparation, and to warehouses and storage
yards where products are stored.
D. ENGINEER's observation of work that will be covered:

1. When directed to allow observation of work before it is covered, provide timely
notification of work readiness and allow ENGINEER reasonable time to
observe such work before covering it.
2. Uncover, at CONTRACTOR's cost, work covered for which ENGINEER was
not given timely notification or reasonable time to conduct observations.
3. ENGINEER may specify time requirements for timely notification and for
performing observations.
1.05 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. General:
1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of
materials, when specified in sections where materials are specified.
2. When specified in sections where products are specified:
a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and
quality required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or
examination.
b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical
organizations.
B. Sampling:
1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested.
2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates
satisfactory compliance with specified requirements.
3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to
determine quality of material.
4. Assist ENGINEER in preparation of test specimens at site of work, such as soil
samples and concrete test cylinders.
C. Test standards:
1. Perform sampling, specimen preparation, and testing of materials in
accordance with specified standards, and when no standard is specified, in
accordance with standard of nationally recognized technical organization.
2. Physical characteristics of materials not particularly specified shall conform to
standards published by ASTM, where applicable.
2018 01450-2 150407

1.06 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Qualification of laboratory:
1. Current AAP Accreditation or equivalent.
2. Has authorization to operate in state in which Project is located.
B. Laboratory duties:
1. Cooperate with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR.
2. Provide qualified personnel.
3. Notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, in writing, of response time needed to
schedule testing or inspections after receipt of notice.
4. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods
of construction in accordance with specified standards to ascertain compliance
of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Promptly notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of observed irregularities or
deficiencies of construction.
6. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection each report shall
include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number.
d. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
e. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
f. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
g. Date of test.
h. Identification of product and Specification Section.
i. Location of sample or test in Project.
j. Type of inspection or test.
k. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
l. Interpretation of test results, when requested by ENGINEER.
C. Limitations of authority of testing laboratory: Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept portion of work.
3. Perform duties of CONTRACTOR.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to construction and

manufacturing operations.
B. Secure and deliver to laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of

materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
C. Provide to laboratory preliminary mix design proposed to be used for concrete, and
other materials mixes which require control by testing laboratory.
D. Furnish copies of product test reports.
E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to construction to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at work site or at source of product to be tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
2018 01450-3 150407

4. For storage and curing of test samples.
F. Notify laboratory in advance of when observations, inspections and testing is

needed for laboratory to schedule and perform in accordance with their notice of
response time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01450-4 150407

SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary
controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and
enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field
offices and sheds, and removal after construction.
a. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
b. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
c. Location for CONTRACTOR field trailers, equipment and material storage,
and other construction related space requirements ahll be located South
West of the wastewater plant. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for site
grading, drainage, access, security fencing, utilites, and any other
requirements for such use of this site. Site shall be returned to pre-
construction condition.
1.02 REFERENCE
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: For products specified to be furnished under this Section, submit product
data as specified in Section 01330.
B. For temporary piping systems:

1. Submit layout drawings showing proposed routing of piping, including
proposed pipe support and pipe restraint locations. This includes pipe
protection from traffic.
2. Submit product data for piping, fittings, appurtenances, restraints, supports,
and all other components of the temporary piping system.
3. Submit all information at least 14 days prior to when each temporary piping
system is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment
by ENGINEER and OWNER.
2018 01500-1 150407

C. For temporary pumping systems:
1. Submit pump data, performance curves, and other operating information as
specified in Section 15050.
2. Submit sketches showing layout of temporary pumping system, including
pump quantity, configuration in wet well, and proposed piping layout specified
in this Section.
3. Submit piping headloss calculations based on proposed temporary piping
system layout.
D. Submit all information at least 14 days prior to when the temporary pumping system
is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment by
ENGINEER and OWNER.
1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary electrical power:

1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.
2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming
to applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for performance of the Work.
B. Temporary electrical lighting:

1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting sufficient to maintain lighting levels
during working hours not less than lighting levels required by OSHA and state
agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
2. When available, permanent lighting facilities may be used in lieu of temporary
facilities:
a. Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, replace bulbs, lamps, or
tubes used by CONTRACTOR for lighting.
C. Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating:

1. Heat and ventilate work areas to protect the Work from damage by freezing,
high temperatures, weather, and to provide safe environment for workers.
2. Permanent heating system may be utilized when sufficiently completed to
allow safe operation.
D. Temporary water:
1. Pay for and construct facilities necessary to furnish potable water for human
consumption and non-potable water for use during construction.
a. Non-Potable construction water will be available on-site from the existing
Ag well. The well is located approximately 400 feet from the Headworks.
Contractor responsible for interconnections and storage tank necessary to
manage the water.
2. Remove temporary piping and connections and restore affected portions of the
facility to original condition before Substantial Completion.
3. Pay for water used for construction prior to final acceptance. OWNER will
provide water for 7-day final test.
4. Development of non-potable water supply:
a. Post ample signs throughout the work area warning that plant water is not
potable.
E. Temporary sanitary facilities:
2018 01500-2 150407

1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with
applicable Laws and Regulations.
2. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and
sanitary condition.
F. Temporary fire protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and
capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.
G. First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements
of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.
H. Utilities in existing facilities: As specified in Section 01140.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by
Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.
B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary
facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.
C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load
bearing capability:
1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered
engineer prior to application of loads.
2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.
D. Accident prevention:
1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and
property.
2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards.
4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety
inspections of the Work.
5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with
provisions for safety and accident prevention.
E. Barricades:
1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn
pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavations.
2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark.
3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted.
4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in
streets, roadways, parking lots, treatment plants, or other public or private
areas.
F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas
and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers:
1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency
which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
G. Hazards in public right-of-way:
2018 01500-3 150407

1. Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches, and other continuous excavations in
public right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, with traffic cones,
barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours:
a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other
adequate lights.
2. At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may
reasonably be expected to approach head on, protect excavations by
continuous barricades:
a. During hours of darkness, provide warning lights at close intervals.
H. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is
excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.
I. Above grade protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that

meets requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA
regulations where Project is located.
J. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on

Project site from injury, damage, or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or
other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with
hazards.
K. Fences:
1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts
of theft, violence, and vandalism.
2. Enclose temporary offices and storage areas with fence adequate to protect
temporary facilities against acts of theft, violence, and vandalism.
3. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may
be built to serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the work site,
provided that damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to Substantial
Completion.
4. Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing
fences to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons.
a. Bear responsibility for protection of plant and material on site of the Work
when openings in existing fences are not closed.
5. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is
performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security
guards to protect temporary openings.
6. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.
1.06 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and
vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury.
1.07 ACCESS ROADS
A. General:
1. Build and maintain access roads to and on site of the Work to provide for
delivery of material and for access to existing and operating plant facilities on
site.
2. Build and maintain dust free roads which are suitable for travel at 20 miles per
hour.
2018 01500-4 150407

B. Off-site access roads:
1. Build and maintain graded earth roads.
2. Build roads only in public right-of-way or easements obtained by OWNER.
3. Obtain rights-of-way or easements when electing to build along other
alignment.
C. On-site access roads:

1. Maintain access roads to storage areas and other areas to which frequent
access is required.
2. Maintain similar roads to existing facilities on site of the Work to provide
access for maintenance and operation.
3. Protect buried vulnerable utilities under temporary roads with steel plates,
wood planking, or bridges.
4. Maintain on-site access roads free of mud. Under no circumstances shall
vehicles leaving the site track mud off the site onto the public right-of-way.
1.08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Dust control:
1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation,
backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of
operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Noise control:
1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to
minimize noise.
2. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night
hours.
C. Mud control:
1. Prevent mud nuisance caused by construction operations, unpaved roads,
excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
1.09 REMOVAL
A. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to

match surrounding conditions.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.
1.10 TEMPORARY PROCESS PIPING
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping, appurtenances, and other materials as

required to provide temporary piping systems as specified in this Section, as
indicated on the Drawings, and as needed to perform the Work.
B. CONTRACTOR shall field route piping as needed and as field conditions dictate,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, and determine appropriate lengths of
piping and quantity/type of pipe fittings needed to construct temporary piping
2018 01500-5 150407

system. Do not block access points such as stairs, doors, and walkways to existing
facilities unless approved in writing by the OWNER.
C. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes
sizes, and at ends:
1. When piping is buried, use concrete thrust block or mechanical restraints.
2. When piping is exposed or under water, use mechanical or structural
restraints.
3. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of the
piping by the operating pressure of the piping.
D. Temporary piping systems shall be installed in a manner that will not damage
existing or new facilities.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, piping material, including gaskets, shall be suitable for
the process fluid requiring temporary piping.
F. Temporary piping and pumping includes, but is not limited to, the following piping
services:
1. Contractor responsible for providing temporary by-pass pumping and piping for
new manholes and tie-ins to existing influent piping. Alternatively, contractor
may propose construction staging that may not require by-pass pumping.
Existing flows range from 300 to 1,400 gpm with averages approximately 760
gpm.
G. Providing temporary piping systems as specified in this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01500-6 150407

SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Product requirements; product selection; product options and

substitutions; quality assurance; delivery, handling, and storage; and manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Related section:
1.02 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.
B. Provide products by same manufacturer when products are of similar nature, unless
otherwise specified.
C. Provide identical products when products are required in quantity.
D. Provide products with interchangeable parts whenever possible.
E. Require each equipment manufacturer to have maintenance facilities meeting the

following requirements:
1. Minimum 3 years operational experience.
2. Location in continental United States.
3. Equipment and tools capable of making repairs.
4. Staff qualified to make repairs.
5. Inventory of maintenance spare parts.
1.03 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. When products are specified by standard or specification designations of technical

societies, organizations, or associations only, provide products which meet or
exceed reference standard and Specifications.
B. When products are specified with names of manufacturers but no model numbers or
catalog designations, provide:
2018 01600-1 150407

1. Products by 1 of named manufacturers which meets or exceeds
Specifications.
2. Accepted or equal.
C. When products are specified with names of manufacturers and model numbers or
catalog designations, provide:
1. Products with model numbers or catalog designations by 1 of named
manufacturers.
D. When products are specified with names of manufacturers, but with brand or trade
names, model numbers, or catalog designations by 1 manufacturer only, provide:
1. Products specified by brand or trade name, model number, or catalog
designation.
2. Products by 1 of named manufacturers proven in accordance with
requirements for or equals to meet or exceed quality, appearance and
performance of specified brand or trade name, model number, or catalog
designation.
E. When Products are specified with only 1 manufacturer followed by "or Equal,"
provide:
1. Products meeting or exceeding Specifications by specified manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ entities that meet or exceed specified qualifications, to execute the Work.
B. Inspect conditions before executing subsequent portions of the Work. Accept

responsibility for correcting unsatisfactory conditions upon executing subsequent
portions of the Work.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Prepare products for shipment by:

1. Tagging or marking products to agree with delivery schedule or shop
drawings.
2. Including complete packing lists and bills of material with each shipment.
3. Packaging products to facilitate handling and protection against damage
during transit, handling, and storage.
B. Transport products by methods that avoids product damage. Deliver products in

undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling

or damage.
2018 01600-2 150407

D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect shipments. Verify compliance with Contract
Documents, correct quantities, and undamaged condition of products. Immediately
store and protect products and materials until installed in Work.
E. Store products with seals and legible labels intact.
F. Store moisture sensitive products in weathertight enclosures.
G. Maintain products within temperature and humidity ranges required or

recommended by manufacturer.
H. Connect and operate space heaters during storage when ambient temperatures fall
below temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
I. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.
Repaint damaged painted surfaces.
J. Exterior storage of fabricated products:

1. Place on aboveground supports which allow for drainage.
2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering.
3. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation under covering.
K. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent

materials mixing with foreign matter.
L. Provide access for inspection.
M. Maintain equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation and industry

standards, including oil changes, rotation, etc. Provide a log of equipment
maintenance to the ENGINEER on a monthly basis.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Deliver, handle, store, install, erect, or apply products in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions, Contract Documents, and industry standards.
B. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and maintained under

required conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3
Not Used.
PART 4 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01600-3 150407

SECTION 01612
SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Seismic design criteria for the following:

1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Seismic design of tanks and anchorage of tanks. For bolted steel tanks see
Section 1309A.
3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified
in Section 01410.
a. Seismic Coefficient, Ca: 0.44.
b. Seismic Component Importance Factor for Anchorage of Mechanical and
Electrical Equipment, Ip: 1.25.
c. Seismic Importance Factor for the Design of Tanks and the Anchorage of
Tanks, Ip: 1.25.
d. Component Amplification Factor, ap: In accordance with Table 16-0 of the
Building Code.
e. Component Response Modification Factor, Rp: In accordance with
Table 16-0 of Building Code.
2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces.
3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical
equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic
forces.
4. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting
overturning due to seismic forces.
5. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic
forces. Anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex
bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J
shape.
6. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shells, powder actuated
fasteners, sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the
Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
7. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to
resist seismic forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic
forces.
2018 01612-1 150407

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic

calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed

to practice in the state where the Project is located.
END OF SECTION
2018 01612-2 150407

SECTION 01614
WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Wind design criteria.
1. Building Code Criteria: Design for wind in accordance with Building Code as
a. Basic Wind Speed: 70 miles per hour.
b. Wind Exposure: C
2. For bolted steel tanks see Section 13209A.
3. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting wind forces.
Anchor bolts used to resist wind forces shall have a standard hex bolt head.
Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J shape.
a. Do not use concrete anchors, sleeve anchors, flush shells, chemical
anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of anchor unless
indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
b. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the anchors used to
resist wind forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist wind
forces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design
calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Civil or Structural Engineer

registered in the state where the Project is located.
END OF SECTION
2018 01614-1 150407

SECTION 01722
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Field engineering to establish lines and grades for the Work.
A. Qualifications of Surveyor or Engineer: Registered civil engineer or land surveyor in

state where Project is located.
B. Accuracy of stakes, alignments, and grades may be checked randomly by

ENGINEER.
1. Notice of when checking will be conducted will be given.
2. When notice of checking is given, postpone parts of the Work affected by
stakes, alignments or grades to be checked until checked.
3. Do not assume that ENGINEER's check substitutes or complements required
field quality control procedures.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES, AND GRADES
A. Execute the Work in accordance with the lines and grades indicated.
B. Make distances and measurements on horizontal planes, except elevations and

structural dimensions.
1.04 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Basic reference line, a beginning point on basic reference line, and a bench mark
will be provided, by OWNER.
B. From these reference points, establish other control and reference points as
required to properly lay out the Work.
C. Locate and protect control points prior to starting sitework, and preserve permanent
reference points during construction.
1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice.
2. Replace Project control point, when lost or destroyed, in accordance with
original survey control.
D. Set monuments for principal control points and protect them from being disturbed
and displaced.
1. Re-establish disturbed monuments.
2018 01722-1 150407

2. When disturbed, postpone parts of the Work that are governed by disturbed
monuments until such monuments are re-established.
1.05 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site referenced to data

established by survey control points.
B. Record permanent benchmark locations with horizontal and vertical data on Project
Record Documents.
C. Assume responsibility for accuracy of stakes, alignments, and grades by performing

verifications and checking in accordance with standard surveying practice.
1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare and submit Record Documents as specified in Section 01770.
B. Maintain complete, accurate log of control points and survey.
C. Affix civil engineer's or land surveyor's signature and registration number to Record
Drawing to certify accuracy of information shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01722-2 150407

SECTION 01732
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cutting and patching existing and new construction.
1. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
2. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
B. Cutting and Patching Plan:

1. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching
construction commences affecting:
a. Work of OWNER or of others.
b. Structural integrity of element of Project.
2. Cutting and Patching Plan shall include the following:
a. Identification of work.
b. Description of affected construction.
c. Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
d. Description of proposed construction.
e. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Comply with specifications and standards for products involved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of

affected portion of work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and
persons from injury.
C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project, which may be exposed
by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.
2018 01732-1 150407

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, Fit, and Patch when required to:

1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents.
3. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing.
4. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping
and electrical conduit.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods, which will prevent damage and will
provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
C. Openings in Existing Concrete and Masonry:

1. Create openings by:
a. Saw cutting completely through concrete or masonry, or
b. Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both
surfaces (when accessible) and removing concrete or masonry by
chipping.
2. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening.
3. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or
chipping.
4. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from
damaging existing equipment and other facilities.
D. Sizing of Openings in Existing Concrete or Masonry:

1. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings
without deflections.
2. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure
watertightness.
E. Grouting Pipes in Place:

1. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign
material from surfaces prior to placing grout.
2. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a
head of at least 4-inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces
occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.
3. Watercure the grout.
F. Connections to Existing Pipes:

1. Cut existing pipe square.
2. Properly prepare the ends for the connection indicated on the Drawings.
3. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.
G. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads

and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such
that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains.
1. Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit,
and fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth.
2. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:
a. Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover
over reinforcement minus 1/2-inch below finished surface. Do not cut
existing reinforcement on floors.
2018 01732-2 150407

b. Chip concrete within scored line, cut exposed reinforcing steel, and
anchor bolts.
c. Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish.
3. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.
H. Treat Existing Concrete Reinforcement as follows:

1. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new
concrete.
2. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows:
a. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut
reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line.
b. Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut
reinforcement 2-inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and
patch holes with dry pack mortar.
END OF SECTION
2018 01732-3 150407

SECTION 01756
TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for equipment and system testing and facility start-
up, including the following:
1. Start-up Plan.
2. Performance Testing.
3. General Start-up and Testing Procedures.
4. Functional Testing.
5. Operational Testing.
6. Certificate of Proper Installation.
7. Services of manufacturer's representatives.
8. Training of OWNER's personnel.
9. Final testing requirements for the complete facility.
1. Section 01324A - Progress Schedules and Reports.
2. Section 13410 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials
and Methods.
3. Section 15954 - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
4. Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
5. Section 16950 - Electrical Testing.
1.02 GENERAL TESTING, TRAINING, AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Contract Requirements: Testing, training, and start-up are requisite to the

satisfactory completion of the Contract.
B. Complete testing, training, and start-up within the Contract Times.
C. Allow realistic durations in the Progress Schedule for testing, training, and start-up
activities.
D. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services

required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and
operational testing.
E. Provide competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment

manufacturers for assembly, installation and testing guidance, and operator training.
1.03 START-UP PLAN
A. Submit start-up plan for each piece of equipment and each system not less than
three weeks prior to planned initial start-up of equipment or system.
2018 01756-1 150407

B. Provide detailed sub-network of Progress Schedule with the following activities
identified:
1. Manufacturer's services.
2. Installation certifications.
3. Operator training.
4. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5. Functional testing.
6. Performance testing.
7. Operational testing.
C. Provide testing plan with test logs for each item of equipment and each system
when specified. Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows,
pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters.
D. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are

necessary to complete start-up of new equipment and systems.
E. Revise and update start-up plan based upon review comments, actual progress, or
to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities.
1.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Test equipment for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly when

specified.
B. When source quality control testing is specified:

1. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements.
2. Provide certified copies of test results.
3. Do not ship equipment until certified copies have received written acceptance
from ENGINEER. Written acceptance does not constitute final acceptance.
4. Perform testing as specified in the equipment specification sections.
C. Include costs associated with witnessing performance tests in the bid price. Include
costs for one OWNER's representative for travel, lodging, transportation to and from
lodging, and 50 Dollars meal allowance per person per day.
1.05 GENERAL START-UP AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Mechanical Systems: As specified in the individual equipment specification sections

and Sections 15050, 15958 and15954:
1. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during
construction.
2. Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. Recharge lubrication
system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
3. Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up.
4. Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, O-rings, and other seals.
Replace defective seals.
5. Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to
prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection.
6. Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of
moving parts before connecting driver.
7. Perform cold alignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances.
8. Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves.
2018 01756-2 150407

9. Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. Tighten packing
glands to insure no leakage, but permit valve stems to rotate without galling.
Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction.
10. Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. Inspect screwed joints for
leakage.
11. Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to
operational testing.
B. Electrical Systems: As specified in Section 16950 and the individual equipment

specification sections.
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring except 120 volt lighting, wiring,
and control wiring inside electrical panels.
2. Perform continuity tests on grounding systems.
3. Test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper operation.
4. Perform direct current high potential tests on all cables that will operate at
more than 2,000 volts. Obtain services of independent testing lab to perform
tests.
5. Check motors for actual full load amperage draw. Compare to nameplate
value.
C. Instrumentation Systems: As specified in Section 13410 and the individual

equipment specification sections:
1. Bench or field calibrate instruments and make required adjustments and
control point settings.
2. Leak test pneumatic controls and instrument air piping.
3. Energize transmitting and control signal systems, verify proper operation,
ranges and settings.
1.06 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
A. Perform checkout and performance testing as specified in the individual equipment

specification sections.
B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and

controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have
been completed.
C. Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound

level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and
with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.
D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms,

local and remote controls, instrumentation and other equipment functions. Generate
signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each control mode.
E. Conduct continuous eight hour test under full load conditions. Replace parts which
operate improperly.
1.07 OPERATIONAL TESTING
A. After completion of operator training, conduct operational test of the entire facility.
Demonstrate satisfactory operation of equipment and systems in actual operation.
2018 01756-3 150407

B. Conduct operational test for continuous seven day period.
C. OWNER will provide operations personnel, power, fuel, and other consumables for
duration of test.
D. Immediately correct defects in material, workmanship, or equipment which became

evident during operational test.
E. Repeat operational test when malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or

partial operation of the facility or results in performance that is less than specified.
1.08 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. At completion of Functional Testing, furnish written report prepared and signed by

manufacturer's authorized representative, certifying equipment:
1. Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated.
2. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
3. Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions.
4. Operates within the allowable limits for vibration.
5. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as
part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and
functioning.
6. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency
shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning.
B. Furnish written report prepared and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation
Subcontractor certifying:
1. Motor control logic that resides in motor control centers, control panels, and
circuit boards furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor
has been calibrated and tested and is properly operating.
2. Control logic for equipment start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks and
emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
3. Co-sign the reports along with the manufacturer's representative and
subcontractors.
1.09 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Provide operations and maintenance training for items of mechanical, electrical and
instrumentation equipment. Utilize manufacturer's representatives to conduct
training sessions.
B. Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions. Arrange sessions so

that individual operators and maintenance technicians do not attend more than two
sessions per week.
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or

systems one month prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system.
D. Satisfactorily complete functional testing before beginning operator training.
E. Provide training sessions for each work shift listed below during the time periods
shown. Pooling of shifts will not be permitted unless accepted by OWNER.
2018 01756-4 150407

Shift
Day Tuesday, 7 a.m.- 3:30 p.m.
F. Training Sessions: Provide training sessions for equipment as specified in the

individual equipment specification sections.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall videotape all training sessions and provide a copy for the
OWNER.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide one or more persons to be

responsible for coordinating and expediting his/her training duties. The person or
persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the
OWNER.
I. The CONTRACTOR’s coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with

OWNER personnel and manufacturer’s representatives, and shall submit a training
schedule for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided.
Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to
the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the
current plan of operation.
1.10 RECORD KEEPING
A. Maintain and submit following records generated during start-up and testing phase
of Project:
1. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome.
2. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on
the job site.
3. Equipment lubrication records.
4. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements.
5. Insulation resistance measurements.
6. Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of
instrumentation devices and setpoints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01756-5 150407

SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Contract closeout requirements including:

1. Final cleaning.
2. Waste disposal.
3. Touch-up and repair.
4. Disinfection of systems.
5. Preparation and submittal of closeout documents.
6. Final completion certification.
a. Section 01324C - Progress Schedules and Reports.
b. Section 01722 - Field Engineering.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
1.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Final Acceptance.
B. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations.
C. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be

cleaned.
D. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work:
1. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.
E. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes,
sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed
surfaces, and fixtures and equipment.
2018 01770-1 150407

1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site:
1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from
OWNER of such property.
B. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems.
C. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.
D. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.
E. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to final acceptance of the Work.
1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and

installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion.
B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired

satisfactorily.
1.06 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon Substantial Completion and at least

7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment:
1. Project Record Documents.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3. Warranties and Bonds.
4. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens as outlined in Conditions of the
Contract.
5. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.
6. Survey Record Documents as specified in Section 01722.
7. Certificate of Final Completion.
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at Project site, available to OWNER and ENGINEER, 1 copy of the

Contract Documents, shop drawings, and other submittals in good order:
1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals
and change orders.
2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes,
duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent
surface features.
3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features
located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment,
electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes.
4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing
through pull boxes and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number
and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits.
5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.
6. Make annotations with erasable colored pencil conforming to the following
color code:
2018 01770-2 150407

Additions: Red
Deletions: Green
Comments Blue
Dimensions: Graphite
B. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction:

1. Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS."
C. Keep documents current:

1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed
and before permanently concealing.
D. Deliver record documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title,
CONTRACTOR's name and address, list of documents, and signature of
CONTRACTOR.
E. Record documents will be reviewed monthly to determine the percent complete for
the monthly pay application.
F. During progress meetings, record documents will be reviewed to ascertain that

changes have been recorded.
G. Final Schedule Submittal as specified in Section 01324C.
1.08 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Provide executed Warranty or Guaranty Form if required by Contract Documents.
B. Provide specified additional warranties, guarantees, and bonds from manufacturers

and suppliers.
1.09 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
A. When 7-day operational test has been successfully completed, ENGINEER will
certify that new facilities are operationally complete. ENGINEER will submit a list of
known items (punch list) still to be completed or corrected prior to contract
completion.
B. List of items to be completed or corrected will be amended as items are resolved by

CONTRACTOR.
C. When all items have been completed or corrected, submit written certification that
the entire work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and request
final inspection.
D. Upon completion of final inspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a written

acceptance of the entire work or advise CONTRACTOR of work not complete. If
necessary, inspection procedures will be repeated.
2018 01770-3 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01770-4 150407

SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and
before training of each piece of equipment or system.
B. Submit four Manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
C. Make manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and
ENGINEER.
D. Make additions and revisions to the Manuals in accordance with ENGINEER's

review comments.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Preparation:
1. Provide Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with rigid
covers. Utilize tab sheets to organize information.
B. Contents of Operation And Maintenance Manuals:

1. Cover Page: Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name,
OWNER's name, appropriate date.
2. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab
section.
3. Lubrication Information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.
4. Control Diagrams:
a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams
for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and
connections between existing systems and new additions, and
adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or
alarm contact settings.
5. Start-up Procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment,
calibration, and troubleshooting.
6. Operating Procedures:
a. Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment
under specified modes of operation.
b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown
instructions.
7. Preventative Maintenance Procedures: Recommended steps and schedules
for maintaining equipment.
2018 01782-1 150407

8. Overhaul Instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and
reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended
tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.
9. Parts List: Generic title and identification number of each component part of
equipment; include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass
frequencies for every bearing.
10. Spare Parts List: Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and
special storage precautions.
11. Drawings: Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts.
12. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.
13. Source (Factory) Quality Control Test Results: Provide copies of factory test
reports as specified in Sections 15958 or the equipment section.
14. Field Quality Control Test Results: After field-testing is completed, insert field
test reports as specified in Sections 15958 or the equipment section.
15. Equipment Summary Form: Completed form in the format attached at the end
of this Section. Insert Equipment Summary Form after the tab sheet of each
equipment section. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 01782-2 150407

EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM
1. EQUIPMENT ITEM
2. MANUFACTURER
3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S)

(maps equipment number)
4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)
NAMEPLATE DATA -
Horsepower
Amperage
Voltage
Service Factor (S.F.)
Speed
ENC Type
Capacity
Other
7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
Name
Address
Telephone Number
8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9. LUBRICANT LIST
10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations)
11. COMMENTS
2018 01782-3 150407

DOCUMENT 00451A
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT

FOR ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION
The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Additional sheets shall be attached as
required. Failure to complete Item Nos. 1, 3, and 7 will cause the Bid to be non-responsive and
may cause its rejection. In any event, no award will be made until all of the Bidder's General
Information (i.e. Items 1 through 7, inclusive) is provided to the Owner.
1. Bidder/Contractor's name and street address:
2. Contractor's telephone number: ( )
3. Contractor's license: Primary Classification
State License Number: ____________________________ Expiration Date:
Supplemental license classifications:
Name of licensee if different from line (1), above:
4. Name of person who inspected the site of the proposed Work for the Bidder:
Name: _____________________________ Date of inspection:
5. Surety Company and Agent who will provide the required Bonds on this Contract:
Name of Surety:
Address:
Surety Company Agent:
Telephone Numbers: Agent (____)_________________ Surety (____)
2018 00451A-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\0451A.docx
6. ATTACH TO THIS BID the experience resume of the person who will be designated as
General Construction Superintendent or on-site Construction Manager for the Contractor.
7. ATTACH TO THIS BID a list of 3 projects completed as of recent date involving work of
similar type and complexity, listing the following data for each project:
(1) Project Name:
Contract Price:
Name, Address, and Telephone Number of Owner's Project Representative
(2) Project Name:
Contract Price:
Name, Address, and Telephone Number of Owner's Project Representative:
(3) Project Name:
Contract Price:
Name, Address, and Telephone Number of Owner's Project Representative:
BIDDER
(Signature)
(Date)
END OF DOCUMENT
2018 00451A-2 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\FrontEnds\0451A.docx
SECTION 02084
UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Onsite utility structures:

1. Precast concrete manholes.
2. Precast drainage inlets.
3. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes.
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is
called for by one is as binding as if called for by all.
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or
entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s
Work.
3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of
Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse
or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed
Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 02318 - Trenching.
b. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
c. Section 05500 - Metal
Fabrications.
d. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C 361 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure
Pipe.
2. C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
3. C 857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
4. C 858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures.
A. Performance requirements:
1. Manholes and appurtenances: Manholes and appurtenances shall be watertight
and free from infiltration or exfiltration.
2018 02084-1 150407
F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\02084.doc
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for precast utility structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Precast concrete manholes:

1. Construct precast concrete manholes in accordance
with design, size, shape, form, details, and at locations
indicated on the Drawings and specified.
2. Construct manholes of precast eccentric or concentric manhole units in
accordance with the requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified.
3. Provide precast, cylinder units, taper sections, and
eccentric flat top sections meeting strength
requirements in accordance with ASTM C 478.
4. Base design and manufacture to A-16 (HS 20-44) loading in accordance with
ASTM C 857.
B. Precast drainage inlets:

1. Construct precast concrete drainage inlets in
accordance with the size, shape, form, details, and at
locations indicated on the Drawings and specified.
2. Base design and manufacture to A-16 (HS 20-44) loading in accordance with
ASTM C 857.
3. In accordance with ASTM C 858.
C. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes:

1. Pipe may be used in lieu of cast-in-place structures, as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Use concrete pipe in accordance with ASTM C 361.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes:

1. Covers: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Precast concrete manholes:

1. Joint sealant: Use precast concrete joint sealant as specified in Section 07900.
2. Manhole frames and cover sets: Type, size, and quality as specified in
Section 05500 or as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Drop manhole fittings:
a. Drop tee and other fittings: Vitrified clay pipe or as otherwise specified or
indicated on the Drawings.
4. Piping penetrations through cylinder units:
2018 02084-2 150407
a. Install Kor-N-Seal, or equivalent, rubber gasket boots with steel clamps. b.
Piping connections to the manhole bases shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
C. Precast drainage inlets:

1. Covers: As indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes:

in Section 02318. Excavation and backfill: As specified.
B. Concrete manholes:
1. Excavation and backfill: As specified in
Section 02318.
2. Precast concrete
manholes:
a. Manhole bases:
1) Form and place concrete on undisturbed soil and/or on aggregate base
course compacted to 95 percent of maximum density.
2) Form that portion of base above invert elevation of sewer pipe to
provide smooth channel section as indicated on the Drawings.
3) Check forms for accuracy of dimensions and relative smoothness prior to
placing concrete for base. Channels shall vary uniformly in size and
shape from inlet to outlet if required.
4) Construct of Class A concrete as specified in Section 03300 to form
and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
5) Place base concrete as monolith.
b. Manhole sections:
1) Set each manhole section plumb.
2) Use sections of various heights and adjustment rings to bring top of
manhole ring and cover to required elevation.
c. Joints:
1) Seal joints with precast concrete joint sealant as specified in
Section 07900 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2) Clean joints with brush and prime.
3) Apply precast concrete joint sealant as follows, except where
instructions differ from manufacturer's printed instructions. Where these
instructions differ from manufacturer's instructions, install precast
concrete joint sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions:
a) Remove silicon treated protective paper from one side of preformed
rope and lay preformed rope, paper side up, on cleaned joint
surface. Press surface firmly end-to-end around entire joint, making
minimum 1-inch laps where necessary.
b) Remove protective paper from preformed rope
and lower next section into place.
4) Seal joints watertight.
2018 02084-3 150407
d. Manhole frame and cover sets:
1) Install manhole frames and cover sets at locations indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Setting:
a) Set manhole frames and covers at elevations and
requirements indicated on the Drawings.
(1) Set manhole covers flush with paving.
(2) Where no paving exists, set manhole cover 6
inches above surrounding grade.
b) Where structure is outside limits of traveled shoulder but not in
roadside ditch, place structure 1/10 foot or more above existing
ground surface.
c) Where cover is in existing pavement or in traveled way of existing
road shoulder, place cover flush with existing surface
d) Where manhole cover falls in existing roadside ditch or right of way,
place manhole cover approximately 1-1/2 feet above existing ground
surface.
e) Set manhole frames at required grade and securely attach to top of
precast manhole shaft unit or on adjustment rings, using cement
mortar.
f) Setting covers:
(1) After frames are securely set in place in accordance with
requirements specified, install covers and perform necessary
cleaning and scraping of foreign materials from frames and covers
as required to accomplish and to assure proper fit.
(2) Any frame and cover that creates noise when passed over by
traffic shall be replaced.
3. Drop manholes:
a. Construct drop manholes at locations and in
accordance with details indicated on the
Drawings.
b. Provide inside diameter of drop inlet pipe the
same as intercepted sewer unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings or specified in this
Section.
c. Furnish and set fittings as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Pipe stubs:
a. Provide pipe stubs at manhole locations and in
conformance with details indicated on the
Drawings and as specified.
b. Plugging stubs:
1) Plug stubs with vitrified clay stopper or brick plug as indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, comply with following:
a) Stubs up to and including 21 inches:
Vitrified clay stoppers. b) Stubs greater
than 21 inches: Brick plugs.
C. Precast drainage inlets:
2018 02084-4 150407

1. Excavation and backfill: As specified in Section 02318.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
B.
1. Sanitary sewer manholes: Vacuum test all sanitary
sewer manholes. Use following vacuum test
procedures and requirements:
a. After completion of the manhole barrels but prior to
backfilling and grade ring installation, seal all
openings in the manhole with plugs and a rubber
ring "donut" type plug inserted inside the opening of
the cone.
b. Attach a small vacuum pump to a hose connected to the plug and apply
4 psi of vacuum.
1) Allow vacuum to stabilize at 3.5 psi for 1 minute, then begin the test.
2) The manhole must maintain vacuum such that no greater than
0.5 psi of vacuum is lost during the
specified test period.
c. The specified test period is as follows:
Manhole Depth Minimum Test Period
(Feet) 0-5 (Minutes) 4.5
5- 5.5
10
10- 6.0
15
Greater than 15 6.5
d. Patch as required and retest manholes that

fail the test.
e. Provide a vacuum regulator on the vacuum pump
such that no greater than 4 psi can be applied to the
manhole during the test.
f. Repair all manholes that do not meet the
leakage test, or are unsatisfactory from visual
inspection.
1) Retest after repair is completed.
END OF SECTION
2018 02084-5 150407

SECTION 02200
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Clearing, grubbing, and stripping project site.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Clearing: Consists of removal of natural obstructions and existing foundations,

buildings, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds, rubbish, trees, boulders,
utility lines, and any other items which shall interfere with construction operations or
are designated for removal.
B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of wood or root matter
below the ground surface remaining after clearing and shall include stumps, trunks,
roots, or root systems greater than 1 inch in diameter or thickness to a depth of
6 inches below the ground surface.
C. Stripping: Stripping shall include the removal and disposal of all organic sod, topsoil,
grass and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and
grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped. The depth of stripping is
estimated to be 6 inches, but the required depth of stripping will be determined by
the ENGINEER.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Verify and comply with applicable regulations regarding

those governing noise, dust, nuisance, drainage and runoff, fire protection, and
disposal.
B. Pre-construction Conference: Meet with ENGINEER to discuss order and method of

work.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. Verify character and amount of clay, sand, gravel, quicksand, water, rock,
hardpan, and other material involved and work to be performed.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Clearing and Grubbing: Perform clearing and grubbing in advance of grading

operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2018 02200-1 150407

Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine site and verify existing conditions for beginning
work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing improvements from damage by site preparation work. Install fence
at drip line of trees to remain as indicated on the Drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Clearing:
1. Clear areas where construction is to be performed and other areas as
indicated on the Drawings or specified in this Section of fences, lumber, walls,
stumps, brush, roots, weeds, trees, shrubs, rubbish, and other objectionable
material of any kind which, if left in place, would interfere with proper
performance or completion of the work, would impair its subsequent use, or
form obstructions therein.
2. Do not incorporate organic material from clearing and grubbing operations in
fills and backfills.
3. Contractor's Construction Facilities: Fill or remove pits, fill, and other earthwork
required for erection of facilities, upon completion of the work, and level to
meet existing contours of adjacent ground.
B. Grubbing:
1. From Excavated Areas: Grub stumps, roots, and other obstructions 3 inches or
over in diameter to depth of not less than 18 inches below finish grade.
2. In Embankment Areas or Other Areas to be Cleared Outside Construction
Area: Do not leave stumps, roots, and other obstructions higher than the
Height of Embankment
Height of Clearing and Grubbing
over Stump
0 feet to 2 feet Grub stumps or roots 3 inches or over in diameter to

18 inches below original grade. Cut others flush with
ground.
2 feet to 3 feet Grub stumps 1 foot and over in diameter to

18 inches below original grade. Cut others flush with
ground.
Over 3 feet Leave no stumps higher than stump top diameter,

and in no case more than 18 inches.
2018 02200-2 150407

3. Backfill and compact cavities left below subgrade elevation by removal of
stumps or roots to density of adjacent undisturbed soil.
C. Stripping:
1. Remove soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation to depth of
6 inches from areas to receive fill or pavement and from area within 5 feet
outside foundation walls.
2. Deposit stripped material in accordance with following requirements:
a. At locations as accepted.
b. Use accepted material in top 6 inches of areas to be used for future
planting.
3. Replace topsoil where indicated on the Drawings.
D. Special Techniques:
1. Remove and segregate dried sludge and soil mixture as required.
CONTRACTOR shall remove most of sludge from sludge beds and facultative
sludge lagoon. CONTRACTOR shall excavate dried sludge and soil mixture
and stockpile at location determined by the OWNER.
2. CONTRACTOR shall excavate and remove significant quantities of native soil
in order to perform the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall excavate and move
suitable native soil material to a designated site. The suitable native soil
material, as specified in Section 02300 – Earthworks, can be used as backfill.
Excess suitable native soil will remain the property of the OWNER. Unsuitable
material shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with
Federal, State, and local laws.
END OF SECTION
2018 02200-3 150407

SECTION 02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for designing, furnishing and installing, maintaining,

and removing excavation support and protection.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC):

1. Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers:

1. Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back Excavations.
C. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. Title 8 - Construction Safety Orders.
D. California Labor Code Sections 6705 to 6707 (CLC).
E. Department of the Navy Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC):

1. NAVFAC Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Structures.
2. NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics Deep Stabilization and Special
Geotechnical Construction.
F. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO):

1. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
G. State of California Department of Transportation (CALTRANS):

1. CALTRANS California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
H. United States Steel Corporation (USS):

1. USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in area

of the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject
of shoring and stability of excavations.
B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces, or nearly

vertical faces, of soil or rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes
cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles and
lagging, and other similar shoring systems. Sloping of the soil is not shoring.
A. Where General Engineering Design Practice is specified, provide drawings and

signed calculations and have design performed by civil or structural engineer
registered in State where the Project is located.
2018 02260-1 150407

1. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made, criteria
followed, and stress values used for the materials being used.
2. Furnish references acceptable to ENGINEER substantiating appropriateness
of design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.
B. Design Requirements:
1. General:
a. Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with general
engineering design practice.
1) The preceding requirement shall not apply to trench excavation
support conforming to standards set forth in CCR Title 8 -
Construction Safety Orders.
b. Design steel members in accordance with the Uniform Building Code and
the AISC Manual of Steel Design.
c. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in accordance with
Uniform Building Code.
d. Perform design in accordance with soil characteristics and design
recommendations contained in a written geotechnical report issued and
signed by a geotechnical engineer hired by CONTRACTOR. Geotechnical
engineer shall be registered in the state where the Project is located.
1) Make copy of geotechnical report available at project site for
ENGINEER's review.
2) Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer's services.
3) Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory tests, and
borings performed for the geotechnical report for the design of
stability of excavations by the geotechnical engineer hired by
CONTRACTOR.
e. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction
higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the Manual of Steel
Construction and the Uniform Building Code, increase in such stresses
shall not exceed 10 percent of value of prescribed stresses.
f. Minimum safety factor used for design shall not be less than 2.0.
g. The calculated minimum depth of penetration of shoring below the bottom
of the excavation shall be increased not less than 30 percent if the full
value of passive pressure is used in the design.
h. The maximum height of cantilever shoring above the bottom of excavation
shall not exceed 15 feet. Use braced shoring when the height of shoring
above the bottom of excavation exceeds 15 feet.
i. The location of the point of fixity for shoring shall not be less than half the
calculated minimum embedment depth below the bottom of the
excavation.
j. Generally acceptable references for the design of shoring and excavations
are as follows:
1) CALTRANS California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
2) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Design.
3) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics Deep Stabilization and
Special Geotechnical Construction.
4) USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
5) Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back
Excavations published by American Society of Civil Engineers.
k. The maximum total deflection at any point on the shoring shall not be
more than 1 inch.
2. Soldier Piles and Lagging:
2018 02260-2 150407

a. Provide lagging over the full face of the excavation. Joints between pieces
of lagging shall be tight to prevent loss of soil.
b. Provide full face lagging all around penetrations through the lagging.
c. If the soldier piles are installed in predrilled holes, the predrilled holes shall
be filled with control density backfill after the soldiers piles are installed.
d. The effective width of driven soldier piles for passive soil resistance shall
not exceed two times the width of the pile. The effective width of concrete
encased soldier piles for passive soil resistance shall not exceed two
times the width of the concrete encasement.
e. Fill voids behind lagging with gravel or other material acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
f. Apply loads from tie back soil, rock, or deadman anchors concentrically to
soldier piles or wales spanning between soldier piles. Wales shall be
back-to-back double channels or other members acceptable to the
ENGINEER. Eccentrically loaded with section soldier piles or wales are
not acceptable.
g. Design soldier piles for downward loads including vertical loads from tie
back anchors.
3. Soil Anchors, Rock Anchors, and Deadmen Anchors:
a. Design tie back anchors for a safety factor of not less than two times the
calculated load from the shoring.
b. Proof load all production anchors to not less than 150 percent of the
calculated load from the shoring. Lock off anchors at the calculated
anchor load.
c. The length of soil anchors used to calculate resistance to load from the
shoring, shall not include any length within the potential active pressure
soil failure zone behind the face of shoring.
d. Design tie rods for anchors for 130 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring.
e. Design tie rods for anchors for 150 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring when tie rod couplers are used and for other conditions where
stress concentrations can develop.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General:
a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in
vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to settlement
or movement of soils, alterations in ground water level caused by such
excavations, and related operations.
b. Herein Specified Provisions:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of
CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work pursuant to
provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and its
subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of the
Work, structures, and other improvements.
2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a) Number and types of means needed to maintain soil stability.
b) Strength of such required means.
c) Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of
means used for maintaining soil stability.
2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing,
sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging
groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain
the stability of soils and rock.
2018 02260-3 150407

3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard of
caving ground.
4. Provide Shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to
general engineering design practice, as defined in this Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to slides,
caving, or other types of failures.
2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements may be
compromised by settlement or movement of soils, or changes in soil
load on structures and other improvements.
b. For trenches 5 feet and deeper.
c. For trenches less than 5 feet in depth, when there is a potential for cave-
in.
d. Where indicated on the Drawings.
5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and procedures for
construction and maintenance to minimize settlement of supported ground and
to prevent damage to structures and other improvements, including:
a. Using stiff support systems.
b. Following appropriate construction sequence.
c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system.
1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss of soil and
extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils from supported
soil mass into the excavation.
d. Providing surface runoff routing and discharge away from excavations.
e. Where dewatering is necessary, recharge groundwater as necessary to
prevent settlement in area surrounding excavation.
f. Where sheet piling is used, use interlocking type sheets. The sheet piles
shall be continuous and driven in interlock. If the bottom of the excavation
is located below the water table, use "thumb and finger" type interlock.
g. Not applying shoring loads to existing structures and other improvements.
h. Not changing existing soil loading on existing structures and other
improvements.
i. Provide welded steel packing between soil retaining members such as
sheet piles and wales and similar members when the gap exceeds
1/2 inch before the wales are loaded.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations:

1. In accordance with requirements in California Labor Code for trench
excavations 5 feet or more in depth and for trenches less than 5 feet in depth
when there is potential for cave-in. Submit in advance of excavation work,
detailed drawings showing means for safe and stable excavations.
a. Where such drawings vary from excavation support standards set forth in
California Code of Regulations Title 8 - Construction Safety Orders, submit
design calculations pursuant to general engineering design practice.
b. Provide means for safe and stable excavations that are not less effective
than required in CCR Title 8 - Construction Safety Orders.
2. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation work,
design calculations as performed pursuant to general engineering design
practice, as specified in this Section, and detail drawing showing means for
safe and stable excavations. In design calculations and detail drawing, cover,
as a minimum:
a. Excavations adjacent to structures and other improvements, and
2018 02260-4 150407

b. Excavations 5 feet or more in depth, or less than 5 feet in depth when
there is potential for cave-in, at other locations.
3. Submit Following:
a. Provide calculations for the different load, support, and other conditions
that occur during the sequence of installation of shoring, construction of
facilities protected by the shoring, and sequence of removal of shoring.
b. Provide sketches showing the condition at various stages of installation
and removal of shoring.
c. Show structures, pipelines, and other improvements located near the
shoring, and the shoring on a plan.
d. When utilities penetrate the shoring, submit an elevation of all sides of the
shoring showing the locations of the penetrations. Submit details on
ground support and sealing around utility penetrations.
B. Written geotechnical report on soil characteristics and design recommendations, as

specified in this Section.
C. Control Points and Schedule of Measurements:

1. Submit location and details of control points and method and schedule of
measurements in accordance with requirements of this section.
2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements at such
control points, as specified in this Section, submit copy of field notes with such
measurements. The field notes shall show the current measurement and the
change in measurement from the first measurement taken.
D. Detailed Sequence of Installation and Removal of Shoring:

1. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of installation and
removal of shoring.
2. Provide sketches showing the conditions at various stages in the sequence of
installation and removal of shoring.
E. Submit submittals for stability of excavations as a complete package and include all
items required in this section. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be
returned for resubmittal as a complete package.
A. Do not begin work on excavations, trenches, and means for providing stability of
excavation and trenches until submittals have been accepted by ENGINEER and
until materials necessary for installation are on site.
B. Submit submittals a minimum of 10 days prior to the scheduled date to begin

excavation work.
C. Do not begin construction of any shoring or excavation operations until:

1. Control points as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Drawings on
existing structures and other improvements have been established and
surveyed to document initial elevations and locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
2018 02260-5 150407

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in the
submittals.
B. Except for concrete encased soldier piles, slurry walls, and similar shoring systems,
remove shoring by completion of the Work. Select shoring system and method of
removal which will minimize soil which sticks to shoring from creating large voids
and causing settlement. To prevent settlement caused by pulling shoring, fill voids
with sand, pea gravel, or pressure injected grout. The methods used shall prevent
settlement. Pressure preservative treated wood lagging may be left in place when
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.02 MAINTENANCE
A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material
acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure or excessive

movement of excavation support, determined in accordance with general
engineering design practice, take appropriate action immediately.
3.03 CONTROL POINTS
A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other improvements in

vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement.
1. Set Control Points On Shoring Support System:
a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.
b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, wales, bottom of excavation,
and other types of supports.
2. Set control points in corners of existing structures and on curbs, manholes, and
other improvements indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of plumb bobs
in relation to shoring at control points located on shoring.
C. Perform horizontal and vertical survey and measurement of control points at least
once every week.
END OF SECTION
2018 02260-6 150407

SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade,
compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining to
site grading for buildings, basins, reservoirs, boxes, roads, and other
structures.
2. Pumping and draining of excavations.
3. Backfilling and compacting around structures.
2. Section 02240 - Dewatering.
3. Section 02722 - Aggregate Base Course.
4. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Associated General Contractors (AGC):

1. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction (Section 9).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Course
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
2. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
3. D 1556 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand
Cone Method.
4. D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m).
5. D 2419 - Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.
6. D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
7. D 3017 - Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
8. D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils.
C. Division of Industrial Safety (DIS).
D. Institute of Makers of Explosives (IOMOE).
E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
F. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).
2018 02300-1 150407

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Consists of satisfactory loosening, removing, loading, transporting,

depositing, and compacting in final location, wet and dry materials, necessary to be
removed for purposes of construction, or as required for ditches, grading, roads, and
such other purposes as are indicated on the Drawings.
B. Backfill Adjacent to Structure: Is backfill within volume bounded by the exterior

surfaces of structure, the surface of undisturbed soil in the excavation around
structure, and finish grade around structure.
C. In-Place Density of Compacted Backfill: Is density determined in accordance with

ASTM D 1557, or with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017.
D. Maximum Density: Is density obtained in laboratory when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 1557.
E. Definitions Related to Compaction of Coarse Fill:

1. One Pass: Defined as one movement of roller over area being compacted.
2. Measurement Of Pass Width: Measure width of pass between centers of
outside tires or outside edge of roller wheel.
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, remove such
material and refill space with select material or gravel, which can be compacted
with no perceptible movement under roller.
2. Obtain acceptable material from other sources if surplus or borrow materials
obtained within project site do not conform to specified requirements or are not
sufficient in quantity for structural backfill.
3. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor for water
required to compact fills.
4. Structural Backfill:
a. Material for Backfill:
1) Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, material for
backfill, adjacent to structures, slabs, or wall shall consist of native
material or of sand, gravel, or other imported materials acceptable to
the ENGINEER.
2) Backfill material under concrete structures, under pavement, or where
heavy compaction equipment, such as a pneumatic tired roller,
cannot be used satisfactorily shall consist of aggregate base course,
except areas indicated on the Drawings as control density fill or
concrete encasement.
3) Backfill in any area under concrete structures, shall extend from
undisturbed native soil or rock to the bottom surface of the structure.
5. Embankments and Roadway Fills:
a. Material for Fills: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings,
material shall be Caltrans Class 2 aggregate base within roadways and
may be surplus material from excavation for structures or other
construction for embankments or, if accepted by the OWNER, borrow
material excavated from source within Project site may be used for
embankments.
b. Whatever source is used, provide fill material conforming with specified
requirements.
2018 02300-2 150407

c. Obtain acceptable material from other sources if surplus or borrow
materials obtained within Project site do not conform to specified
requirements or are not sufficient in quantity for construction of
embankments.
6. Compacted Fills:
a. Provide specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other earthwork.
b. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has complied,
and is complying at all times, with requirements specified in this Section
concerning initial compaction demonstration, and field quality control
testing.
7. Borrow Area:
a. All borrow material shall be obtained from Pond No. 5.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
B. Property Owner's Permission Agreements: Submit copy of property owner's

agreements to allow placement of surplus material on their property.
C. Product Data: Submit material source, gradation, and testing data for all materials,
including imported and on-site materials.
D. Excavation Plan: Submit proposed excavation plan.
E. Testing Lab: Submit CONTRACTOR's proposed testing laboratory capabilities and

equipment.
F. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports of all tests specified to be performed by
the CONTRACTOR. Test reports shall be signed and sealed by a registered
geotechnical engineer in the State of California.
A. Initial Compaction Demonstration:

1. Adequacy of Compaction Equipment and Procedures: Demonstrate adequacy
of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of following
amounts of earthwork quantities:
a. 200 linear feet of trench backfill.
b. 50 cubic yards of structural backfill.
c. 100 cubic yards of embankment work.
d. 50 cubic yards of base material.
2. Compaction Sequence Requirements: Until specified degree of compaction on
previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform
additional earthwork of the same kind.
3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstration and at any
time during construction, provide confirmation tests as specified under "FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL."
A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements as provided in this Section for

excavation and uses of excavated material.
B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it in specified locations.
2018 02300-3 150407

C. Excavation and Filling: Perform excavation and filling, during construction, in manner
and sequence that provides drainage at all times.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Water for Compacting Fills: Use water from source acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Fill Materials:
1. General:
a. Provide sand, aggregate base course, gravel, Class 2 permeable, drain
rock, select material, and native material, where required for fill and
backfill.
b. Obtain material for fills from cut sections or from borrow source.
c. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches
and that is free of trash, lumber, debris, leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and
other vegetable matter.
d. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt
concrete are not acceptable.
2. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02722.
3. Class 2 Permeable:
a. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed
to the specified size and gradation.
b. Provide free of organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious
matter.
c. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
d. Sand Equivalent: Not less than 75 when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 2419.
e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing
(Square Openings) Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
3/8 inch 40-100
Number 4 25-40
Number 8 18-33
Number 30 5-15
Number 50 0-7
Number 200 0-3
4. Drain Rock:
to specified size and gradation.
b. Free from vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious
matter.
c. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to
meet gradation requirements.
2018 02300-4 150407

d.
Durability Index: Not less than 40 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 131 and Caltrans Standard Specifications.
e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C 136:
f. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as follows when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136.
Sieve Size Percent By Weight
(Square Openings) Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95-100
3/4 inch 50-100
3/8 inch 15-55
Number 4 0-25
Number 8 0-5
Number 200 0-2
5. Gravel:
to the specified sizes and gradations.
b. Free of vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious
matter.
c. Crush or waste coarse material and add or waste fine material as required
in order to meet specified gradations.
d. Fraction of Material Passing Number 40 Sieve: Material having plasticity
index not greater than 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
e. Durability Index: Not less than 40 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 131, and Caltrans Standard Specifications.
f. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as followed when tested in
Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing Sieve
(Square Openings) A B C
3 inch 100 -- --
1-1/2 inch -- 100 --
1 inch -- -- 100
Number 4 30-70 30-70 40-80
Number 200 0-15 0-15 5-20
6. Native Material:
a. Sound, earthen material passing 1 inch sieve.
b. Percent of material by weight passing Number 200 sieve shall not exceed
30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.
c. Expansion index less than 35.
7. Sand:
a. Clean, coarse, natural sand.
b. Nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
c. 100 percent shall pass a 1/2 inch screen.
d. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 screen.
8. Select Material: Sound earthen material for which sum of plasticity index when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and the percent of material by weight
passing Number 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 136. Organic content shall not be greater than 3 percent by volume.
9. Light Weight Material:
2018 02300-5 150407

a.
Light weight aggregate shall be Baypor, available from Port Costa
Materials, Port Costa, California; Glass Mountain Pumice, Inc., Reno,
Nevada; or equal.
b. Shall have a maximum dry density of 48-65 pounds per cubic foot,
absorption of 12-16 percent, sand equivalent of 68 gradation as follows:
c. Aggregate shall not be greater than 3/4 inch in size.
Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent by Weight Passing
Sieve
3/4 inch 100
Number 4 40-50
Number 30 10-20
Number 200 0-5
10. Pea Gravel (3/8 inch by No. 4 gravel):
a. Material shall have the following sieve distribution:
Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent by Weight Passing
Sieve
1/2 inch 100
3/8 inch 96-100
Number 4 4-14
Number 8 1-5
Number 200 --
b. Shall have a dry density of 166 pounds per cubic foot, absorption of 1.1
percent, and a cleanness value of 84 to 94.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Character and Quantity of Material:
a. Verify character and quantity of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and other
inorganic or organic materials to be encountered in work to be performed.
b. Determine gradation and shrinkage of excavation and fill material, and
suitability of material for use intended in work to be performed.
c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for construction
of excavations and fills, whether from on-site excavations, borrow areas,
or imported materials. Include in cost of work to be performed.
d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in cost of work to be
performed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Preparing Ground Surfaces for Fill or Concrete:
a. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas which underlie fill sections
or structures to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts,
hummocks, and other features which would prevent uniform compaction
by equipment to be used.
b. Recompact areas to density specified in "Compacted Fills" before placing
of fill material or concrete.
2018 02300-6 150407

c. Where cemented rock, cobbles, or boulders compose a large portion of
foundation material underlying structures, slabs, or paved areas, it may not
be advisable to scarify the top 6 inches prior to compaction. If the
ENGINEER deems it advisable not to scarify existing natural ground, then
moisten the native soil and compact it as specified in "Compaction of
Coarse Fill."
2. Preparing Sloped Surfaces for Fill or Foundations:
a. Foundations for Fill Having Slopes in Excess of One Vertical to Four
Horizontal:
1) Bench or terrace to adequately key existing ground and fill built
thereon.
b. Slopes of Original Hillsides and Old Fills: Bench minimum of 4 feet
horizontally as fill is placed.
c. Provision of New Benches:
1) Start new bench wherever vertical cut of next lower bench intersects
existing ground.
2) Recompact material thus cut out along with new embankment
material at no additional cost to the Contract.
3. Preparing for Structural Backfill:
a. After completion of foundation footings and walls and other construction
below the elevation of the final grades and prior to backfilling, all forms
shall be removed and excavation shall be cleaned of all trash and debris.
b. After inspection of foundation, walls, and pipes, backfill shall be placed
symmetrically to prevent eccentric loading upon or against structures.
c. To prevent damage to structures, structural backfill shall be placed with
equipment, which does not exceed H-20 loading, within a distance of 1/2
to 1/3 h (h being the vertical distance from the level being compacted
down to the surface on the opposite side of the wall). Outside this
distance, normal compaction equipment may be used.
d. All backfill shall be compacted per Compaction of this specification.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Dispose of excavated materials, which are not required or unsuitable for fill and
backfill in lawful manner.
2. Dispose of surplus material on private property only when written permission
agreement is furnished by owner of property. Submit copies of such
agreements.
3. Obtain material required for fills in excess of that produced by excavation from
borrow areas subject to the fill material requirements specified herein.
4. Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials larger than 4 inches in
greatest dimension shall not be placed in fill areas, but removed from project
site at no additional cost to the Contract.
5. Stabilization of Subgrade: Provide materials used or perform work to stabilize
subgrade so it can withstand loads, which may be placed upon it by
CONTRACTOR's equipment.
B. Excavation:
1. Excavations for Buildings and Structures:
a. Dimensions and Elevations of Excavations: Provide excavations
conforming to dimensions and elevations indicated on the Drawings for
each building and structure, including trenching for adjacent piping and all
work incidental thereto.
2018 02300-7 150407

b. Soil of Unsuitable Bearing Value: Where soil is encountered having
unsuitable bearing value, ENGINEER may direct in writing that excavation
be carried to elevations above or below those indicated on the Drawings.
c. Unless directed by the ENGINEER, excavations shall not be carried below
elevations indicated on the Drawings.
d. Where excavations are made below elevations indicated on the Drawings,
adjust elevations of excavations in accordance with requirements
following:
1) Under Slabs: Restore to proper elevation in accordance with
procedure specified for backfill in this Section.
2) Under Footings: Select one of the following:
e. Excavation Width: Extend excavations at least 24 inches clear from walls
and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of
services, and inspection. Undercutting of slopes will not be permitted.
f. Bottom of Excavations for Structures: Consist of native material with top
6 inches compacted to 95 percent of maximum density and graded to
conform to outside limits of structures as indicated on the Drawings,
except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified.
g. Difficulty of Excavation: No extra compensation will be made for removal
of rock or any other material due to difficulty of excavation.
h. Location of Structures on Different Substrates: Where structure will be
located partially on fill and partially on undisturbed or natural material,
over-excavate entire area to depth of 6 inches below elevations indicated
on the Drawings and recompact to 95 percent maximum density.
2. Excavation of Ditches and Gutters:
a. Cutting: Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and grades
b. Excavation: Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below grades
c. Over Excavation: Backfill excessive ditch and gutter excavation to grade
with suitable thoroughly compacted material to form adequate gutter
paving.
d. Depositing of Material Adjacent to Ditches: Do not deposit any material
within three feet of edge of ditch unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
3. Necessary Over Excavation:
a. General:
1) Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines of
excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects,
backfill voids remaining after removal as specified in Backfilling of
Voids, or as acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2) Perform necessary excavation beyond normal lines as specified
above and backfill such voids.
b. Backfilling of Voids:
1) Fill voids with suitable material acceptable to the ENGINEER, placed
in manner and to same uniform density as surrounding material.
2) With acceptance of the ENGINEER, concrete of same mix as used in
concrete channel may be used.
C. Compaction:
1. Compacted Fills:
a. Lines and Grades:
1) Construct fills, embankments, and backfills, designated herein as fills,
at locations and to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.
2018 02300-8 150407

2. Where required, CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary imported fill material
from outside sources.
a. Compacted Fill Shape and Sections: Provide completed fill that
corresponds to shape of typical sections indicated on the Drawings or that
meets requirements for particular case.
b. Preparation of Areas Designated to Receive Fill Material: Scarify to
minimum depth of 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,
and recompact to density of fill material as specified in following Article.
c. Fills and Backfills and Upper 6 Inches in Cuts: Compact to percentage of
maximum density as follows:
1) Backfill adjacent to structures: 90 percent.
2) Under present and future structures: 90 percent.
3) Under roadways, parking and storage areas, curbs, and sidewalks:
95 percent.
4) Other areas: 90 percent.
5) Compacted embankments: 90 percent.
6) Spoil areas indicated on the Drawings: no minimum required.
7) Demolition areas: as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Placing Compacted Fills:
1) Placement: Place loose material in successive layers that do not
exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
2) Moisture Content: Bring each layer to optimum moisture content for
maximum density before compaction by rolling.
3) Defective Compacted Fills: Remove and recompact.
e. Placing Light Weight materials:
1) When excavations extend into soft soils, backfill shall consist of light
weight material from base of excavation to the top of the soft soil,
above which, select material may be used.
2) Where light weight material is used for backfill, it shall be separated
from adjacent soils by the use of geotextile fabric specified in Part 2.
3. Compaction of Coarse Fill:
a. When materials are coarsely graded such that performance of field density
tests are impossible:
1) Placement and Compaction: Place material in lifts so as to obtain
compacted thickness of 6 inches and roll with pneumatic roller or
power roller.
2) Moisture Content: Provide moisture content of fraction of material
passing 3/4 inch sieve within plus or minus 2.0 percent of optimum
moisture as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C.
4. Compaction of Embankments and Roadway Fills:
a. Construction and Compaction of Fills:
1) Construct in layers of depths specified above.
2) Compact by rolling with power rollers, tamping rollers, vibrating rollers
or pneumatic tire rollers.
3) Moisture Content:
a) 2 Percent.
5. Compaction of Loose Fill:
a. In Disposal Areas: In disposal areas indicated on the Drawings, bring fill
up essentially in level layer over entire spoil area indicated.
1) Continue filling spoil area until disposal of surplus excavated material
is completed.
2) Slope edges of fill area off at between 1 and 2 horizontal to 1 vertical
to natural ground.
3) Provide slopes that are smooth and uniform.
2018 02300-9 150407

4) Level finished surface of disposal area to within plus or minus
4 inches of indicated elevation.
b. Clods or Hard Lumps of Earth of 6 Inches in Greatest Dimension: Break
up before compacting material in embankments, except as provided as
follows:
1) When fill material includes large rocky material or hard lumps, such
as hardpan or cemented gravel, which cannot be broken readily,
distribute such material throughout fill.
2) Place sufficient earth or other fine material around larger material as
it is deposited so as to fill interstices and produce dense, compact fill.
Do not place such material within two feet of finish grade of fill.
c. Compaction:
1) No compaction other than by hauling vehicles will be required.
2) Uniformly distribute travel of vehicles over fill area as required to
provide uniformly compacted surface.
A. Tests:
1. Confirmation Tests:
a. CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities:
1) Accomplish specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other earthwork.
2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify that compaction
work complies, and is complying at all times, with requirements
specified in this Section concerning compaction, control, and testing.
3) Cost of Confirmation Tests: Paid for by CONTRACTOR.
4) Qualifications of CONTRACTOR's Testing Laboratory: Perform
confirmation testing by soils testing laboratory acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
5) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the
ENGINEER.
b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:
1) Perform testing not less than as follows:
a) For structural backfill: 1 every 100 cubic yards.
b) In embankment or fill: One every 200 cubic yards.
c) Base Material: One every 50 cubic yards.
2. Compliance Tests:
a. Frequency of Testing: Periodic compliance tests will be made by the
ENGINEER to verify that compaction is meeting requirements previously
specified.
b. Coordination with Engineers Testing: Remove overburden above level at
which the ENGINEER wishes to test and backfill and recompact
excavation after testing is completed.
c. If compaction fails to meet specified requirements, perform remedial work
by one of the following methods:
1) Remove and replace backfill at proper density.
2) Bring density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
d. Retesting:
1) Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify
that remedial work has brought compaction within specified
requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
2) CONTRACTOR's Confirmation Tests During Performance of
Remedial Work:
2018 02300-10 150407

a) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to
ENGINEER.
b) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation tests.
B. Tolerances:
1. Finish Grading of Excavations, Backfill and Fills:
a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that finished surfaces
are never above established grade or approved cross section and are
never more than 0.10 feet below.
b. Provide finish surface areas outside of structures that are not more than
0.10 feet above or below established grade or accepted cross section.
2. Of Excavation of Unlined Channels and Basins:
a. In Both Cut and Fill, and Levee and Access Road Side Slopes in Cut:
Vertical tolerance of none above and 3 inches below specified grade will
be allowed on bottom and side slopes.
b. On Top Surface of Levee and Access Road in Both Cut and Fill, and
Levee and Access Road Side Slopes in Fill: Vertical tolerance of none
below and 3 inches above specified grade will be allowed.
3. Of Areas Which Are Not under Structures, Concrete, Asphalt, Roads,
Pavements, Walks, Dikes and Similar Type Items:
a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed natural soil, or
cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep.
b. Intent of preceding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas.
4. Finished Grading Surfaces:
a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes.
b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade grader
operations, except as otherwise specified.
c. Uniformly grade areas, which are not under concrete.
d. Finish gutters and ditches so that they drain readily.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:

1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any
settlement or washing way that may occur from action of the elements or any
other cause prior to final acceptance.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:

1. Protect newly graded areas from action of the elements.
B. Ditches and Gutters:

1. Maintain ditches and gutters excavated free from detrimental quantities of
debris that might inhibit drainage until final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
2018 02300-11 150407

SECTION 02312
CONTROLLED DENSITY BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Controlled density backfill.
1. Section 03300 - Cast-in-place Concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 31 - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in The Field.
2. C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregate.
3. C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
4. C 231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method.
5. C 260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
6. C 618 - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in portland cement concrete.
1. Total Calculated Air Content: not be less than 8.0 percent or greater than
12.0 percent.
2. Minimum Unconfined Compressive Strength: Not less than 50 pounds per
square inch.
3. Maximum Unconfined Compressive Strength: Not greater than 150 pounds per
square inch, measured at 28 days.
4. Wet Density: No greater than 132 pounds per cubic foot.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: A suggested mix design is as follows:

1. Submit a mix design which conforms to the density and strength criteria
established herein.
Absolute Volume
Material Weight Specific Gravity Cubic Foot
Cement 30 pounds 3.15 0.15
Fly Ash 300 pounds 2.30 2.09
Water 283 pounds 1.00 4.54
Coarse Aggregate 1,465 pounds 2.68 8.76
Fine Aggregate 1,465 pounds 2.68 8.76
Admixture 4-6 ounces - 2.70
TOTAL 3,543 pounds - 27.00
2018 02312-1 150407

B. Samples:
1. Submit Mix Proportions and Trial Batch Test Results for Acceptance:
a. Prepare the trial batches using the specified cement and aggregates
proposed to be used for the work.
b. Prepare sufficient quantity of trial batches to determine slump, workability,
consistency, and to provide sufficient test cylinders.
2. Test Cylinders: Prepare test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 with the
Following Exception:
a. Fill the concrete test cylinders to overflowing and tap sides lightly to settle
the mix.
b. Do not rod the concrete mix and strike off the excess material.
c. Place the cylinders in a safe location away from the construction activities.
Keep the cylinders moist by covering with wet burlap, or equivalent. Do not
sprinkle water directly on the cylinders.
d. After two days, place the cylinders in a protective container for transport to
the laboratory for testing. The concrete test cylinders are fragile and shall
be handled carefully. The container may be a box with a styrofoam or
similar lining that will limit the jarring and bumping of the cylinders.
3. Submit data for each of the test cylinders.
a. Identify the data for the mix and slump for each of the test cylinders.
Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143 with the following
exceptions:
1) Do not rod the concrete material.
b. Place in the cone in one semi-continuous filling operation, slightly
overfilled, tapped lightly and struck off, then measure slump and record.
c. Use a slump of the placed material greater than 9 inches, and sufficient to
allow the material to flow freely during placement.
1) After trial batch testing and acceptance, maintain slump developed
during testing during construction at all times plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Compression test eight test cylinders.
a. Test four test cylinders at three days and four at 28 days in accordance
with ASTM C 39 with the following exception:
1) Place test cylinders in a moist curing room prior to compression
testing. Exercise caution in moving and transporting the cylinders
since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal bumping,
banging, or jolting without damage.
2) Do not remove the test cylinder mold until the cylinder is to be capped
and tested.
5. The cylinders ordinarily may be capped with standard sulfur compound or
neoprene pads.
a. Perform the capping carefully to prevent premature fractures.
b. Use neoprene pads a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, and 1/2 inch larger in
diameter than the test cylinders.
c. Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach a minimum
age of three days.
6. The compression strength of the four test cylinders tested at 28 days shall be
equal to or greater than the minimum required compression strength but not to
exceed maximum compression strength.
7. If the trial batch tests do not meet the Specifications for strength or density,
change the mix design proportions, and make additional trial batches and tests
until an acceptable trial batch is produced that meets the Specifications.
a. All the test batches and acceptability of materials shall be paid by the
CONTRACTOR.
b. After acceptance, do not change the mix design without submitting a new
mix design and test information.
2018 02312-2 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Controlled density Backfill Components:

1. Type II low alkali portland cement as specified herein.
2. Class F fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618.
3. Water as specified in Section 03300.
4. Air entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C 260.
5. Fine Aggregate: Concrete sand, but need not conform to ASTM C 33. No more
than 12 percent of aggregate shall pass a No. 200 sieve, and no plastic fines
shall be present.
6. Coarse Aggregate: Pea gravel no larger than 3/8 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Place controlled density backfill by any method which preserves the quality of
the material in terms of compressive strength and density.
a. The basic requirement for placement equipment and placement methods
is the maintenance of its fluid properties.
b. Transport and place material so that it flows easily around, beneath or
through walls, pipes, or other structures.
c. Use a slump, consistency, workability, flow characteristics, and
pumpability (where required) such that the material when placed is self-
compacting, self-densifying, and has sufficient plasticity that compaction or
mechanical vibration is not required.
A. General: Make provisions for and furnish all material for the test specimens, and
provide manual assistance to assist the ENGINEER in preparing said specimens.
Be responsible for the care of and providing curing condition for the test specimens.
B. Tests by OWNER:
1. During the progress of construction, the OWNER will have tests made to
determine whether the controlled density backfill, as being produced, complies
with the requirements specified hereinbefore:
a. These tests will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31, and ASTM C 39
with exceptions as given herein.
b. Test cylinders will be made and delivered to the laboratory by the
ENGINEER and the testing expense will be borne by the OWNER.
2. Not less than three cylinder specimens will be tested for each 150 cubic yards
of controlled density backfill and not less than three specimens for each half
day's placement. One cylinder will be tested at three days and two at 28 days.
3. The OWNER will test the air content of the controlled density backfill by volume
by measurement. Test will be made immediately after discharge from the mixer
in accordance with ASTM C 231.
C. Tests by CONTRACTOR:
1. Test the slump of controlled density backfill using a slump cone in accordance
with ASTM C 143 with exceptions as given herein.
2018 02312-3 150407

a. Test the slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary
to keep the slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so
by the ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
2018 02312-4 150407

SECTION 02318
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Trench excavation, fine grading, pipe bedding, backfilling, and
compaction for the following, including requirements for ditch crossings:
1. Pipe and electrical conduits.
2. Manholes, valves, or other accessories.
3. Potable water pipe appurtenances.
1. Section 02260 - Excavation Support and Protection.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 117 - Test Method for Material Finer than 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing.
2. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Course
3. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
4. D 1556 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand
Cone Method.
5. D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
Soils.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Products Data: For all proposed bedding and backfill materials.

1. Material source.
2. Gradation.
3. Testing data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches and that
is free of leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other vegetable matter.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete
are not acceptable.
B. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02722.
C. Gravel:
2018 02318-1 150407

1. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to
the specified sizes and gradations.
2. Free of vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious matter.
3. Crush or waste coarse material and add or waste fine material in order to meet
the specified gradations.
4. Fraction of Material Passing Number 40 Sieve: Material having plasticity index
not greater than 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
5. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 131.
6. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as follows when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing Sieve

(Square Openings) A B C
3 inch 100 -- --
1-1/2 inch -- 100 --
1 inch -- -- 100
Number 4 30-70 30-70 40-80
Number 200 0-15 0-15 5-20
D. Native Material:
1. Sound, earthen material passing the 1 inch sieve.
2. Percent of material passing the Number 200 sieve by weight shall not exceed
30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.
E. Sand:
1. Clean, coarse, natural sand.
2. Nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
3. 100 percent shall pass a 1/2 inch screen.
4. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 screen.
F. Select Material: Sound earthen material for which the sum of the plasticity index
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and the percent of material by weight
passing the Number 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 136. Organic content shall not be greater than 3 percent by volume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Before laying pipes or electrical conduits in fill, place fill and compact it to not
less than 2 feet above top of pipe or conduit.
2. After placing and compacting fill, excavate through fill and fine grade as
required in this Section.
B. Protection: Stabilize excavation as specified in Section 02260.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Trench Excavation:
1. General Requirements:
2018 02318-2 150407

a. If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements or other reasons, trench
width at top of pipe is increased beyond width specified in this Section,
upgrade laying conditions or install stronger pipe designed in conformance
with Specifications for increased trench width, without additional cost.
b. Pipe and Electrical Conduits:
1) Lay pipe and electrical conduits in open trench.
2) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of rock or any material that
by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to provide uniform
bearing surface, remove such rock or other material to a depth of not
less than 4 inches below bottom of pipe and refill to grade with
aggregate base course material or sand placed at uniform density,
with minimum possible compaction, at no additional cost.
3) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable material
which is incapable of properly supporting pipe, remove such material
to a depth and for the length required, as determined by the
ENGINEER, and then refill trench to grade with aggregate base
course or sand, compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.
4) Where indicated on the Drawings, cradle pipe in concrete.
c. Trench Widths:
1) Minimum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe 4 Inches in Diameter and
over (Measured at Top of Pipe): Not less than outside diameter of
pipe plus 18 inches.
2) Maximum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe (Measured at Top of Pipe):
a) For Pipe Sizes 4 Inches to and Including 24 Inches: Not to
exceed outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
3) Maximum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe (Measured at Top of Pipe):
a) For Pipe Sizes Larger than 24 Inches: Not to exceed outside
diameter of pipe plus 36 inches.
d. For Manholes, Valves, or Other Accessories:
1) Provide excavations sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear
between their outer surfaces and embankment or shoring which may
be used to hold banks and protect them.
2) Do not backfill with earth under manholes, vaults, tanks, or valves.
3) Fill any unauthorized excess excavation below elevation indicated on
the Drawings for foundation of any structure with sand, aggregate
base material, bedding material, or concrete at no additional cost.
4) Backfilling of Manhole Excavation: Conform to backfilling
requirements as specified for trenches in this Section.
e. Potable Water Pipe Appurtenances:
1) Lay in trenches separate from those used for sewers.
2) Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay in
trenches having cover of not less than 3 feet below surface of ground
and located at distance of not less than 10 feet from any parallel
sewer trench.
f. At Road Crossings or Existing Driveways:
1) Make provision for trench crossings at these points, either by means
of backfills, tunnels, or temporary bridges.
B. Trench Fine Grading:

1. For Pipes 16 Inches in Nominal Diameter and Under:
a. Unless otherwise specified, accurately grade bottom of trench to provide
uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe, on undisturbed soil
at every point along pipe's entire length, except for portions of pipe where
it is necessary to excavate for bells and for proper sealing of pipe joints.
2. For Pipe over 16 Inches in Diameter:
2018 02318-3 150407

a. Overexcavate bottom of trench by at least 4 inches, or 1/12 outside
diameter of pipe, whichever is greater.
b. Fill overcut with bedding material specified herein, and fine graded as
specified above.
c. Place bedding material at uniform density, with minimum possible
compaction.
d. Where trench excavation is below grade of bedding material, restore
trench bottom to proper grade by backfilling and compacting backfill to
95 percent of maximum density, at no additional cost. Use bedding
material as specified in this Section.
3. Bell or Coupling Holes:
a. Dig holes after trench bottom has been graded.
b. Provide holes of sufficient width to provide ample room for grouting,
banding, or welding.
c. Excavate holes only as necessary in making joints and to ensure that pipe
rests upon prepared trench bottom and not supported by any portion of the
joint.
4. Depressions for Joints, Other than Bell-and-spigot:
a. Make in accordance with recommendations of joint manufacturer for
particular joint used.
C. Pipe Bedding:
1. After Pipe Laid:
a. Place bedding material under and around pipe to level even with spring
line of pipe, and compact to 90 percent of maximum density.
b. Fill section of trench from spring line to 12 inches above top of pipe with
bedding material and water settle or mechanically compact to 90 percent
of maximum density.
2. Pipe Displacement:
a. Take necessary precautions in placement and compaction of bedding
material to prevent displacement of piping.
b. In event there is movement or floating, re-excavate re-lay, and backfill the
pipe.
3. Consolidation:
a. When acceptable to the ENGINEER, perform consolidation by flooding
and poling, or jetting so as to obtain compaction of backfill material at least
equal to that specified.
b. Do not use water settling methods when backfill material is not sufficiently
granular in nature to be self-draining during and after consolidation and
when foundation materials may be softened or otherwise damaged by
water.
c. When flooding, poling, or jetting methods are used, place and consolidate
material used as backfill in layers not exceeding 4 feet in thickness.
d. Supplement flooding and poling, or jetting methods by use of vibratory or
other compaction equipment when necessary to obtain required
compaction.
D. Trench Backfill:
1. Place and compact backfill in accordance with following requirements and
Section 01734 (which ever is greater):
a. From 12 inches above top of pipe to natural surface level.
b. Finish grade indicated on the Drawings as follows:
1) Backfill for Trench Cuts Across Roadways and Paved Streets:
Backfill trench to underside of specified pavement replacement with
2018 02318-4 150407

aggregate base course material compacted to 90 percent of
maximum density.
2) Trench Backfill for Longitudinal Trench Cuts in Roadways, Paved
Areas, and Storage Areas:
a) Backfill trench up to within 2 feet of finish grade with native
material compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.
b) Then backfill from 1 foot below finish grade to finish grade, or to
underside of specified aggregate base course material as
indicated on the Drawings, or to underside of specified
pavement replacement with native material, aggregate base
course material, or select material compacted to 90 percent of
maximum density.
c. Trench Backfill for Trench Cuts in Areas Outside the Improved Section of
Roadways and in Open Country: Backfill trench from 12 inches above top
of pipe to finish grade with native material compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density.
d. Trench Backfill Through Earth Slopes or Embankments Supporting
Structures, Through Structural Fill, or Adjacent to and/or Under Structures:
Backfill trench from 12 inches above top of pipe to finish grade with ABC
material or approved select material compacted to 90 percent of maximum
density.
e. Existing Conditions: Where existing underground pipes or conduits larger
than 3 inches in diameter cross trenches above new work:
1) Backfill from bottom of trench to spring line of intersecting pipe or
conduit with aggregate base course material compacted to
90 percent of maximum density when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922.
2) Extend aggregate base course material 2 feet on either side of
intersecting pipe or conduit to ensure that material remains in place
while other backfill is placed.
E. Compacting Native Material:

1. Assure that native material, when used as previously specified, is capable of
being compacted to degree specified.
2. If native material cannot be compacted to density as previously specified,
remove and dispose of material whether it has been placed in trench as backfill
or not, and utilize other backfill material from another source acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
F. Excess Material:
1. Remove excess excavated material from the project site as specified in
Section 02200 – Site Preparation.
A. Tests:
1. Confirmation Tests:
a. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1) Accomplish specified compaction of trench backfill.
2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and confirm that
compaction work complies, and is complying at all times, with
requirements specified in this Section concerning compaction,
control, and testing.
3) Cost of Confirmation Tests: Paid for by the CONTRACTOR.
2018 02318-5 150407

4)
Qualifications of Contractor's Testing Laboratory: Provide lab
certification.
5) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the
ENGINEER.
b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:
1) Perform testing not less than as follows:
a) For Trenches: At each test location include tests for each type or
class of backfill from bedding to finish grade.
b) In Open Fields: Two every 250 linear feet.
c) Along Dirt or Gravel Road or off Traveled Right-of-way: Two
every 500 linear feet.
d) Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each crossing.
e) Under Pavement Cuts or Within 2 Feet of Pavement Edges: One
location every 250 linear feet.
2. Compliance Tests:
a. Frequency of Testing: Periodic compliance tests will be made by the
ENGINEER to verify that compaction is meeting requirements previously
specified.
b. For Tests in Water Settled Backfill: Remove overburden above level at
which the ENGINEER wishes to test. Backfill and recompact excavation
after testing is completed.
c. If Compaction Fails to Meet Specified Requirements: Perform remedial
work by one of the following methods:
1) Remove and replace backfill at proper density.
2) Bring density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
d. Retesting:
1) Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify
that remedial work has brought compaction within specified
requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
2) Contractor's Confirmation Tests During Performance of Remedial
Work:
a) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
b) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation tests.
3. Water Testing Pipe:
a. After Bedding the Pipe, CONTRACTOR Has the Following Option To:
1) Water-test pipe.
2) Backfill to surface, at his own risk, before water-testing pipe.
b. If pipe does not pass test, uncover pipe, locate leaks, repair and retest,
repeating until pipe section under test passes.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Bedding Materials:
1. For Pipe less than 16 Inch Nominal Size: Except as otherwise specified, use
sand or aggregate base course.
2. For Pipe from 16 Inch to 48 Inch Nominal Size: Except as otherwise specified,
use sand or aggregate base course or Type B gravel.
3. For Pipe over 48 Inches: Same as specified in subparagraph 2.01D1 or Type A
gravel.
4. For Polyvinyl Chloride or Other Plastic Pipe less than 2 Inches in Diameter:
Sand or select material.
END OF SECTION
2018 02318-6 150407

SECTION 02360
SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Soil treatment for control of unwanted plant life.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include for each material to be used, composition by percentage,

dilution schedule, rate and volume calculations, intended application rate; current
EPA-approved labels and Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used.
B. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Complete handling, mixing, application, cleanup, and

safety instructions.
D. Certificate of Treatment: Indicate materials and quantities used, and times of

application.
A. Qualifications of Applicator: Licensed applicator in the State where project is located.
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not apply treatment materials when soil or fill is excessively wet in order to
avoid surface flow of material from application site.
A. Notification of Treatment: Notify ENGINEER in advance so that ENGINEER may be

present during application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Vegetation Control:
1. Soil Sterilization Type. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. DuPont, Oust.
b. Drexel Chemical Corp.'s, Diuron 4L.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that soil is unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb soil treatment materials and
ready to receive treatment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
2018 02360-1 150407

B. Verify final grading is complete.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Vegetation Control:
1. Provide vegetation control material for unwanted plant life under structures,
sidewalks, and pavements.
2. Apply vegetation control material in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3. Do not allow soil treatment materials to contact areas not designated for
treatment.
B. Prevent spillage and contact by wind-carried material.
C. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same treatment materials and application as
original treatment.
3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit soil grading or surface disruption over treated work.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Apply Vegetation Control as follows:

1. Below pump station manifold slab.
2. ABC Areas.
3. Gravel Areas.
END OF SECTION
2018 02360-2 150407

SECTION 02581
ELECTRICAL MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Electrical manholes and electrical manhole accessories.
1. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.
3. Section 16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit sketch of each manhole with plan and sections showing manhole
dimensions and actual installation of cables trained along the side walls of the
manhole.
a. Include a statement of compliance with the requirements of applicable
codes on each manhole sketch.
b. Indicate on sketch those manholes where cable splices will be installed.
c. Indicate ductbank knock-out sections on each manhole wall.
2. Submit underground ductbank profile drawings. Include site elevations, grade
level, ductbank elevations, manhole elevations, and piping that is crossed.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANHOLES
A. Use precast manholes only when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
B. Size: As indicated on the Drawings and to suit duct banks, conduit, and cable
installation requirements as specified in Sections 16123, 16124, and 16125 but not
less than:
1. 6 feet wide by 6 feet long by 7 feet deep for 600 volt system.
2. 8 feet wide by 10 feet long by 7 feet deep for medium voltage system.
2018 02581-1 150407

C. Comply with ANSI C2 as minimum requirement for manholes and manhole
accessories, including grade rings and covers.
D. Pulling Eyes: Secured to reinforcement on interior walls.
E. Cable Racks: Non-corrosive spaced to support each conductor at 2 foot intervals.
F. Manhole Covers: Cast iron; frame and inner pan for traffic loading and for electrical
installations; inner pan with caulking joint; radial block tread, lifting ring, and
machined to fit; word, ELECTRICAL, engraved on top side; 30 inch clear opening.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Alhambra Foundry.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Route signal cable such as instrumentation and communication cables separately

from alternating current power and control cable as specified in Section 16123.
B. Identify cables and conductors routed through manholes as specified in

Section 16075.
C. Support medium voltage conductors and low voltage conductors 4/0 American Wire
Gauge and larger on industrial grade insulators. Route and tie all conductors in
manholes to prevent damage during personnel ingress.
D. Install cover drainpipe to minimum 12 by 12 by 12 inch drain rock approximately

10 feet from manhole on down slope.
E. Install top of manholes at 4 inches above finish grade or surface. Install surveyor
markings to establish finish grade.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Seal manholes and covers to avoid water leakage within manholes.
END OF SECTION
2018 02581-2 150407

SECTION 02722
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Aggregate base course.
1. Section 02300 - Earthwork.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. State of California Department of Transportation:

1. CALTRANS - Standard Specification.
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 117 - Test Method for Material Finer than 75 M (Number 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregate by Washing.
2. C 136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
Soils.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Source, gradation, and testing data for aggregate base course.
B. Quality Control:
1. Test Reports: Reports for tests required by Sections of CALTRANS Standard
Specifications.
2. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates as required by Sections of CALTRANS
Standard Specifications.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture during
delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Class 2, 3/4 inch maximum aggregate size free from vegetable matter and
other deleterious substances and of such nature that aggregate can be
compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete
are not acceptable.
3. Coarse aggregate material retained in Number 4 sieve shall consist of material
of which at least 25 percent by weight shall be crushed particles when tested in
accordance with California Test 205.
2018 02722-1 150407
4. Aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement, or other chemical material
before the Durability Index test is performed.
5. Aggregate grading and sand equivalent tests shall be performed to represent
not more than 500 cubic yards or one day's production of material, whichever is
smaller.
6. Grade within the limits and conform to quality requirements as follows when
tested in accordance with California Test 202:
Sieve Sizes Percent by Weight
(Square Openings) Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
Number 4 35-55
Number 30 10-30
Number 200 2-9
Quality Requirements
Description California Test Minimum Test Result
Resistance (R Value) 301 78
Sand Equivalent 217 22
Durability Index 229 35
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions upon which the work specified in this
Section depends for defects that may influence installation and performance.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Preparation: Prepare as specified in Section 02300, "Earthwork."
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish, spread, and compact aggregate base course material to the lines, grades,
1. Spreading: Spread in accordance with sections of CALTRANS Standard
Specifications.
2. Compacting: Compact in accordance with sections of CALTRANS Standard
Specifications.
A. Tests: Perform field tests as required by sections of CALTRANS Standard

Specifications.
END OF SECTION
2018 02722-2 150407

SECTION 02742
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Asphalt concrete pavement on prepared subgrade or aggregate

base course, and on existing pavement, to lines, grades, compacted thicknesses,
and cross sections indicated on the Drawings.
1. 02300 - Earthwork.
2. 02722 - Aggregate Base Course.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. C 117 - Test Method for Material Finer than 75 M (Number 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
2. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
3. C 136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
4. D 977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
5. D 1559 - Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
Using Marshall Apparatus.
6. D 3381 - Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for use in
Pavement Construction.
Soils.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Bituminous Prime Coat: Consist of application of hot bituminous material on

previously prepared base course.
1. Compact the asphalt concrete to at least 95 percent of the density of the
laboratory specimen of the same mixture subjected to 75 blows of a standard
Marshall hammer test in accordance with ASTM D 1559.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed mix design and gradation of materials.
B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificate of Compliance.
A. Asphalt Concrete Delivery:
2018 02742-1 150407

1. Transport the mixture from the mixing plant to the point of use in vehicles
having tight bodies previously cleaned of all foreign materials.
2. Treat bodies as necessary to prevent material from sticking to the bodies.
3. Cover each load with canvas or other suitable material of sufficient size and
thickness to protect the asphalt mixture from the weather.
1. Asphalt Concrete:
a. Place asphalt concrete only when surface is dry, when atmospheric
temperature in the shade is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and rising, or above
50 degrees Fahrenheit if falling.
b. Do not place asphalt concrete when weather is foggy or rainy nor when
base on which material is to be placed is in wet or frozen condition.
2. Prime Coat:
a. Do not apply prime coat when atmospheric temperature is below
60 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Apply prime coat only when base course is dry or contains moisture not in
excess of that which will permit uniform distribution and desired
penetration.
A. Prime Coat:
1. Prior to requesting Engineer's acceptance for application, inspect area to be
coated to determine its fitness to receive bituminous priming material.
2. Do not begin application before area to be coated has been accepted for
application by the ENGINEER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Prime Coat: Use bituminous material for prime coat conforming to requirements for
SC-70 and apply at temperature of 105 degrees Fahrenheit to 175 degrees
Fahrenheit at rate of 0.3 to 0.6 gallons per square yard by use of bituminous
distributor.
B. Sand: Acceptable to the ENGINEER.
C. Tack Coat: Grade SS-1h anionic emulsion per ASTM D 977.
D. Asphalt Concrete Materials:

1. Asphalt Cement: Conform to requirements for asphalt cement, AR-4000,
ASTM D 3381.
2. Mineral Aggregate:
a. Consist of coarse aggregate of crushed stone or gravel composed of hard,
durable particles, sand, and filler as specified following herein.
1) Coarse Aggregate: Portion of material retained on Number 8 sieve.
2) Fine Aggregate: That portion passing Number 8 sieve.
b. Provide composite material that is uniformly graded from coarse to fine
and that complies with requirements of one of following gradings when
2018 02742-2 150407

c. Asphalt concrete shall be as indicated on the Drawings, but if not indicated
shall be two course plant mix for asphalt concrete having an overall
thickness of 2-1/2 inches or more. If less than 2-1/2 inches asphalt
concrete, use single course plant mix.
Plant Mix, Two Course Plant Mix, Single Course

Seal, 3/4 inch Base, 1-3/4 inch 1-1/2 inch
Thick Minimum Thick Minimum Thick Minimum
Percent Percent Percent
Sieve Size Sieve Size Sieve Size
Passing Passing Passing
1/2" 100 1-1/4" 100 3/4" 100
3/8" 95 - 100 1" 87 - 100 1/2" 75 - 95
No. 4 50 - 70 3/4" 75 - 90 3/8" 65 - 85
No. 8 35 - 55 3/8" 55 - 72 No. 4 50 - 65
No. 30 15 - 30 No. 4 40 - 60 No. 8 35 - 50
No. 100 5 - 15 No. 8 30 - 50 No. 30 15 - 30
No. 200 3-8 No. 30 15 - 30 No. 100 5 - 15
No. 100 5 - 15 No. 200 3-8
No. 200 3-8
3. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Consist of at least 70 percent by weight of each size aggregate and
consist of particles which have at least one rough, angular surface
produced by crushing.
1) Have percentage of wear of not more than 50 at 500 revolutions, as
determined by ASTM C 131.
b. Aggregate Plasticity Index: Not more than two as determined by
ASTM D 4318.
c. Sand may be added to crusher or pit run product to supply any deficiency
in 8 mesh size, and filler may be added to supply any deficiency in
200 mesh material. If aggregate contains an excess of sand, wasting will
be required.
d. Filler:
1) Use finely powdered limestones, Portland cement, or other artificially
or naturally powdered mineral dust, acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2) Weigh filler and add separately to each batch at time of proportioning.
3) Use filler that is free from deleterious matter of any kind.
4) It shall be of such fineness that it shall meet following requirements:
a) Passing 50 mesh Sieve: 100 percent.
b) Passing 200 mesh Sieve: At least 75 percent.
5) Determine amount of material passing the Number 200 sieve in
e. Provide composite aggregate that is free from vegetable matter, lumps or
balls of clay, adherent films of clay, or other matter which would prevent
thorough coating of asphalt cement.
f. Materials derived from processing demolished, or removed asphalt
concrete, are not acceptable.
E. Fog Sealing: Asphalt emulsion, Grade SS-1h.
2018 02742-3 150407

2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Bituminous Distributor: Designed and equipped so as to distribute bituminous

material uniformly at even heat on variable widths of surface at readily determined
and controlled rate with pressure range of 25 to 75 pounds per square inch.
B. Liquid Asphalt Distributor:

1. Designed and operated to distribute asphaltic material in uniform spray without
atomization.
2. Equipped with bitumeter having dial registering feet of travel per minute.
a. Locate dial so that it is visible to truck driver so that he can maintain
constant speed required for application at specified rate.
3. Equip pump with tachometer having dial registering gallons per minute passing
through nozzles.
a. Locate dial so that it is readily visible to operator.
4. Provide means for accurately indicating temperature of asphaltic material in
distributor at all times.
a. Locate thermometer well so that it is not in contact with, or close to,
heating tube.
5. Have spray bar having normal width of application of not less than 12 feet and
capable of providing for application of lesser width when necessary.
6. Provided with hose and spray nozzle attachment for applying asphaltic material
to patches and areas inaccessible to spray bar.
7. Equipped with heating attachments and capable of circulating asphaltic
material through spray bar during entire heating process.
C. Asphalt Concrete Mixing Plants:

1. Equipment:
a. Use screen and storage bins at plant of sufficient capacity to furnish the
necessary amount of all aggregates, when operating at the maximum
capacity of the plant, with no periods of undue waiting for material.
1) Use bins consisting of at least two compartments, so proportioned as
to insure adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the aggregate.
2) Provide each compartment with an overflow pipe of such size and at
such location as to prevent any backing up of material into other
compartments.
b. Dryer:
1) Designed to heat and dry the aggregate to specification requirements
and to agitate it continuously during the heating.
2) Capable of preparing aggregates at a rate equal to the full rated
capacity of the plant.
c. Dust Collector:
1) So constructed as to waste or return uniformly to the hot elevator all
or any part of the material collected.
d. Mixer:
1) Adequate capacity, with twin shafts.
e. Thermometers:
1) Furnished for determining the temperature of the mix.
f. Weighting and Measuring Equipment:
1) Weighing or volumetric measuring equipment of sufficient capacity.
2) Devices to permit easy readjustment of any working part needing
readjustment, so that the equipment will function properly and
accurately.
3) Scales for weighing shall be attached to the bucket.
2018 02742-4 150407

4)All weighing equipment shall be tested and sealed by a
representative of the Inspector of Weights and Measures having
jurisdiction, as often as the ENGINEER may deem necessary to
insure accuracy.
g. Tanks for Storage of Bituminous Material:
1) Capable of heating the material under effective and positive control at
all times to temperatures within the range stipulated.
2. Asphalt Concrete Plant Operation:
a. Mineral Aggregate:
1) Dry and heat mineral and then screen into at least two fractions and
conveyed into separate compartments ready for proportioning and
mixing.
2) When Combined with Asphalt Cement:
a) Aggregate shall contain not more than 2 percent moisture by
weight. Be at a temperature within the range of that specified for
the asphalt cement but not more than 25 degrees Fahrenheit
above the temperature of the asphalt cement.
b. Combine dry aggregate in the plant in the proportionate amounts of each
fraction of aggregate required to meet the specified grading.
1) Introduce the asphalt cement into the mixer in the amount and at the
temperature for the particular material being used.
2) Continue mixing for at least 30 seconds, and for such longer period
as may be necessary to coat all the particles.
c. When a continuous mixer is used, determine the mixing time by weight
method using the following formula:
1) Mixing time in seconds = Pugmill dead capacity in pounds.
2) Pugmill output in pounds per second.
D. Asphalt Concrete Placing Equipment:

1. Use equipment for placing, spreading, shaping, and finishing asphalt concrete
consisting of a self-contained power machine operating in such manner that no
supplemental spreading, shaping, or finishing is required to provide surface
which complies with requirements for smoothness contained herein.
a. In areas inaccessible to the machine, hand spreading may be permitted.
2. Furnish one self-propelled, pneumatic-tired roller, and one 8 ton (minimum),
smooth-wheel tandem roller.
a. When spreading is in excess of 100 tons per hour, furnish one additional
roller of either type for each additional 100 tons, or fraction thereof, spread
per hour.
2.03 MIXES
A. Asphalt Cement:
1. Do not mix at temperatures lower than 275 degrees Fahrenheit, nor higher
than 325 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Usual amount of asphalt cement, by weight, to be added to aggregate shall be
5.4 to 5.8 percent of weight of mixture.
B. Asphalt Concrete:
1. Before being delivered to the site, mix aggregate with asphalt cement at central
mixing plant.
2. Use mixing plants that are in good working order with no excessively worn
parts and so equipped that:
2018 02742-5 150407

a. Temperatures of aggregates leaving dryer, of asphalt cement entering
mixer, and of mix leaving mixer can be readily determined and positively
controlled within specification limits at all times.
b. Weights of different sizes of aggregates and of asphalt cement as set by
the ENGINEER can be consistently introduced into mixer.
c. Asphalt cement can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture with
aggregate completely coated.
d. Mixing time can be positively controlled to minimum specified.
e. Bin samples of aggregate can be readily obtained.
f. Provide means of calibrating weighing devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protection
1. Prime Coated Surfaces:
a. Maintain surfaces until succeeding layer of pavement has been placed.
b. During this interval, protect primed surfaces against damage and repair
any broken spots.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Prime Coat:
a. Where portions of base course prepared for immediate treatment are
excessively dry, sprinkle such portions lightly with water immediately in
advance of prime coat application.
b. Immediately following preparation of base course, apply bituminous
material by means of bituminous distributor at the temperature previously
specified.
c. Apply priming material in manner that results in uniform distribution being
obtained at all points of surface to be primed.
d. Following the application of prime material, allow the surface to dry for a
period of not less than 48 hours without being disturbed, or for such
additional period of time as may be necessary to obtain penetration into
the base course and drying out or evaporation of the volatiles from prime
material.
e. Spread sufficient sand on areas which show an excess of bituminous
material to effectively blot up and cure the excess.
2. Base Courses:
a. Thoroughly clean base and apply prime coat before placing asphalt
concrete.
b. Thoroughly clean any existing base, surfacing, or pavement prior to
placing plant-mixed surfacing.
c. Where existing pavement is being widened or extended cut to straight
vertical face and treat with asphalt paint binder prior to paving operations.
d. When asphalt concrete is to be applied over existing pavement and local
irregularities in existing surface would result in course of more than
specified thickness, bring surface of existing pavement to uniform contour
by patching with asphalt concrete thoroughly tamped or rolled until it
conforms with surrounding surface, and then apply tack coat.
2018 02742-6 150407

3.02 APPLICATION
A. At Existing Asphalt to Be Paved Over: Apply tack coat at minimum rate of 0.10
gallons per square yard.
B. Placing and Compacting Asphalt Concrete:

1. Placing and Compacting Asphalt Mixture: Progress in sections generally not
more than 750 linear feet in length.
2. Spreading of Mixture:
a. Spread, shape, and finish by specified equipment.
b. Spread each successive strip adjacent to previously spread strip.
c. Do not compact minimum 6 inch width of each strip adjacent to new strip
until after new strip has been placed.
d. Spread as nearly continuous as possible.
e. Laying Against Vertical Surfaces Such as Gutters: Roughen and clean
face of vertical surfaces as required for proper bonding and then paint with
light coating of asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt.
f. At Terminations of New Surface Courses: Feather asphalt mixture into
existing surface over such distance as may be required to produce smooth
riding transition.
g. Base Course and Single Course Construction: Joined by vertical butt
joints, finished and rolled to smooth surface.
h. Rolling:
1) Perform initial or "breakdown" rolling with tandem power roller and
follow spreading operation when mixture has reached temperature
where it does not "pick up" on rolls.
2) Keep rolls properly moistened but do not use surplus of water.
3) Follow initial rolling with pneumatic roller when mixture is in proper
condition and when rolling does not cause undue displacement,
cracking, or shoving.
4) Begin rolling at sides and progress gradually to center, lapping each
preceding track until entire surface has been rolled.
5) Terminate alternate trips of roller in stops at least three feet distant
from any preceding stop.
6) At any place not accessible to roller, thoroughly compact mixture with
tampers and finish, if necessary, with hot iron to provide uniform layer
over entire width being paved.
3. Provide finish surface having uniform texture.
C. Fog Sealing:
1. Fog seal asphalt pavement after compaction with fog sealing material applied
at rate of 0.05 gallons per square yard at following locations:
a. At locations indicated on the Drawings.
D. Full-depth Asphalt Pavement:

1. Contractor's Option:
a. Install either asphalt and aggregate base material or full-depth asphalt
pavement in areas where paving is indicated on the Drawings or specified
to be two inches of asphalt concrete over aggregate base course.
b. If option is selected to install full-depth asphalt pavement, prepare
subgrade as previously specified herein.
c. Substitute asphalt concrete for aggregate base at ratio of one inch of
asphalt concrete to 2-1/2 inches of aggregate base material. Use full-
2018 02742-7 150407

depth asphalt pavement not less than 4 inches in thickness after
compaction.
d. Place asphalt concrete in courses of not more than four inches.
e. Use compaction equipment in accordance with Following course
thicknesses:
1) 1 to 2 Inch Thickness: Minimum 8 ton roller.
2. Pneumatic Rollers Used for Initial or Secondary Rolling: Use 12 to 15 tons with
tires capable of 90 pounds per square inch inflation pressure.
3. Asphalt Concrete for Full-depth Asphalt Pavement:
a. Asphalt concrete as previously specified in this section.
b. Apply bituminous prime coats where full-depth asphalt pavement is
installed.
c. Contractor's Option: If CONTRACTOR elects to use full-depth asphalt
pavement, at road shoulders reduce aggregate base course to minimum
aggregate thickness of 4 inches.
4. Except for asphalt thickness, aggregate base course thickness and prime
coating, full-depth asphalt pavement shall comply with requirements of this
Section.
A. Placement:
1. Place the mixture on the roads, pavements, or walks at a temperature not less
than 225 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Tests:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling and control testing for the asphalt
concrete. The type and size of the samples shall be suitable to determine
conformance with stability, density, thickness and other specified requirements.
Use an approved power saw or core drill for cutting samples. Furnish all tools,
labor, and materials for cutting samples, testing, and replacing the pavement
where samples were removed. Take a minimum one sample per 200 tons of
asphalt concrete placed.
C. Inspection:
1. Asphalt Concrete: When tested with a 10 foot straightedge laid on the surface
parallel with the centerline of the road, the variation of the surface from the
testing edge of the straightedge shall not be more than 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
2018 02742-8 150407

SECTION 02952
PAVEMENT RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Resurfacing roads and paved surfaces in which surface is removed or
damaged by installation of new work.
1. Limiting Dimensions:
a. Determine the exact lengths and dimensions of such roads,
pavements, parking areas, and walks that will require removal and
replacement for new work.
b. Join existing surfaces to terminals of new surfacing in smooth juncture.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Designs:
1. Prior to placement of asphalt concrete, submit full details, including design and
calculations for the asphalt concrete mix proposed.
2. Submit gradation of aggregate base.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder shall be PG 58-28 in accordance with Section 9-02.1(4) of the
B. Aggregate Base Course shall be in accordance with Section 9-03.6 of the Standard
Specifications.
C. Asphalt Pavement shall be 1/2 inch HMA in accordance with Sections 9-03.8 of the
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Roads, Pavements, Parking Areas, and Walks:
1. Equipment Requirements: Good condition, capable of performing work
intended in satisfactory manner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Aggregate Surface Removal Replacement:
1. When trench cut is in aggregate surfaced areas, replace aggregate base
course material with material matching existing material compacted to 95 percent
of its maximum density.
B. Pavement Removal and Temporary Asphalt Replacement:
1. Install temporary asphalt pavement or first course of permanent pavement
replacement immediately following backfilling and compaction of trenches that
have been cut through existing pavement.
2018 02952 - 1 150407

2. Except as otherwise provided, maintain this temporary pavement in safe and
reasonably smooth condition until required permanent pavement is installed.
3. Remove and dispose of temporary paving from project site.
4. Where longitudinal trench is partly in pavement, replace pavement to original
pavement edge, on a straight line, parallel to centerline of roadway.
5. Where no part of longitudinal trench is in pavement, surfacing replacement
shall only be required where existing surfacing materials have been removed or
damaged.
C. Asphalt Pavement Replacement:
1. Replace asphalt pavement to same thickness as adjacent pavement and
match as nearly as possible adjacent pavement in texture, unless otherwise
2. Cut existing asphalt pavements to be removed for trenches or other
underground construction by wheel cutter, clay spade, or other device capable of
making neat, reasonably straight and smooth cut without damaging adjacent
pavement. Cutting device operation shall be subject to acceptance of
ENGINEER.
3. Cut and trim existing pavement after placement of required aggregate base
course and just prior to placement of asphalt concrete for pavement replacement,
and paint trimmed edges with material for painting asphalt concrete pavement
immediately prior to constructing new abutting asphalt pavements. No extra
payment will be made for these items, and all costs incurred in performing this
work shall be incidental to pipe laying or pavement replacement.
4. Conform replacement of asphalt pavement to contour of original pavement.
D. Curb, Gutter, and Sidewalk Replacement:
1. Where any concrete curb, gutter, or sidewalk has been removed or displaced,
replace to nearest construction joints with new Class A curb, gutter, or sidewalk
to same dimensions and finish as original construction that was removed:
a. Provide expansion joints of same spacing and thickness as original
construction.
A. Tests:
1. As specified in the Standard Specifications.
B. Inspection:
1. Asphalt Concrete:
a. Lay 10-foot straightedge parallel to centerline of trench when the
trenches run parallel to street, and across pavement replacement when
trench crosses street at angle.
b. Remove and correct any deviation in cut pavement replacement
greater than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
2018 02952 - 2 150407

SECTION 03071
EPOXIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Epoxy.
2. Epoxy gel.
3. Epoxy bonding agent.
1. Section 03072 - Epoxy Resin - Portland Cement Bonding Agent.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life limitations
set forth by manufacturer.
2. Perform and conduct work of this section in neat orderly manner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing epoxy materials.
B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive two-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material

containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics
when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the
following or equal:
1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI.
2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
2018 03071-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div 3\03071.doc
Physical Test Required Results
Characteristic Method
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Compressive ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch minimum
Strength at 24 hours and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Bond Strength -- Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy.
Gel Time for 5 Mil -- Four hours maximum at 77 degrees
Film Fahrenheit.
Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and
B. Epoxy Gel: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel.
C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive 1001 Liquid LPL.
2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod.
3. If increased tack time is required for concrete placement, epoxy resin -
Portland cement bonding agent as specified in Section 03072 may be used
instead of epoxy bonding agent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions.
B. Epoxy:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Epoxy Gel:
2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.
3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal work.
D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:

2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal
finishing and patching of similar sized small defects.
END OF SECTION
2018 03071-2 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div 3\03071.doc
SECTION 03072
EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM):

1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens).
2. C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement
Mortars.
3. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
4. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear.
B. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA).

1. Program Report Number: FHWA/RD 86/193.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110.
B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered
providing the CONTRACTOR requests its use in writing to the ENGINEER. This
request shall be accompanied by:
1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory
that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified performance
criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards.
2. Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a one year proved
record of performance of bonding Portland cement mortar/concrete to
hardened Portland cement mortar/concrete, confirmed by actual field tests and
five successful installations that the ENGINEER can investigate.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable
viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.
2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.
3. Component "C" shall be a blend of selected Portland cements and sands.
4. The material shall not contain asbestos.
2018 03072-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div3\03072.doc
2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Properties of the Mixed Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Pot life: 75 to 105 minutes.
2. Contact time: 24 hours.
3. Color: Dark gray.
B. Properties of the Cured Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109.
a. One day: 810 pounds per square inch minimum.
b. Seven day: 6,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
c. 28 day: 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496.
a. 28 days: 540 pounds per square inch minimum.
3. Flexural Strength:
a. 1,100 pounds per square inch minimum in accordance with ASTM C 348.
4. Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C 882 modified at 14 days.
a. Zero Hours Open Time: 1,900 pounds per square inch minimum.
b. 24 Hours Open Time: 1,500 pounds per square inch minimum.
5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.
6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested
under the procedures as set forth by the Federal Highway Administration
Program Report Number FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an
independent testing laboratory corrosion report showing prevention of
corrosion of the reinforcing steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mixing the Epoxy Resin: Shake contents of Components "A" and Component "B.”
Empty all of both components into a clean, dry, mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for
30 seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per
minute drill. Slowly add the entire contents of Component "C" while continuing to
mix for a minimum of three minutes and until uniform with no lumps. Mix only that
quantity that can be applied within its pot life.
B. Placement Procedure:
1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or "hopper type"
spray equipment.
a. For Hand Applications: Place fresh, plastic concrete/mortar while the
bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.
b. For Machine Applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry for
12 hours minimum.
C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/Portland Cement Adhesive
in the manufacturers current printed literature.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.
END OF SECTION
2018 03072-2 150407

SECTION 03102
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete formwork.
1. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Section 03600 - Grouts.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
B. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM):

1. A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plant, Sheet, and Strip.
4. A 580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire.
1. Design of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures without bulging,
spreading, or lifting of forms.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades,
2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard,
and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.
3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the work may be performed rapidly
and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.
4. Use forms that are clean and free from dirt, concrete, and other debris. Coat
with acceptable form release oil if required, prior to use or reuse.
2018 03102-1 150407

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Information on the CONTRACTOR's Proposed Forming System: Submit in such

detail as the ENGINEER may require to assure himself that intent of the
Specifications can be complied with by use of proposed system.
B. Alternate Combinations of Plywood Thickness and Stud Spacing: May be submitted.
A. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured

by manufacturers having minimum five years experience, except as otherwise
specified, or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Install work of this Section in accordance with local,

state, and federal regulations.
A. Requirements Due to Weather Condition:

1. Removal of Formwork: Do not remove forms from concrete which has been
placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit
until concrete has attained specified strength as determined by test cylinders
stored in field under equivalent conditions as concrete structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Form Ties:
1. General:
a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by
recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment.
b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.
c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms.
d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed, they
locate no metal or other material within 1-1/2-inches of the surface of the
concrete.
e. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of
concrete.
2. Cone-Snap or Flat Bar Form Ties:
a. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with
a minimum diameter of 1-inch at the surface of the concrete and
1-1/2-inches deep.
b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the
concrete.
3. Taper Ties:
a. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are driven,
plugs are located in center third of wall thickeners.
b. Dry-Pack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes:
1) Consist of mix of one part of Portland cement to one part of plaster
sand.
2018 03102-2 150407

2) Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that
mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted.
3) Admixtures or Additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar.
B. Built-Up Plywood Forms:

1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming system
subject to following minimum requirements:
a. Size and Material:
1) Full size 4- by 8-foot plywood sheets, except where smaller pieces
are able to cover entire area.
2) Sheet Construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4-inch nominal, made
with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that
is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and
alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.
b. Wales: Minimum 2- by 4-inch lumber.
c. Studding and Wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps, cups,
and bows.
C. Steel or Steel Framed Forms:

1. Steel Forms: Provide forms that are:
a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum deflection of
finish surface.
b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups, or
dents.
2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:
a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being braced.
b. Plywood Paneling: 5-ply, 5/8-inch nominal or 3/4-inch nominal, made with
100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated
or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium
and sodium hydroxide of cement.
D. Incidentals:
1. External Angles:
a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4-inch
bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer
strip on walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and openings.
b. Provide 1/4-inch bevel formed by utilizing true-dimensioned wood or solid
plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at expansion, and
construction joints.
2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according
to label directions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for
alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical
and electrical inserts or other embedded items.
2018 03102-3 150407

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forms and Accessories:

1. Vertical Forms:
a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed.
b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist
surface or other damage, forms may be removed.
2. Other Forms Supporting Concrete and Shoring: Remain in place as follows:
a. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum.
b. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, and Similar Members: 48 hours
minimum.
c. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified
strength f’c or until shoring is installed.
d. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength
reaches specified strength.
e. Wall Bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs
laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength.
3. Green Concrete:
a. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted.
b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of
specified strength f’c.
4. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces,
and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in
Section 03300.
B. Form Ties:
1. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot
centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie
holes as follows:
a. Remove form ties from surfaces.
b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.
c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar as specified in
Section 03600.
2. Taper Ties:
a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with
neoprene plug as follows:
1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes.
2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with
steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of
wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy.
3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during driving.
a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical
recess.
b. Dry-Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After Installing Plugs in Tie Holes:
1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack
mortar as specified in Section 03600.
a) Dry-Pack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not
exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer.
b) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than seven days
after the inside of the hole has been dry packed.
2018 03102-4 150407

c) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side
of water containing structures and the outside of below grade
walls:
(1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.
(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend
minimum of 2-inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes.
(3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or
other voids.
C. Built-Up Plywood Forms:

1. Studding:
a. Spaced at 16-inches or 24-inches on center.
b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of
the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on faces of finished
concrete work.
c. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.
2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material with minimum size as specified
in this section.
3. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or
overlay used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are
capable of producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when
stripped.
D. Steel or Steel Framed Forms:

1. Steel Forms:
a. Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface.
2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:
a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly.
b. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or
overlay used.
3. Built-Up Plywood Forms: As specified in this section may be used in
conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for special forming
conditions such as corbels and forming around items, which will project
through forms.
E. Bracing and Alignment of Forms:

1. Line and Grade: Limit deviations to tolerances which will permit proper
installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and electrical
equipment and piping.
2. Formwork:
a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to prevent
any movement.
b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on forms,
and deflection of forms.
3. When Second Lift is Placed on Hardened Concrete: Take special precautions
in form work at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:
a. Spreading and vertical or horizontal displacement of forms.
b. Grout "bleeding" on finish concrete surfaces.
4. Pipe Stubs, Anchor Bolts, and Other Embedded Items: Set in forms where
required.
5. Cracks, Openings, or Offsets at Joints in Formwork: Close those that are
1/16-inch or larger by tightening forms or by filling with acceptable crack filler.
2018 03102-5 150407

F. Incidentals:
1. Keyways: Construct keyways as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Reentrant Angles: May be left square.
3. Level Strips: Install level strips at top of wall concrete placements to maintain
true line at horizontal construction joints.
4. Inserts:
a. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts, as
indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete.
b. Use dovetail anchors in conjunction with slots as specified in this section
and as may be necessary for required work.
G. Pipe and Conduit:

1. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and seal
with materials as specified in Section 07900.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Tolerances:
1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions
2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances
listed below at time of acceptance of project.
3. General: In accordance with ACI 117, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and
paragraphs 4.0 through 4.6, except as modified in following:
a. Slabs:
1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Slabs Indicated to Be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in
10 feet without any apparent changes in grade.
b. On Circular Tank Walls: The CONTRACTOR may deviate from finish line
indicated on the Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to
exceed 2 feet.
c. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances required for proper installation and
operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains.
d. Maximum Tolerances: As follows:
Item Tolerance
Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8 inches
Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0 inches
Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16 inches
END OF SECTION
2018 03102-6 150407

SECTION 03150
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Waterstops.
2. Preformed synthetic sponge rubber expansion joint material.
3. Preformed bituminous fiber expansion joint material.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. D 570 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
2. D 624 - Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers.
3. D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
4. D 746 - Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers
by Impact.
5. D 747 - Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plastics by Means of a
Cantilever Beam.
6. D 792 - Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement.
7. D 2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness.
B. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers (U.S.ACOE):

1. CRD-C-572, Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Complete physical characteristics.
2. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Sufficient information on each type of
material for review to determine conformance of material to requirements
specified.
B. Samples:
1. Polyvinyl chloride waterstop.
C. Laboratory Test Reports: Indicating that average properties of polyvinyl chloride

waterstops material and finish conform to requirements specified in this section.
D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificates of Compliance:
a. Written certificates that polyvinyl chloride waterstops supplied on this
Project meet or exceed physical property requirements of current
U.S.ACOE CRD-C-572 and the requirements of this section.
2018 03150-1 150407

2. Manufacturer's Instructions: For materials specified in this section that are
specified to be installed with such instructions.
A. Mock-ups:
1. Welding Demonstration:
a. Demonstrate ability to weld acceptable joints in polyvinyl chloride
waterstop before installing waterstop in forms.
B. Field Joints:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops Field Joints: Shall be free of misalignment,
bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets and other defects which
would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any
point. Replace defective joints. Remove faulty material from the site and
disposed of by the CONTRACTOR at its own expense.
C. Inspections:
1. Quality of welded joints will be subject to acceptance of the ENGINEER.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop: The following defects that represent a partial list
that will be grounds for rejection.
a. Offsets at joints greater than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of the material
thickness, at any point, whichever is less.
b. Exterior crack at joint, due to incomplete bond, which is deeper than
1/16 inch or 15 percent of the material thickness, at any point, whichever
is less.
c. Any combination of offset or crack which will result in a net reduction in
the cross section of the waterstop in excess of 1/16 inch or 15 percent of
the material thickness, at any point, whichever is less.
d. Misalignment of the joint, which will result in misalignment of the
waterstop in excess of 1/2 inch in 10 feet.
e. Porosity in the welded joint as evidenced by visual inspection.
f. Bubbles or inadequate bonding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Manufactured from prime virgin polyvinyl chloride

plastic compound containing the plasticizers, resins, stabilizers, and other materials
necessary to meet the requirements of this Specification. No scrap or reclaimed
material shall be used.
A. Waterstops:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Vinylex Corporation, Kwik-Tie.
2) Greenstreak Plastic Products Company, Inc.
b. Type: Ribbed Waterstop.
1) Construction Joints: 6 inch wide ribbed type.
2018 03150-2 150407

2) Expansion Joint for Wall Penetrations for Concrete Encased
Electrical Duct Banks: 6 inch ribbed type with hollow center bulb.
3) Expansion Joints: 9 inch wide ribbed type with hollow center bulb.
c. Provide polyvinyl chloride waterstops complying with following
requirements:
Physical
Characteristics Test Method Required Results
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 Not less than 1.3.
Hardness ASTM D 2240 70 to 90 Type A Shore durometer.
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 Not less than 2,000 pounds per
square inch.
Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 Not less than 350 percent
Alkali Extraction CRD-C-572 7 day weight change between
minus 0.1 percent and plus
0.25 percent.
Low Temperature Brittle ASTM D 746 Not more than minus 35 degrees
Point Fahrenheit.
Water Absorption ASTM D 570 Not more than 0.15 percent after
24 hours.
Accelerated Extraction CRD-C-572 Not less than 2,000 pounds per
Tensile square inch.
Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 Not less than 725 pounds per
square inch.
Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 Not less than 300 pounds per
inch.
Weight Requirements
6 inch Waterstops – Weigh not less than 130 pounds
per 100 linear feet.
9 inch Waterstops – Weigh not less than 220 pounds
per 100 linear feet.
Thickness – 3/8 inch
Center Bulb:
6 inch Waterstops – 7/8 inch or 1 inch nominal outside
diameter.
9 inch Waterstops – 1-inch nominal outside diameter.
For expansion joints 1-inch and
narrower and 2-inches for
expansion joints wider than
1-inch.
Allowable Tolerances
Width – Plus or minus 3/16 inch.
Thickness – Plus or minus 1/32 inch.
2018 03150-3 150407

d. Dumbbell type waterstop will not be allowed unless otherwise specified or
B. Preformed Expansion Joint Materials:

1. Preformed Synthetic Sponge Rubber Expansion Joint Material:
1) Tamms Industries, Inc., Cementone.
2) Burke Concrete Accessories Inc., Neoprene Sponge Rubber
Expansion Joint.
2. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Expansion Joint Material:
1) Tamms Industries, Inc., Hornboard/fiber.
2) Burke Concrete Accessories Inc., Fiber Expansion Joint.
3. Use specific type in applications as indicated on the Drawings.
4. No scrap or recycled material shall be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Waterstops - General:
1. Waterstops shall be stored so as to permit free circulation of air around the
waterstop material and to prevent direct exposure to sunlight.
2. Install waterstops in concrete joints where indicated on the Drawings.
3. Carry waterstops in walls into lower slabs and join to waterstops in slabs with
appropriate types of fittings.
4. In Waterbearing Structures: Provide all joints with waterstops, whether
indicated on the Drawings or not.
5. Provide waterstops that are continuous.
6. Set waterstops accurately to position and line as indicated on the Drawings.
7. Hold and securely fix edges in position at intervals of not more than 24 inches
so that they do not move during placing of concrete.
8. Position the waterstop so that symmetrical halves of the waterstop are equally
divided between the concrete pours. The center axis of the waterstop shall be
coincident with the centerline of the joint.
9. Do not drive nails, screws, or other fasteners through waterstops in vicinity of
construction joints.
10. Use wires at not more than 24 inches on centers near outer edge of the
waterstop to tie waterstops into position.
11. Special clips may be used in lieu of wires, at CONTRACTOR's option.
12. Terminate waterstops 3 inches from top of finish surfaces of walls and slabs
unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
13. When any waterstop is installed in the concrete on one side of a joint, while
the other half or portion of the waterstop remains exposed to the atmosphere
for more than two days, suitable precautions shall be taken to shade and
protect the exposed waterstop from direct rays of sunlight during the entire
exposure and until the exposed portion is embedded in concrete.
14. When placing concrete at waterstops in slabs, lift the edge of the waterstop
while placing concrete below the waterstop. Manually force the waterstop
against and into the concrete. Then cover the waterstop with fresh concrete.
2018 03150-4 150407

B. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops:
1. Install waterstops so that joints are watertight.
2. Weld joints such as unions, crosses, ells, and tees, with thermostatically
controlled equipment recommended by waterstop manufacturer.
a. The material shall not be damaged by heat sealing.
b. Make joints by overlapping then simultaneously cut the ends of the
sections to be spliced so they will form a smooth even joint. Heat the cut
ends with the splicing tool until the plastic melts. Press the two ends
together until the plastic cools.
c. The continuity of the waterstop ribs and tubular center axis shall be
maintained.
d. The splices shall have a tensile strength of not less than 60 percent of the
unspliced materials tensile strength.
3. Butt joints of the ends of two identical waterstop sections may be made while
the material is in the forms.
4. All joints with waterstops involving more than two ends to be joined together,
and all joints that involve an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining of two
dissimilar waterstop sections shall be prefabricated by the CONTRACTOR or
the manufacturer prior to placement in the forms, providing not less than
24 inch long strips of waterstop material beyond the joint. Upon being
inspected and accepted, install such prefabricated waterstop joint assemblies
in the forms and the ends of the 24-inch strips shall be butt welded to the
straight run portions of waterstop in place in the forms.
5. Vertical crosses and tees shall be factory prefabricated by the manufacturer.
Horizontal crosses or tees may be field or factory welded.
6. Split type waterstop will not be permitted except where specifically indicated
on the Drawings.
C. Joints:
1. Construct construction, and expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Fasten expansion joint strips to concrete,
masonry, or forms with adhesive. No nailing will be permitted, nor shall
expansion joint strips be placed without fastening.
END OF SECTION
2018 03150-5 150407

SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. 315 - Detailing Manual: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
2. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
3. 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.

1. A 143 - Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement.
2. A 185 - Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
3. A 615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
4. A 706 - Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
5. A 767 - Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
A. The Drawings contain general notes concerning amount of reinforcement and

placing, details of reinforcement at wall corners and intersections, and details of
extra reinforcement around openings in concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Changes to Reinforcing Steel Contract Drawing Requirements:
a. Indicate in separate letter submitted with shop drawings any changes of
requirements indicated on the Drawings for reinforcing steel.
b. Such changes will not be acceptable unless the ENGINEER has accepted
such changes in writing.
2. Reinforcement Detail Drawings:
2018 03200-1 150407

a. Review of reinforcement shop drawings by the ENGINEER will be limited
to general compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Samples:
1. Bar Supports: Submit samples of chairs proposed for use along with letter
stating where each type of chair will be used.
A. Packing and Shipping:

1. Deliver bars bundled and tagged with identifying tags.
B. Acceptance at Site:
1. Reinforcing Bars: Deliver reinforcing bars lacking grade identification marks
accompanied by manufacturer's guarantee of grade.
A. Bar Supports: Do not place concrete until samples and attached data of bar
supports has been accepted by the ENGINEER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcement:
1. General: Provide reinforcing steel that is of quality specified, free from
excessive rust or scale or any defects affecting its usefulness.
B. Reinforcing Bars:
1. Reinforcing Bars to Be Embedded in Concrete or Masonry: Grade 60
deformed bars in accordance with ASTM A 615 except as specified in the next
subparagraph.
2. Reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in
concrete frame members and in concrete wall boundary members shall be in
accordance with low alloy ASTM A 706. ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
may be used in these members if the following requirements are met:
a. The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the
specified yield strength by more than 18,000 pounds per square inch
(retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional
3,000 pounds per square inch).
b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile stress to the actual tensile yield
strength is not less than 1.25.
3. Thread Bars:
a. Provide thread bars having continuous rolled-in pattern of thread-like
deformations along entire length.
b. Provide hex nuts and couplers for the thread bars that develop
125 percent of yield strength of bar.
c. In accordance with to ASTM A 615 Grade 60.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) DYWIDAG Systems International, DYWIDAG Threadbar.
e. Do not substitute cut threads on regular reinforcing bars for thread bars.
2018 03200-2 150407

C. Bar Supports:
1. Reinforcement Support Chairs:
a. Provide Type 304 stainless steel reinforcement support chairs.
D. Tie Wires: Annealed steel.
E. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcement:

1. In accordance with ASTM A 185.
2. Fabric may be used in place of reinforcing bars if accepted by the ENGINEER.
3. Provide welded wire fabric in flat sheet form.
4. Provide welded wire fabric having cross-sectional area per linear foot of not
less than cross-sectional area per linear foot of reinforcing bars indicated on
the Drawings.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly:
1. Cut and bend bars in accordance with provisions of ACI 315, ACI 318, and
ACI 350.
2. Bend bars cold.
3. Provide bars free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the
Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Reinforcing Bars:
a. Verify that bars are new stock free from rust scale, loose mill scale,
excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings which adversely affect bonding
capacity when placed in the work.
3.02 PREPARATION
1. Reinforcing Bars: Thin coating of red rust resulting from short exposure will not
be considered objectionable. Thoroughly clean any bars having rust scale,
loose mill scale, or thick rust coat.
2. Cleaning of Reinforcement Materials: Remove concrete or other deleterious
coatings from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or
sandblasting before bars are embedded in subsequent concrete placement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcing Bars:
1. No field bending of bars will be allowed.
2. Welding:
a. Weld reinforcing bars where indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to
the ENGINEER.
b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
2018 03200-3 150407

B. Placing Reinforcing Bars:
1. Accurately place bars and adequately secure them in position.
2. Overlap bars at splices as indicated on the Drawings or specified.
3. Unless specifically otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install bars at lap
splices in contact with each other and fasten bars together with tie wire.
4. If lap splice length for bars in concrete is not specified or indicated on the
Drawings, bars shall be lap spliced in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
5. If not indicated on the Drawings and not specified in Division 4, lap splice bars
in masonry in accordance with the building code as specified in Section 01410.
6. Bar Supports:
a. Provide in sufficient number to prevent sagging and to support loads
during construction, but in no case less than quantities and at locations as
indicated in ACI 315.
b. Support reinforcing for concrete placed on ground by standard
manufactured chairs, with steel plates for resting on ground.
c. Do not use brick, broken concrete masonry units, spalls, rocks, or similar
material for supporting reinforcing steel.
7. If not indicated on the Drawings, provide protective concrete cover in
accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
C. Tying of Bar Reinforcement:

1. Fasten bars securely in place with wire ties.
2. Tie bars sufficiently often to prevent shifting.
3. There shall be at least three ties in each bar length (does not apply to dowel
lap splices or to bars shorter than 4 feet, unless necessary for rigidity).
4. Tie slab bars at every intersection around periphery of slab.
5. Tie wall bars and slab bar intersections other than around periphery at not less
than every fourth intersection, but at not greater than following maximum
spacings:
Slab Bars Wall Bars
Spacing Spacing
Bar Size Inches Inches
Bars Number 5 and Smaller 60 48
Bars Number 6 through Number 9 96 60
Bars Number 10 and Number 11 120 96
6. After tying wire ties, bend ends of wire ties in towards the center of the
concrete section. Wire ties shall conform to the cover requirements of the
reinforcing bars.
7. Above tying requirements do not apply to reinforcement for masonry. Refer to
DIVISION 4 for tying requirements for masonry.
D. Lap Splices of Reinforcing Bars:

1. Where bars are to be lapped spliced at joints in concrete, ensure bars project
from concrete first placed, minimum length equal to lap splice length indicated
on the Drawings.
2. Where lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, then provide lap
splice length in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 350, and as specified in this
Division.
E. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcement:
2018 03200-4 150407

1. Install necessary wiring, spacing chairs, or supports to keep welded wire fabric
in place while concrete is being placed.
2. Bend fabric as indicated on the Drawings or required to fit work.
3. Unroll or otherwise straighten fabric to make perfectly flat sheet before placing
in the work.
4. Lap splice welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings.
5. If lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, splice fabric in accordance
with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
END OF SECTION
2018 03200-5 150407

2018 03200-6 150407
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete.
1. Section 03071 - Epoxies.
2. Section 03150 - Concrete Accessories.
3. Section 03366 - Tooled Concrete Finishes.
4. Section 03931 - Epoxy Injection System.
5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.
2. 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures
and Commentary.
3. Manual of Concrete Practice.
4. Recommended Practices.

1. C 31 - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
2. C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
4. C 40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.
5. C 42 - Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete.
6. C 88 - Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate.
7. C 94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
8. C 114 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
9. C 117 - Test Method for Materials Finer that 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing.
10. C 123 - Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.
11. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
12. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
13. C 142 - Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate.
14. C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
15. C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
16. C 156 - Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
17. C 157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement
Mortar and Concrete.
2018 03300-1 150407

18. C 171 - Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
19. C 172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
20. C 173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method.
21. C 227 - Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
22. C 260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
23. C 289 - Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method).
24. C 295 - Guide to Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete.
25. C 309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
26. C 311 - Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete.
27. C 494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
28. C 618 - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete.
29. D 75 - Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
30. D 2103 - Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alkali: Is defined as the sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as
sodium oxide.
B. Cementitious Materials: Defined as Portland Cement and pozzolan admixture.
C. Hairline Crack: Crack with a crack width of less than four thousandths of an inch.
1. General:
a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of Portland
cement, fly ash, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so
proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in
accordance with requirements as specified in this section and suitable to
specific conditions of placement.
b. Proportion materials in a manner such that will secure lowest water-
cement ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive
mixture, and one which is within specified slump range.
c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregates in manner such as not to produce
harshness in placing or honeycombing in structures.
2. It is the intent of this section to secure for every part of the work concrete and
grout of homogeneous structure, which when hardened will have required
strength, watertightness, and durability.
a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will develop
in the concrete surfaces.
b. Construction and expansion joints have been specified and positioned in
structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for
purpose of reducing number and size of cracks, due to normal expansion
and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes.
2018 03300-2 150407

c. Class A and Class D Concrete: Watertight: Repair cracks which develop
in walls or slabs and repair cracks which show any signs of leakage until
all leakage is stopped.
d. Pressure inject visible cracks, other than hairline cracks and crazing, in
following areas with epoxy as specified in Section 03931.
1) Floors and walls of water bearing structures.
2) Walls and overhead slabs of passageways or occupied spaces,
outsides of which are exposed to weather or may be washed down
and are not specified to receive separate waterproof membrane.
3) Other Items Not Specified to Receive Separate Waterproof
Membrane: Slabs over water channels, wet wells, reservoirs, and
other similar surfaces.
e. Walls or slabs, as specified above, that leak or sweat because of porosity
or cracks too small for successful pressure grouting: Seal on water or
weather side by coatings of surface sealant system, as specified in this
section.
f. Grouting and Sealing: Continue as specified above until structure is
watertight and remains watertight for not less than one year after final
acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.
3. Workmanship and Methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of
reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in ACI
318, ACI 350, Manuals, and Recommended Practices.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data completely describing products.
B. Information on Heating Equipment to Be Used for Cold Weather Concreting: Submit

information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new
concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.
C. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
humidity, high temperature, and wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for use
prior to placing concrete.
D. Copies of Tests of Concrete Aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of

commercial laboratory tests not more than 90 days old of all samples of concrete
aggregates.
1. Fine Aggregate:
a. Clay lumps.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e. Color.
f. Decantation.
a. Clay lumps and friable particles.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e. Abrasion loss.
f. Coal and lignite.
2018 03300-3 150407

g. Materials finer than 200 sieve.
E. Sieve Analysis: Submit sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates being used in
triplicate at least every three weeks and at any time there is significant change in
grading of materials.
F. Concrete Mixes: Submit full details, including mix design calculations for concrete
mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete.
1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents of
fine aggregate.
2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal.
a. Include calculations for f'cr based on source quality test records.
G. Trial Batch Test Data:

1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
H. Sequence of Concrete Placing: Submit proposed sequence of placing concrete

showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements.
I. Curing Compound Other than Specified Compound: Submit complete data on

proposed compound.
J. If Either Fine or Coarse Aggregate Is Batched from More than One Bin: Submit
analyses for each bin, and composite analysis made up from these, using
proportions of materials to be used in mix.
K. Cement Mill Tests: Include alkali content, representative of each shipment of

cement for verification of compliance with specified requirements.
L. Pozzolan Certificate of Compliance: Identify source of pozzolan and certify

compliance with requirements of ASTM C 618.
M. Information on mixing equipment.
N. Drying shrinkage test data.
O. If there is change in aggregate source or aggregate quality from same source:

submit new set of design mixes covering each class of concrete.

1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner that prevents damage
and inclusion of foreign substances.
2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use.
3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in
moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of
specified degree of uniformity and slump.
B. Acceptance at Site: Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of

water or other damage.
2018 03300-4 150407

1. Hot Weather Concreting:
a. When Ambient Air Temperature Is above 90 Degrees Fahrenheit: Prior to
placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel to by water cooling to
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Temperature of Concrete Mix at Time of Placement: Keep temperature
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of
concrete.
2. Cold Weather Concreting:
a. Concrete placed below ambient air temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit
and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating
water.
b. If materials have been exposed to freezing temperatures to degree that
any material is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials.
c. Heating Water, Cement, or Aggregate Materials:
1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Protection of Concrete in Forms:
1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other acceptable
covering acceptable to ENGINEER.
2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in manner
to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least five
days.
3. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
humidity, high temperature, and wind: Take corrective measures to minimize
rapid water loss from concrete.
a. Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self-
recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around
concrete.
A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing

operation to construction or expansion joint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Admixtures:
1. General:
a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written
authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER.
b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.
c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in
excess of 0.5 percent by weight.
d. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and add each
admixture to concrete mix separately.
2. Air Entraining Admixture:
a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained air
of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement.
2018 03300-5 150407

b. Conform to ASTM C 260.
3. Pozzolan Admixture:
a. Fly ash in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F, may be
used as admixture in concrete made with Type II Portland Cement.
b. Maximum of 15 percent by weight of pozzolan admixture to total weight of
cementitious materials. The total weight of cementitious materials shall
not be less than minimum cementitious materials listed in Table A.
c. Do not use pozzolan admixture as an admixture in concrete made with
Portland-pozzolan Cement.
d. Loss on Ignition for Pozzolan Admixture: Not exceed 4 percent.
4. Water Reducing Admixture:
a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR's option.
b. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A or Type D.
c. Not contain air entraining agents.
d. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.
e. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing
admixture.
5. Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without acceptance by ENGINEER.
B. Aggregate:
1. General:
a. Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and free of
deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified.
b. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
c. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate that produces in place
concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.
d. Do not use aggregate made from recycled materials such as crushed and
screened hydraulic-cement concrete, brick, and other construction
materials.
2. Fine Aggregate:
a. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural
sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel.
b. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of
following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. In no case
shall total exceed percent listed.
Item Test Method Percent

Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3
Shale or Chert ASTM C 295 1
Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1
c. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in

accordance with requirements of ASTM C 33.
a. General: Provide coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone
made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings,
organic matter, or other foreign substances.
b. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having
length greater than five times average thickness.
2018 03300-6 150407

c. Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by
weight, and in no case having total of all deleterious substances
exceeding 2 percent.
Item Test Method Percent

Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1
Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 1/4
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1/4
Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 1/2*
* Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum
amount shall be 1 percent.
d. Grading:
1) Aggregate for Class A, B, C, and D Concrete: As specified in
ASTM C 33, Size Number 57, except as otherwise specified or
authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2) Aggregate for Class CE Concrete for Encasement of Electrical
Conduits:
a) Graded as specified in ASTM C 33, Size Number 8.
C. Concrete Sealer:
a. ChemMasters, Madison, OH, Spray-Cure & Seal 25.
b. Tamms Industries, Luster Seal WB-300.
D. Conduit Encasement Coloring Agent:

1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits,
and similar type items.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.
a. Davis Company, No. 100 Utility Red.
b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.
3. Conduit Encasement Concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete
10 pounds of coloring agent.
E. Evaporation Retardant:
a. Master Builders Technologies, Cleveland, Ohio, Confilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio, Eucobar.
F. Keyway Material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.
G. Nonslip Abrasive:
1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard
aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing,
moisture, or cleaning compounds.
a. Exolon Company, Tonawanda, New York.
b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigan.
2018 03300-7 150407

H. Portland Cement:
1. General: Conform to specifications and tests for ASTM C 150, Type V, Low
Alkali, except as specified otherwise.
2. Low Alkali Portland: Have total alkali containing not more than 0.60 percent.
3. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of Portland
Cement.
4. Cement for Finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as
concrete to be finished.
I. Plastic Membrane Curing: Use polyethylene film in accordance with ASTM C 171.
1. Color: White
2. Thickness: Nominal thickness of polyethylene film shall not be less than
0.0040-inches when measured in accordance with ASTM D 2103. Thickness
of polyethylene film at any point shall not be less than 0.0030-inches.
3. Loss of Moisture: Not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.
J. Sprayed Membrane Curing Compound: Clear type with fugitive dye conforming to
ASTM C 309, Type 1D.
K. Surface Sealant System: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.
2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal.
L. Water:
1. Water for Concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and free
from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other
substances.
2. Chlorides and Sulfate Ions:
a. Water for Conventional Reinforced Concrete: Use water not containing
more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion,
nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate
ion.
b. Water for Prestressed or Post-tensioned Concrete: Use water not
containing more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as
chloride ion, nor more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated
as sulfate ion.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Concrete:
1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.
2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and
control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.
3. Mixing Equipment:
a. Capable of combining aggregates, cementitious materials, and water
within specified time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and
discharging mixture without segregation.
b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and
operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by manufacturer or
as specified.
c. Proportion cementitious materials and aggregate by weight.
2018 03300-8 150407

B. Machine Mixing:
1. Batch plant shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer
within 1 percent by weight of individual material.
2. If bulk cementitious materials are used, weigh them on separate visible scale
which will accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation
from zero to full capacity.
3. Prevent cementitious materials from coming into contact with aggregate or
with water until materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing
water.
4. Procedure of mixing cementitious materials with sand or with sand and coarse
aggregate for delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing
water will not be permitted.
5. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
6. Discharge entire batch before recharging.
7. Volume of Mixed Material Per Batch: Not exceed manufacturer's rated
capacity of mixer.
8. Mixers:
a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.
b. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating
quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such that
leakage will not occur when valves are closed.
c. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring, indicating, and
controlling time required for mixing.
1) Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before
expiration of mixing period.
C. Transit-Mixed Concrete:
1. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94.
2. Total Elapsed Time Between Addition of Water at Batch Plant and Discharging
Completed Mix: Not to exceed 90 minutes. Elapsed time at project site shall
not exceed 30 minutes.
3. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted
may be reduced by the ENGINEER.
4. Equip each truck mixer with device interlocked to prevent discharge of
concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device
that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.
5. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely
discharged its batch.
a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving.
b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of revolutions or
to decrease designated maximum number of revolutions allowed, if
necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The CONTRACTOR will not be
entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease.
D. Other Types of Mixers: In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows:
1. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and discharge
mixer completely before recharging.
2. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in drum,
and for batches larger than one cubic yard increase minimum mixing time
15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2018 03300-9 150407

2.03 MIXES
A. Measurements of Materials:
1. Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other
methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2. Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cementitious materials that is
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose.
3. Accuracy of Weighing Devices: Furnish devices that have capability of
providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured to
within 1 percent of desired amount of that material.
4. Measuring or Weighing Devices: Subject to review by the ENGINEER. Shall
bear valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.
5. Weighing Cementitious Materials:
a. Weigh cementitious materials separately.
b. Cement in Unbroken Standard Packages (Sacks): Need not be weighed.
c. Bulk Cementitious Materials and Fractional Packages: Weigh such
cementitious materials.
6. Mixing Water: Measured by volume or by weight.
B. Concrete Proportions and Consistency:

1. Concrete Consistency and Composition:
a. Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles of
forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without
permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on surface.
b. Prevent unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency of concrete.
2. Ratio of Coarse Aggregate to Fine Aggregate: Not less than 1.0 or more than
2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.
3. Aggregate:
a. Obtain aggregate from source that is capable of providing uniform quality,
moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation.
4. Concrete Mix Water to Cementitious Materials Ratio, Minimum Cementitious
Materials Content, and Slump Range: Conform to values specified in Table A
in this section.
5. Concrete Batch Weights: Control and adjust to secure maximum yield. At all
times, maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits.
6. Mix Modification: If required, by the ENGINEER, modify mixture within limits
set forth in this section.
C. Concrete Mixes:
1. Proportioning of Concrete Mix: Proportion mixes based on required average
on compressive strength f'cr.
2. Mixes:
a. Adjusting of Water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without
acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of
water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate.
b. Total Water Content of Each Concrete Class: Not exceed those specified
in Table A in this section.
c. Checking Moisture Content of Fine Aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means
at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine aggregate.
3. Change in Mixes: Submit new mix design and undertake new trial batch and
test program as specified in this section.
2018 03300-10 150407

D. Hand Mixed Concrete:
1. Hand mix concrete only when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platform in batches not to
exceed 1/3 cubic yard each.
3. Aggregate:
a. First, spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an even
and uniform layer. Then over coarse aggregate, spread proper proportion
of fine aggregate.
b. Depth of Combined Coarse and Fine Aggregate Layers: Not be greater
than 1 foot.
4. Cementitious Materials:
a. First, evenly spread required quantity of cementitious materials over fine
aggregate.
b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least two times before adding
water.
5. Water:
a. Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over batched
materials.
b. Then turn with shovels not less than three times before concrete is
removed from platform.
E. Classes of Concrete:
1. Provide concrete consisting of four classes, referred herein as Classes A, C,
D, and CE as specified in this section. Use where specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Weight of Concrete Classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum
weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Class C Concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized
excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of
pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.
4. Class D Concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.
5. Class CE Concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.
6. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
Use Class A concrete.
TABLE A
CONCRETE
WITH AIR ENTRAINMENT
Specified Minimum
Compressive Cementitious
Strength f'c at Maximum Materials per Cubic
28 Days Water-to- Yard of Concrete by Slump
(Pounds per Square Cementitious Weight Range
Class Inch) Materials Ratio (Pounds) (Inches)
A 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4
C 2,500 0.45 423 2 to 4
D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4
CE 2,500 0.62 564 3 to 6
2018 03300-11 150407

7. Pumped Concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all
requirements of this section.
8. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A.
9. Classes:
a. Classes A, C, D, and CE Concrete: Make with Type V low alkali Portland
Cement.
b. Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this section.
F. Air Entraining Admixture:

1. Add agent to batch in portion of mixing water.
2. Batch solution by means of mechanical batcher capable of accurate
measurement.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Trial Batches:
a. After concrete mixes have been accepted by ENGINEER, have trial
batches of the accepted Class A, and Class D concrete mix designs
prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. Prepare trial batches using specified cementitious materials and
aggregates proposed to be used for the work.
c. Provide batches of sufficient quantity to determine slump, workability,
consistency, and finishing characteristics, and to provide sufficient test
cylinders.
d. Test Cylinders: Provide cylinders having 6-inch diameter by 12-inch length
and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests specified in
this section.
e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143.
f. Test Cylinders from Trial Batch:
1) Test eight cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C 39.
a) Test four cylinders at seven days and four at 28 days.
b) Establish ratio between seven day and 28-day strength for mix.
Seven-day strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of
28-day strength provided effects on concrete of temperature and
humidity between seven day and 28-day are taken into account.
2) Average Compressive Strength of four Test Cylinders Tested at
28 Days: Equal to or greater than required average compressive
strength f'cr on which concrete mix design is based.
g. Drying Shrinkage:
1) Prepare five drying shrinkage specimens in accordance with
ASTM C 157, except as modified herein.
2) Remove drying shrinkage specimens from molds at age of 23 hours
plus or minus one hour after trial batching, then immediately place
them in water at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees for
at least 30 minutes and then measure specimens within 30 minutes
thereafter to determine original length. Then submerge specimens in
saturated lime water at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus
3 degrees for moist curing.
2018 03300-12 150407

3) Make measurement to determine expansion expressed as
percentage of original length at age seven days. Use length at age
seven days as base length for drying shrinkage calculations.
4) Immediately store specimens in humidity controlled room maintained
at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees and 50 percent
plus or minus four relative humidity for remainder of test.
5) Make and report measurements to determine shrinkage expressed
as percentage of base length separately for seven, 14, 21, and
28 days of drying after seven days of moist curing.
6) Drying Shrinkage Deformation:
a) Measure drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as
difference between base length and length after drying at each
test age.
b) Measure average drying shrinkage deformation of specimens to
nearest 0.0001-inch at each test age.
c) If drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from average of test
age by more than 0.0004-inch, disregard results obtained from
that specimen and test another specimen.
d) Shrinkage of trial batch concrete at 28 days drying age shall not
exceed 0.045 percent maximum.
h. If trial batch tests do not meet specified requirements for slump, strength,
workability, consistency, drying shrinkage, and finishing, change concrete
mix design proportions and, if necessary, source of aggregate. Make
additional trial batches and tests until an acceptable trial batch is
produced that meets requirements of this section.
i. Perform test batches and tests required to establish trial batches and
acceptability of materials without change in Contract Price.
j. Do not place concrete until the concrete mix design and trial batch have
been accepted by ENGINEER.
2. Required Average Compressive Strength:
a. Determine required average compressive strength (f'cr) for selection of
concrete proportions for mix design, for each class of concrete, using
calculated standard deviation and its corresponding specified
compressive strength f'c, in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
b. When test records of at least 30 consecutive tests that span period of not
less than 45 calendar days are available, establish standard deviation as
described in ACI 318 and ACI 350 and as modified as follows herein.
c. Provide test records from which to calculate standard deviation that
represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to
materials, quality control procedures, and conditions expected to apply in
preparation of concrete for the work.
d. Provide changes in materials and proportions within test records that are
more restricted than those for the work.
e. Specified Compressive Strength (f'c) of Concrete Used in Test Records:
Within 1,000 pounds per square inch of that specified for the work.
f. When lacking adequate test records for calculation of standard deviation
meeting requirements, determine required average compressive strength
f'cr from following Table B.
2018 03300-13 150407

TABLE B
Specified Compressive Strength f'c Required Average Compressive Strength
(pounds per square inch) f'cr (pounds per square inch)
Less than 3,000 f'c + 1,000
3,000 to 5,000 f'c + 1,200
Over 5,000 f'c + 1,400
3. Pozzolan Admixture:
a. Sampling and Testing:
1) Sample and test pozzolan admixture in accordance with
ASTM C 311.
4. Aggregate:
a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR's expense.
b. If there is change in aggregate source or if there is a significant change in
aggregate quality from same source, submit new set of design mixes
covering each class of concrete and prepare new trial batches.
c. Sieves:
1) Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of aggregates.
2) Sieve Analyses: If sieve analyses indicate significant change in
materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix design and trial
batch be submitted and accepted before further placing of concrete.
d. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
e. Fine Aggregate:
1) Provide fine aggregate that does not contain strong alkali nor organic
matter, which gives color darker than standard color when tested in
2) Provide aggregate having soundness complying with requirements of
ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88.
3) Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of
ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
f. Coarse Aggregate:
1) Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88: Have loss
not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.
2) Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when
3) Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM C 33
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
g. Portland Cement:
1) Determination Alkali Content: Determine by method set forth in
ASTM C 114.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Liquid Evaporation Retardant: Under conditions which result in rapid evaporation of

moisture from the surface of the concrete, immediately after the concrete has been
screeded, coat the surface of the concrete with a liquid evaporation retardant. Apply
the evaporation retardant again after each work operation as necessary to prevent
2018 03300-14 150407

drying shrinkage cracks. Conditions which result in rapid evaporation of moisture
may include one or more of the following:
1. Low humidity.
2. Windy conditions.
3. High temperature.
B. Surface Sealant System: Apply as recommended by manufacturer published

instructions. Where concrete continues to sweat or leak, apply additional coats of
surface sealant until the sweating or leaks stop.
C. Joints and Bonding:

1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.
2. Locations of construction, expansion, and other joints are indicated on the
Drawings or as specified in this section.
3. For the following structures, provide not less than 14 days between
placements of concrete in adjacent concrete wall placements. Place concrete
for slabs in checkerboard pattern with not less than 14 days between
placements of concrete in adjacent concrete slab placements.
a. Oxidation Ditch.
b. Clarifier Slab and Walls.
4. Construction Joints:
a. Where construction joints are not indicated on the Drawings, provide
construction joints in slabs and walls at intervals not greater than 35 feet.
b. In order to preserve strength and watertightness of structures, make no
other joints, except as authorized the ENGINEER.
c. At construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete of laitance, grease, oil,
mud, dirt, curing compounds, mortar droppings, or other objectionable
matter by means of heavy sandblasting, and wash surfaces just prior to
succeeding concrete placement.
d. At Horizontal Joints: Immediately prior to resuming concrete placing
operations, thoroughly spread bed of grout not less than 1/2-inch in
thickness nor more than 1-inch in thickness over horizontal joint surfaces.
5. Keyways in Joints:
a. Provide keyways in joints as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Treat lumber keyway material with form release coating, applied in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Take special care to ensure that concrete is well consolidated around and
against waterstops and waterstops are secured in proper position.
7. Cleaning of Construction Joints:
a. Wash construction joints free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after
forms are built and immediately before concrete or grout placement.
b. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such
manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with water, use
vacuum cleaner for their removal, after which flush cleaned surfaces with
water.
c. Provide cleanout hole at base of each wall and column for inspection and
cleaning.
8. Construction and expansion and Construction Joints
a. Constructed where and as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Waterstops, Expansion Joint Material, Synthetic Rubber Sealing
Compound, and Other Similar Materials: As specified in Sections 03150
and 07900.
2018 03300-15 150407

9. Repair of Concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding
mortar or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat
surface of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as specified in
Section 03071.
D. Conveying and Placing Concrete:

1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that prevent
separation or loss of materials.
2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size and
design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end
without separation of materials.
3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that
direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying
device.
4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and
scraping upon completion of any day's placement.
E. Placing Concrete:
1. Place no concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER.
2. Do Not Place Concrete Until:
a. Reinforcement is secure and properly fastened in its correct position and
loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened.
b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, anchor bolts, and any
other fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and
adequately anchored.
c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled as specified.
3. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred, or of retempered
concrete, will not be permitted.
4. Place no concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.
5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from coming
in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying.
6. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of
concrete.
7. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except
when specific changes are requested and accepted by the ENGINEER.
8. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place
concrete in any portion of the work.
a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations, as the
ENGINEER deems necessary to make final inspection of preparations at
location of proposed concrete placing.
b. Place forms, reinforcement, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place
before notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER.
c. Depositing Concrete:
1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid segregation
caused by rehandling or flowing.
2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work
along forms with vibrator or by other methods.
3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater than 5 feet.
4) Use tremies for placing concrete where drop is over 5 feet.
5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of slope.
9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24-inches in
depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.
2018 03300-16 150407

10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous
operation, until end of placement is reached.
11. After placement begins, it should continue without significant interruption.
Precautions should be planned and implemented to prevent any delay from
exceeding 20 minutes.
12. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than
20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than 1/2-inch in
thickness nor more than 1-inch in thickness over surface before placing
additional concrete.
13. Placement of Concrete for Slabs, Beams, or Walkways:
a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until
concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.
b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage.
F. Consolidating Concrete:
1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.
2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes
built into the work.
3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle
readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least
18-inches.
4. Vibrators:
a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as
placed.
b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have
on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition.
c. Place no concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating
equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.
5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms to leave no voids.
6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for
any reason surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, repair
such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
G. Footings and Slabs on Grade:

1. Do not place concrete on ground or compacted fill until subgrade is in moist
condition acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. If necessary, sprinkle subgrade with water not less than six or more than
20 hours in advance of placing concrete.
3. If it becomes dry prior to actual placing of concrete, sprinkle again, without
forming pools of water.
4. Place no concrete if subgrade is muddy or soft.
H. Loading Concrete:
1. Green Concrete:
a. No heavy loading of green concrete will be permitted.
b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of the
specified strength.
2. No backfill shall be placed against concrete walls, connecting slabs, or beams
until the concrete has reached the specified strength.
3. Use construction methods, sequencing, and allow time for concrete to reach
adequate strength to prevent overstress of the concrete structure during
construction.
2018 03300-17 150407

I. Curing Concrete:
1. General:
a. Cure concrete by methods specified in this section.
b. Cure concrete minimum of seven days.
c. Cure concrete to be painted with water or plastic membrane.
d. Do not use curing compound on concrete surfaces that are to receive
paint or upon which any material is to be bonded.
e. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs that are specified to
be sealed by concrete sealer.
f. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the
CONTRACTOR's option.
g. Floor slabs may be cured using plastic membrane curing.
2. Water Curing:
a. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist
day and night for period of not less than seven days.
b. Each day forms remain in place may count as one day of water curing.
c. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has
once been broken between concrete surface and forms.
d. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by
leaving forms in place.
e. Flood top of walls with water at least three times per day, and keep
concrete surfaces moist at all times during seven day curing period.
3. Sprayed Membrane Curing:
a. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching,
and within one hour after forms are removed.
b. If more than one hour elapses after removal of forms, do not use
membrane curing compound, but use water curing for full curing period.
c. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete
surfaces.
d. Curing Compound:
1) Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than seven
days.
2) Curing compound may be removed only upon written request by the
CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what
measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures.
3) Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints.
See that curing compound is placed within construction joint
silhouette.
4) After curing period is complete, remove curing compound placed
within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to
placing any new concrete.
5) CONTRACTOR's Option: Instead of using curing compound for
curing of construction joints, such joints may be water cured.
6) Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and
mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and
compound.
7) Apply compound in at least two coats.
8) Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat.
9) Apply curing compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has
uniform appearance and that natural color is effectively and
completely concealed at time of spraying.
2018 03300-18 150407

10) Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is
achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces.
11) Thickness and Coverage of Curing Compound: Provide compound
having film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and
all points after drying for at least 24 hours.
12) The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that method of applying curing
compound specified herein may require more compound than
normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also more
than is customary in the trade.
13) Apply amounts specified herein, regardless of manufacturer's
recommendations or customary practice, if curing compound is used
in place of water curing.
14) If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than
specified curing compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with
proposed curing compound and also similar adjacent area with
specified compound in specified manner for comparison.
a) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the
ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substitution will not be
allowed.
15) Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or
other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed
to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible
uniformly over entire surface.
4. Plastic Membrane Curing:
a. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs. Seal joints and edges with
small sand berm.
b. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be
walked on without damage.
c. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.
3.02 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide concrete finishes in accordance with Section 03366.
B. Edges of Joints:
1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and
thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.
C. Concrete Sealer:
1. Floors and Slabs to Receive Concrete Sealer: As specified in DIVISION 9 on
finish schedule.
2. Floors and Slabs to Receive Concrete Sealer: As specified in DIVISION 9.
3. Seal Floors and Slabs at CONTRACTOR's Option:
a. All Floor Slabs Except for the Following:
1) Those indicated on the Drawings to receive seamless Floor
surfacing.
2) Any slabs which receive concrete or grout surfacing, in lieu of water
or curing compound.
4. Apply Concrete Sealer:
a. Apply concrete sealer at coverage rate not to exceed 300 square feet per
gallon.
2018 03300-19 150407

b. Apply as soon as slab or floor will bear weight.
c. Sealer:
1) Before applying concrete sealer, sweep entire surface clean with
very soft bristled brush that will not mark finish and remove any
standing water.
2) Apply concrete sealer with sprayer.
3) Use of paint rollers or mop is not acceptable.
4) Workmen shall wear flat soled shoes which will not mark or scar
surface.
5) Do not allow traffic on floors and slabs until concrete sealer has dried
and hardened.
A. Testing of Concrete:
1. During progress of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall have tests made to
determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with
requirements specified.
2. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and
ASTM C 172.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory and
testing expense will be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
4. Required Number Cylinders:
a. Not less than three cylinder specimens, 6-inch diameter by 12 inch long,
will be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete with
minimum of three specimens for each class of concrete placed and not
less than three specimens for each half day's placement.
b. One cylinder will be broken at seven days and two at 28 days.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with requirements
of ASTM C 143.
b. Furnish test equipment.
c. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in
regards to slump. Remove such concrete from project site.
d. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to
keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by
the ENGINEER.
e. Make provisions for and furnish concrete for test specimens.
f. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of during conditions for
test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.
B. Air Entraining Admixture:

1. Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as
often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified range, and when
requested to do so by the ENGINEER.
2. Provide test equipment.
3. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements for air
entrainment. Remove such concrete from project site.
4. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173.
5. The ENGINEER may at any time test percent of entrained air in concrete
received on project site.
2018 03300-20 150407

C. Enforcement of Strength Requirement:
1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is
indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength f'c.
2. Strength Level of Concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following
conditions are satisfied.
a. Averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results is greater or
equal to specified compressive strength f'c.
b. No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below specified
compressive strength f'c by more than 500 pounds per square inch.
c. Whenever one, or both, of two conditions stated above is not satisfied,
provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in
accordance with ASTM C 42, ACI 318, and ACI 350 and comply with
1) If additional curing does not bring average of three cores taken in
affected area to at least specified compressive strength f'c, designate
such concrete in affected area as defective.
2) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen
defective concrete by means of additional concrete, additional
reinforcement, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the
CONTRACTOR's expense.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Repair of Defective Concrete:

1. Remove and replace or repair defective work.
2. Correct defective work as specified in this article.
3. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the
ENGINEER.
4. Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified concrete for
areas involved.
5. Preparation of Concrete for Repair:
a. Make no repair until ENGINEER has accepted method for preparing
surface for repair.
b. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for
repair.
c. Surfaces of Set Concrete to Be Repaired: First coat with epoxy bonding
agent as specified in Section 03071.
6. Methods of Repair:
a. Dry Pack Method:
1) Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least
surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt holes, and for narrow slots
cut for repair.
2) Smooth Holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before
repair.
b. Mortar Method of Replacement:
1) Use for holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete
replacement.
2) Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no
deeper than nearest surface reinforcement.
c. Concrete Replacement:
2018 03300-21 150407

1) Use when holes extend entirely through concrete section or when
holes are more than one square foot in area and extend halfway or
more through the section.
END OF SECTION
2018 03300-22 150407

SECTION 03366
TOOLED CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Tooled concrete finishes.
A. Mock-Ups:
1. Test Panels for Concrete Finishes:
a. Prepare test panels for F4 and F5 finishes and tie-hole repairs for review
by ENGINEER.
b. Accepted panels shall serve as standard of quality and workmanship for
project.
2. Test Panels Showing Horizontal and Vertical Joints: Prepare test panel
showing horizontal and vertical joints proposed for project for review by the
ENGINEER. Refer to finishes as specified in this section.
3. Test Panels Indicating Methods for Making Concrete Repairs: Prepare test
panels for proposed repairs at beginning of project for review by ENGINEER.
a. Panels shall serve as standard for repairs during the project.

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MIXES
A. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of one part cement and 1-1/2 parts of fine sand
passing Number 100 screen, mixed with enough water and emulsified bonding
agent to have consistency of thick cream.
B. Mortar Mix for F5 Finish: Consist of one part cement to 1-1/2 parts of sand which
passes Number 16 screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Cement for Finishes:

1. Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches
color of concrete to be finished.
2018 03366-1 150407

B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use Following Finishes for Vertical Concrete Surfaces
as indicated in Article 3.02:
1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill
depressions 1-inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing
membrane.
2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins,
fill depressions 1/2-inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of
curing membrane.
3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane,
and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4-inch or larger in depth or
width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane.
4. F4 Finish:
a. Same as specified for F3 Finish, and, in addition fill depressions and holes
1/16-inch or larger in width with mortar.
b. "Brush-Off" sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all holes
near surface of the concrete.
c. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and
depressions while surfaces are still damp.
d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap,
sponge rubber floats, or trowels.
e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and
depressions.
f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure.
5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and, in addition, receive
special stoned finish, in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing as
specified in this section.
b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float dipped in
water containing two pounds of Portland Cement per gallon.
c. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed.
d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface with
brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids.
e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for three days.
1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum stone of
approximately Number 50 grit until entire surfaces have smooth
texture and are uniform in color.
2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time.
f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in above
specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed to view,
whether finished or not.
1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified for
brushed surfaces and handstoned with Number 60 grit carborundum
stone, using additional mortar for brushed surfaces until surface is
evenly filled without an excess of mortar.
2) Continue stoning until surface is hard.
3) After moist curing for three days, make surface smooth in texture and
uniform in color by use of Number 50 or Number 60 grit carborundum
stone.
4) After stoning, continue curing until seven day curing period is
completed.
2018 03366-2 150407

C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use
following finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicated in Article 3.02:
1. S1 Finish: Screeded to grade and leave without special finish.
2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish.
3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth finish
free of all irregularities.
4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points, followed
by light hairbroom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Perform
brooming parallel to slab-drainage. Provide resulting finish that is rough
enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject to review and
acceptance by the ENGINEER.
5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screeded level and
hardened enough to support man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from
shake screen into surface at uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square
feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface
with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide
nonslip surface.
D. Concrete Floor Surfaces to Which Surfacing Material Is Applied: Finish smooth with
tolerance within 1/8-inch in 10 feet in any direction from lines indicated on the
Drawings.
A. Finish concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Where not specified or

indicated on the Drawings, finish surfaces as follows:
1. F4 Finish for Following Vertical Surfaces:
a. Concrete surfaces specified or indicated to be painted.
b. Concrete surfaces, interior or exterior, exposed to view.
2. S4 Finish for Following Surfaces:
a. Under drain slab
b. Sludge bed bottoms and side-slopes.
c. Tops of exterior walls or beams, which are to serve as walkways.
d. Tops of exterior walls or beams, which are to support gratings.
END OF SECTION
2018 03366-3 150407

SECTION 03400
PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Precast concrete wall panels, weir troughs, and roof panels.
1. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3. Section 09910 - Paints.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
B. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO):

1. UBC - Uniform Building Code.
C. Precast Concrete Institute (PCI):

1. Manuals.
1. Precast Concrete Roof Panels:
a. Have panels structural designed by registered civil or structural engineer
registered in state where Project is located.
b. Design diaphragm shear connections for roof panels for shear value of not
less than 600 pounds per linear foot and as indicated on the Drawings for
shear greater than 600 pounds per linear foot.
1. Provide precast concrete items as indicated on the Drawings and specified in
this Section.
2. Most of these items are indicated on the Drawings for the CONTRACTOR's
convenience.
3. Check and verify dimensions prior to casting to ensure proper fit.
4. Bring discrepancies or changes in dimensions to the ENGINEER's attention.
5. Precast Concrete Roof Panels: Perform design, manufacture, and erection of
panels in accordance with applicable PCI Manuals, ACI 318, and UBC.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations:
2018 03400-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div3\03400.doc\
1. Precast Wall Panels: Submit shop drawings and calculations showing pick-up
point locations, center of gravity location, reinforcing, strongbacks, and inserts
for each panel prior to casting any panels.
2. Precast Concrete Roof Panels: Submit copy of shop drawings and calculations
as required by Article titled "System Description", Sub-Article titled "Design
Requirements" in this Section.
B. Quality Control:
1. Certificates of compliance.
2. Manufacturer's instructions.
A. Qualifications:
1. Precast Concrete Roof Panels: Manufactured by producer certified by PCI.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete for Precast Sections: Class D concrete as specified in Section 03300.
B. Reinforcement Support Chairs:

1. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel with plastic tips at
surfaces which will be exposed to view. Use unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Stainless steel where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Parting Compound: Suitable for intended use, as standard with manufacturer.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Weir Plates for Precast Weir Troughs: Fiberglass, having means of adjustment to
permit adjusting of weir edge to theoretical elevation indicated on the Drawings
within plus or minus 1/16 inch.
B. Slab Lifting Inserts, Lifting Brackets, or Swivel Lift Plates:

1. Lifting Inserts: Have minimum factor of safety of three at worst possible
working condition.
2. Lifting Brackets or Swivel Lift Plates: Type that prevent excessive local
moment in concrete slab at point of pickup when panel is hanging vertically.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly:
1. Forms:
a. Make forms watertight, accurate, and true to measurement as indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Thoroughly clean forms before each usage and coat contact surface
thoroughly with form release compound so that no bond occurs between
concrete and form.
2. Casting on Top Previously Cast Panels:
2018 03400-2 150407

a. If subsequent panels are cast on top of previously cast panels, allow not
less than two days to elapse between time panel is finished until work is
performed on surface of panel.
b. For columns and similar shapes where workmen do not have to get onto
finished surface, placing of form release compound and reinforcement
may begin eight hours after completion of finishing.
3. Curing: Water cure precast concrete for not less than seven days and seven
nights, except that after 24 hours of water curing, steam curing may be
substituted at ratio of one hour of steam curing for three hours of water curing.
4. Removal from Forms: Do not remove any precast unit from form or otherwise
handled until adequate strength has been acquired, and in no case less than
24 hours after casting.
5. Precast Wall Panels:
a. Casting: Cast panels as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this
Section.
b. Pickup Points: Pickup points and reinforcing required for stresses
encountered during tilting and lifting have not been indicated on the
Drawings.
6. Precast Weir Troughs:
a. Reinforcement:
1) Reinforce as indicated on the Drawings.
2) Install anchor bolts, baseplates, and inserts as required for specific
condition.
3) Attention is called to the fact that, although troughs may be
symmetrical in cross-sections, number of anchor bolts and inserts
required may vary.
4) Addition and removal of anchor bolts mislocated will not be
acceptable.
b. Casting:
1) Cast weir troughs in upside down position so that weir edge of trough
is down and bottom of trough is on top side while being cast.
2) Vibrate concrete into place with sufficient vibration to provide
concrete that is solid and has smooth finish.
3) Use concrete slump as low as practicable for placing of weir trough
sections in order to secure high strength durable concrete.
7. Precast Concrete Roof Panels: Manufactured in accordance with requirements
of Articles titled "Quality Assurance," Sub-Article titled "Qualifications" and
applicable requirements of Article titled "System Description" in this section.
B. Shop Finishing:
a. After all wall panels and sections are installed, rework surfaces, if
necessary, to obtain smooth, uniform texture and color between panels
and to obtain finish specified.
b. The ENGINEER may require panel surfaces to be sandblast or "sacked"
to achieve uniformity.
a. Finish of Troughs upon Removal from Forms:
1) Typical: Smooth finish, as would be expected from precast concrete
placed against smooth metal.
2) Joints That Do Not Appear Smooth: Rub smooth.
2018 03400-3 150407

3)
Holes on Surface Larger Than 1/8 Inch Wide or Deep: Fill with non-
shrink grout.
4) Unformed Portion of Weir Trough: Steel trowel finish.
3. Precast Concrete Roof Panels:
a. Exposed Surfaces: Receive F3 finish and be prepared for painting as
C. Tolerances:
a. Cast general body of weir troughs accurately to within plus or minus
1/4 inch of theoretical dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Provide troughs having weir plates bolted to edges of trough as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified in this section.
A. Inspection:
a. Checking After Curing: Check each weir trough for correct elevation and
for warpage after curing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Preparation for Lifting:

a. Stiffness for Handling:
1) Fit any panel lacking adequate stiffness for handling with
strongbacks before the panel is lifted.
2) Use lifting devices as specified in Paragraph 3.02A.
3) After panel is solidly placed in its final position, remove strongbacks.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Precast Wall Panels:

1. Placing:
a. Tilt up panels using four or more pickup points depending on size of
panel.
b. Use rigging such that each pickup point has same load, from time panel is
horizontal until it has been tilted to vertical position.
2. Slab Lifting Inserts, Lifting Brackets or Swivel Lift Plates: Use types acceptable
to ENGINEER for lifting panels.
3. Securing in Place:
a. Secure each panel in proper position with adequate bracing to prevent
wind or other forces from dislocating panels.
b. Leave bracing in place until after columns have been cast and roof
framing and roof deck are in place.
B. Precast Weir Troughs:

1. Joints: Make joints watertight.
2018 03400-4 150407

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. General: Remove any precast unit cracked or otherwise structurally damaged in

handling from any cause from project site and replace with structurally sound unit.
B. Precast Wall Panels: Patch resulting holes in panels resulting for installation of
strongbacks with mortar blended to match concrete.
C. Precast Weir Troughs:

1. If weir troughs warp or if weir edges are not in true line and plane after curing
and erection, grind edges to secure specified tolerances.
2. Maintain reinforcing clearances so that no metal is exposed after grinding.*
END OF SECTION
2018 03400-5 150407

SECTION 03600
GROUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Concrete mortar.
2. Drypack mortar.
3. Epoxy grout.
4. Grout.
5. Non-shrink epoxy grout.
6. Non-shrink grout.
1. Section 03071 - Epoxies.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (using 2-inch or 50-millimeter cube specimens).
2. C 230 - Standard Specification For Flow Table For Use In Tests Of Hydraulic
Cement
3. C 531 - Standard Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and
Polymer Concretes.
4. C 579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.
5. C 939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
6. C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink).
7. C 1181 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-
Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data prior to
installation.
B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data
prior to installation.
A. All materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or
containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed
instructions.
2018 03600-1 150407

B. All materials shall be stored in a cool dry place and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. All materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special

physical or environmental limitations that may be required for use of products.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Non-Shrink Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that the non-shrink grout will
never go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 1107.
B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that non-shrink epoxy
grout will show negligible shrinkage or expansion when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 531.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mortar:
1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and
water quantity adjusted as required.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water:
White cement.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.
C. Epoxy Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand.
2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand.
D. Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.
E. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout:

a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout.
b. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Masterflow 648 CP Plus.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., EPOGROUT.
2. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a 100 percent solid, premeasured,
prepackaged system containing a two-component thermosetting epoxy resin
and inert aggregate.
3. Consistency: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall maintain a flowable consistency for
at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Dimensional Stability (height change):
2018 03600-2 150407

a. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion (less
than 0.0006 inches/inch) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531.
5. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall show a minimum
compressive strength of 10,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours and
14,000 pounds per square inch at seven days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 579, Method B.
6. Compressive Creep: The compressive creep for non-shrink epoxy grout shall
not exceed 0.0027 inches/inch when tested under a 400 pounds per square
inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with
ASTM C 1181.
7. Thermal Capability: The coefficient of thermal expansion for non-shrink epoxy
grout shall not exceed 0.000018-inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when
tested under ASTM C 531, Method B.
F. Non-Shrink Grout:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Grout.
b. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Masterflow 928.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, CRYSTEX.
2. Preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. It shall contain no
metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic aggregate such as
iron filings. It shall require only the addition of potable water.
3. Potable Water for Pre-Soaking, Mixing, and Curing: Clean and free of oils,
acids, alkalies, organics, and any other deleterious matter.
4. Bleeding: Free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the
presence of water on its surface.
5. In accordance with ASTM C 1107.
6. Consistency: Remain at a minimum flowable consistency for at least
45 minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 230. If at a fluid consistency, it shall
be verified in accordance with ASTM C 939.
7. Dimensional Stability (height change): In accordance with ASTM C 1107,
volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees to 90 degrees. It shall show
90 percent or greater bearing area under bases or baseplates.
8. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink grout shall show minimum compressive
strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance
with ASTM C 1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including
5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 109 as modified by ASTM C 1107.
2.02 MIXES
A. Concrete Mortar Mix:

1. Use water-to-cementitious materials ratio that is no more than that specified
for concrete being repaired.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use
sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of
surrounding concrete.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to
touch after being formed into ball by hand.
2018 03600-3 150407

C. Epoxy Grout:
1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Proportioning:
a. For Horizontal Work: Consist of mixture of one part epoxy as specified in
Section 03071 with not more than two parts sand.
b. For Vertical or Overhead Work: Consist of one part epoxy gel as specified
in Section 03071 with not more than two parts sand.
D. Grout Mix:
1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being
repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for spreading.
2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no
more water used than allowed by water-to-Cementitious materials ratio
specified for concrete.
3. For Other Applications: Mix in proportions by weight of one part cement to four
parts of concrete sand.
E. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions.
F. Non-Shrink Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions

such that resulting mix has flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by
pouring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of
ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations, and all loose
material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar.
B. Inspect baseplate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious
substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout.
C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design
strength and limit further shrinkage.
D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed

manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 PREPARATION
1. Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other
mechanical means to assure bond. Loose or broken concrete shall be
removed.
2. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious
materials that may affect bond that were identified in the inspection process
shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of baseplates. All
metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile for epoxy grouts.
2018 03600-4 150407

3. For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated surface
damp. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts.
4. For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where
required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical
or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts.
B. Forms and Headboxes for Cementitious or Epoxy Grouts:

1. Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand
the placement of grouts.
2. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with
an elastomeric sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy
grout release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax
shall also be acceptable.
3. Forms shall be 4- to 6-inches higher than the baseplate on one side of the
baseplate configuration when using head pressure for placement.
4. A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of
grouts.
5. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8-inch in diameter shall be provided when
required by a baseplate configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Cement Mortar and Grout:

1. For Defective Concrete Repair:
a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete.
b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and similar
type items.
2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Apply epoxy-bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surfaces before
placing mortar or grout.
3. Placing:
a. Exercise particular care in placing Portland cement mortar or grout since
they are required to furnish structural strength, or impermeable water seal,
or both.
b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within
30 minutes after mixing.
B. Epoxy Grout:
2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 PLACEMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements to have a grout manufacturer's

representative present for a preconstruction meeting and during initial grout
placement.
B. Grout shall only be installed after the final equipment alignment is correct and
accepted by the ENGINEER.
1. Grouts shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2018 03600-5 150407

2. Use mortar mixer with moving paddles for mixing grouts. For cementitious
grouts, pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning
mixing.
3. Cementitious Grouts:
a. Add non-shrink cementitious grout to a premeasured amount of water that
does not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water
content.
b. Mix cementitious grouts per manufacturer's instructions for uniform
consistency.
c. Grouts may be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place. All baseplate
grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other to avoid
trapping air. Do not overwork grouts.
d. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening.
e. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of the
grout in the headbox above the bottom of the baseplate. The headbox
should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down to top of
baseplate.
4. Epoxy Grouts:
a. Epoxy grouts shall be mixed in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of
components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix.
b. Pour the hardener into the resin and mix for at least one minute and until
each mixture is uniform in color. Pour the chemical components into the
mortar mixer wheelbarrow and add the aggregate. Mix until aggregate is
uniformly wetted. Over mixing will cause air entrapment in the mix.
c. All epoxy grout shall be flowed into place using a headbox. All grouting
shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other in a continuous
flow to avoid trapping air.
d. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of
grout in headboxes above the bottom of baseplates. Headboxes shall be
filled to the maximum level and grout worked down to the bottom of
baseplates.
e. Epoxy grouts shall not be cut back after setting. The final level of grout will
be as installed with all chamfer edges built into the formwork.
3.05 CURING
A. Cementitious Grouts:
1. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching initial
set. Provide a 45 degree angle cut back.
2. Clean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer.
3. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations. Keep grout moist for a minimum of three days. The method
needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet
burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding, and, in extreme conditions, a
combination of methods shall be employed.
4. Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have
attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch, or above
70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from
subsequent freezing.
B. Epoxy Grouts:
2018 03600-6 150407

1. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and
recommendations. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts.
2. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any
surface in contact with epoxy grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees
Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.
A. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall be tested for 24-hour compressive strength in

B. Non-shrink grouts shall be tested for 24-hour compressive strength in accordance

with ASTM C 579, Method B.
C. Each batch of grout shall be tested for compressive strength. All testing shall be
borne by the CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION
2018 03600-7 150407

2018 03600-8 150407
SECTION 03936
WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Leakage test for concrete water holding structures.
1. Section 03931 - Epoxy Injection System.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Leak repair methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WATER LEAKAGE TEST
A. Test the Following Concrete Water Holding Structures for Leakage:

1. Pump Station.
B. Before Testing Water Holding Structures for Leakage:

1. Backfill excavations to top of structure foundations.
2. Cure concrete and obtain specified concrete compressive strength.
3. Do not apply brick facing or other materials that will cover concrete surfaces
until after testing water holding structures for leakage.
C. Isolate sections of water holding structures that can be isolated in actual operation.
Test sections separately for leakage.
D. Close valves and gates to structures.
E. Fill waterholding structures with water to maximum liquid level indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Make other equipment such as stop gates, sluice gates, valves, and temporary
bulkheads watertight, or measure leakage through other equipment by methods
acceptable to ENGINEER. Do not base leakage upon manufacturer's estimates.
G. Determine evaporation by floating evaporation pans in structures during testing.
2018 03936-1 150407

H. Examine concrete surfaces for leaks and damp spots during first 24 hours after
filling structures.
I. When Leaks or Damp Spots Appear on Exposed Surfaces:

1. Mark visible leaks and damp spots.
2. Drain structures of water after minimum 24 hours of being full.
3. Repair defects causing leaks and damp spots by epoxy injection as specified
in Section 03931 on both interior and exterior of structures.
4. Refill water-holding structures.
5. Repeat testing and repair process until no leaks or damp spots appear.
J. When no leaks or damp spots appear after 24 hours of being full, measure change
in water volume during the next 24 hours.
K. When water volume loss exceeds 0.10 percent of water volume originally held with
allowance for equipment leakage, evaporation, and precipitation:
1. Determine cause of volume loss.
2. Drain structures of water.
3. Repair defects causing loss of water volume.
4. Refill water-holding structures.
5. Repeat testing and repair process until volume loss does not exceed
0.10 percent of water volume originally held in 24 hours.
END OF SECTION
2018 03936-2 150407

SECTION 05140
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Structural aluminum products, including sheet, pipe, extrusions,

and associated accessories.
1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
2. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM B 209 -Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
2. ASTM B 221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM B 308/B 308M -Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard
Structural Profiles.
B. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS A 5.10 - Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding
Electrodes and Rods.
2. AWS D 1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Test Reports: Certified copies of mill tests or reports from a recognized
commercial laboratory including chemical and tensile properties of each
shipment of structural metal or part thereof having common properties. Tests
and analyses shall be made in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards.
A. Qualifications:
1. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current American
Welding Society certificate for the type of welding to be performed.
2. Notify ENGINEER 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding.
3. ENGINEER may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders.
4. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory work, or require to requalify.
5. ENGINEER may use gamma ray, magnetic particle dye penetrant, or other
aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or all welds.
6. CONTRACTOR shall bear costs of retests on defective welds.
7. CONTRACTOR shall bear costs in connection with qualifying welders.
2018 05140-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Structural Aluminum: ASTM B 308, Alloy 6061-T6.
C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T42.
D. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Furnish supplementary parts necessary to complete each item even where
such work is neither definitely indicated on the Drawings nor specified.
2. Size, form, attachment, and location shall conform to the best of current
practice.
3. Conform to applicable ASTM Standards for materials not otherwise specified.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Aluminum Layout:
1. Center punch hole centers, and punch or scribe cutoff lines, except where
marks would remain on fabricated material.
2. Apply temperature correction where necessary in layout of critical dimensions.
Use a coefficient of expansion of 0.000013 per degree of Fahrenheit.
B. Cutting Aluminum:
1. Material 1/2-inch Thick or Less: Shear, saw, or cut with a router.
2. Material More than 1/2-inch Thick: Saw or rout.
3. Make cut edges true and smooth, free from excessive burrs or ragged breaks.
4. Avoid reentrant cuts wherever possible. Where used, fillet by drilling prior to
cutting.
5. Do not flame cut aluminum alloys.
6. Punch or drill rivet or bolt holes to finished size before assembly.
a. Make finished diameter of holes for bolts 1/16-inch maximum larger than
nominal bolt diameter.
b. Make holes cylindrical and perpendicular to principal surface.
c. Do not permit holes to drift in a manner to distort metal.
C. Aluminum Forming and Assembly:

1. Do Not Heat Structural Aluminum, Except as Follows:
a. Heat aluminum to 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 30 minutes maximum, to
facilitate bending or welding.
b. Heat only when proper temperature controls and supervision can ensure
that limitations on temperature and time are observed.
D. Before assembly, remove chips lodged between contacting surfaces.
E. Welding Aluminum:
1. Perform welding of aluminum in accordance with AWS D1.2, "Structural
Welding Code - Aluminum."
2. Weld aluminum in accordance with the following:
a. Preparation:
2018 05140-2 150407

1) Remove dirt, grease, forming or machining lubricants, and organic
materials from areas to be welded by cleaning with a suitable solvent
or by vapor degreasing.
2) Additionally, etch or scratch brush to remove oxide coating just prior
to welding when inert gas tungsten arc welding method is used.
3) Oxide coating may not need to be removed if welding is performed
by automatic or semi-automatic inert gas shielded metal arc.
4) Suitably prepare edges to assure 100 percent penetration in butt
welds by sawing, chipping, machining, or shearing. Do not cut with
oxygen.
b. Filler Metal: Aluminum alloys conforming to the requirements of
AWS A5.10 and AWS classification ER 4043, ER 5654, ER 5554,
ER 5183, ER 5356, or ER 5556.
c. Perform welding of structures which are to be anodized using filler alloys
which will not discolor when anodized, AWS ER 5654, ER 5554, ER 5183,
ER 5356, or ER 5556.
d. Perform welding by using a non-consumable tungsten electrode with filler
metal in an inert gas atmosphere (TIG) or using a consumable filler metal
electrode in an inert gas atmosphere (MIG).
e. Do not use welding process that requires use of a welding flux.
f. Neatly make welded closures.
g. Where weld material interferes with fit or is unsightly in appearance, grind
it smooth.
h. Make welds full penetration welds unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to

receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this
Work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install structural aluminum products as indicated on the Drawings and specified.
B. Install structural aluminum products accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in
correct alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipment
for which intended.
C. Do not cock out of alignment, redrill, reshape, or force fit fabricated items.
D. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaces, which
bear against structural items smooth and true to level.
E. Rigidly support and brace structural products needing special alignment to preserve
straight, level, even, smooth lines, and keep braced until concrete, grout, or dry
pack mortar has hardened for a minimum 48-hour period.
F. Interface with Other Products:
2018 05140-3 150407

1. Where aluminum comes in contact with dissimilar metals bolt it with stainless
steel bolts and separate or isolate it from dissimilar metals as specified in
Section 05120.
2. Coat those parts of aluminum which will be cast into concrete or which will be
in contact with concrete, grout, masonry, wood, or other materials that will
cause the aluminum to corrode, as specified in Section 09960.
END OF SECTION
2018 05140-4 150407

SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Aluminum grating stair tread.
2. Aluminum stair nosing.
3. Cast iron stop plank grooves.
4. Concrete inserts.
5. Handrails and guardrails.
6. Ladders.
7. Manhole frames and covers.
8. Metal gratings.
9. Metal tread plate.
10. Preformed channel pipe supports.
11. Stairs.
12. Miscellaneous metals.
13. Associated accessories to the above items.
1. Section 02084 - Utility Structures.
3. Section 15061 - Pipe Supports.
4. Section 15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA):

1. Specification M12-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes.
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings.
3. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded, and Seamless.
4. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
5. A 240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
6. A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service.
7. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
2018 05500-1 150407

8. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
9. A 325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints.
10. A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
11. A 490 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
12. A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
13. A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing.
14. A 569 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent)
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality.
15. A 570/A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon.
Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.
16. A 635/A 635M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-
Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled.
17. A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
18. A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
19. B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
20. B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
21. B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard
Structural Profiles.
22. B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe
and Tube.
D. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.
E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. Metal Finishes Manual.
F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 29, Labor, Pt. 1900-1990.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Aluminum grating stair tread.
2. Aluminum stair nosing.
3. Cast iron stop plank grooves.
4. Handrail and Guardrail
5. Manhole frames and covers.
6. Metal grating.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Handrails and Guardrails:
a. Including details on connection attachments, gates, kickplates, ladders,
and angles.
2018 05500-2 150407

b. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,
size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
c. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
d. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.
Indicate net weld lengths.
2. Ladders.
3. Metal grating.
4. Metal tread plate.
5. Stairs.
6. Miscellaneous metals.
C. Samples:
1. Guardrails with specified finishes.

1. Design data.
2. Test Reports:
a. Guardrails: Three copies of certified tests performed by an independent
testing laboratory certifying that guardrails meet current State and
Occupational Safety and Health Administration strength requirements.
b. Gratings:
1) Grating manufacturers' calculations showing that gratings will meet
specified design load, stress, and deflection requirements for each
size grating for each span.
2) Reports of tests performed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, structural and

miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the ASTM, including the
following:
ASTM Class, Grade

Item Standard No. Type or Alloy No.
Cast Iron
Cast Iron A 48 Class 40B
Steel
Galvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90
Black steel, sheet or strip A 569 --
A 570
Coil (plate) A 635 --
Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, A 36 --
and miscellaneous items (except W
shapes).
Rolled W shapes A 992 Grade 50
2018 05500-3 150407

ASTM Class, Grade
Item Standard No. Type or Alloy No.
Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A 307 --
High strength bolts, nuts, and A 325 --
hardened flat washers A 490
Eyebolts A 489 Type 1
Tubing, cold-formed A 500 --
Tubing, hot-formed A 501 --
Steel pipe A 53 Grade B
Stainless steel
Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316**
Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316**
Aluminum
Flashing sheet aluminum B 209 Alloy 5005-H14,
0.032 inches minimum
thickness
Structural sheet aluminum- B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
Structural aluminum B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
B 308
Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42
* Use Type 304L if material will be welded.
** Use Type 316L if material will be welded.
1. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM.

2. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.
A. Aluminum Grating Stair Tread:

a. IKG Borden Industries, Aluminum Grating Stair Tread with Mebac nosing.
b. McNichols Co., Type A-Standard with Corrugated Angle Nosing.
2. Material: Welded aluminum grating tread with non-slip nosing and integral end
plates for bolt on attachment to stair stringers.
3. Size:
a. Tread Width: To equal tread spacing plus 1-inch minimum.
b. Tread Length: Length to suit stringer to stringer dimension indicated on
the Drawings.
c. Depth: 1-3/4-inches.
4. Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.
B. Aluminum Stair Nosing:

a. Wooster Products, Inc., Type 101 Nosing.
b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc., Style 801 Nosing.
2018 05500-4 150407

2. Material: Cast aluminum abrasive nosings with aluminum oxide granules
integrally cast into metal, forming permanent, nonslip, long-wearing surface.
3. For installation in cast-in-place stairs.
4. Configuration: 4-inches wide, fabricated with integrally cast stainless steel
anchors at approximately 12-inch centers. Length to extend within 3-inches of
stair edge on each side.
C. Cast Iron Stop Plank Grooves:

a. Neenah Foundry Company, R-7500 Series, Type A.
b. McKinley Iron Works, Type L.
2. Size: 2-inch wide groove opening by 1-1/2 inch deep, unless otherwise
3. Recess groove with the cast iron surface of the groove set flush with the
concrete surface.
D. Concrete Inserts:
1. Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in
Section 15061.
E. Handrails and Guardrails:

1. General: Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State,
and Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards and
requirements.
2. Aluminum Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe):
a. Rails, Posts, and Fitting-Assembly Spacers:
1) In accordance with ASTM B 429, 6063-T5 or T6, minimum
Schedule 40, extruded aluminum pipe of minimum 1.89-inch outside
diameter and 0.14-inch wall thickness.
2) Alloy 6063-T6 may be used for pieces requiring bending only.
b. Kick Plates: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.
c. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the
manufacturer.
d. Other Parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum
castings.
1) Fabrications: In accordance with ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221
extruded bars.
a. Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.
2) Plug Screws or Blind Rivets: Type 305 stainless steel.
a. Other Parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.
e. Finish of Aluminum Components:
1) Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after
cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M12-C22-A41,
mechanical finish-medium satin, chemical finish-medium matte,
anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural.
2) Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before
anodizing.
f. Fabrication and Assembly:
1) Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
2) Perform without welding.
3) Do not epoxy bond the parts.
2018 05500-5 150407

4)Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as
g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail.
2) Julius Blum and Company, Inc., Connectorail.
3) Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.
3. Guardrail Gates:
a. Supplied by Guardrail Manufacturer:
1) Of same material, quality, and workmanship as specified for guardrail
system in which they will be installed.
2) Of design similar to that of handrail or railing system in which they
will be installed.
b. Components: Gate frame, stainless steel self-closing device, hinges, gate
stops, and durable self-locking type latch. Fabricate components in
conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration
minimum strength requirements.
4. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by guardrail
manufacturer for use with this system.
F. Ladders:
1. General:
a. Type: Safety type conforming to local, State, and Occupational Safety and
Health Administration standards as minimum. Furnish guards for ladder
wells.
b. Size: 18 inches wide between side rails of length, size, shape, detail, and
location indicated on the Drawings.
2. Aluminum Ladders:
a. Materials: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
b. Rungs:
1) One-inch minimum solid square bar with 1/8-inch grooves in top and
deeply serrated on all sides.
2) Capable of withstanding 1,000-pound load without failure.
c. Side Rails: Minimum 4-inch by 1/2-inch flat bars.
d. Fabrication:
1) Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details indicated
on the Drawings.
2) For ladders over 20 feet high, furnish standard ladder cages or fall
prevention system designed in accordance with State and
Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements.
e. Fall Prevention System: Include but not limit to railing, brackets, clamps,
two sleeves, and two belts, satisfying Occupational Safety and Health
Administration safe climbing requirements.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a North Consumer Products, Saf-T-Climb.
b Swager Communications, Climbers Buddy System.
3. Steel Ladders:
a. Materials and Fabrication:
1) Steel with solid rungs fitted into holes drilled in side rails, plug welded
both sides. Bracket supports at top, bottom, and intermediate points,
maximum 60-inches on center. Space rungs 8-inches from wall
surface unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, prime paint
finish.
2018 05500-6 150407

b. Rungs: Capable of withstanding 1,000-pound load without failure.
c. Side Rails: Minimum 3-inch by 3/8-inch flat bars.
d. Fabrication:
1) Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details as
2) For ladders over 20-feet high, furnish standard ladder cages or fall
prevention system designed in accordance with State and
Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements.
3) Fall Prevention System: Include but not limit to railing, brackets,
clamps, two sleeves, and two belts, satisfying Occupational Safety
and Health Administration safe climbing requirements.
Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) North Consumer Products, Saft-T-Climb.
b) Swager Communications, Climbers Buddy System.
G. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Material: Gray iron castings, in accordance with ASTM A 48, Class 30-B.
2. Type: Heavy-duty traffic type, with combined minimum set weight of
265 pounds.
3. Machine horizontal and vertical bearing surfaces to fit neatly, with easily
removable cover bearing firmly in frame without rocking.
4. Frame:
a. Bottom flange type.
b. Approximately 4-1/2-inches frame height.
c. 24-inches diameter clear inside dimension and approximately 32-inches
bottom flange outside diameter, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
5. Cover:
a. Skid-resistant grid pattern design stamped with name of utility service
provided by manhole, such as "ELECTRICAL," "SEWER,"
"TELEPHONE," or "WATER."
b. Solid type without ventilation holes.
6. Finish: Unpainted.
H. Metal Gratings:
1. General:
a. Fabricate grating to cover areas indicated on the Drawings.
b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, grating over an opening shall
cover entire opening.
c. Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or
protrusion, including valve operators or stems, and gate frames.
d. Band ends of grating and edges of cutouts in grating.
1) End Banding: 1/4-inch less than height of grating, with top of grating
and top edge of banding flush.
2) Cutout Banding: Full-height of grating.
3) Use banding of same material as grating.
4) Panel Layout: Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating
around protrusions or piping.
5) Openings 6-inches and Larger: Lay out grating panels with edges of
two adjacent panels located on centerline of opening.
6) Openings Smaller than 6-inches: Locate opening at edge of single
panel.
2018 05500-7 150407

7)Where an area requires more than one grating section to cover area,
clamp adjacent grating sections together at 1/4-points with fasteners
acceptable to ENGINEER.
8) Fabricate grating in units of maximum 50 pounds each.
e. When requested by ENGINEER, test one section of each size grating for
each span length involved on the job under full load.
1) Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections.
f. Grating shall be aluminum, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Aluminum Grating:
a. Material for Gratings, Shelf Angles, and Rebates: 6061-T6 or
6063-T6 aluminum alloy, except cross bars may be 6063-T5 aluminum
alloy.
b. Shelf Angle Concrete Anchors: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Grating Rebate Rod Anchors: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
d. Bar Size and Spacing: As determined by manufacturer to enable grating
to support design load.
e. Design Live Load: A minimum of 150 pounds per square foot uniform live
load on entire grating area, but not less than the live load indicated on the
Drawings for the area where grating is located.
f. Maximum Fiber Stress for Design Load: 12,000 pounds per square inch.
g. Maximum Deflection Due to Design Load: 1/240 of grating clear span.
h. Maximum Spacing of Main Grating Bars: 1-1/8-inches clear between bars.
i. Minimum Grating Height: 1-1/2-inches.
j. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) IKG Borden Industries, grooved Galok Aluminum I-Bar.
2) Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., grooved I-Bar.
3. Heavy-Duty Steel Grating:
a. Heavy-duty type, fabricated from structural steel and designed in
accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges,
using H-20 loading.
b. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Reliance Steel Products Company, Heavy-Duty Steel Grating.
2) Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., equivalent product.
I. Metal Tread Plate:

1. Plate having a raised figured pattern on one surface to provide improved
traction.
J. Preformed Channel Pipe Supports:

1. Preformed channel pipe supports for pipe supports and other applications are
K. Stairs:
1. Aluminum Stairs:
a. Stringers: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.
b. Stair Treads:
1) Aluminum of same type specified under Aluminum Grating.
2) Of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and 1-3/4-inch minimum depth
with cast abrasive type safety nosings.
2018 05500-8 150407

c. Handrails and Guardrails: Aluminum pipe specified under Aluminum
Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe).
d. Fasteners: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
L. Steel Stairs:
1. Ships ladders shall conform to local, State, and Occupational Safety and
Health Administration Standards as minimum.
2. Stringers: Structural steel channels or plates.
3. Treads: Open type attached to stringers with support angles and clips.
a. Borden, "Welded Tread" with Algrip nosing.
4. Railings: Steel pipe, sized as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Anchors: Welded or bolted brackets designed for support and anchorage at
top and bottom.
6. Finish: Prime paint finish for interior locations.
M. Miscellaneous Metal:
1. Miscellaneous Aluminum: Fabricate aluminum products, not covered
separately herein, in accordance with the best practices of the trade and field
assemble by riveting or bolting. Do not weld or flame cut.
2. Miscellaneous Cast Iron:
a. General:
1) Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts.
2) Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on
rectangular edge of casting without flaking metal.
3) Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16-mil dry film
thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified or
3. Miscellaneous Stainless Steel:
a. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as
indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in
accordance with the best practices of the trade.
4. Miscellaneous Structural Steel:
a. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicated on the
Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with
the best practices of the trade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to

receive the work of this section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this
work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with shop
drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions, as applicable except where
specified otherwise.
B. Aluminum Stair Nosing:
2018 05500-9 150407

1. Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs, including top tread on upper
concrete slab.
2. Omit stair nosings where concrete is submerged.
3. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in
Section 09960.
4. Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete, flush with tread and riser faces. Install
nosing in center of step approximately 3-inches from each stair edge.
C. Cast Iron Stop Plank Grooves:

1. Recess stop plank grooves with cast iron surfaces of groove set flush with
concrete surface.
D. Handrails and Guardrails:

1. General:
a. Fasten pipe rails to fittings with Series 300 stainless steel pop rivets or
flush set screws.
b. Make pipe cuts clean and straight, free of burrs and nicks, and square and
accurate for minimum joint-gap.
c. Drill and countersink holes to proper size, as required for a tight flush fit of
screws and other component parts.
d. Space attachment brackets as indicated in the manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Aluminum Pipe Handrails and Guardrails:
a. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of handrails and guardrails
covered with 0.4 millimeters, minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film.
b. Do not remove protective film before handrails and guardrails have been
accepted by ENGINEER nor before other work in proximity of handrails
and guardrails has been completed.
c. Discontinue handrails and guardrails at lighting fixtures.
d. Provide 1/8-inch diameter weep hole at base of each post.
e. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials
electrolysis, make application such that none of the protective material is
visible in the completed assembly.
f. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings.
g. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into formed holes in
concrete, into stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to
face of concrete surfaces as specified and indicated on the Drawings.
h. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings.
i. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kickplates and
rails. Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the
Drawings.
j. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous.
k. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced
lengths to three posts minimum.
l. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver.
m. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in
manufacturer's installation instructions.
n. Completed installation shall have handrails and railings rigid and free of
play at joints and attachments.
o. Protect handrail and guardrail finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains,
and other damage.
p. Replace damaged or disfigured handrails and guardrails with new.
2018 05500-10 150407

q. Shortly before final acceptance of the work, and after removal of
protective polyethylene film, clean handrails and guardrails with mild
detergent or with soap and water. After cleaning, thoroughly rinse
handrails and guardrails and wipe with soft cloth.
r. Erect guardrail straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated
on the Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade, which are
visible to the eye.
3. Guardrail Gates:
a. Install gate to be a vertical plane with the guardrail when in the closed
position.
b. Install hinges so that each gate can swing 180 degrees from the closed
position to the fully open position.
c. Install so that the gates swing to the walkway side of the guardrail only.
Install gate stops on the stationary railing posts to prohibit gates from
swinging in the wrong direction.
d. Install gate frames, hinges, stops, and latches in conformance with
Occupational Safety and Health Administration minimum strength
requirements.
E. Ladders:
1. Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8-inches
between supporting surface and center of rungs.
2. Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung, extend side rails three feet
3-inches minimum above landing and return the rails with a radius bend to the
landing.
3. Where exit from ladder is to side, extend ladder 5 feet 6-inches minimum
above landing and rigidly secure at top.
4. Erect rail straight, level, plumb, and true to position indicated on the Drawings.
Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye.
F. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Installation: As specified in Section 02084.
G. Metal Gratings:
1. General:
a. Allow 1/8-inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside
face of vertical leg of shelf angles.
b. Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2-inches minimum.
c. Install aluminum plate or angles where necessary to fill openings at
changes in elevation and at openings between equipment and grating.
d. Install angle stops at ends of grating.
e. Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off support.
f. Weld stops in place, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
g. Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same
plane.
2. Aluminum Grating:
a. Coat surfaces of aluminum shelf angles, rebates, and rod anchors in
contact with concrete as specified in Section 09960.
b. Aluminum Grating: Support on aluminum shelf angles or rebates.
3. Heavy-Duty Steel Grating:
2018 05500-11 150407

a. Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel rebates embedded and
anchored in concrete.
b. Use for roadways, traffic areas, and where indicated on the Drawings.
H. Stairs:
1. General:
a. Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or
specified.
END OF SECTION
2018 05500-12 150407

SECTION 06608
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: General fabrication and design requirements for fiberglass

reinforced plastic fabrications.
2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or
furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.
excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the
a. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. RTP-1 - Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C 582 - Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting
Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.
2. D 883 - Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics.
3. D 2563 - Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced
Plastic Laminate Parts.
4. D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor.
5. D 2584 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.
6. D 3299 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Glass Fiber Reinforced
Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks.
7. D 4097 - Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The terminology of this specification is in accordance with ASTM D 883. Fabricators

using this specification are responsible for correct interpretation.
B. Fiberglass reinforced plastic: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic or glass fiber and resin
fabrication consisting of approximately 35 to 55 percent glass fiber reinforcement by
weight for hand lay-up structural laminates and 55 to 70 percent glass for filament
wound structural laminates, unless otherwise specified.
2018 06608-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div6\06608.docx
C. Equipment: The fiberglass reinforced plastic equipment, including ancillary
equipment, work, and materials as described in this specification.
D. Fabrication drawings: Those drawings produced by the Fabricator or Contractor,

with the intention of providing the necessary information to construct or install the
equipment.
E. Mat: Fibrous material consisting of randomly oriented chopped or swirled filaments

loosely held together with a binder.
F. Chopped glass: Fibrous material consisting of randomly oriented chopped filaments

applied directly to a mold surface or laminated under construction by a chopper gun.
G. Fiber prominence (jackstraw): The distinct visibility of individual glass strands

causing a loss of translucency of the laminate.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design fiberglass reinforced plastic tanks, scrubbers, and other vessels following
the procedures and methods, utilizing the equations and formulas, and
incorporating safety factors and allowable design stresses and strains set forth in
ASME RTP-1. Base the design of duct and other fiberglass reinforced plastic
equipment not covered by ASME RTP-1 on the engineering rationale, applicable
formulas, and safety factors set forth in ASME RTP-1.
B. Perform calculations necessary to ensure long-term, low risk service of the

fiberglass reinforced plastic equipment with minimum reasonable maintenance
requirements.
1. Long-term, low risk service is defined as a service life of 20 years without
major structural failure or leakage.
2. The design shall ensure proper functioning of the equipment at the stated
operating conditions.
3. The design shall include as a minimum, engineering calculations, materials
selection and documented physical and mechanical properties, and detailed
drawings required for fabrication and assembly of the equipment.
C. Design in accordance with applicable national, regional, and local design and
building codes.
1. Wind and seismic forces shall be determined in accordance with the building
code as specified in Section 01410.
D. Resistance to overturning shall not include the weight of the liquid contained in the
equipment.
E. Consider the interaction of the installed system including but not limited to thermal
expansion of duct, tanks, and vessels and the effects of external loading from
piping, fans, pumps, platforms, and other attached items.
F. Allow for the most severe combination of conditions which may include, but not be
limited to, the following:
1. Internal or external pressure.
2. Static head of contents (working and test conditions).
3. Mass of structure and contents.
2018 06608-2 150407

4. Design temperature including upset conditions.
5. Superimposed loads, such as seismic and wind forces.
6. Bending moments due to eccentric loads.
7. Localized loads acting at supports, lugs, and other attachments.
8. Shock loads.
9. Loads due to heating or cooling and thermal gradients.
10. Loads applied during transport or erection.
11. Loads imposed by personnel during erection and operations.
12. Fatigue.
G. Use safety factors and allowable strains specified in ASME RTP-1 unless otherwise
specified. Do not use safety factors and allowable strains less than the following:
1. Allowable hoop and axial strain shall be 0.001 inch per inch for filament wound
tanks.
2. A safety factor of 10 for hand lay-up components in tension, flexure, or other
loading conditions where elastic stability is not in question.
3. A safety factor of 5 for external loading (vacuum) or local buckling due to
seismic or wind loading.
H. Safety factors for upset conditions or infrequent loading situations may be less than
the above values for the specific condition if acceptable to the Engineer.
I. There will typically be other aspects which should be considered. Identify and
consider their effects, identify design limitations, and submit this information.
J. Provide test reports or other documentation for laminate properties used in the
design. Laminates shall be similar in construction, layer sequence, resin type, and
cure to those used to determine tested properties. Properties shall be adjusted to
reflect reductions at operating temperatures. Test reports shall be provided for:
1. Grating: Indicate grating strength and deflection.
2. Physical properties of test cover panels.
3. Tanks showing conformance with specified strength requirements.
K. The corrosion liner shall be a minimum of 100 mils in thickness, unless otherwise
specified, and documentation shall be provided verifying veil type, liner thickness,
and resin cure.
1. Consider 50 mils of the corrosion liner as sacrificial and do not include it in
determining structural wall thickness.
2. Use structural wall thickness not less than 0.375 inches for tanks and vessels
and 0.1875 inches for ductwork.
3. Submit minimum structural thicknesses of other types of fiberglass reinforced
plastic fabrications.
L. Laminate types may include hand lay up, helical winding, and hoop/chop
construction methods.
1. In laminates with helix angles greater than 80 degrees and in hoop/chop
laminates, orientate approximately 10 percent of the structural wall thickness
at 0 degrees (longitudinal direction).
2. Apply this reinforcement in at least 2 layers of weft unidirectional fabric and
equally spaced within the structural wall.
M. For tanks and scrubbers; nozzles, determine manways and shell reinforcements
according to the tables and formulas in ASME RTP-1.
2018 06608-3 150407

N. Anchor tanks and vessels using lugs and a continuous filament wound band or an
integral filament wound load ledge with external stainless steel anchor clips.
1. The anchor clips shall be bolted to the concrete foundation; use non-shrink
grout to level anchor clips.
2. The design shall resolve the sum of the moments and the sum of the force
equal to 0.
O. Design internal beams and support attachments using a maximum of 200 pounds
per square inch shear stress for secondary bonds. Also apply this to design of
external lugs required for ladders, platforms, and other attached items.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations:

1. Submit general arrangement and fabrication drawings, calculations, and
elements of the design.
2. Include submittal information which describes specifically how the equipment
is to be built and details necessary to ascertain that products meet specified
requirements. Provide in the form of drawings, standards, specifications, or
other shop instructions, but may also be partially contained in quality control
records. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Fabrication drawings.
b. General arrangement drawings signed by an Engineer registered in the
state where the project is located, showing complete structural, fasteners,
and erection procedures for a complete assembly.
c. Quality control programs.
d. Verification that the manufacturer has been engaged in fabrication of
similar fiberglass reinforced plastic equipment for a minimum of 5 years.
e. Statement of compliance with contract design requirements, codes, and
standards.
f. Recommendation for each resin selection from resin manufacturer.
g. Type and amounts of fillers.
h. Nominal corrosion liner description.
i. Reinforcement types and glass content range for hand lay-up laminates.
j. For filament wound laminates:
1) Helix angle.
2) Glass content range.
3) Strand yield.
4) Strand per inch in the winding band.
5) Ply thickness.
6) Amount of chop or unidirectional roving interspersed with winding, if
any, and location within laminate.
k. For other components:
1) Construction type.
2) Laminate thicknesses.
3) Ply sequences.
4) Glass content range.
l. For secondary overlays (both interior and exterior):
1) Laminate thicknesses.
2) Ply sequences and widths.
2018 06608-4 150407

m. Construction details: Construction details for assembly and other special
configurations, including:
1) Tank bottom/top attachments with knuckle configuration and overlays
and thicknesses.
2) Tank support and anchor lugs, including attachment details.
3) Tank nozzles and installation, including cutout reinforcement,
gusseting, and similar items.
4) Tank lateral or other support fabrication details, including platform
attachment clips and/or shoulders.
5) Scrubber configuration and fabrication details of internal support
system and other specialty items.
6) Cover panel joints, anchorage detail, and details of doors and
inspection ports and their attachment or incorporation within the
cover.
n. Miscellaneous equipment required.
o. Test reports and certification of compliance with physical property
requirements.
p. Color samples.
q. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
r. ASME RTP-1 certification.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranty.
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Fiberglass reinforced plastic manufacturer with

experienced personnel, physical facilities, and management capacity sufficient to
produce custom-made glass fiber and resin products of quality and size specified
for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record.
B. Quality assurance plan: Fabricator shall be responsible for implementation of a

comprehensive quality assurance plan. The quality assurance plan describes
procedures with the following minimum requirements:
1. Fabricator shall designate personnel to inspect equipment while in process
and after completion to assure compliance to every aspect of the section and
fabrication drawings.
a. Inspection shall include, as a minimum, checks for visual defects,
laminate thickness and sequence, glass content, Barcol hardness,
dimensional tolerances, adherence to construction details, surface
preparation, and environmental conditions.
b. Fabricator's inspector shall complete a report of the findings including
method of measurement for each separate assembly.
2. Prior to use of resins in fabrication, fabricator shall extract samples of resins
and retain them for use by the Engineer. Sample size shall be 100 cubic
centimeters minimum:
a. Take 1 sample for each manufacturer's batch number if resin is received
in the form it will be used.
2018 06608-5 150407

b. If the fabricator alters the resin after receipt, such as through the addition
of styrene, promoters, or other additives, take samples from each drum or
portion thereof mixed with additives.
c. Fabricator shall provide documentation for each sample including resin
type, manufacturer, batch and lot number, drum number, complete listing
of additives with amounts added, and description and manufacturer of
each additive.
3. Fabricator shall inspect glass reinforcement prior to use in fabrication.
a. Do not use glass that does not meet the manufacturer's acceptance
standards.
b. Do not use glass material that is wet or has been wet.
c. For each type of glass and lot number used, fabricator shall record the
manufacturer, product description, binder type, product code, production
date, and lot number.
d. For mat, woven roving, unidirectional roving, and cloth, also include in
records actual measured weight per square yard of material.
4. Fabricator shall retain nozzle cutouts and other excess laminate, clearly
marking each piece to identify its original location. These laminate samples
become the property of the Owner.
5. For areas where valid laminate samples are not available, take sample plugs
at the Engineer's request.
a. Repair subsequent holes in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
6. Fabricator shall verify glass content on available samples in accordance with
ASTM D 2584. Complete this test and submit the results complete for each
major component where samples are available.
7. Prior to final shipment of the equipment, fabricator shall submit to the Engineer
a complete quality control report, consisting of copies of records maintained for
compliance with this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RESIN AND REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. General physical properties: In accordance with applicable specifications PS15-69,

ASTM C 582, ASTM D 3299, ASTM D 4097, and ASME RTP-1 with verification of
properties. Physical properties may include tensile, flexural, and compression
modulus of elasticity and ultimate strengths, limiting strains, Poisson ratios,
coefficients of expansion, and other directional properties as required for the design
of the equipment.
B. Resin:
1. Fabricate equipment using the corrosion-resistant resin(s) specified in the
fiberglass reinforced plastic equipment specifications. The fabricator is
required to obtain independent endorsement of each resin selection from the
resin manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified, use the resin throughout
laminates.
2. The type of catalyst recommended varies between resin manufacturers.
Submit resin/catalyst before fabrication begins to verify compliance to the resin
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
2018 06608-6 150407

3. Employ no fillers, additives, or pigments in the resin.
a. A thixotropic agent for viscosity control may be used in the proportion and
type recommended by the resin manufacturer.
b. Use no thixotropic agent in the corrosion liner or on surfaces to be in
contact with the corrosive environment.
4. Make resin putty using the same resin as was used in the original fabrication
and shall contain milled glass fibers.
a. The use of silica flour, grinding dust, or other fillers is not allowed.
5. When specified, add antimony trioxide or antimony pentoxide to the resin in
the amount necessary to achieve the required fire retardancy rating in the
structural wall only. Follow resin manufacturer's recommendations.
a. Unless otherwise specified, the corrosion liner shall not contain this
additive.
C. Reinforcement:
1. Show the type and sequence of reinforcements to be used on the fabrication
drawings.
2. Use as commercial grade corrosion-resistant borosilicate glass fiber
reinforcement, unless otherwise specified.
3. Use glass fiber reinforcing having a surface finish and binder that is specifically
recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular resin system to be
used.
4. Use Type C (chemical grade) glass, 10 mils (0.01 inches) thickness, or
polyester surfacing veil, such as Nexus surfacing veils.
5. Use Type E (electrical grade) glass, 1-1/2 ounces or 3/4-ounce per square
foot, with nominal fiber length of 1.25, within 0.75 inches mat.
6. Continuous glass roving used in chopper guns for spray up shall be Type E
chopper roving.
7. Woven roving shall be 24 ounces per square yard Type E glass and have a
5-by-4 plain weave.
8. Continuous roving used in filament wound structures shall be Type E glass
winder roving with a yield of 200 yards or more per pound.
9. Use Type E glass unidirectional fabric. Weft unidirectional fabric shall be
15.7 ounces per square yard.
10. When specified, use Type ECR glass reinforcements supplied in similar fabric
styles to those specified above.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Molds:
1. Construct molds of a suitable material to produce a smooth and glossy
corrosion liner surface on the fiberglass reinforced plastic equipment.
2. Covering of mandrels with cardboard must be accepted by the Engineer prior
to start of fabrication.
B. Laminates:
1. Determine specified glass content in accordance with ASTM D 2584.
2. Consider laminate thicknesses shown on the fabrication drawings as
construction minimums. Verify that minimum thicknesses are obtained using
the laminate sequences specified. When only total laminate thicknesses are
specified or indicated on the Drawings, the minimum allowable structural
2018 06608-7 150407

laminate thickness shall be the total laminate thickness less the specified
corrosion liner thickness.
3. Interruptions in laminating sequence shall follow the application of a ply of mat
and be succeeded by a ply of mat.
4. The interruption shall not exceed 24 hours, and the in-process surface must
retain acetone sensitivity until laminating is resumed. Lack of compliance with
these aspects or indication that contamination of the surface has occurred
shall require that surface preparation be accomplished before resuming.
5. Chopped strand glass applied by chopper gun is allowed in lieu of mat layers
in the structural laminates only.
a. Chopper gun application of the corrosion liner is not allowed.
6. Coat non-mold surfaces with resin containing wax additive in the amount
necessary to allow full cure of the surface. In the case of exterior surfaces, this
wax coat shall also contain an ultraviolet stabilizer in the type and amount
recommended by the resin manufacturer.
7. The exterior surface of equipment shall be resin-rich and reinforced with
1 layer C glass surfacing veil, unless otherwise specified.
8. When specified, the exterior coat shall be an opaque pigmented surface coat,
applied only after Engineer's inspection. Color shall be selected by the
Engineer.
C. Corrosion liner laminates:

1. The inner surface of laminates shall be resin-rich and reinforced with surfacing
veil of the type and number of layers as shown on the fabrication drawings.
2. The interior layer of the corrosion liner shall consist of 1-1/2 ounces per square
foot mat in the number of layers specified on the fabrication drawings. An
exotherm interruption is specifically prohibited within the corrosion liner.
3. Chopped glass applied by chopper gun is not allowed in the corrosion liner.
4. Plies of the inner surface and interior layer are to gel completely before
proceeding with the structural laminates.
5. Completed corrosion liner as described above shall contain not less than
20 percent nor more than 30 percent glass by weight.
a. Use no thixotropic material in the resin for the liner, nor in the fabrication
of fiberglass reinforced plastic components intended for internal service.
b. The completed liner shall be the minimum thickness specified or indicated
on the Drawings.
6. Do not use a separately cured unreinforced gel coat.
D. Hand lay-up structural laminates:

1. The corrosion liner laminate shall be followed by hand lay-up structural
laminates of varying reinforcement sequences as indicated on the fabrication
drawings.
2. For hand lay-up structural laminates, reinforcement shall consist of mat and
woven roving in the sequence specified on the fabrication drawings.
3. Woven roving shall have a ply of mat on each side. Two adjacent plies of
woven roving are not permitted.
4. Laminates containing primarily 1-1/2 ounces per square foot mat layers in
conjunction with woven roving shall contain not less than 35 percent or more
than 45 percent glass (by weight).
5. Laminates containing primarily 3/4-ounce per square foot mat layers in
conjunction with woven roving are considered to be high strength laminates
2018 06608-8 150407

and shall contain not less than 45 percent or more than 55 percent glass by
weight.
E. Filament wound structural laminates:

1. The corrosion liner laminate shall be followed by filament wound structural
laminates as indicated on the fabrication drawings.
2. For filament wound structural laminates, reinforcement shall consist of
continuous strand fiberglass roving applied with a minimum of interruptions
until the specified minimum thickness is attained.
a. This laminate shall contain 55 to 70 percent glass by weight as indicated
on the fabrication drawings.
3. Each complete cycle of filament winding shall form a closed pattern of winding
bands which completely covers the surface with 2 bi-directional layers.
a. Each layer shall be a maximum of 1 roving in thickness.
b. Uniformly space the filaments across the winding band without bunching
or gaping.
4. Specify the helix angle of winding on the approved fabrication drawings, as
measured from the centerline of revolution of the equipment shell.
5. Tolerance on helix angle is plus or minus 2 degrees, unless otherwise
specified.
6. The fabrication drawings may require that layers of unidirectional roving be
interspersed within the continuous filament winding.
7. Apply the unidirectional roving with the glass strand aligned in the axial
direction, to within plus or minus 5 degrees.
8. If layers of mat or chopped glass are needed to ensure proper bonding of
unidirectional roving, or within the filament winding to accommodate the
Fabricator's manufacturing methods, consider the layers' extra material that
will result in a thickness greater than specified. The amount of filament winding
and unidirectional roving specified must still be applied.
F. Joining laminates:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic joining laminates are subject to applicable
requirements specified in other sections for laminates.
2. Reinforce fiberglass reinforced plastic joints with an overlay of glass
reinforcement and resin which extends equally within plus or minus 1/2 inch on
each side of the joint. Use minimum thickness, ply sequence, and ply widths of
fiberglass reinforced plastic joints as indicated on fabrication drawings.
3. Restrain parts to be joined to prevent movement until completion and cure of
the joint overlay.
4. Fit-up parts and verify that tolerances and assembly requirements are
satisfied. Completely fill the void between component parts with resin putty,
taking care not to extrude an excessive amount of putty into the interior.
G. Environment:
1. The fabrication process and materials at the point of fabrication are to be
maintained within a range of 60 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit. This temperature
must also be at least 5 degrees greater than wet bulb temperature, as
measured with a sling psychrometer.
2. Store materials in a dry area and within the temperature and humidity limits
recommended by the manufacturers.
2018 06608-9 150407

H. Flanges:
1. Make flanges by hand lay-up construction with nozzle neck and flange made
integrally in 1 piece and fabricated in accordance with the dimensions
indicated on the fabrication drawings. Extend layers of reinforcement in the
nozzle neck and hub uninterrupted into the flange.
2. Build-up additional hub thickness using alternating layers of 1-1/2 ounces per
square foot mat and 24 ounces per square yard woven roving.
3. Build-up additional thickness in the flange using "ring" cutouts of mat, evenly
distributed throughout the flange thickness.
4. Press molded or filament wound flanges are not allowed.
5. Overall machine facing of the back of flanges is not permitted.
a. To obtain proper seating, spotface bolt holes for SAE size washers.
b. Resin coat bolt holes and other cut surfaces so that no fibers are
exposed.
c. Spotfacing shall not produce a flange thickness less than indicated in the
fabrication drawings.
6. Bolt holes in flanges shall straddle principal centerlines of the Equipment.
Tolerance in bolt hole locations and in diameter of bolt circle shall be plus
1/16 inch.
7. Depressions or projections in flange face shall be no greater than 1/32 inch.
I. Allowable visual defects:

1. Visual defects in areas of the equipment shall not exceed the maximum
allowable levels of visual defects set forth in Table A, unless acceptable to
Engineer.
2. Visual defects in accordance with ASTM D 2563.
3. Presence of visual defects in excess of the allowable levels of Table A shall be
grounds for rejection of the equipment. Listed quantities apply to small,
localized areas and shall not be averaged over larger areas.
4. For the purpose of Table A, use of the following definitions apply:
a. INNER surface - Interior process surface, thickness of surfacing veil(s),
and interface between veils and mat layers. Includes surfacing veils on
internal joints.
b. Interior mat layers - Layers of mat following the inner surface, and
interface between liner and structural wall. Includes mat layers on internal
joints.
c. Structural wall - Layers of filament winding or alternating layers of mat and
woven roving following the corrosion liner, and layers of mat and woven
roving in internal overlays.
d. Exterior surface - The exterior surface of the laminate and the thickness of
the surfacing veil.
e. Dimensions listed in Table A refer to the largest dimension measured for
defects.
TABLE A
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LEVELS OF VISUAL DEFECTS
Condition/ Exterior
Defect Inner Surface Interior Mat Layers Structural Wall Surface
Chip None None None
Crack None None None
2018 06608-10 150407

TABLE A
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LEVELS OF VISUAL DEFECTS
Condition/ Exterior
Defect Inner Surface Interior Mat Layers Structural Wall Surface
Crazing None None None
Delamination None None See Air Bubble
Dry Spot None See Air Bubble See Air Bubble
Foreign None Maximum Diameter See Air Bubble
Inclusion 1/32"
Fracture None None None None
Air Bubble/ Less than 1/64" Ø Less than 1/32" Ø Less than 3/16" Ø
Void unlimited. 1/64" to unlimited. 1/32" to unlimited. 3/16" to
1/16" Ø 2 / sq. in. 1/8" Ø 5 / sq. in. 1/4" Ø 2 / sq. in.
Maximum Diameter Maximum Diameter Maximum Diameter
1/16" 1/8" 1/4"
Blister See Air Bubble See Air Bubble See Air Bubble
Burned None None None
Pit (Pinhole) Less than 1/32" Ø N/A N/A
50/square feet 1/32"
to 1/16" Ø
10/square feet
Maximum Diameter
1/16" Maximum
Depth 1/32"
Resin Pocket None Maximum 1 square Maximum 1 square
inch per occurrence. inch per occurrence.
Wrinkle Allowable if laminate Allowable if laminate Allowable if laminate
is glass reinforced. is glass reinforced is glass reinforced
No sharp edges and full mat layer and full mat layer
allowed. thickness and total thickness and total
thickness are thickness are
maintained. maintained.
Scratch None N/A N/A
Fiber None Maximum 10 fibers Maximum 20 fibers
Prominence visible per square visible per square
inch inch
2018 06608-11 150407

A. Inspection:
1. Owner's inspection: Permit the Engineer access to the equipment during
fabrication and upon completion for the purpose of verifying compliance to the
Contract Documents. The inspection is not intended to replace the Fabricator's
own quality control procedures.
2. In no respect does inspection of equipment by Engineer relieve the Fabricator
of compliance with the Contract Documents.
a. A final inspection will be performed by the Engineer.
3. The Fabricator shall notify the Engineer at the completion of particular
milestones during fabrication. The milestones are as follows:
a. View tooling prior to fabrication.
b. Beginning application of corrosion liner for each part, extraction of each
part prior to beginning assembly.
c. Upon completion of each separate assembly, Engineer reserves the right
to include additional milestones.
4. Allow Engineer to photograph the equipment while in process and/or upon
completion.
5. Engineer may use magnification or other special viewing or measurement
devices during inspection.
6. Evidence of poor workmanship or lack of compliance with aspects of the
Contract Documents will be grounds for rejection of the equipment.
7. Subsequent repair of rejected equipment may, at the Engineer's option, be
undertaken in an attempt to bring the equipment to an acceptable state.
a. Repair procedures must be accepted by the Engineer prior to
implementation.
2.04 TESTING
A. The Engineer may employ destructive testing, such as ultimate tensile or flexure
strength tests or glass content ignition tests, on available samples or use other
non-destructive test methods, such as acoustic emission or ultrasonic polygauge
thickness measurement, on the completed equipment for verification of compliance
to the contract documents.
B. Testing performed by the Engineer will be accomplished through use of applicable

ASTM test methods when appropriate.
C. Hardness tests will be made for acceptance by the Engineer on the liner surface
using the Barcol impressor, Model GYZJ 934 1, calibrated at 2 points in accordance
with ASTM D 2583.
1. Ten readings will be taken in a localized area, deleting the 2 highest and
2 lowest, and averaging the remaining 6.
2. Minimum acceptable Barcol hardness will be a reading of 30 unless otherwise
specified.
D. An acetone sensitivity test will also be performed by the Engineer as an acceptance

criteria. Evidence of a sticky or tacky surface following rubbing with an acetone-
saturated cloth will be grounds for rejection of the equipment.
2018 06608-12 150407

PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
2018 06608-13 150407

SECTION 06611
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications including:

1. Weirs.
2. Baffles.
3. Stop plates.
4. Parshall flume liners.
2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or
furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.
excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the
a. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
b. Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
c. Section 01614 - Wind Design Criteria.
d. Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and
Masonry.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. F 102 - Matched-Die-Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates, Scum
Baffles, and Mounting Brackets.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
2. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
4. D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation of Hardness of Rigid Plastics
by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
5. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
2018 06611-1 150407

C. United States, Department of Agriculture (USDA).
D. United States, Department of the Interior:

1. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR):
a. ISO 9826 - Water Measurement Manual, Measurement of Liquid Flow in
Open Channel.
A. Parshall flume liner: Provide temporary bracing for liner to ensure maintenance of
dimensions during shipment. Maintain bracing in place for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEIR PLATES AND BAFFLES
A. General:
1. In accordance with AWWA F 102, and as specified in this Section.
B. Materials:
1. Laminate construction: Glass fiber-reinforced, chemical-resistant polyester
resin.
a. Glass content of laminate: Minimum 20 percent by weight.
b. Resin fillers: Minimum 40 percent.
2. Physical properties of laminate: Equal to or exceeding the tensile, flexural,
impact, hardness, and water absorption properties specified in AWWA F 102.
3. Performance criteria:
a. Chemical resistance: Classification: AWWA F 102 Type II
(chemical-resistant resin, filler and fabrications exposed to untreated
sewage and hydrogen sulfide gas.
4. Color: Manufacturer’s standard aqua/turquoise.
C. Fabrications:
1. Fabricated to the shapes, dimensions, and details indicated on the Drawings
and specified, and using processes as specified in this Section.
2. Dimensions:
a. Conform to tolerances in accordance with AWWA F 102, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Final laminate thickness: Plus or minus 10 percent of nominal thickness.
3. Fabricate weir plates with oversize holes to allow vertical adjustment.
4. Seal cut edges of non-standard lengths, and edges of drilled and countersunk
holes in fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications with resin.
5. Furnish fiberglass reinforced plastic lapped plate splices at joints.
D. Rectangular “flat crested” weirs and baffles:

1. Fabrication:
a. Baffles:
1) Hand lay-up components to specified shape and dimensions.
b. Weirs:
1) Of shape and dimensions specified.
2018 06611-2 150407

2)
Provide 2-3/8 inch holes for adjustment
3)
Resin coat cut edges and drilled and countersunk holes in fiberglass
reinforced plastic fabrications.
c. Furnish fiberglass reinforced plastic butt plates for joints.
d. Molded to produce uniform, smooth surfaces.
e. Tolerances: In accordance with AWWA F 102.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Glass Steel, Inc.
b. MFG Water Treatment Products.
c. NEFCO, Inc., Palm Beach Gardens, FL.
d. Warminster Fiberglass, Southhampton, PA.
E. Accessories:
1. Washers: Of same material as weirs, with surfaces smooth, free of voids, and
without dry spots and crazes.
2. Assembly hardware: Concrete anchors as specified in Section 05190.
2.02 STOP PLATES
A. General:
1. Design criteria and Chemical exposure:
a. As specified for the application.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Glass Steel, Inc.
2. Plasti-Fab.
3. Warminster Fiberglass.
C. Materials:
1. Minimum corrosion liner: Manufacturer’s standard for the service environment
specified.
2. Ultraviolet stabilizer: Added to the exterior surface coat of fabrications in the
type and amount recommended by the resin manufacturer for the in-service
UV exposure.
3. Resin: Fire-retardant, premium grade vinyl ester, antimony trioxide, or
pentoxide added to meet Class 1 flame spread rating of ASTM E 84 and
self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D 635.
4. Color: Tan or green, unless otherwise specified.
D. Fabrication:
1. Stop plates: Hand lay-up components to specified shape and dimensions.
E. Accessories:
1. Provide handle for removal/installation of stop plate.
2.03 PARSHALL FLUME LINER
A. General:
1. Size(s)/Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings with interior dimensions in
accordance with USBR/ISO 9826.
2. Performance requirements:
a. Accuracy of flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of rate with plus or minus
0.5 percent of rate repeatability.
2018 06611-3 150407

b. Chemical exposure: In contact with untreated sewage and hydrogen
sulfide gas.
c. Suitable for outdoor use in contact with untreated sewage.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. BIF Industries.
2. F. B. Leopold Company, Inc.
3. Plasti-Fab.
4. TRACOM, Inc., Alpharetta, Georgia.
5. Warminster Fiberglass.
C. Parshall flume (concrete):

1. Composition: Sufficient embedded galvanized steel to produce substantial,
self-supporting rigid structure requiring no external supporting structure.
2. Throat with fiberglass reinforced plastic liner installed: 24 inches wide for
measuring flows from 0.5 to 12 million gallons per day.
3. Interior dimensions with fiberglass reinforced plastic liner installed: In
accordance with USDA Circular 843.a.
D. Materials:
1. Glass fiber reinforced plastic, having the following properties:
Test Standard Requirement:
Tensile strength ASTM D 638 14,000 psi, minimum
Flexural strength ASTM D 790 25,000 psi, minimum
Flexural modulus ASTM D 790 1,000,000 psi, minimum
Indentation hardness (Barcol) ASTM D 2583 40 minimum, average
2. Minimum corrosion liner:
a. On interior surface of flume.
b. Two "C" or Nexus veils as specified for the service environment.
c. Remainder 1-1/2 ounce per square foot mat to a total minimum thickness
of 0.106 inches.
3. Ultraviolet stabilizer: Added to the corrosion liner in the type and amount
recommended by the resin manufacturer.
4. Minimum 3/8-inch total thickness.
5. Resin: Premium grade vinyl ester:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: As recommended by the
resin manufacturer for the specific operating environment:
1) Derakane 411.
2) Hetron 922.
3) Reichhold Dion VER 9100.
4) Interplastic VE 8300.
6. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.
E. Fabrication:
1. Fabricated with integral stiffening ribs.
2. One piece, full-length construction for flumes up to 84 inches.
F. Accessories:
1. Wing walls: At inlet and/or outlet as indicated on the Drawings.
a. 45-degree angle type.
2018 06611-4 150407

2. Ultrasonic level transmitter:
a. As specified in Section 17206 for transmitter and mounting requirements.
b. Bushing/coupling for mounting bracket.
c. Fixed position bracket of Type 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in

Section 01600.
3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's

printed instructions.
3.03 WEIRS
A. Carefully install weirs, aligning and leveling to the elevations indicated on the
Drawings.
3.04 PARSHALL FLUME
A. Install by grouting into place.
END OF SECTION
2018 06611-5 150407

SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fire extinguishers.
1. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed products for minimum five

years with satisfactory performance record of minimum five years.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with UL requirements for classification.
2. Provide fire rated cabinet tubs where required to maintain fire rating of walls.
3. Coordinate installation of blocking for anchoring of accessories in accordance
with Section 06100.
A. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices as specified in Section 09110.
B. Coordinate preparation of openings for fire extinguisher cabinets in accordance with

cabinet manufacturer's recommendations and Section 09250.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish and install minimum 10 percent, but not less than one, of
fire extinguishers with brackets installed in addition to the number indicated on the
Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguisher and Cabinets: One of the following or equal:

1. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN.
3. Modern Metal Products by Muckle, Owatonna, MN.
4. Watrous, Incorporated, Northbrook, IL.
2018 10520-1 150407

F:\PROJ\2015\150407\2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT\SPECIFICATIONS\SEPT2018\DIV10\10520.DOC
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type FE10: UL 4A:60B:C with 10 pound capacity of dry chemical with ammonium
phosphate base for extinguishing ABC fires.
B. Type EFE10: UL 1A:10B:C with 10 pound capacity of colorless, odor less,

electrically non-conductive liquefied gas, or clean agent as defined by NFPA 2001,
for extinguishing electrical fires without leaving residue.
2.03 WALL BRACKETS

1. Type: Standard as manufactured by fire extinguisher manufacturer.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, corrosion resistant finish, size and type to suit
extinguisher.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install products plumb, square and level.
C. Place Extinguishers: Locate one extinguisher in each cabinet and elsewhere as

indicated.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. Install fire extinguisher on wall brackets when fire extinguisher are indicated without
cabinets.
END OF SECTION
2018 10520-2 150407

F:\PROJ\2015\150407\2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT\SPECIFICATIONS\SEPT2018\DIV10\10520.DOC
SECTION 13410
BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION

MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. This Section includes general design, material, equipment fabrication,
installation, calibration, testing, commissioning, training, and documentation
requirements for instrumentation and control systems.
2. Additional or more stringent requirements, when given in other Sections, shall
prevail.
B. Related DIVISIONs and Sections:

1. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL.
2. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.
3. Section 01210 – Allowances.
6. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures.
9. Section 13411 – Control System Strategies
10. Section 13423 – Level and Flow Instruments
11. Section 13424 – Pressure Instruments
12. Section 13442 – Instrument and Control Panels
13. Section 13455 – I/O List
14. Section 13475 – Local Area Network (LAN) Communication System
15. Section 13485 – Instrument Index
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
B. American National Standards Institute/ American Petroleum Institute (ANSI/API):

1. API RP550 - Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems.
2. ANSI/API 551-1992 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.
C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service.
D. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA):

1. ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2018 13410-1 150407

2. ISA S5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems.
3. ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams.
4. ISA S5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
5. ISA RP7.1 - Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test.
6. ISA S7.3 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air.
7. ISA S12.4 - Instrument Purging for Reduction of Hazardous Area
Classification.
8. ISA S18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications.
9. ISA S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves.
10. ISA S51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology.
11. ISA RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers.
12. ISA S71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Airborne Contaminants.
E. Milspec:
1. MIL-I-46058C - Electrical Insulating Compound.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2. NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
3. NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities.
H. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA):

1. SAMA PMC-5 - Resistance Thermometers.
2. SAMA PMC-6 - Filled System Thermometers.
3. SAMA PMC-8 - Thermocouple Thermometers.
4. SAMA PMC-17 - Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements.
I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Where a term is used in Specification Section number series 13400 through 13499
relating to instrumentation, and the meaning is not defined therein or elsewhere in
the Contract Documents, the meaning of the term shall be as defined in ISA S51.1
Process Instrumentation Terminology, or if not contained in ISA 51.1, as defined in
listed reference standards under "References."
B. Control Circuit: Any circuit operating at 80 volts ac or dc or more, whose principal

purpose is the conveyance of information and not the conveyance of energy for the
operation of an electrically powered device.
C. HMI: Human Machine Interface. This is the graphical interface operators will use to
view plant processes, alarms, trends, etc. Additionally, this will be the point of
interface for control commands and setpoints.
2018 13410-2 150407

D. ICS: Instrumentation and Control System
E. ICS Integrator: The ICS and ICS subsystems shall be the responsibility of a single
integrator. The ICS Integrator shall use a qualified fiber optic installer for the fiber
optics and associated fiber optic components.
F. LAN: Local Area Network.
G. Panel: An instrument support system which may be a flat surface, a partial

enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in
process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the
context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents shall be interpreted as a
general term, which includes flat panels, enclosures, cabinets, and consoles.
H. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. The PLC executes the core logic of the
process control including PID loops, alarm detection, motor interlock protection and
all other control and monitoring logic.
I. Power Circuit: Any circuit operating at 80 volts (ac or dc) or more, whose principal
purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered
device.
J. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.
K. Signal Circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 80 volts ac or dc.
L. Standard Software: Software packages that are independent of project on which

they are used. Standard software includes system software, and process monitoring
and control software.
1. System Software: Application independent software developed by digital
equipment manufacturers and software companies. Includes, but is not limited
to, operating systems; programming languages such as C, BASIC, Visual
BASIC and other similar software. .
2. ICS Software: Software packages independent of specific process control
project on which they are used and includes data acquisition, alarming, and
other controls functionality.
3. Application Software: Software to provide functions unique to this Project and
that are not provided by standard software alone.
M. Two-Wire Transmitter: A transmitter which derives its operating power supply from
the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply
connections. As used in this Specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a
transmitter, which provides a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulation of signal in a
series circuit with an external 24 volt direct current driving potential and a maximum
external circuit resistance of 600 ohms.
N. WAN: Wide Area Network.
1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Overview.
2018 13410-3 150407

1. This Section describes work to be provided to upgrade the existing plant
control system to support both new facilities. New facilities being installed as
part of this project include:
a. Headworks Bar screen and Washer compactor
b. Influent Pump Station
2. Control systems shall be provided to support the process upgrades as
required under this Contract.
B. Work Includes: Providing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting,

commissioning and OWNER training for a complete and fully functional plant control
system. Major work includes (but is not limited to):
1. Field instrumentation, network communication system (including radio
telemetry, fiber optic and copper network infrastructure), control panels, PLC,
SCADA server hardware, SCADA workstation hardware, SCADA network
equipment, UPS units, standard software, and related items. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide labor for engineering, installation, drawings and
submittals, testing, start up and training.
2. The new PLC system shall be constructed to perform the functions of Section
13411, Control System Strategies.
3. SCADA workstation shall be installed in the Administration Building to monitor
and control both new and existing plant equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall
modify existing Motor Control Center buckets and control panels as required to
interface the existing plant equipment to the new PLCs.
4. Subsequent to the start up of the new plant SCADA system, the existing
process display workstation shall be removed.
5. PLCs and SCADA system equipment shall be networked via a new Ethernet
based fiber optic communications network.
a. Remote lift stations shall communicate via Ethernet radio to Plant PLC.
6. Specific SCADA system hardware and standard software will be provided
under an SCADA System Allowance. Due to speed of obsolescence of
computer systems, the allowance will allow the OWNER to select the latest
hardware models and software revisions. This will also allow OWNER to select
equipment which standardizes with other City installed equipment. Refer to
Section 01210, Allowances.
C. Work Does Not Include: ENGINEER will serve as OWNER representative to

provide application software for PLC, SCADA servers, and SCADA workstations.
References to ENGINEER in specification sections include SCADA software
programming, testing and commissioning services. ENGINEER will coordinate and
cooperate with CONTRACTOR to ensure a complete and functional system.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Review other Sections and DIVISIONs of the Contract Documents for full
compliance with the total Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict between
Sections, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly seek clarification from the ENGINEER.
B. Unless different requirements are clearly specified or shown elsewhere,

instrumentation and control design, materials, equipment, installation, and testing
shall comply with the requirements of DIVISION 16.
2018 13410-4 150407

C. Completeness:
1. Provide a complete and fully functional instrumentation and control system
ready for use.
2. Components which are not identified on the Drawings and Specifications, but
necessary to meet the full functional operation and performance requirements,
shall be provided.
3. Equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings,
Specifications, and instructions and recommendations of the related
equipment manufacturer.
D. Connections and Appurtenances:

1. The instrumentation and control systems shall include all necessary
connections to sources of electrical power, air, water, drains, and vents, with
all required valves, switches, and accessories as specified or as
recommended for best operation by the manufacturer of the equipment
furnished.
2. All necessary mounting panels, stands, hangers, and brackets shall be
furnished and installed and shall comply with the relevant Sections of these
Specifications.
E. Coordination:
1. Systems and equipment provided under this Section shall be designed and
coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and materials
provided under other Sections of these Specifications, and where applicable,
under other referenced contracts, and with identified existing equipment.
F. Control Functions: The complete instrumentation and control system shall perform
functions as specified in Section 13411, Control Descriptions.
G. Instrument Tagging:
1. All field mounted instruments shall be provided with stainless steel tags
stamped or engraved with the instrument's full tag number. Tags shall be
affixed with stainless steel wire fasteners.
2. All back of panel instruments shall be provided with black-white-black plastic
laminate nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number.
Nameplates shall be secured to the panel with stainless steel screws.
3. All front of panel instruments shall include the instrument's full tag number and
service description in the nameplate legend. Unless it is part of the instrument,
the nameplate shall be engraved black-white-black plastic laminate, secured
with stainless steel screws.
H. Electrical Marking:
1. All electrical devices, terminal blocks, terminals, cables, and conductors shall
be clearly labeled.
2. Cables and conductors shall be fitted with heat shrink identification sleeves.
Adhesive tape identification markers shall not be used. A unique numbering
system shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, but this shall conform with
requirements specified in DIVISION 16. Cables shall be tagged at both ends
and at any intermediate pull box or manhole through which the cables are
routed. All cables shall be identified on the CONTRACTOR's cable schedule.
I. Cable and Conductor Termination:
2018 13410-5 150407

1. All cables and conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks with full
identification.
2. Terminal Block Enclosures: Field mounted terminal blocks shall have NEMA 4
enclosures or NEMA 4X enclosures in wet or corrosive areas unless otherwise
specified.
3. Terminal blocks, except those which are part of a manufactured unit, shall be
capable of terminating 22-12 AWG wire with contact resistance no greater
than 3 milli-ohms. Screws shall be captive and have metal on metal friction
locking such that when wire is clamped into the metal body self-loosening is
not possible. Metal components shall be manufactured from 85 percent copper
alloy and be nickel-plated over 100 percent of their surface area.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Terminal Blocks: Phoenix Contact, Type No. UK4, or equal.
J. Signal Transmission:
1. Unless otherwise specified, analog signal transmission between electronic
(and electric) instruments not located within a common panel shall be 4 to 20
milliamperes and operate at 24 volt dc.
2. Milliampere signals shall be current regulated and not affected by changes in
supply voltage and load resistance within the unit's rating.
K. Loop Impedance:
1. Total loop impedance for 4 to 20 milliamperes signals shall not exceed the
rated value for the regulating device at the loop operating voltage.
2. Where necessary, loop impedance shall be reduced by providing current-to-
current (I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission.
L. Grounding:
1. Instrument panels shall be provided with a signal ground bus which shall be
isolated from the power ground bus. Multiple panels in one location shall have
a common point for signal ground bus connection to ground.
2. Shields and measurement loops shall be single point grounded at the source
panel external terminals by bonding to the instrument panel signal ground bus.
3. Isolating amplifiers shall be provided within the panel for field equipment
possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is
galvanically isolated.
M. Discrete Circuit Configuration:

1. Discrete control circuits shall be configured to fail safe, i.e., on loss of
continuity or loss of power. Alarm contacts shall fail to the alarm condition,
which shall be open. Control contacts shall fail to the inoperative condition
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
N. Instrument and Loop Power:

1. Power to instruments and instrument loops shall be from sources providing the
highest integrity: e.g., from the loop primary receiving instrument/module, or
from a UPS when so specified. A loop shall not be dependent on a diversity of
power sources, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
O. Field Instruments Installation Design:

1. Field instruments shall be installed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, ANSI/API 550 and 551,and the manufacturer's instructions.
2018 13410-6 150407

2. Field instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read, can be
readily approached and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to
mechanical equipment. Field instruments not directly mounted shall be
mounted on a pipe stand or local panel, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
3. Field electronic instruments exposed to direct sunlight shall be provided with
sun shields. LED, LCD, or other digital readouts shall be oriented and shielded
to eliminate exposure to direct sunlight.
4. Field instrument enclosures shall be NEMA 4 minimum. For corrosive
environments, or where otherwise specified, enclosures shall be NEMA 4X.
5. Connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments shall be made with
jacketed flexible conduit with a maximum length of 3 feet.
6. Field instruments shall be connected with cable as specified in DIVISION 16,
except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise
specified herein. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the
NEC.
7. Provide a power disconnect switch (NEMA 4) for 120 VAC powered instrument
which does not have a built-in power disconnect.
P. Hazardous (Classified) Areas:

1. Instrumentation and control equipment specified, is subject to the
requirements for hazardous (classified) areas as specified in DIVISION 16 and
2. Two-wire transmitters to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be
Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe, and made safe by means of
suitably rated Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe barriers installed in a
nonhazardous area.
3. Switches to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be made safe by
means of suitably rated Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe barriers or
intrinsically safe relays installed in a nonhazardous area.
Q. Corrosion Protection:
1. The CONTRACTOR is specifically cautioned that the treatment plant ambient
air contains airborne contaminants, including but not limited to, the corrosive
gases: hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, and ammonia. The corrosion severity level
will vary according to specific location, temperature, relative humidity, rate of
change of relative humidity, wind speed and wind direction, and may,
therefore, also be subject to seasonal variation.
2. Unless otherwise specified, electronic equipment (except for modifications to
existing units) shall be installed such that no significant or detrimental
corrosion shall occur over a 20-year period. Installation in a NEMA 4X
enclosure is acceptable.
R. Documentation to be provided:
1. All aspects of the instrumentation and control systems design shall be fully
documented, and subsequently revised to conform with the "As-Built"
installation.
2. The numbering of all instruments, equipment, terminal blocks, conductors, and
cables shall be shown on all related documents.
S. Surge Protection:
2018 13410-7 150407

1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units,
capable of limiting voltage to 30 volt dc peak with a response time of 5 nano-
seconds, and dissipating a 15,000 watt, 1 millisecond surge. Provide 24 VDC
line-to-line, and line-to-ground protection.
2. Individually fuse each 4-20 mA DC loop with a 1/16 ampere slow blow fuse
between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.
3. Provide voltage/surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers with 120
VAC power sources. Protect both 120 VAC power source and 24 VDC signal
loop.
T. Supplemental Design Requirements:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide supplemental electrical and control system
design support, as required, to detail the interfaces to the existing and new
plant equipment. The Contract Drawings have been prepared from as-built
drawings prepared as part of a previous project. These as-builts schematically
reflected the construction of the plant, but did not contain sufficient detail to
prepare interface drawings for the installing electricians.
2. As part of this projects scope of work, the existing control circuits shall be
verified and detailed drawings prepared indicating the specific work to be
performed. The drawings shall be of sufficient detail to serve as working
drawings for the installing technicians or electricians. The drawings shall
include demolition, panel modifications and connections.
3. The installation drawings shall be generated from a qualified Control System
Engineer based on information collected from available approved shop
drawings of new equipment, as-built drawings, field investigations, and wiring
ring-outs of existing circuits. Where drawings have been prepared based on
site investigations, the names and signatures of the personnel performing the
investigations shall be included in the design submittal.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
2. Submittal data shall be grouped in a logical manner to facilitate review of
subsystems and each submittal shall be substantially complete. Individual
drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted
for review.
3. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without the
ENGINEER's review and without contract time extension.
4. Design Data submittals shall be reviewed and returned with resubmittal not
required, before fabrication is started.
5. All panel drawings and loop drawings shall be produced with latest version of
AutoCAD software.
B. Design Submittals:
1. Bill of Material for all equipment.
2. Instrument Data Sheets using ISA S20 format, with variations/enhancements
to accommodate specific types of instruments.
3. Catalog Data for all instruments and equipment, with applicable features and
options "arrowed."
4. System Configuration Diagrams.
2018 13410-8 150407

5. Panel Arrangement Drawings for panels or enclosures showing size,
arrangement, cutouts, color, item identification, nameplate legends, and
annunciator engravings.
6. Panel Wiring/Piping Drawings.
7. Loop Diagrams for Analog and Discrete Signals, in accordance with ISA S5.4.
a. The diagrams shall be fully detailed including all equipment and locations,
new and existing, reached by the loop and its branches.
b. The diagrams shall include instruments, electrical equipment, mechanical
packaged equipment, and terminal strip, wire, and cable numbers. Loops
with associated inputs and outputs shall be drawn compositely.
c. Loop continuity via programmable control functions shall be depicted
schematically using P&ID symbology.
8. Schematic Diagrams (also known as elementary diagrams, control diagrams,
and logic diagrams) shall be provided for hardwired and programmable
logic/control. Diagrams (including printouts) shall include full annotation of all
elements, cross references, and explanation of annotation.
9. Electrical cable and wire marking (identification) system, for all analog and
discrete loops.
10. Schematic diagrams, interface drawings and loop diagrams shall be of
sufficient scope and detail to serve as working drawings for the installing
electricians. The drawings shall include design information provided by the
ENGINEER described in paragraph 1.05 Design Requirements and shall be
approved prior to de-commissioning of any plant equipment.
11. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reviewing existing plant as-built
information for the generation of drawings that include existing plant control
equipment. Where as-built information is not available, accurate information
shall be collected through site surveys.
C. Installation Submittals:
1. Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals for proprietary instruments
and systems. Upon acceptance of equipment and before installation, submit 3
sets for information only.
2. Retrofit Schedules: 70 days prior to scheduled start of retrofit.
3. Cable and Wire Schedules, including existing which are not removed under
retrofit or demolition work.
D. Testing Submittals:
1. Test plan: 70 days prior to scheduled start of testing.
2. Test procedures: 70 days prior to scheduled start of testing.
3. Factory test data records, certified.
4. Field test data records.
E. Training Program Submittals: 70 days prior to scheduled start of training, submit

training program course outline and training schedule.
1. Training Program course outline and training schedule shall be submitted with:
technical or operation heading, subjects, times, duration of sessions, name of
instructor. There shall be a description of each subject-session. There shall be
a list of instructors with their employer's name, job title, and qualifications. Be
prepared to tailor the training schedule for compatibility with the plant
operations staffing requirements.
F. Project Closeout Submittals:
2018 13410-9 150407

1. Recommended Spare Parts List.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project, fully indexed, incorporating all
instrumentation and control system documentation submitted and produced,
and revised to conform with the "As-Built" installation. Application specific
operation and maintenance instruction and application program records shall
be included. Submit 1 set for review and 4 sets of the final accepted manuals.
3. Submit reproducible copies of all Drawings revised to conform with the "As-
Built" installation for the OWNER's records after acceptance of the project
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Digital Media, 2 sets, in the form of CD-ROM disks, bearing all electronically
formatted documents including "As-Built" CAD Drawings and application
programs, shall be submitted for information only and the OWNER's records,
after acceptance of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project. The
media shall contain a table of contents, ASCII formatted, identifying the
contents of each file and the software program/version with which it was
produced. The media shall contain a CAD plotting document providing
definition of, and correlation between layers/colors and line types for all CAD
files.
A. Procurement Restriction:
1. Certain equipment manufacturers with marketing operations based on local
agents, have terms where the selling agent has responsibility for after sales
service. In such cases, the CONTRACTOR's procurement of such equipment
is restricted to the selling agent within whose service area the equipment will
be finally installed, thus assuring the OWNER of the availability of local after
sales service.
B. CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. Instrumentation and Control Systems shall be provided under the supervision
of a single contractor or subcontractor, which has been regularly engaged over
the previous 5 years in supervision of projects of similar scope and complexity.
2. Supervision shall include responsibility for, but not be limited to design,
procurement, fabrication, installation, field loop integrity, programming,
calibration, testing, commissioning, training, documentation, and interfacing
requirements.
C. Quality Assurance Procedure:

1. A quality assurance procedure shall be defined and implemented by the
CONTRACTOR or subcontractor supervising instrumentation and control
systems. The procedure shall:
a. Require that the project manager schedule and budget for in-house and
inter-Contractor checking.
b. Specify qualifications required for engineering and technical personnel in
the execution and checking of specific tasks.
c. Identify the responsibilities of the executor and the checker.
d. Provide quality assurance data sheets listing specific tasks and stages of
tasks, with space for the printed names of the executor and checker, and
the checker's signature and date.
2018 13410-10 150407

2. The quality assurance procedure shall form part of the contractual
requirements for subcontractors, and manufacturers or suppliers with unit
responsibility.
3. The quality assurance data sheets shall be maintained current and shall be
available for inspection upon request.
D. Substitutes and "Or-Equals":

1. Substitutes and "Or-Equals" may be proposed in accordance with the General
Conditions.
2. Where manufacturers of instrumentation or control system products other than
those specified are proposed, they shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience in the manufacture of comparable equipment used in similar
applications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturers' references to
existing installations upon request of the ENGINEER. Noncompliance shall be
a basis for rejection.
A. Delivery Timing:
1. No instrumentation or control system equipment shall be delivered to the job
site until required for integration with other construction, and all necessary
environmental preparations have been made.
B. Intermediate Storage and Handling:

1. When the CONTRACTOR is obliged to take delivery in advance of this time,
the CONTRACTOR shall do so at a bonded air-conditioned warehouse.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for storage at the warehouse and transport
of the equipment to the jobsite by suitably qualified movers with moving
equipment (e.g., floating bed truck) as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Non-Compliance:
1. Should the equipment be delivered to the jobsite and be stored in adverse
conditions or installed in improper environmental conditions, then at the
ENGINEER's discretion, prior testing may be declared void.
2. The prior testing (e.g., factory acceptance testing) shall be repeated and/or, at
the discretion of the ENGINEER, a reduced value dollar credit shall be
provided by the CONTRACTOR.
3. The equipment shall still be required to satisfy site testing performance criteria.
1.09 SITE CONDITIONS
A. General: Instrumentation and control systems equipment shall be suitable, or made

suitable, for site conditions at the project location.
B. Temperature:
1. Electrical and Control Room Temperature: 60 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Field Locations Temperature: 20 to 125 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Above temperatures do not include affects of direct sunlight or wind chill.
C. Relative Humidity (RH):

1. Electrical and Control Rooms RH: 20 to 80 percent.
2. Field Locations RH: 10 to 100 percent.
2018 13410-11 150407

D. Atmospheric Contaminants:
1. Atmospheric contaminants include hydrogen-sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, and
dust in indeterminate concentrations.
2. Corrosive atmosphere testing shall be conducted, where specified.
E. Hazardous Areas:
1. Hazardous areas shall be as specified in DIVISION 16 and as shown on the
electrical Drawings.
F. Electromagnetic Radiation:
1. Electromagnetic radiation: 27 to 500 MHz: 10 volts/m.
A. General:
1. Sequence and schedule instrumentation and control system provisions in
accordance with Section 01352 and the progress schedule submitted in
accordance with Section 01324.
2. Coordinate instrumentation and control system delivery and installation with
other portions of the Work.
3. Coordinate SCADA system testing with ENGINEER. Provide schedule
updates to ENGINEER, when changes occur. Advance notice of 1 week prior
to testing shall be required for any functions that incorporate SCADA
application software for process control or monitoring. In particular, Loop
Testing, End-to-End Testing, and Control Strategy Testing shall require
advance notification to ENGINEER.
B. Special Planning:
1. Retrofit of the existing plant shall be specifically scheduled and sequenced.
Shutdown of existing plant shall be minimized. All shutdown operations shall
be scheduled with the OWNER. Detailed planning and careful execution shall
be conducted to limit risk of accidental shutdown of adjoining existing facilities.
2. The work shall be divided into stages that shall be individually scheduled with
the OWNER. For each stage, a detailed retrofit schedule shall be submitted.
The retrofit schedule shall list each individual action in step order, identifying
individual devices, terminals, and wire numbers. Prior to commencing each
stage of retrofit work, and prior to shutdown, the CONTRACTOR shall make a
"dummy run" through the schedule to add identification markers to all
unmarked devices, terminals, and wires.
3. Planning of work shall include allowance for testing requirements detailed in
Part 3.
C. Special Sequencing:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections.
2018 13410-12 150407

A. Factory Testing:
1. Instrumentation and control systems shall be factory tested and calibrated.
2. Factory test/calibration records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER to show
that the equipment has achieved the specified performance and accuracy.
3. Additional Factory Testing: Refer to other instrumentation and control
Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install instrumentation and control systems in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications, final submittals, manufacturer's instructions, and (where
applicable) American Petroleum Institute RP550/551.
B. Electrical: Install cable and wiring in accordance with applicable Sections in

DIVISION 16.
C. Piping: Install piping and fittings in accordance with applicable Sections of

DIVISIONS 2 and 15.
D. Field Equipment:
1. Install field equipment such that ports, terminals, and adjustments have
unobstructed access for in-place testing and calibration. Equipment shall not
obstruct walkways. Where possible, hand controls and indicators shall be 48 to
60 inches above the floor or a permanent work platform.
2. Equipment shall be installed suitably protected from environmental conditions.
Equipment shall be mounted such that shock or vibration will not impair its
operation.
3. Sun Shade:
a. Each instrument transmitter with a readout and each control panel located
outdoors shall be provided with a sun shield.
b. Sun shield shall be designed and installed to minimize heat gain in
instruments and panels.
c. Where practical, outdoor instruments shall be installed so readouts face
north to minimize direct sun exposure.
d. Design and install sun shield to prevent direct sunlight from striking
instrument readouts.
A. Testing - General:
1. The requirements given in this Section are a minimum and may be
augmented, but not replaced, by more specific requirements in subsequent
Sections.
2. 70 days before the commencement of any testing activity, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a detailed test plan and detailed step-by-step test procedures,
2018 13410-13 150407

complete with forms for the recording of test results, testing equipment used,
and space for signature identification of the individual witnessing the test.
3. No required test shall be applied without prior notice to the OWNER. Testing
shall not be conducted without being witnessed unless with the prior
acceptance of the OWNER or OWNER's representative.
4. Each unit of test equipment used shall have a certified calibration report
traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), and
issued within 6 months of the testing date. These calibration reports shall be
submitted with the test records. Test instruments shall have an accuracy 3
times better than that of the device under test. Analog devices shall be tested
at 5 equally spread points over the full range.
B. Field Calibration Testing:

1. Field test and calibrate all control systems and instrumentation in accordance
with the reviewed Testing Procedure submittal and the manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Field test/calibration data sheets shall be submitted to the ENGINEER to show
that the equipment has achieved the specified performance and accuracy.
3. Unless identified by the CONTRACTOR as an exception in the bid, accuracy
shall be within the specified tolerance. Accuracy shall be within the
manufacturer's stated tolerance where this is a lesser value.
4. Field testing shall include all discrete and analog loops.
C. Site Acceptance Testing - General:

1. Conduct control system and loop acceptance tests proving control system
performance, and loop integrity and accuracy, in accordance with the reviewed
Testing Procedure submittal and the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and data sheets shall
be submitted recording results and acceptance.
3. Where equipment or systems fail to meet the manufacturer's specified
performance and accuracy, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the on-site
services of the manufacturer's field service engineer to resolve the problem at
no cost to the OWNER.
D. Loop Acceptance Testing:

1. For each and every analog and discrete circuit, verify the proper operation of
all hardwired circuits, functions, and logic.
2. Test the accuracy of each hardwired loop. Overall loop accuracy shall not
exceed the sum of the accuracies of the loop components as determined
under Field Calibration Testing.
3. For digital communication, verify proper data transmission and receipt of all
pertinent signals.
E. End-to-End Acceptance Tests:

1. Requires coordination and cooperation with OWNER representative for
SCADA application software.
2. For each and every analog and discrete circuit, perform an end-to-end test.
Also test each signal circuit transmitted over digital networks (i.e., valve
networks, RS-422 links, etc.)
3. Check each loop from the field element to the respective computer control
display. Include all intermediate field instruments, control devices, panels,
2018 13410-14 150407

indicators, and other devices in the loop for proper operation and linkage to
computer control station displays.
4. Analog signals shall be tested at 0, 50, and 100 percent of scale to verify the
proper receipt on computer control displays.
5. Discrete input circuits shall be tested to verify proper state when the field
device is switched between state. Discrete output circuits shall be tested to
verify equipment responds properly (start, stop, etc.).
F. Control Strategy Acceptance Tests:

1. Requires coordination and cooperation with OWNER representative for
SCADA application software. For each control strategy and for each electrical
schematic diagram, demonstrate the proper operation of all hardware and
software logic and control functions. Perform a step-by-step test of each
function described in each control strategy.
2. Perform separate tests on each individual piece of equipment, and for each
control loop.
3. Perform the proper operation of each discrete control loop for proper operation
of motors, hand switches, interlocks, solenoid valves, other auxiliary devices,
status lights, computer control operator interfaces, and alarms.
3.03 TRAINING
A. General:
1. The requirements given in this Section that follow are a minimum and may be
augmented, but not replaced, by more specific requirements in subsequent
Sections.
a. Provide training to the OWNER in the maintenance, programming, and
operation of the instrumentation and control systems. Instructors shall
have in-depth knowledge and experience in the subjects they cover.
Instructors on major systems, complex instruments, or analyzers shall be
employed or certified by the manufacturer.
b. Each attendee shall be provided with a set of documentation covering the
subject matter.
c. One set of documentation and 1 copy of any videotapes used shall be
provided to the OWNER.
d. The OWNER shall be permitted to videotape all live training sessions.
2. The costs associated with training of the OWNER's and ENGINEER's
designated staff shall be included in the Contract Price, including travel,
accommodation, and per diem for instructors visiting the plant and/or
attendees visiting the manufacturer.
B. On-Site Training:
1. Provide on-site training for all instrumentation and control systems. On-site
training shall include: testing and maintenance techniques, set-up, calibration,
operation, application programming, system reconfiguration, a thorough
description and explanation of the on-site control system, failure and recovery
procedures (inducing failures), and operation during failures. Both theory and
hands-on experience shall be provided.
2. Allow for 32 hours of operational training and 16 hours of technical training
with no limitation on the number of allowable attendees.
2018 13410-15 150407

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean area during construction in accordance with Section 01500, and after
completion of construction in accordance with Section 01770.
B. Vacuum panels, cabinets, and enclosures to remove dust and debris. Wipe
surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION
2018 13410-16 150407

SECTION 13423
LEVEL & FLOW INSTRUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Level instruments installed permanently in field.
1. Section 13485 - Instrument Index.
2. Section 13424 - Pressure Instruments.
3. Section 16135 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Connection diagram.
2. Loop diagram.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include mounting details.
D. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
A. Provide sensing probe mounting hardware and manufacturer-supplied cable of

sufficient length between sensing probe and transmitter.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed Level sensors of minimum

five successful operating installation.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty modified to comply with Contract

Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIXED MOUNT FLOAT TYPE LEVEL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers, Products: One of the following or equal:

1. US Filter/Consolidated Electric, 9G.
2. Anchor Scientific, SST.
3. Or equal.
2018 13423-1 150407

B. Switches: Floating ball type using nominal 5-inch diameter, 316 grade stainless
steel encapsulated float ball with mercury switch and supporting submarine flexible
synthetic rubber hinge fastened to adjustable mounting bracket and acting as
housing for lead wires from switch.
C. Lead Wire: Flexible waterproof cable, long enough to preclude splices or junction
boxes in wet well, with stainless steel mounting accessories.
D. Life Expectancy: Minimum 30 years.
E. Contacts: Single pole, double throw, Form C, rated at 10 amperes, 120-volts

alternating current.
2.02 ULTRASONIC LEVEL INDICATING TRANSMITTER
A. General: Used for direct level measurement or calculated flow measurement,

based on level through a flume.
1. Influent Flow: Ultrasonic Level implemented with Parshall Flume to measure
level above the weir and calculate influent flow to the plant.
2. Influent Lift Station: Direct level measurement of Influent Lift station.
B. Manufacturers: One of following or equal:

1. Siemens Milltronics, Hydro Ranger 200 Plus, differential level.
2. Or equal.
C. Type: Microprocessor based electronic unit with the following components:

1. Sensor transducer assembly.
2. Signal converter and transmitter.
3. Interconnecting cable.
D. Sensor Transducer Assembly:

1. Sensor: Encapsulated in chemical and corrosion-resistant material, such as
Kynar, Teflon, or Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride suitable for outdoor
application.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Operating Relative Humidity Range: 10 to 100 percent.
4. Range and Sensor Sensitivity: 0 to 26 feet, able to return echo of at least
400 millivolts from target 2 feet distant when excited by 1.4 milliseconds,
1,200 volts peak-to-peak pulse with beam angle of 10 degrees or less.
5. Automatic compensate for changes in air temperature and density.
6. Manufacturer and Model: Siemens Echomax XRS5
E. Signal Converter and Transmitter:

1. Indicator: 4-digit Liquid Crystal Diode indicator with approximately 0.50 inch
display scaled to read in engineering units.
2. Sensitivity: Able to ignore momentary level spikes or momentary loss of echo
and indicate loss of echo condition on indicating transmitter unit.
3. Transmitter Signal Output: Isolated 4-20 milliampere direct current signal
linearly proportional to measured level range; proportional to tank or vessel
volume instead of level where indicated.
2018 13423-2 150407

4. Accuracy of Transmitted Signal: Within 0.25 percent of level range.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, suitable for wall or pipe stand mounting, operating
temperature range from minus 15 to 125 degrees Fahrenheit, relative humidity
of 10 to 100 percent.
6. Mounting: Handrail or Stanchion mounted.
7. Solar Protection: Sun shades.
8. Input Power: From 120 volts alternating current, 60 hertz through power
disconnect switch suitable for location.
F. Interconnecting Cable: Provide cable sufficient to transmit signal from transducer to

signal converter transmitter. Able to transmit signal at least 200 feet from signal
converter transmitter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all instruments in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Wiring: refer to Section 13410, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation

Materials and Methods; 13411, Control System Strategies; and DIVISION16.
C. Probe Type Conductivity Level Switches: Install in Control relay enclosure in non-
hazardous location.
END OF SECTION
2018 13423-3 150407

2018 13423-4 150407
SECTION 13427
PANEL INSTRUMENTS
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Panel instruments for instrumentation and control systems.
B. Related Documents: Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections, apply to work of
this Section.
C. Related Divisions and Sections:

1. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL.
5. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330:

1. Panel elevation and device layout diagrams.
2. Schematic diagrams.
3. Wiring diagrams.
4. Loop diagrams.
B. Manufacturer's installation instructions and mounting details.
C. Factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that require
set-up and calibration.
A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with Section 01600.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty in accordance with Section 01770.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts:
1. Deliver lamps equaling minimum 5 or 10% of each type installed to
OWNER.
2. Deliver control relays equaling minimum 5 or 10% of each type installed to
OWNER.
2018 13427-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANEL INSTRUMENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Electronic panel instruments shall be industrial grade instruments with a
proven reliability record. Scales shall be calibrated in engineering units.
2. Panel controllers and recorders shall be of a rail mounted draw-out type of
depth suitable for the panel but not more than 20 inches deep. Instrument
operation, tuning, and fine adjustment shall be possible without disconnecting
the instrument from the process.
3. Instruments shall have matching or compatible fascia such as height, finish,
color and display color with arrangement to provide a logically grouped panel
display.
4. Provide programming equipment. Where this includes the use of an IBM
compatible PC, only the software, registered to the OWNER, shall be
provided.
5. Analog signal indicators shall be LED bar graph or dot matrix displays. LED
bar graph shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of span. An
LED bar graph duplicated by a digital display shall have an accuracy of plus or
minus 1.0 percent of span. A dot matrix display shall include bar graph and
3-1/2 digit digital displays, with a bar graph accuracy of plus or minus 2.0
percent of span. Digital displays shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 0.1
percent of span for setpoints and measured variables; and plus or minus 0.3
percent of span for retransmitted and output variables. Temperature drift shall
not affect accuracy by more than an additional plus or minus 0.01 percent per
degree Celsius.
6. Electronic panel instruments shall be able to operate from 120 volts AC plus
or minus 10 percent, 60 Hertz, and 24 volts DC plus or minus 10 percent
power supply. Instruments in the same panel shall be powered from the same
power supply.
7. Panel instruments shall be capable of providing loop power (nominally 24
volts DC) for all analog inputs and outputs. Signal circuits and power supply
circuits shall be galvanically isolated from each other and the instrument case.
8. Operating temperature range shall be from 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 120
degrees Fahrenheit and relative humidity to 90 percent noncondensing.
9. Indoor Panel instrument enclosures shall be NEMA 12 unless otherwise
specified.
10. Outdoor Panel instrument enclosures shall be NEMA 4X unless otherwise
specified.
B. Digital Panel Indicators:

a. Action Instruments, Inc.
b. Electro Numerics, Inc.
c. Newport Electronics, Inc.
d. Weston Instruments Division of Electric Instrument Services.
e. Red Lion Controls.
f. Digitec.
2018 13427-2 150407

2. Furnish digital indicators for semi-flush mounting in a panel. Display: 4-
1/2digit light emitting diode (LED) indoor type and vacuum fluorescent or liquid
crystal display (LCD) outdoor type with digit height not less than 0.5 inches,
easily read at a distance of 10 feet in varying room or outdoor lighting
environments.
3. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50 degrees Celsius. Indicator shall
have differential type ungrounded input terminators.
4. Scale the display in engineering units, such as feet or million gallons per
day, with the units engraved on the display face or on the associated
nameplate. The display shall have a movable decimal point and overrange
indication.
5. Provide zero and span adjustments at the front display.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of span.
7. Power Supply: 120 VAC.
C. Indicating Lights:
a. Allen Bradley, 800 series.
b. Micro Switch Division of Honeywell, Type PT.
c. Eaton Corporation.
d. Cutler Hammer Products, Type T.
e. General Electric Company, Type CR.
2. Heavy-duty, oil-tight type, which utilizes a 6 VDC lamp and a built-in
transformer. Engrave legends on the lens or on a legend faceplate. Lamps
shall be easily replaceable from the front of the indicating light.
3. Integrate a push-to-test feature with each indicating light, or a common test
of all panel indicating lights.
D. Selector Switches:
a. Allen-Bradley, 800 series.
b. Micro Switch Division of Honeywell, Type PT.
c. Eaton Corporation.
d. Cutler-Hammer Products, Type T.
e. General Electric Company, Type CR.
2. Selector switches: Heavy duty oil-tight type with gloved-hand or wing lever
operators. Engrave position legends on switch faceplate. Switches for electric
circuits shall have silver butting or sliding contacts, rated 10 amperes
continuous at 120 volts AC.
3. Contact configuration: Switches used in electronic circuits shall have
contacts with a minimum rating of 2 amperes.
E. Indicating Selector Switches:

a. Allen Bradley, 800 series.
b. Micro Switch Division of Honeywell, Type CMC.
2. Multi-light oil-tight with cover plates as indicated on the Drawings or as
required for the application.
F. Totalizers:
2018 13427-3 150407

a. Red Lion Controls.
b. Newport Electronics, Inc.
2. Totalizers shall have rectangular, semi-flush counters, designed for use in
conjunction with indicators, integrators and recorders. Flush-mount the
counter, and locate the associated integrating mechanism in the rear of the
panel, when not self-contained in the counter.
3. The counter shall contain not less than seven digits with a multiplier of a
power of 10 plainly engraved on the face of the counter, or on a nameplate
below the counter so that a full range of 9,999,999 is reached before
repeating. Totalizers shall not reset upon power failure.
a. Provide each totalizer with a manual reset pushbutton.
b. Provide remote reset when indicated on the Drawings.
4. Bidirectional: As indicated on the Drawings.
5. Frequency Response: Configurable and match the field or panel instrument
output.
2.02 PANEL DEVICES
A. Control Relays:
a. Potter and Brumfield, Series KRP.
b. Eagle Signal Controls, Series 22 or 80.
c. Manufacturers of Struthers-Dunn, Inc., Series A3 or A4.
2. Provide control relays indicated in instrument and control panels and
enclosures with plug-in socket base type with dustproof plastic enclosures.
3. Relays: Relays shall function as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance
with design requirements, and with not less than 4 pole, Form "C" double-
throw contacts.
4. Control circuit relays shall have silver-cadmium oxide contacts rated for 10
amperes at 120 volts AC.
5. Electronic switching-duty relays shall have gold-plated or gold alloy contacts
suitable for use with low level signals.
6. Relays utilized for computer input, alarm input, or indicating light service
shall have contacts rated not less than 5 amperes.
7. Time delay relays shall have dials or switch settings engraved in seconds,
with timing repeatability of plus or minus 2.0 percent of setting.
8. Provide latching and special purpose relays as indicated for the specific
application.
9. Relays shall have a built-in lamp, LED or neon, to indicate an energized
relay.
B. Intrinsically Safe Relays:

a. Consolidated Electric Company.
b. Gem Sensors Division of IMO, Inc.
c. R. Stall, Inc.
2. Solid-state electronic type with energy level of the sensing or actuation
circuit low enough to allow safe usage in hazardous areas as defined in NEC
Article 500.
2018 13427-4 150407

C. Digital Display Timers:
a. Eagle Signal Controls.
b. Paragon Electric Company, Inc.
c. Or equal.
2. Provide LED type digital timers on panels as indicated; 3 inches long and 1
inch high.
D. Audible and Visual Alarm Devices:

a. Federal Signal Corporation.
b. Edwards Company, Inc.
c. Or equal.
2. Provide a nominal 4 inch 120 volts AC vibrating 65 decibels to 110 decibels
adjustable volume industrial grade weather resistant device as required by the
panel layout, schematic diagram, or 1 line diagram.
3. Provide a nominal 5 inch diameter red flashing strobe alarm light, 200 watt,
where indicated on the panel layout, schematic diagram, or 1 line diagram.
4. Power requirements: 120 volts AC or 24 volts DC per the Drawings.
2.03 SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULES
A. Requirements:
1. Signal conditioning modules and converters shall be of industrial grade,
high quality instruments. Modules shall be of a plug-in circuit board design.
Converters shall be mounted in a common 19-inch rack with a common power
supply for powering the rack.
2. External power supply for the rack shall be 24 volts DC plus or minus 10
percent or 120 volts AC plus or minus 10 percent, 60 Hertz with internal power
supply of 24 volts DC.
3. Analog input signals shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes DC into 50 ohms or 1 to 5
volts DC into 1 Mohm input impedance.
4. Analog output signals shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes into 0 to 600 ohms or 1
to 5 volts DC into 20 Kohm.
5. Discrete output contacts shall be double-pole double-throw rated 5A at 120
volts AC or 28 volts DC.
6. Electronic trips shall make output contacts to open in case of loss of signal
or power supply.
7. Span and zero adjustments shall be made by front mounted multi-turn
potentiometers.
8. Electronic trip modules shall be provided with LEDS for relay status
indication.
9. Signal terminals and power supply terminals shall be galvanically isolated.
10. Converters shall be provided with radio frequency interference (RFI) traps
to shunt conducted radio interference to ground.
11. Converter outputs shall be galvanically isolated from the input circuits.
12. Temperature rating shall be 0 degrees Celsius to 120 degrees Celsius for
specified performance.
2018 13427-5 150407

13. Individually mounted signal conditioning modules shall be able to operate
from a 24 volts DC plus or minus 10 percent or 120 volts AC plus or minus 10
percent, 60 Hertz power supply.
14. Signal conditioning modules shall be the product of one manufacturer.
B. Current-to-Current Converters:
a. Moore Industries International, Inc.
b. AGM Electronics, Inc.
c. Acromag, Inc.
2. Solid-state or microprocessor circuitry with electrical isolation between the
power supply, the input signal, and the output signal.
3. Each current-to-current converter shall be designed to accept 4 to 20
milliamperes DC analog input and produce an identical 4 to 20 milliamperes
DC output signal. Input and output(s) shall be galvanically isolated. Input
impedance shall be 50 ohm and output driving impedance shall be 0 to 650
ohm.
4. Accuracy shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent of span with temperature
effect within plus or minus 0.0025 percent of span per degree Fahrenheit.
Power supply effect shall not exceed plus or minus 0.05 percent of span.
C. Signal Selectors:
a. Moore Industries International, Inc.
b. AGM Electronics, Inc.
c. Acromag, Inc.
2. Electronic signal selectors shall select the high, low, or intermediate input
signal as indicated on Drawings, and reproduce this signal as its output.
Circuitry: Solid-state. Shall include 24 volts DC power supply for two 2-wire
field transmitters.
3. Time constant shall be 50 milliseconds or less. Temperature drift of 0.02
percent of span per degrees Celsius or less. Power supply effect shall not
exceed 0.1 percent of span.
4. Analog output signal shall be linear and proportional to the analog input
signals. An analog output signal inversion capability shall be provided. Input
impedance shall be 50 ohms for 4 to 20 milliamperes DC analog signals.
5. Accuracy shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent of span with temperature
effect within plus or minus 0.0025 percent of span per degree Fahrenheit.
Power supply effect shall not exceed plus or minus 0.05 percent of span.
D. Signal Summers:
a. Acromag, Inc.
b. Moore Industries International, Inc.
c. Rochester Instrument Systems, Inc.
d. Fischer and Porter Company.
e. Leeds and Northrup Company.
f. The Foxboro Company.
g. Honeywell, Inc.
2018 13427-6 150407

2. Solid-state or microprocessor circuitry capable of adding or subtracting
analog input signals with input scaling and bias adjustments, and an output
bias adjustment to obtain a 4 to 20 milliampere DC or 1 to 5 volt DC standard
analog output signal.
3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of span.
E. Adjustable Deadband Setpoint Relays:

a. Acromag, Inc.
b. Moore Industries International, Inc.
c. AGM Electronics, Inc.
d. Fischer and Porter Company.
e. Leeds and Northrup Company.
f. The Foxboro Company.
g. Honeywell, Inc.
2. Signal monitor setpoint relay shall accept an analog input 4-20 milliamperes
DC signal and provide an electrically isolated contact output when the input
exceeds a field selected predetermined setpoint. The setpoint shall be
adjustable from 0-100 percent of span by means of a 10 turn precision
calibrated potentiometer.
3. Circuitry: Microprocessor with setpoint. Fully adjustable with resolution of
0.1 percent of span.
4. Trip Point Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of span.
5. Deadband: Adjustable from 0.5 to 100 percent by means of a 10 turn
precision calibrated potentiometer. Unless otherwise specified deadband shall
be initially set to 2 percent of span.
6. Output Relay Contacts: Single-pole, double-throw, rated 5 amperes at 120
volts AC.
7. Accuracy and repeatability shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent full
scale. Response time shall not exceed 50 milliseconds for a step change of 1
percent of span beyond setpoint. Temperature drift shall not exceed plus or
minus 0-01 percent/degree Fahrenheit. Line voltage sensitivity shall not
exceed plus or minus 0.005 percent per 1 percent line change.
F. Fixed Deadband Setpoint Relays:

a. Hecon Corporation.
b. Red Lion Controls.
c. Newport Electronics, Inc.
2. Signal monitor setpoint relay shall accept an analog input 4 to 20
milliampere DC signal and provide an electrically isolated contact output which
changes state when the input exceeds a field selected predetermined value.
3. Circuitry: Microprocessor with setpoint fully adjustable having a resolution of
0.1 percent or span.
4. Trip Point Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of span.
5. Deadband: Fixed at approximately 1.0 percent of span.
6. Output Relay Contacts: Single-pole, double-throw, rated 5 amperes at 120
volts AC.
2018 13427-7 150407

7. Switches: Capable of actuating from either an increasing or decreasing
input signal. Switches shall fail in the alarm or fail-safe condition upon power
failure.
2.04 POWER SUPPLIES AND CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
1. Solid state electronic instrumentation loads shall be supplied with AC power
which has been conditioned to suit the instrumentation manufacturer's
specified requirements. Power supplies to panels housing electronic
instrumentation shall include a noise isolation transformer.
2. This provision is not necessary where the electronic instrumentation
includes an integral isolation transformer or equivalent noise isolation is
provided by an alternative UPS power supply conditioning device.
B. Noise Isolation Transformers:

a. Topaz/Square D Company.
b. Cutler-Hammer.
c. Cooper Industries.
2. Noise isolation transformers shall be of the triple box shield type. Each coil
shall be completely enclosed in a grounded conductive faraday shield, and the
overall transformer enclosed in a faraday shield. Common mode noise
attenuation between primary and secondary shall exceed 130 decibels at up to
100 KHz. Transverse mode noise attenuation shall exceed 20 decibels at up to
100 KHz. Isolation transformer dielectric strength shall be 2,500 volts
minimum.
3. Isolation transformers serving panel boards and control panels shall have a
load capacity not less than 200 percent of the connected load. Isolation
transformers serving individual instruments shall have a load capacity not less
than 125 percent of the connected load. Loss in the isolation transformer shall
not exceed 2 percent of the maximum load rating.
4. Harmonic distortion introduced by the isolation transformer shall not exceed
0.1 percent. Three phase units shall be 4-wire Y connected and capable of
supporting 100 percent unbalanced load.
C. Direct Current Power Supplies:

a. AGM Electronics, Inc.
b. Lambda Electronics, Inc.
2. Direct current power supply units shall be switching type. Line regulation
shall not exceed plus or minus 0.4 percent for 95 to 132 volts AC input
variation. Load regulation shall not exceed plus or minus 0.2 percent for 0 to
100 percent load variation. Ripple shall not exceed 150 millivolts peak to peak.
Temperature coefficient shall not exceed 0.03 percent per degree Celsius.
3. Automatic adjustable overvoltage shutdown and overtemperature protection
shall be included. An integral or external undervoltage relay shall provide an
alarm on undervoltage, overvoltage, or overtemperature. Transient voltage
response to a 50 percent step change in load shall not exceed 0.25 volts or
plus or minus 0.1 percent after 20 milliseconds. Hold-up time shall be 16.7
2018 13427-8 150407

milliseconds or greater. Efficiency shall be 75 percent or greater. Conducted
electro-magnetic interference (EMI) shall conform to FCC Docket 20780, Class
A. Radiated EMI shall be minimized with suitably designed screened
enclosures.
4. 24 volt nominal power supply systems shall be of redundant configuration
and shall provide 26.4 volts at the distribution terminals at no load. An
allowance for voltage drop across redundant unit isolation diodes will typically
necessitate the selection of 28 volt nominal power supply units with outputs
adjusted to suit. The capacity of each unit shall be 50 percent greater than the
maximum system connected load.
D. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS):

a. Sola.
b. Powerware, Inc.
c. Emerson Industrial Controls.
d. Topaz/Square D Company.
2. General Requirements: The UPS shall be configured as a single channel,
normally on-line, with automatic bypass switching on channel failure, and with
manual bypass switching for maintenance. The UPS shall include
rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static transfer switch, and solid
state controls and shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) technology.
3. Input Voltage: Single phase, 120 volts AC plus or minus 10 percent, without
reduction in DC bus voltage; 120 volts AC minus 20 percent without drawing
DC power from batteries.
4. Input Frequency: 60 Hertz.
5. Output Voltage: Single phase, 120 volts AC plus or minus 5 percent for line
and load changes.
6. Output Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 5 percent (voltage) total.
7. Output Frequency: 60 Hertz plus or minus 0.5 percent free-running; 60
Hertz plus or minus 2 percent synchronized.
8. Static Switching Response Time: Not greater than 4 milliseconds.
9. KVA Rating: 1 kVA minimum and not less than 150 percent of connected
load.
10. KVA In-Rush Rating: 1.5 x total connected load in-rush.
11. Battery Capacity: 20 minutes minimum.
12. Noise Emission: Not greater than 60 decibels at 1 meter.
13. Batteries shall be sealed, no maintenance type, designed for 5 years
minimum service.
14. Displays Shall Include: On-line or bypass mode, input power failure, UPS
fault, UPS overload, battery discharging, UPS input volts, UPS output volts,
UPS output percent load.
15. Common fault alarm output dry contacts (open on alarm).
16. Bypass mode alarm output dry contacts (open on alarm).
17. The UPS manufacturer shall provide a 1 year 24 hour field service warranty.
2018 13427-9 150407

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products in accordance

with Section 01600.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment in accordance with Section 01756.
3.03 CLEANING
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of equipment in accordance with Section 01600.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.
END OF SECTION
2018 13427-10 150407

SECTION 13442
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Detailed design, fabrication and installation of instrument and

control panels; including instruments, control devices, power supplies and
components. Panels shall include meters, switches, indicating lights, wireways,
conductors, nameplates, and all other accessories and appurtenances required for
complete panels.
3. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures.
6. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-up.
8. Section 13410 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials
and Methods.
9. Section 13411 - Control Systems Strategies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC): Article 250 Grounding.
B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
C. Instrument Society of America (ISA):

1. ANSI/ISA-S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams.
A. Structural Design:
1. Design connections and related details for seismic design criteria as specified
in Section 01612.
2. For equipment with weight of 400 pounds or more provide calculations for:
a. Determination of weight including panel internal components.
b. Determination of seismic forces and overturning moments.
c. Determination of shear and tension forces in connections.
2018 13442-1 150407

d. Design of connection details based on calculated shear and tension
forces.
B. Equipment Units Weighing 50 Pounds or More: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to
allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include:

1. Panel front view showing equipment arrangement and dimensional
information.
2. Panel floor plan and side view showing dimensions, doors, and equipment
layout inside the panel.
3. Drawings showing structural details of fabricated panels.
4. Internal interconnecting wiring diagrams showing terminal strips and all
external devices connected to the panel as specified in Section 13410, design
submittal for loop and schematic diagrams.
5. Complete schematic and diagrams including terminal block and wire
identification numbers and device location symbols consistent with the
Contract Documents.
6. Panel bill of material with detailed description of components and equipment
data sheets.
7. Field cable number/I.D. and terminations.
8. Factory data sheets for instrumentation.
B. Panel Color: Submit color samples of paint to the ENGINEER for color selection.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
D. Cooling Calculations: Submit in accordance with requirements to maintain 90

degrees Fahrenheit within panel, calculations will not be returned.
A. Panel testing shall be as required in Section 13410.
A. Sequence and schedule in accordance with Section 01352 and accepted progress
schedule submitted in accordance with Section 01324.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty in accordance with Section 01770.
B. Warrant to correct defective products for minimum 2 years.
2018 13442-2 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Hoffman.
2. Rittal
2.02 PANEL ENCLOSURE
A. NEMA 12 indoor and NEMA 4 or 4X outdoor. Specific requirement as specified

herein or as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Size panels in accordance with limitations indicated on the Drawings. Panel size is
the specific requirement of the panel manufacturer. Minimum panel sizes and/or
maximum panel sizes are indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 PANEL FABRICATION
A. The general fabrication requirements for the instrument and control panels including
enclosures and sub-panels shall be as specified herein.
B. Pneumatic Tubing: Not less than 1/4 inch OD copper with compression fittings. Run
tubing in horizontal and vertical planes, rigidly supported to withstand handling and
shipment. Use flexible tubing to connect devices mounted on hinged doors.
C. Provide compression type bulkhead fittings near the bottom or top of the panel, and
compression nuts and sleeves for field connections. Provide plugged test
connections and isolation shutoff valves for panels containing pneumatic
instruments.
D. Pneumatic devices shall have separate air supply shutoff valves.
E. Interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be MTW
or SIS 16 AWG, stranded copper wire, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a
moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90 degrees
Celsius except for electronic circuits and special instrument interconnect wiring
which shall be in accordance with manufacturer requirements.
F. Panel Wiring Size:

1. Power distribution wiring on line side of panel fuses minimum 12 AWG.
2. Secondary Power Distribution Wiring and Wiring for Control Circuits: Minimum
number 14 AWG.
3. Annunciator and Indicating Light Circuits: Minimum 16 AWG.
4. Electronic Analog Circuits Within Instrument and Control Panels: Minimum 16
AWG twisted and shielded pairs or triads rated not less than 600 volts.
G. Analog Circuits and AC Power Circuits: Separated.
H. Internal Panel Wiring Colors:

1. AC Power Distribution: Red
2018 13442-3 150407

2. DC Power and Control: Blue
3. Instrument: Black and white twisted shielded pair.
4. Other and in agreement with manufacturer's wiring diagrams as stated on
manufactured drawing legend.
I. Surge Protection Device for Power Entrances: Nominal 120 volts AC with a nominal
clamping voltage of 200 volts; nonfaulting and noninterrupting design with a
response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds.
J. Terminal Blocks for External Connections: Suitable for specified AWG wire, rated 30
amperes at not less than 600 volts; with marking strip, covers, pressure connectors,
and labeled terminals, each conductor of external circuits plus one ground terminal
for each shielded cable. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals.
K. Group cables, and firmly support wiring to the panel. Provide minimum 8 inches
clearance between terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and
wiring space. Individually fuse each control loop or system, and clearly label and
locate fuses or circuit breakers for maintenance.
L. Furnish and install equipment grounding conductor in accordance with NEC 250.
Provide power ground lugs. Provide signal insulated and isolated ground lugs.
M. Nameplates on Internal and External Instruments and Devices: Materials

approximate dimensions with legends as indicated on the Drawings made of
laminated phenolic material having engraved letters approximately 3/16 inch high
extending through the black face into the white layer; firmly secured to panels. Refer
to Section 13410.
N. Fabricated Custom Panels: Thoroughly clean, sand, and apply minimum 2 coats of
rust inhibiting primer both inside and out of panels. Apply minimum 2 coats of white
enamel or lacquer on panel interior surfaces. Smooth exterior surfaces and apply
minimum 2 coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish. Furnish 2 quarts of
finish color paint with the panels to cover future scratches.
O. Provide panels with an inside pocket to hold the panel drawings. Ship panels with 1
copy of accepted submittal drawings in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel
drawing pocket.
2.04 FREESTANDING VERTICAL PANELS
A. Panel Custom Fabrication: Dust tight, completely enclosed cubicle formed from
steel structural members and steel plates. Form base of heavy channel iron, with
flanges up, and with 1/2 inch holes drilled at 12 inch spacing so that the panel shall
be bolted to floor. Grind smooth welds, seams, and edges on exposed surfaces.
Provide lifting facilities for handling and shipment.
B. Panel Bracing: Suitably brace panel structure for sufficient strength to support
equipment mounted on or within, to withstand handling and shipment, to maintain
alignment, to be rigid and freestanding and resist seismic forces as specified in
Section 01612.
2018 13442-4 150407

C. Fabricate tops, sides and rear from minimum 12 steel plates with stationary rear
suitable for back-to-wall installation. Panels requiring rear access shall be designed
with hinged rear doors. Rear doors shall be fabricated from US 14 gauge steel.
D. Front Doors: US 12 gauge steel plate, with turned-back edges suitably braced and
supported to maintain alignment and rigidity without sagging; of sufficient width to
permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush mounted
instruments; essentially full height, with strong continuous piano type hinges.
E. Positive Latches: Acting from a common door handle which shall hold doors
securely compressed at top, side, and bottom against gaskets.
F. Doors shall have padlock locking provisions.
G. Top and bottom with nominal 1 square foot per section removable access plates
which shall be drilled to accommodate external wiring and conduit. Arrange panel
internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into panel either from
above or below.
H. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration from an

operator's standpoint and as indicated on the Drawings. Center line of recorders
shall fall within 36 inches and 69 inches above base of panel for convenient reading
and chart replacement.
I. Locate control switches within 60 inches and 36 inches above the base of the panel.
Local indicators within 36 inches and 60 inches above the base of the panels.
Mount annunciators and clocks near the top of the panels.
J. Panels or panel sections shall be capable of passing through 36 inch doorways less
stops.
K. Provide internal ceiling-mounted covered or guarded 1-lamp, 40 watt fluorescent

fixture spaced at approximately 30 inches and located toward the rear for
illumination of panel interiors with On-Off switches near end doors.
L. Provide duplex, grounded GFI receptacles for service and maintenance tools within
the panel at spacings not greater than 5 feet throughout the length of a panel.
Provide lighting and receptacle circuit from a separate power source and fuse
separately from the instrumentation systems.
2.05 OUTDOOR PANELS
A. Panels: NEMA 4X rating, fabricated as described for vertical panels. An enclosure

fabricated from US 10 gauge stainless steel plate shall provide a rigid and
freestanding structure of sufficient strength to support equipment, withstand
handling and shipment, and maintain alignment.
B. Grind smooth welds, seams, or edges. Edges shall be slightly rounded.
C. Latches and Other Hardware: Stainless steel.
2018 13442-5 150407

D. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed iron bases, flanges up, for anchoring to floor.
E. Completely shop assemble panels and ship as a complete unit. Access panels shall
be fabricated from not less than US 14 gauge stainless steel. Provide doors and
access panels with gaskets. Doors shall have padlock locking provisions.
F. Panel Mounted Instruments, Devices, and Control Switches: Suitable for outdoor
service.
G. Conduits connections shall be waterproof sealed with suitable materials.
2.06 EXISTING PANEL MODIFICATIONS
A. Provide labor and materials for complete modifications to existing panels as

specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
B. The existing panel face shall be field cut and refinished to original condition to
accommodate installation of new instruments, removal of existing instruments and
fitting of blanks to suit new layouts. New instrument supports shall be provided as
required for complete installation.
2.07 AIR CONDITIONING
A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1. Hoffman.
B. Provide cabinet coolers or solid-state air conditioning units on panels containing

electronic components such as panel instruments, programmable logic controllers
remote I/O.
C. Provide internal fans, coolers, or air conditioning units with thermostatic control as
necessary for internal air circulation to maintain internal temperature ratings of 90
degrees Fahrenheit or below. Provide filters on intake and exhaust openings.
2.08 STRIP HEATERS
A. Provide electric strip heaters as required by the application.
B. Strip Heaters: Suitable for 120 volt, single phase power supply, sized to prevent
condensation within the enclosure and to ensure that equipment is maintained
above its minimum operating temperature of 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Locate strip heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large

temperature fluctuations on the hardware.
D. Control strip heaters with adjustable thermostats having an adjustment range of 40

degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide a circuit breaker or fused
disconnect switch within the enclosure.
2018 13442-6 150407

2.09 POWER SUPPLIES/FUSING
A. Design and arrange regulated 24 volt DC power supplies for instrument loops so
that loss of 1 loop does not affect more than 1 instrument loop or system. Provide
power supplies suitable for an input voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent.
Fuse or short circuit protect the supply output.
B. Selectively fuse the power distribution from multi-loop supplies so that a fault in one
instrument loop will be isolated from the other loops being fed from the same
supply. Label and locate fuses for easy access.
C. Output Voltage Regulation: As required by the instrument or control equipment

being supplied.
D. Backup power supply units shall be provided to automatically supply the load upon
failure of the primary supply. Design backup supply systems so that either the
primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without
disrupting the instrument system operation.
E. Over size the multi-loop supply systems for an additional 20 percent future load.
Indicate failure of a multi-loop supply on the respective instrument panel or
enclosure.
F. Furnish and install signal repeaters for instrument loops that exceed the load
impedance of the power supplies. Indicating fuses: Neon bulb type for 120 VAC
circuit and glass indicating fuse type for 24 VDC circuits.
2.10 UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. General:
1. Type: Continuous-duty, on-line, double conversion, power isolated.
2. Consist: Rectifier, inverter, battery charger, batteries, automatic bypass, and
control and monitor electronics.
B. Output Performance:
1. 120V ac, 60-Hz, single-phase.
2. Regulation 3 percent and THD less than 5 percent for any combination of the
following without using the inverter:
3. Line-Neutral Voltage: 85V ac to 144V ac.
4. Load: No-load to full load.
5. Load Power Factor: 0.85.
6. Overload:
a 105 percent infinite.
b 106 to 110 percent for 4 minutes.
c Greater than 110 percent for 4 seconds.
7. Surge Suppression: Per EKE 587/ANSI C62.41 Category A&B.
8. Noise Attenuation: Greater than 60 dB at 100 kHz common mode, greater than
80 dB at 100 = kHz transverse mode.
9. Frequency Stability: 0.1 percent on inverter.
10. Temperature Range: 10 to 40 degrees C.
11. Efficiency: 85 percent minimum while online.
2018 13442-7 150407

12. Audible Noise: 50 dBA maximum.
C. Features: Unit shall be provided with UPS bypass module. Battery charger shall
restore the batteries to full charge after a complete discharge in less than 24 hours.
D. External Interface:
1. Provide the following maintained contact outputs which will be used as
discrete inputs by the plant control system. Contacts shall be noble metal or
hermetically sealed, and suitable for 3 amps at 120V ac.
a On battery.
b Fault.
2. Provide Ethernet network card to perform power monitoring via network
connection. Provide necessary power monitoring software with the unit.
E. Mounting: Tower
F. Manufacturer and Product: Powerware; 9130L – 700 VA.
2.11 SCADA HARDWARE ALLOWANCE
A. OWNER to reserve SCADA Hardware Allowance for specific SCADA components

unique to OWNER standards.
B. CONTRACTOR to install OWNER provided components in control panel as shown

on drawings. These components to be installed and tested at Factory Acceptance
Testing (FAT):
1. Allen Bradley CompactLogix PLC
2. Allen Bradley CompactLogix I/O modules and appurtenances
3. Hirschmann RS20-0800 series Network Switch;
A. Functionally factory test instrument and control panel items electrically and
pneumatically before shipment.
2.13 PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. Surge Protectors:
a. Transector ACP-100 BW.
b. Power Integrity Corporation ZTAS.
c. Entrelec.
d. Weidmuller.
e. Phoenix Contact.
B. Terminal Blocks:
a. Weidmuller SAKS.
b. Entrelec.
c. Phoenix Contact.
2018 13442-8 150407

d. Allen Bradley.
2. Nickel plated copper only; DIN rail; universal foot with the following as required
for the application:
a. Universal type.
b. Feed through.
c. Ground.
d. Neutral disconnect.
e. Intrinsically safe.
f. Explosion-proof.
g. Fuse.
h. Knife disconnect.
i. Ground fault indicator.
j. Bolt connecting.
3. Terminal Block Labeling: Each terminal and each conductor as previously
specified with machine labels only.
C. Signal Interface Modules:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.
a. Phoenix Contact.
b. Entrelec.
2. Analog isolating converter.
3. Ground loop isolations.
4. Signal amplification.
5. Signal level matching.
6. 24 VDC power supply (120 VAC input).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit.
Undercoat floor mounted panels.
B. Install conduit gasket, sealing material, and NEC Article 500 Seal-Off as specified in
Division 16.
C. Install signal grounding conductor and grounding electrode as required by the panel
manufacturer.
D. Connect panel equipment grounding (safety) terminal to the building or facility

ground grid with 6 AWG green insulated conductor.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment in accordance with Section 01756.
3.03 CLEANING
2018 13442-9 150407

3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of equipment in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT) required of complete control panel after build.
This shall include simulating all inputs and outputs to the PLC. PLC provided by
OWNER at minimum of 4 weeks prior to Factory Acceptance Testing.
CONTRACTOR to coordinate with OWNER for necessary component
C. Site Acceptance Testing (SAT) shall repeat FAT testing with all field inputs and
outputs wired correctly. SAT will demonstrate control panel functionality simulating
the inputs and outputs to the maximum extent possible.
3.05 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
2018 13442-10 150407

2018 13442-11 150407
SECTION 13475
LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Fiber optic cables for SCADA network.
2. Network components for SCADA network.
3. Network accessories/appurtenances.
4. Radio components
5. Radio accessories/appurtenances
B. Provide functional LAN for the WWTP SCADA system, providing communication
between SCADA hardware components.
C. Provide radio equipment, antennas, antenna poles, antenna cables and surge
suppressors at the following locations. Provide in accordance with Radio Site
Survey Report (refer to Appendices)
1. WWTP – Headworks PLC Panel (PLC01)
2. Lift station control panel at Hail & Garzoli
3. Lift station control panel at Hail & 5th
4. Lift station control panel at San Juan & E. Perkins
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 13410 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and
Methods.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Purchase Quotation: Listing of LAN system components and accessories to be

provided. Include applicable tag numbers and functional names of components.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
Include description of components, methods of connecting components, and the
following:
1. LAN System Components Data Sheets:
a. Neat and legible markups of the LAN System Components Data Sheets
provided in this Section.
b. Markup the LAN System Components Data Sheets to include complete
product information and corrections to reflect all items in the purchase
quotation.
c. Component Data:
1) Manufacturer and model number.
2) General data and description.
3) Engineering specifications and data sheet.
4) Scaled drawings and mounting arrangements
2. Cable Schedule showing:
a. Cable identification.
2018 13475-1 150407

b. Fiber counts for each cable and identification of used fiber pairs.
c. Cable length and attenuation, with two connector pairs and no splices,
based on TIA/EIA 568, Annex H.
C. Statement of Installation Engineer’s Training and Experience: Submit in accordance

with requirements for and with Product Data. Include the following:
1. Statement of Experience: List of at least five Ethernet network systems and
three fiber optic data communications systems comparable to system specified
which have been furnished and placed into operation by prospective
CONTRACTOR. For each system, provide following information:
a. Owner’s name, address, telephone number, and name of current
operations supervisor or other contact.
b. Description of system hardware configuration, including major equipment
items, number of nodes, and communication standards implemented.
c. System block diagram.
d. Dates when contract was signed, equipment was delivered, and system
was accepted by Owner. Also, include originally scheduled completion
date and if different from actual date, explain why.
e. Approximate value of listed LAN system provided, in dollars.
2. Qualification of Personnel:
a. Network certifications from nationally recognized vendor or training
agency, showing individuals are knowledgeable LAN installers.
Certifications may be similar to Certified Network Cabling Installer
Professional (CNCIPro).
b. Resumes giving management and technical qualifications of supervisory,
local service representative, and key personnel.
A. Provide Fiber Optic cables by a reputable manufacturer in this field for at least 3
years and has supplied Fiber Optic cables to minimum of 5 major installations.
B. Fiber Optic installer shall be specialized in this field and has minimum of 10 years
prior experience.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Humidity: Maximum 95 percent, non-condensing.
B. Ambient Temperature:
1. Operational: Zero to 60 degrees Celsius.
2. Storage: Minus 40 to 80 degree Celsius.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty to correct defective products for minimum

of 3 years.
2018 13475-2 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. Provide fiber optic cables in the following size ranges in accordance with the
drawings and specifications:
1. 12 fibers (6 pairs). Each cable shall contain a minimum of 100 percent spare
fibers.
B. Optical fiber coated with a suitable material to preserve the intrinsic strength of the
glass.
C. Fiber protected by a protective tube, a jacketed strength member and an exterior
jacket.
D. Cable shall be loose tube type with dielectric central member.
E. Cable can be used for underground ductbank and shall be waterproof.
F. Multimode, graded index, solid glass wave guides with the following characteristics:
1. Nominal core diameter 62.5/125 microns.
2. Minimum ellipicity 2.0 percent.
3. Outside clad diameter 125 microns.
4. Minimum numerical aperture (NA) 0.275.
5. Maximum attenuation (850 nm) 3.75 db/Km.
6. Maximum attenuation (1,300 nm) 1.5 db/Km.
G. Glass cladding nominally concentric with the fiber core.
H. Each fiber continuous with no factory splices.
I. Mechanical stress present in the cable shall not be transmitted to the optical fibers.
J. Loose tube construction allowing for thermal expansions and free movement of the
fiber within the protective container.
K. All protective coverings in any single length of cable continuous and of the same
material. Protective coverings free from holes, splices, blisters and other
imperfections.
L. A flooding compound applied into the interior of the fiber buffer tubes.
M. Strength members an integral part of the cable construction. The combined strength
of all the strength members sufficient to support the stress of installation and to
protect the cable in service.
N. The outer cable jacket made of polyethylene (PE).
O. FDDI compatible and meets the requirements of ANSI X3T9.5 for FDDI cable.
P. Type: Fiber optic cable as manufactured by Siecor, type 0.12K14-11105-20, Belden

Series 2254SS, or equal.
2.02 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATIONS
A. Connectors:
1. General: Provide “SC” type keyed connectors for all fiber terminations. Use the
same type of connectors for all fiber optic equipment and cable.
2018 13475-3 150407

2. Provide the following:
a. Attenuation (typical/maximum): 0.3 db/0.4 db.
b. Fiber nominal outside diameter: 125 micron.
c. Cable nominal outside diameter: 2.4 mn, 3.0 mm.
2.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
A. Provide sufficient fiber patch cords to make the interfaces required. Provide two
spare fiber patch cords of each type (“SC” to “SC”) for PLC and network cabinets.
2.04 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (RACK MOUNT)
A. Fiber optic patch panels shall meet the following (minimum) requirements:
1. Mounting: 19-inch rack mount, two rack units (maximum).
2. Capacity: 48 ports (minimum) via 6 or 8 port modules.
3. Connector style shall match fiber connector used for area network switch
specified in this section.
4. Include built-in cable management features for patch cords and cable
distribution. Slide out tray for access to user side and installer side connectors.
5. Lockable, protective front cover.
B. Manufacturers shall be:

1. Ortronics, FC01U
2. Siecor LANscope.
3. Or equal.
2.05 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL(WALL MOUNT)
A. Provide wall mountable interconnect center for terminating fibers in cabinets that do
not contain 19” racks. Cabinets shall have two lockable compartments.
B. Minimum 12 type “SC” connections, as required.
C. Strain relief provision.
D. Manufacturer:
1. Ortronics OR-615SMFC-P
2. Corning WIC-012
3. Or equal.
2.06 COPPER PATCH PANEL(RACK MOUNT)
A. Provide rack mountable interconnect center for terminating CAT5e cables in 19”
server rack cabinets.
B. Minimum 24 x RJ-45 ports.
C. Strain relief provision.
D. Manufacturer:
1. Ortronics; OR-PSD5E6U24
2. Corning
2018 13475-4 150407

3. Or equal.
2.07 TWISTED PAIR, COPPER ETHERNET NETWORK CABLE
A. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300 Volts:
1. Category 5e UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIA/EIA
568-C Category 5e requirements. Must comply with IEEE 802.3ab standard for
CAT5e.
2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit Ethernet and
video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products
and shall be backward compatible with Category 5.
B. Proven capability of 1,000 Mb/sec (1,000 baseTX standard).
C. Must be bonded cable to ensure cable integrity and eliminate any “untwisting” of
UTP cable.
D. All CAT5e cable to be provided by one vendor, to ensure similarity and consistency
in cable manufacturing, such as twists per inch. This includes both long-run cables
and patch cables.
E. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with FEP insulation
and blue PVC jacket.
F. NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenum requirements of

NFPA 70 and NFPA 262
G. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperature of minus 20

degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking
H. Manufacturer: Belden or equal.
2.08 NETWORK INTERFACE PANELS
A. General: Control panels, as shown on Drawings, shall house network switches and
fiber optic cable management area at the following locations:
1. Existing Admin Building: NIP01.
B. Network Interface Panel, NIP01 shall house the following (at a minimum):
1. Fiber distribution patch panels.
2. Fiber management system.
3. Copper patch panels.
4. Network switches.
5. Rack-mounted uninterruptible power supplies.
C. Network Interface Panel construction:

1. Four post anodized aluminum frame construction.
2. Color: Black.
3. 19 inches wide by 36 inches deep by 84 inches high, minimum. Accept 19 inch
standard rack mounted equipment.
4. Four vertical mounting rails providing 45 rack mounting units for each rack
section.
5. Provide horizontal and vertical cable management.
2018 13475-5 150407

6. Provide power distribution components.
a. Rack Mounted Power Strip: 19 inch rack mounted power strip with eight
20 amp outlets.
b. Manufacturer and Product: Ortronics; Model OR-50900052-TL
7. Provide DIN rail mounted 24V power supply
a. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley 1606-XLE15, Or equal.
8. Mount 24V power supply and network switch on DIN-rail adapter plate for
power to industrial network switch.
9. Solid sides and ventilated top panels.
10. Perforated metal front and rear access doors. Doors shall be lockable, 3-point
access doors.
11. Manufacturer and Product: Chatsworth Products Inc; M Series.
2.09 KVM SWITCH AND MONITOR ASSEMBLY:
A. As defined shown on Drawings
B. Monitor and Keyboard Assembly with built-in switch assembly:

1. Rack-mounted 19-inch monitor.
2. 8-port switch built-in
C. Manufacturer and Product: Belkin Inc.; F1DC108H.
2.10 RADIO TRANSCEIVER
A. Radio equipment specified herein is based on the Radio Site Survey Report
performed by ENGINEER, for installation of a new SCADA Radio System that will
interface with the new OWNER SCADA System. Refer to Appendices.
B. The radio provided shall at a minimum be equipped with the following:

1. Unlicensed IP/Ethernet and serial communications.
2. Frequency range 900 MHZ.
3. High speed long range Point-to-Multi Point.
4. Ethernet and serial communications (4 dual gateway).
5. Prevents unauthorized network access and secures wireless data.
6. Operation Temperature Range -30 Deg C to +60 Deg C.
7. High receive sensitivity for noisy environment and long distance
communications.
8. Multiple layers of security for INET-II radio.
9. Radius authentication.
10. Plan traffic segregation.
11. Proprietary hopping patterns, DTS with FHSS.
12. AES 128-Bit encryption.
13. Includes SNMP agent which can be managed and access by MDS Netview.
14. RJ45 Ethernet connectivity.
15. Wide range DC power (10-30VDC).
16. Two independent RS232 ports for serial communications to devices with
Modbus Protocol
C. Provide DIN rail mounting bracket. Include interface cable, as required, for
connection to the SCADA network switch.
D. Provide network management software, MDS Netview for diagnostic monitoring of
2018 13475-6 150407

radio traffic.
E. Manufacturer/Model: GE MDS iNET-II, 902-928 MHz data transceiver, with

Diagnostics and Ethernet communication port.
2.11 ANTENNA AND APPURTENANCES
A. Antennas shall be yagi type with the following characteristics; final properties
dependent on the frequency allocated:
1. Frequency: 900-928 MHz.

2. Gain: 10 dBi.
3. Number of elements: 6.
4. Polarization: vertical or horizontal.
5. Horizontal beam width: 36 degree.
6. Vertical beam width: 36 degree.
7. Front-to-Back ratio: > 21dB.
8. VSWR: < 1.5 : 1.
9. Max Power: 200 watts.
10. Standard Connector: N-type female (50 ohm).
11. Width: 18in (45cm) pigtail.
12. Length: 11.9in (180cm).
B. Mounting: 2.0in (5.1cm) max. diameter mast OD.
C. Antenna Cable
1. Provide a minimum three (3) foot section of "super-flexible" transmission cable
between the bulkhead mounted transient surge suppressor and the radio.
"Super-flexible" transmission cable shall be Heliax FSJ4-50B or equal
equipped with type "N" connectors.
2. Provide ½ inch low loss foam dielectric type antenna cable that is weatherproof
and suitable for direct exterior exposure between the bulkhead mounted
transient surge suppressor and the antenna, Heliax LDF4-50A or equal.
Furnish with "O" ring seals at all connectors.
3. Provide and field install an antenna cable grounding kit to the cable. Connect
grounding lead to the ground system. Provide Heliax SGL4-15B4, or equal.
4. Seal the exterior cable connections according to the cable manufacturer's

recommended weatherproofing methods, materials and installation practices,
Heliax 221213, or a self-shrink (cold shrink) tube constructed of EDPM rubber
as furnished by the antenna cable manufacture
D. Antenna Surge Suppressor

1. Provide Polyphaser Model No. IS-50NX-C2 bulkhead mounted antenna cable
transient surge suppressor, or equal.
2.12 UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (RACK MOUNT)
A. General:
1. Type: Continuous-duty, on-line, double conversion, power isolated.
2. Consist: Rectifier, inverter, battery charger, batteries, automatic bypass, and
2018 13475-7 150407

control and monitor electronics.
B. Output Performance:
1. 120V ac, 60-Hz, single-phase.
2. Regulation 3 percent and THD less than 5 percent for any combination of the
following without using the inverter:
3. Line-Neutral Voltage: 85V ac to 144V ac.
4. Load: No-load to full load.
5. Load Power Factor: 0.85.
6. Overload:
a. 105 percent infinite.
b. 106 to 110 percent for 4 minutes.
c. Greater than 110 percent for 4 seconds.
7. Surge Suppression: Per EKE 587/ANSI C62.41 Category A&B.
8. Noise Attenuation: Greater than 60 dB at 100 kHz common mode, greater than
80 dB at 100 = kHz transverse mode.
9. Frequency Stability: 0.1 percent on inverter.
10. Temperature Range: 10 to 40 degrees C.
11. Efficiency: 85 percent minimum while online.
12. Audible Noise: 50 dBA maximum.
C. Features: Unit shall be provided with UPS bypass module. Battery charger shall
restore the batteries to full charge after a complete discharge in less than 24 hours.
D. External Battery Modules (EBM): Batteries shall be sealed, maintenance-free type

capable of providing 45 minutes backup time. Provide EBM quantities to meet load
demand and backup time requirement.
E. External Interface:
1. Provide the following maintained contact outputs which will be used as discrete
inputs by the plant control system. Contacts shall be noble metal or
hermetically sealed, and suitable for 3 amps at 120V ac.
a. On battery.
b. Fault.
2. Provide Ethernet network port to perform power monitoring via network
connection. Provide necessary power monitoring software with the unit.
F. Mounting: 19 inch rack mounting.
G. Manufacturer and Product: Powerware; 9130 – 3,000 VA.
2.13 SCADA HARDWARE ALLOWANCE
A. OWNER to reserve SCADA Hardware Allowance for specific SCADA components

unique to OWNER standards.
B. CONTRACTOR to install OWNER provided components in network interface panel

as shown on drawings and tested at Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT).
C. The following SCADA hardware and network components will be provided by

OWNER.
1. Dell PowerEdge R720 Servers (3 total);
2. Cisco ASA 5510 series Firewall;
2018 13475-8 150407

3. Dell Optiplex Series Workstation;
4. Hirschmann RS20-0800 series Network Switch
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIBER OPTIC SPLICING
A. Provide a fiber optic cable plant installation diagram and include in the submittal to
ensure a minimum number of splices.
B. Where splices are necessary, fusion splice or mechanical splice the optical fibers
with a splice loss not to exceed 0.2-db.
C. Test all splices with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) bidirectionally to
verify splice loss at the time of splicing. Re-splice any splices not conforming to
these specifications.
D. During splicing operations, protect the unspliced portions of the cable from the
intrusion of moisture and other foreign matter.
1. Notify and obtain approval from the Engineer prior to splicing of all required
splices not identified by submittal.
3.02 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION
A. Fan out all fiber optic cable to allow direct connectorization of the fiber optic cable.
Sleeve over each individual fiber with a kevlar reinforced furcation tube. At the
convergence point of all furcation tubes, provide strain relief with a high density
plastic fan-out collar. Additionally, provide a minimum of 6.0-feet coil of spare fiber at
each wiring closet.
B. Terminate cables in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.
C. Break Out Kits:

1. Terminate cables using manufacturer supplied break out kits.
2. Terminate in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Connectors:
a. Terminate 100 percent of fibers in each cable to specified connectors.
b. Connect into fiber management system.
3.03 FIBER OPTIC ON-SITE TESTING
A. General: Provide all equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform

all testing. The Engineer shall have the option to witness and participate actively in
the on-site tests performed by the installer.
B. Pretesting: Prior to the physical placement of the fiber optic cable, test each fiber
while on the spool with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) at
wavelength of 1300 nm. Document the OTDR tests and show that the fibers
conform to the manufacturer’s attenuation specifications and that no damage
occurred to the cable during shipping. Provide hard copy plots of the tests to the
Engineer prior to approval for the placement to proceed.
2018 13475-9 150407

C. Post Testing:
1. After installing connectors, test all installed fibers from both ends of the cable
using the OTDR. Provide test documentation that includes the cable tested,
fiber number, total length of fiber, attenuation of the fiber and splice loss if fiber
has been spliced. Perform the tests at the wavelength used for the network
being tested, either 1300 nm or 850 nm. Provide a permanent hard copy and
diskette copy of all OTDR signature traces documentation.
2. After installing connectors, perform fiber end-to-end attenuation testing on all
installed fibers from both ends of the cable, suing a stabilized light source and
an optical power meter. Perform attenuation tests at wavelengths of 850 nm
and 1300 nm. Demonstrate and document specified gain margin. Document
results including the cable tested, fiber number, direction of tests, wavelength
and reference power reading.
3.04 STAGING SITE DEMONSTRATION TEST
A. General: Test the communication system as a part of the DISTRIBUTED CONTROL

SYSTEM Staging Site Demonstration Test (SDT). Include all components in the test
except the interbuilding fiber optic cables. Use temporary fiber optic interconnect
cables for the test, in place of the inter-building cables.
B. Test all functions including, but not limited to, the following:
1. PLC to PLC and PLC to HMI communications.
a. Communications timing.
b. Communication signal level margins (assume manufacturer’s maximum
signal loss for cable lengths and maximum specified signal loss for
splices, terminations and other components not tested).
3.05 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT AND RADIO TESTING SERVICES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a technician trained in testing and startup of this
radio system to make adjustments to the location, height and alignment of the
antenna as required to optimize the signal strength and to conduct the following
radio site tests.
3.06 RADIO FIELD TESTS
A. Test radio transceiver with all field wiring connected and confirm that the radio status
LED indications are normal.
B. Test and record Return Loss and VSWR.
C. Test and record Cable loss.
D. Test and record Radio Output power.
E. Provide the OWNER a written report on the results of the radio test, including the
weather conditions during the test as a baseline.
3.07 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum on one (1) instructor days of training at the jobsite for the
Owner’s personnel in the hardware maintenance of the communication system. This
2018 13475-10 150407

shall include testing, fault analysis, switchover to backup cable and other topics
required for system maintenance.
END OF SECTION
2018 13475-11 150407

SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical

equipment.
1. Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
2. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-up.
4. Section 01782 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
6. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
7. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
8. Section 09910 - Paints.
10. Section 10400 - Identification Devices.
11. Section 13410 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and
Methods.
12. Section 15082 - Piping Insulation.
13. Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
14. Section 16950 - Electrical Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards:

1. AGMA 2001-B88 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for
Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
2. AGMA 6000-A88 - Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration on Gear
Units.
3. AGMA 6010-E88 - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel
Enclosed Drives.
4. AGMA 6019-E89 - Standard for Gear motors using Spur, Helical, Herringbone,
Straight Bevel or Spiral Bevel Gears.
5. AGMA 6025-C90 - Sound for enclosed Helical, Herringbone and Spiral Bevel
Gear Drives.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. ASME PTC 8.2 - Performance Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps.
2. ANSI/ASME PTC 10 - Performance Test Code - Compressors and Exhausters.
3. ANSI/ASME PTC 17 - Performance Test Code - Reciprocating Internal-
Combustion Engines.
4. ANSI/ASME PTC 11 - Performance Test Code - Measurement of Shaft
Horsepower - Instruments and Apparatus.
C. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards:

1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
2018 15050-1 150407

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. A 526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip
Process, Commercial Quality.
4. B-61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
5. B 62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
6. E 527 - Standard Practice for Numbering Alloys and Metals (UNS).
E. American National Standards Institute/Hydraulic Institute Standards (ANSI/HI):

1. ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application
and Operation.
2. ANSI/HI 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
3. ANSI/HI 2.1-2.5 - Vertical Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and
Operation.
4. ANSI/HI 2.6 - Vertical Pump Tests.
5. ANSI/HI 3.1-1.5 - Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and
Operation.
6. ANSI/HI 3.6 - Rotary Pump Tests.
7. ANSI/HI 4.1-4.6 - Sealless Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions,
Application, Operation and Test.
8. ANSI/HI 5.1-1.6 - Sealless Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions,
Application, Operation and Test.
9. ANSI/HI 6.1-6.5 - Reciprocating Power Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions,
Application and Operation.
10. ANSI/HI 7.1-7.5 - Controlled Volume Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions,
Application and Operation.
11. ANSI/HI 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions,
Application and Sound Measurement.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Special Tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment
for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.
B. Resonant Frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an

ever larger vibration if no dampening exists.
C. Rotational Frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as

revolutions per minute.
D. Critical Frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the
installed machine and base.
E. Peak Vibration Velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the
vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second.
F. Rotational Speed: Same as rotational frequency.
G. Maximum Excitation Frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration
velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a
particular machine.
H. Critical Speed: Same as critical frequency.
2018 15050-2 150407

I. Free Field Noise Level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an
idealized situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified
otherwise.
A. General:
1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over
and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Section.
2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses which may occur
during fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation.
3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as
required by tests.
4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable.
5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide
products of same manufacturer.
6. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of
gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries
required for proper operation.
7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to
specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and
contained in Laws and Regulations.
B. Material Requirements:
1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under
conditions normally encountered in similar installations.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.
C. Power Transmission Systems:

1. Power Transmission Equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains,
sprockets, mechanical variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear
reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting,
intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day
continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever
is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5.
a. Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime
source of power and not to actual equipment loading.
b. Apply service factors higher than 1.5 when recommended for continuous
24 hour-per-day operation and shock loadings specified in
AGMA 6010-E88, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable
referenced standards.
c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5,
manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence.
D. Vibration:
1. Resonant Frequency: Ensure there are no natural resonant torsional, radial, or
axial frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational
frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be
excited by the equipment design.
2. Design, balance and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in
Section 15958.
E. Equipment Mounting and Anchoring:
2018 15050-3 150407

1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel
support frames. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges
between steel members. Grind welds smooth.
2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment
or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and
openings for electrical conduits.
3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over
1,000 pounds.
4. Anchor equipment base to concrete pad. Determine number, size, type, and
location of bolts, anchor bolts, or other connections.
5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. Adjust bolts to final
location and fill sleeve with non-shrink grout.
F. Structural Design:
1. Design connections and related details for seismic design criteria as specified
in Section 01612.
2. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more provide
calculations for:
a. Determination of operating weight and centroid of equipment.
1) Operating weight is to be weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids
normally contained in unit during operation.
b. Determination of seismic forces and overturning moments.
c. Determination of shear and tension forces in connections.
d. Design of connection details based on calculated shear and tension
forces.
G. Equipment Units Weighing 50 pounds or More: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to
allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each item of Equipment:
a. Design features.
b. Load capacities.
c. Efficiency ratings.
d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and
Grade.
e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications.
f. Catalog data.
g. Name plate data.
h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials and
accessories or options being furnished.
2. Gear Reduction Units:
a. Engineering information per applicable AGMA standards.
b. Gear mesh frequencies.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Drawings for Equipment:
a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut-away drawings, parts lists,
material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate
that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.
2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal,
motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints,
2018 15050-4 150407

couplings, drive arrangement, gears, baseplate or support dimensions, anchor
bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components.
3. Installation and check-out instructions including leveling and alignment
tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial start-up procedures.
4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar
for computer based controls.
5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and
pressures.
6. Alarm and shutdown setpoints for all controls furnished.
C. Calculations:
1. Calculations and other information to substantiate base plates, supports, and
anchor bolts meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic design
criteria specified in Section 01612.
2. Bearing L10 life calculations in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11
calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other drive
line components with bearings.
3. Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational
frequencies meet the requirements of this Section.
4. Torsional Analysis of Power Transmission Systems: When torsional analysis
specified in the equipment Sections, provide:
a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics including
mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness.
b. Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of
system components and complete system.
5. Calculations for connection details demonstrating compliance with specified
structural design requirements.
6. Require Professional Engineer registered in state where Project is located to
stamp and sign calculations.

1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in
Section 15958.
2. Submit factory test reports before shipment.
3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment.
4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Section 15958.
5. Start-up Plan: Proposed plan for field testing equipment as specified in
Section 01756.
6. Certificate of Proper Installation: As specified in Section 01756.
7. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment sections.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782.
2. Submit prior to training of OWNER's personnel.
3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field
personnel and ENGINEER during start-up and testing of equipment.
4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated
ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer
raceways.
5. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies.
F. Project Closeout Documents: As specified in Section 01770.
2018 15050-5 150407

A. Qualifications: Equipment manufacturer and system component manufacturers to

have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design, manufacture, and assembly of
the specified equipment and components with an established record of successful
operation of such equipment and components.
B. References: Provide references from a minimum of 3 installations currently

operating the same model equipment in continuous service for a minimum of 2 years
under similar operating conditions. Reference information shall include location,
service, contact person, and contact phone number.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service:

1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of
equipment.
a. Visit project site and perform tasks necessary to certify installation.
b. Furnish Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Section 01756.

1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and
moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage.
2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport.
3. Spare Parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare
parts belong, and name of CONTRACTOR.
B. Storage:
1. Equipment Having Bearings: Store in enclosed facilities. Rotate units at least
once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacture to protect
rotating elements and bearings.
2. Gear Boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.
C. Protection:
1. Equipment: Protect equipment from deleterious exposure.
2. Painted Surfaces: Protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other
damage.
1. Equipment for project is to be suitable for performance in wastewater treatment
plant environment and under following conditions:
a. Ambient Temperatures: 30 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Relative Humidities: 70 to 100 percent.
c. Site Elevation: About 235 feet above mean sea level.
d. Other: Marine environment with coastal fog and sea salt spray.
A. Equipment Anchoring: Obtain from equipment manufacturers' anchoring material

and templates or setting drawings in time for anchors to be cast-in-place when
concrete is placed.
2018 15050-6 150407

B. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including
verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are
compatible.
C. General Start-up and Testing of Equipment:

1. Perform general start-up and testing procedures after operation and
maintenance manuals for equipment have been received.
2. Conduct functional testing of mechanical or electrical systems when each
system is substantially complete and after general start-up and testing
procedures have been successfully completed.
3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sections 01756, 15958, 13410,
and 16950 and the equipment sections.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Warrant equipment free of defects in material and workmanship for 1 year
from the date of acceptance or date of first beneficial use of the equipment by the
OWNER; cover parts and labor.
B. Where warranty exceeds 1 year, manufacturer’s warranty shall be issued in the

OWNER’s name.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools:
1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance.
2. Mark or tag and list such tools in maintenance and operations instructions.
Describe use of each tool.
B. Spare Belts:
1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type and
size of belt-driven unit.
a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets.
b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size,
and use.
c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.
C. Spare Parts:
1. Assume responsibility until turned over to OWNER.
2. Store in enclosed facilities.
3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part.
4. List parts by generic title and identification number.
5. Furnish name, address, and telephone number of supplier and spare parts
warehouse.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ferrous Materials:
1. Steel for Members used in Fabrication of Assemblies: ASTM A 36.
2. Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blow-
holes, flaws, and other imperfections.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge).
2018 15050-7 150407

4. Expanded Metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, 1/2 inch flat pattern expanded metal.
B. Nonferrous Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified; provide L grade where welding
required.
2. Bronze in Contact with Liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent
aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or
C92700 in accordance with ASTM B 62, B-61, B-505, or B-584, when not
specified otherwise.
C. Dielectric Materials for Separation of Dissimilar Metals:

1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings,
nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials.
D. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05120; minimum 0.5 inch diameter.
E. Non-Shrink Grout: As specified in Section 03600.
2.02 SHAFT COUPLINGS
A. General:
1. Type and Ratings: Provide nonlubricated type, designed for not less than
50,000 hours of operating life.
2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application,
considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service.
3. Use: Use of couplings specified in this Section does not relieve
CONTRACTOR of responsibility to provide precision alignment of driver-driven
units as required by equipment manufacturer and alignment criteria specified
elsewhere in this section.
B. Shaft Couplings - Close Coupled: Shaft couplings for close coupled electric motor
driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to sudden torque reversals
or shock loading:
a. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, L-Jaw, C-Jaw, or G-Jaw.
b. Lovejoy, S-Flex.
2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment,
parallel misalignment, and end float.
3. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber, or urethane.
4. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives.
5. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment.
6. Examples of Loads Where Sudden Torque Reversals may be Expected:
a. Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors.
b. Conveyor belts.
c. Reversing equipment.
C. Shaft Couplings - Direct Connected: Shaft couplings for direct connected electric
motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non-
reversing applications:
a. Falk, WA Torus.
b. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, Sure-Flex or Form-Flex.
2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration,
and shaft misalignment or offset.
3. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers.
2018 15050-8 150407

4. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their
shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins.
D. Spacer Couplings: Where cartridge type mechanical seals or non-split seals are
specified, provide a spacer type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal
without disturbing the driver or driven equipment mountings unless noted otherwise
in the individual equipment specifications.
E. Specialized Couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized

features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer.
2.03 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS
A. General:
1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge type,
double mechanical shaft seals for pumps.
2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal.
3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a
double mechanical seal.
4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, 3/4 inch size unless another size is
indicated on the Drawings. Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest
equipment floor drain indicated on the Drawings.
5. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and
repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box.
B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the
following type of packing:
1. Wastewater, Water, and Sludge Applications:
a. Asbestos free.
b. PTFE (Teflon) free.
c. Braided graphite.
1) Chesterton, 1400.
2) John Crane Inc., equivalent product.
2. Drinking Water Service:
a. Approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
b. Asbestos free.
c. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon).
1) Chesterton, 1725.
2) John Crane, Inc., equivalent product.
C. Mechanical Seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as
specified herein.
1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements:
a. Balanced hydraulically.
b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type 316 stainless
steel for split seals.
c. O-Ring: Viton 747.
d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel.
e. Set Screws: Type 316L stainless steel.
f. Hard Face: Reaction bonded, Silicon Carbide.
g. Soft Face: Carbon, Union Carbide 658 RC.
2018 15050-9 150407

h. Seal designed to withstand 125 pounds per square inch gauge minimum
differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer
pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though
process suction head may be present in pump.
2. Cartridge Type Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or
equal:
a. Chesterton, 155.
b. John Crane, 88 SRS Series.
3. Cartridge Type Double Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or
equal:
a. Chesterton, 225.
b. John Crane, 88 RS Series.
4. Split Face Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Chesterton, 442 (single).
b. John Crane, 37 (single).
2.04 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS
A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified.
B. Design:
1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service.
2. AGMA Class II service.
a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's
manufacturer.
3. Cast iron housing with gears running in oil.
4. Anti-friction bearings.
5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime
mover not actual load.
6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards.
C. Planetary gear units are not to be used.
2.05 BELT DRIVES
A. Sheaves:
1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap
tightening screws.
2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set
of sheaves.
3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operate at
peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute.
4. Key bushings to drive shaft.
B. Belts: Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock
bushings.
2. Woods's, Super-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip
bushings.
2018 15050-10 150407

2.06 BEARINGS
A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard

manufacture.
B. Oil Lubricated Bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil
reservoir splash type system.
1. Oil Lubrication Systems: Sized to safely absorb heat energy normally
generated in bearings under maximum ambient temperature of 15 degree
Fahrenheit above the specified maximum ambient temperature specified
under article, Project Conditions; provide external cooler when required, air
cooled if water cooling source not indicated on the Drawings. Equip with filler
pipe and external level gauge.
C. Grease Lubricated Bearings, Except Those Specified to Be Factory Sealed: Fit with
easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings.
1. Lubrication Lines and Fittings:
a. Lines: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel tubing.
b. Multiple Fitting Assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible
location.
c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings.
a) Alenite
b) Zurk.
D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 for L10 rating life of not less
than 50,000 hours.
1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sections, supersede preceding
requirement.
2.07 SAFETY GUARDS
A. Drive Assemblies: Enclose sprockets, belts, drive chains, gearings, couplings, and
other moving parts on drive assemblies in safety enclosures that are in compliance
with applicable Laws and Regulations.
B. Shafts: Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components
within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms.
C. Hot Surfaces: Insulate all surfaces with normal operating temperatures above
120 degrees Fahrenheit when surface is within 7.5 feet height from any operating
floor or level; insulation thickness such that temperature is below 120 degrees; cover
insulation with moisture-proof protective jacket; insulation Type 3 and cover Type 5
as specified in Section 15082.
D. Guard Requirements:
1. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal.
2. Allow access to lubrication fittings.
3. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations.
4. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent
larger and addition of one belt.
E. Materials:
1. Sheet Metal: Carbon steel, 12 gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.
2018 15050-11 150407

2. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel.
2.08 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS
1. Telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and
vertical forces.
2. Use steel coil springs.
3. Design vibration isolators in accordance with seismic design criteria as
B. Performance Requirements: Minimum spring deflection of 1 inch under static load

and capable of limiting transmissability to 10 percent maximum at design operating
load.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.
2. Mason Industries, equivalent product.
D. Materials:
1. Fabricate isolators using welded steel or shatterproof ductile iron in
accordance with ASTM A 536 Grade CS-45-12.
2. Spring Steel: ASTM A 125.
2.09 WARNING SIGNS
A. Provide for equipment that starts automatically or remotely.
B. Material and Size: Metal as specified in Section 10400.
C. Colors: Black lettering on yellow background.
D. Text: As specified in Section 10400.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel Members: As specified in Section 05120.
B. Nameplates:
1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment
at factory in an accessible and visible location.
2. Indicate Following Information as Applicable:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Equipment model number and serial number.
c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed.
d. Horsepower.
e. Rated capacity.
f. Service class per applicable standards.
3. Nameplates for Pumps: Include:
a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid.
b. Rated flow in gallons per minute.
c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.
4. Gear Reduction Units: Include:
a. AGMA Class of service.
b. Service factor.
2018 15050-12 150407

c. Input and output speeds.
C. Bolt Holes in Equipment Support Frames: Do not exceed bolt diameter by more than
25 percent, up to limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch.
D. Shop Finishing:
1. Provide factory and field coating as specified in Section 09960. If not specified
in Section 09960, provide coating as follows:
a. Bases and Support Frames in Contact with Concrete or Other Material:
Paint contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer
before installation or grouting.
b. Shop Primer for Steel and Iron Surfaces, Unless Specified Otherwise:
a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer.
b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat.
c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer.
d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem-Prime.
e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer.
c. Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be
painted with rust-preventive compounds.
a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344.
b) Rust-Oleum, R-9.
d. Coating for Ferrous Metal Surfaces, Except Stainless Steel: High solids
polyamine epoxy.
e. Finish Painting of Motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard
coating, unless otherwise specified in Section 09910.
A. As specified in Section 15958 for testing requirements and the individual equipment
sections of the Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and

proper torques and tightness of fasteners.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Metal Work Embedded in Concrete:

1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed.
2. Clean surface of metal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is
placed.
B. Concrete Surfaces Designated to Receive Grout:

1. Give surfaces heavy sandblasting treatment.
2. Clean surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other foreign
material that may reduce bonding of grout.
3. Concrete Saturation: Saturate concrete with water. Concrete surface shall be
damp concrete at time grout is placed.
2018 15050-13 150407

C. Field Measurements:
1. Prior to fabrication of equipment, take measurements for installation of
equipment and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Ensure
equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations.
B. Lubrication Lines and Fittings:

1. Lines from Fittings to Point of Use: Support and protect.
2. Fittings:
a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily
accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates,
housings, or guards.
b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple
fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and
protected from damage.
c. Fittings for Underwater Bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and
mount on edge of structure above.
C. Alignment of Drivers and Equipment:

1. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by
flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment
after complete unit has been leveled on its foundation.
2. Comply with procedures of appropriate Hydraulic Institute Standards, AGMA
Standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following
requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment:
a. Maximum Total Coupling Offset (not the per plane offset): Not to exceed
0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on
coupling length (not dial separation).
b. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections.
3. Use Reverse-indicator Arrangement Dial Type or Laser Type Alignment
Indicators: Mount indicators on the driver/coupling flange and
equipment/coupling flange. Alignment instrumentation accuracy to be sufficient
to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the
manufacturer's recommended acceptable misalignment.
4. Alignment and calculations to include measurement and allowance for thermal
growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation and axial spacing
tolerances of the coupling.
5. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components,
tighten anchor bolts and grout between base and foundation. Allow minimum
48 hours for grout to harden. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, fully
tighten anchor bolts, and recheck alignment. Correct alignment as required.
6. After operational testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven
equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Grouting Equipment Bases:

1. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting spaces, type of
grout, and tolerances for level and alignments, both vertical and horizontal.
2. Grout base when piping connections are complete and in alignment with no
strain transmitted to equipment.
2018 15050-14 150407

3. Grout base when equipment is leveled and in alignment.
4. Place grout, filling voids under equipment bases including recesses between
anchor bolts and sleeves.
a. Extend grout to edge of bases or bedplates and bevel at 45 degrees
around units.
b. Finish surfaces with slope that prevents ponding water within grouted
areas.
5. Grout: As specified in Section 03600.
E. Special Techniques: Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision
machinist levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations.
F. Tolerances:
1. Completed Equipment Installations: Comply with requirements for intended use
and specified vibration and noise tolerances.
G. Warning Signs: Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment which can be
started automatically or from remote locations.
A. Test equipment as specified in Section 15958 and the individual equipment Section
of the Specifications.
B. Perform operational testing as required by Section 01756.
3.05 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Field Check-out: Before field testing and start-up, provide services of factory trained
field service representative to certify the equipment has been installed, aligned and
checked in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the Specifications.
B. Testing: Provide services of factory trained representative to observe and advise the
CONTRACTOR during field quality control testing.
C. Training: When training is specified, provide services of factory trained

representative to perform training as specified in Section 01756.
END OF SECTION
2018 15050-15 150407

SECTION 15052
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic piping materials and methods.
1. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
3. Section 15061 - Pipe Supports.
4. Section 15142 - Disinfection of Domestic Water Lines.
5. Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated Welded and Seamless.
2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service.
3. D 2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Aboveground Piping: Piping within buildings, tunnels, or other structures without

regard to elevation of piping, or exposed piping outside buildings and structures.
B. Underground Piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete.
C. Underwater Piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or concrete tanks containing
water.
D. Wet Wall: Wall with water on at least one side.
A. Piping Drawings:
1. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and
fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on
the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings.
2. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid
structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or
changed.
a. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to
the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Times.
1. Venting Piping Under Pressure:
a. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps,
2018 15052-1 150407

b. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping. Provide
one inch plug valves for water lines, and 2 inch plug valves for sewage
and sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping
as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling.
d. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs.
Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in accordance with Section
09960.
2. Restraining Piping:
a. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction,
changes sizes, and at ends.
1) When piping is underground, use concrete thrust block or mechanical
restraints.
2) When piping is aboveground or under water, use mechanical or
structural restraints.
3) Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional
area of the piping by design test pressure of the piping.
b. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from
test pressures.
1) During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping
does not require permanent restraints.
c. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. Place concrete so
piping joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for
assembly and disassembly.
d. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping
Schedule.
3. Connections to Existing Piping:
a. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient
time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or
fittings.
1) Protect domestic water supplies from contamination.
a) Make connections between domestic water supply and other
water systems in accordance with requirements of public health
authorities.
b) Provide devices approved by OWNER of domestic water supply
system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic
supply system.
b. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new
piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
c. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings
needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make
connections to existing piping.
4. Connections to In-service Piping:
a. Shutdown in-service piping in accordance with Section 01140.
1) Establish procedures and timing in a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER of the in-service piping.
b. Where operation and maintenance of existing facilities require that a
shutdown be made during hours other than normal working hours, perform
the related work in coordination with the hours of actual shutdown.
c. Additional provisions regarding shutdown of existing facilities are specified
in Section 01140 Work Restrictions.
5. Connections at Dissimilar Metals:
2018 15052-2 150407

a. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with
dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical
reactions between dissimilar metals.
b. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
C. Piping Alternatives:
1. Provide piping in accordance with this Section, unless indicated on the
Drawings or specified otherwise.
2. Alternative Pipe Ratings: Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may
be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price.
Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping.
3. Alternative Joint Types: Ductile iron piping with mechanical joints or push-on
joints may be substituted in lieu of bell and spigot joints.
4. Valves in Piping Sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for
piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping.
5. For flanged joints, where one of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide
a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.
2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.
3. Beaton and Corbin, Model Number 1 or Number 13.
B. Material: Chrome plated steel plate.
2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS

1. Calpico, Inc.
2. Thunderline Corporation, Link-Seal.
B. Characteristics:
1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and
wall opening.
2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe.
3. Provide a stainless steel or glass reinforced nylon pressure plate under each
bolt head and nut. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
2.03 GASKETS
A. Gaskets for Non-steam Cleaned Ductile Iron and Steel Piping:

1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch
gauge, temperatures equal to and less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw
sewage service.
2. Gasket Material:
a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70.
b. Reinforcement: Inserted 13 ounce nylon fabric cloth for pipes 20 inch or
larger.
2018 15052-3 150407

c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32 inch thick for less than 10 inch pipe; minimum
1/8 inch thick for 10 inch and larger pipe.
a. Pipe 20 inches in Diameter and Larger:
1) Garlock, Style 8798.
2) John Crane, similar product.
b. Pipe less than 20 inches in Diameter:
1) Garlock, Style 7797.
2) John Crane, similar product.
B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Polyvinyl Chloride and Polyethylene Piping:

1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge,
with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120 degrees
Fahrenheit, polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except
chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous
fluorine.
2. Material: Viton Rubber; 0.125 inch thick.
a. Garlock.
b. John Crane, similar product.
C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Gas or Liquified Petroleum Gas Piping:

1. Liquefied Petroleum, Propane, and Natural Gas Applications in Black Steel
Piping: Suitable for pressures equal and less than 250 pounds per square inch
gauge, temperatures equal and less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit, and
liquefied petroleum gas, propane gas, and natural gas application.
2. Material:
a. Microcellular Teflon outer layers with rigid center layer.
b. Sealability in accordance with ASTM F37, lass than 0.55 millimeters/hr
leakage of iso-octane at 1,000 psi gasket load and 9.8 psig fluid pressure.
a. Garlock, Style 3545.
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Low Pressure Air Piping:

temperatures equal and less than 300 degrees Fahrenheit, and compressed
air service.
2. Material: EPDM elastomer, 1/8 inch thick, 60 Shore hardness, smooth surface.
a. Garlock, Style 8314.
E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Ductile Iron, or Steel Water Piping:

1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per
square inch gauge, and temperatures equal and less than 160 degrees
Fahrenheit.
2. Material:
a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, non-asbestos fiber reinforcement.
b. Teflon ring; or teflon envelope with nonasbestos filler.
a. Bluegard, Style 3300.
b. Garlock.
c. John Crane, similar product.
2018 15052-4 150407

F. Gaskets for steel piping (fuel oil):
temperatures equal and less than 350 degrees Fahrenheit, fuel oil service.
2. Material:
a. Compressed organic fibers (Kevlar) and Neoprene binder.
b. ASTM F104 (F712400), 2500 psi (ASTM F152), 0.2 ML/HR leakage fuel A
(ASTM F37).
a. Garlock.
b. John Crane.
G. Gaskets for stainless steel piping (high temperature):

temperatures equal and less than 1200 degrees Fahrenheit, diesel exhaust
service.
2. Type:
a. Spiral-wound with Type 347 stainless steel V-shaped metal strips wound
in a spiral and separated by graphoil, flat, full faced.
3. Manufacturers: One at the following or equal:
a. Garlock.
b. John Crane.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Existing Conditions:

1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities and
obstructions which may affect construction of underground piping before
starting excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.
2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing
facilities and obstructions. Determine conflicts for the construction of the new
underground piping and appurtenances.
3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new
piping and existing facilities and obstructions.
3.02 WALL AND SLAB PENETRATIONS
A. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and concrete
walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, pilasters, columns, piers, and beams unless specified or
otherwise indicated on the Drawings. When indicated on the Drawings, verify that
sleeves are large enough inside diameter to clear piping, and that filler material for
spaces between piping and sleeve, and synthetic rubber sealing compound at the
end of the sleeves are shown.
B. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum
inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than
1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter of
piping.
1. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and
replaced without disturbing the structure.
2. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.
3. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors,
walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.
2018 15052-5 150407

4. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not
otherwise specified oindicated on the Drawings.
5. Seal openings around piping running through interior walls and floors of
chlorine rooms and chlorine storage rooms gastight with synthetic rubber
sealing compound.
C. Cast couplings or wall pieces in walls for penetrations of buried rigid piping including
cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, and vitrified clay through structures.
1. Provide couplings or wall pieces with mechanical push-ons, or similar flexible
joints at outside faces of walls.
2. Provide additional similar joints in piping at transition points between trenches
and structure excavations.
3. For steel piping, single joints may be used in lieu of 2 joints. Locate single
joints outside within 2 feet from outside faces of walls.
D. Link Seal: Use 2 link seals where seal is used to seal at wet wall sleeves. Mount one
seal on the inside face of the wall and the other on the outside face of the wall.
Coordinate the inside diameter of the wall sleeve with the size of the seal to provide
watertight sealing.
E. Where not indicated on the Drawings, penetrations for conditions other than those
specified under the preceding subparagraphs shall be 1 of the 3 types specified in
such subparagraphs found by ENGINEER to be the most suitable for the particular
conditions.
3.03 EXPOSED PIPING
A. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless
indicated otherwise.
1. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings. Slope plumbing drain piping with 1/8 inch per foot downward in the
direction of flow. Slope digester gas piping to drip traps or low-point drains at
minimum 1/2 inch per foot where condensate flows against the gas, or 1/4 inch
per foot where condensate flows with gas.
B. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations
have been determined.
C. Support piping in accordance with Section 15061.

1. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
D. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings,
flanged joints, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and
suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and
disassembly of the piping.
E. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment.

1. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other
connections.
2. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping.
Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or
subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses.
3. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements
shall slip freely into place.
4. Alter piping assembly to fit when proper fit is not obtained.
2018 15052-6 150407

5. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction
piping.
3.04 BURIED PIPING
A. Bury piping with minimum 3 foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
B. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be
laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and
disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation
requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Laying Piping:
1. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest
point with bell ends up slope.
2. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.
3. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full
length of barrels.
4. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space
under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with
sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.
5. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily to
prevent entrance of debris or animals.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Piping Cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and
debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
B. Cleaning Potable Water Piping:

1. Flush and disinfect potable water piping in accordance with Section 15142.
C. Cleaning Chlorine Piping:

1. Clean chlorine piping by pulling clean cloths saturated with trichloroethylene or
other suitable chlorinated solvent through piping.
a. Do not use hydrocarbons or alcohols which may react with chlorine.
b. Use chlorinated solvents in accordance with manufacturer's safety
recommendations to avoid serious physiological effects.
2. Disassemble and clean valves and equipment that have oil residues before
installation.
3. Dry piping immediately before effecting final connections for service. Keep
piping kept sealed to prevent moisture from entering chlorine piping. Drying
procedure shall be as follows:
a. Pass steam through piping from the high end until piping is thoroughly
heated. While steaming, allow condensate and foreign matter to drain out.
b. Stop steaming and drain pockets and low points.
c. While piping is hot, blow dry air through piping until piping is dry. Use dry
air with a dew point of minus 40 degrees F or below.
d. Continue blowing dry air through piping until exhausted air has a dew point
of minus 30 degrees F or below.
e. Allow several hours for drying piping.
D. Cleaning Air Piping:
2018 15052-7 150407

1. Perform special cleaning of filtered air piping from the intake clean air plenums
to the discharge points and high pressure air piping. Protect surfaces from
contamination.
2. Special cleaning shall include wire brushing, power tool cleaning, wiping down
with lint-free cloths, brooming, and vacuuming to remove rust, scale, weld
spatter, dust, dirt, oil, and other matter deleterious to operation of the air
system.
a. Do not sandblast installed piping.
3. To the greatest extent possible, clean piping immediately prior to final closure
of piping systems.
a. Enter piping, clean and wipe down surfaces, and vacuum out residue.
b. Clean surfaces not accessible to this cleaning operation after installation
within 6 hours preceding installation.
4. Subsequent to cleaning, protect surfaces from contamination by dust, dirt,
construction debris, and moisture, including atmospheric moisture.
a. Whether or not pipe upstream has been cleaned, temporarily seal
openings in partially completed work except when installation is actively in
progress.
b. When installation is actively in progress, seal openings at the end of each
day's construction or when construction is temporarily stopped.
5. Suspend cleaning and seal openings when inclement weather, including dust
storms, is imminent.
6. Use clean, dry air for testing the piping and other elements of the system.
7. Prior to introduction of air to the system, blow piping clean. Blow with maximum
discharge rate possible for minimum 4 hours, using new blowers or
compressors and filters.
8. Clean surfaces which become contaminated prior to acceptance.
3.06 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Abbreviations:
1. The following abbreviations used in the column of test method refer to the
respective methods specified in Section 15956.
AM Air method
GR Gravity method
HH High head method
LH Low head method
SC Special case
2. Abbreviations to designate piping include the following:
CI Cast iron
Cl Class, followed by the designation
DIP Ductile iron piping
Ga Gauge, preceded by the designation
GE Grooved end joint
NPS Nominal pipe size, followed by the number in inches pounds per
square inch Pounds per square inch, gauge
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
2018 15052-8 150407

Sch. Schedule, followed by the designation
SS Stainless steel
VCP Vitrified clay piping
(The PIPING SCHEDULE follows in the next pages.)
2018 15052-9 150407

Piping Schedule
F:\PROJ\2015\150407\2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT\SPECIFICATIONS\SEPT2018\DIV15\15052A.DOC
2018
Pipe Thickness
Code Size (inches) Spec Or
Service Exposure Min Max Material Section Class Joints/Findings Pressure Method Lining Coating Remark
PW Potable Water & Plant Water
Buried 1/2 To 2 PVC, ASTM D 1785 15265 Sch 80 Solvent welded 105 PSIG High Head None No Coating
4 To 12 PVC, AWWA C 900, 15265 Class 150 Push on 105 PSIG High Head None No Coating
flanged
Exposed 1/2 To 2 1/2 Steel, galvanized, ASTM 15252A Sch 40 Screwed 105 PSIG High Head None No coating
A 53, Grade B
D Drain
Buried
4 To 12 PVC, AWWA C900, 15265 Class 150 Push-on 105 Feet High Head None No Coating Use only
Push-on where
indicated
Buried under 2 To 18 Ductile iron, AWWA C 15251 Class 51 Mechanical-joint 22.5 Feet Low Head Asphalt Concrete Use at
15052-1
Structure 151, Mech Jt Base encasement oxidation ditch

& chlorine
contact basin
INF Influent
Buried 36 To 48 PVC, ASTM-26 15265 SDR-26 Bell & Spigot 45 PSIG Low Head None No coating Use Upstream
of headworks
SI Screened Influent
Buried 3 To 18 Ductile iron, AWWA C 15251 Class 51 Mechanical-joint 105 PSIG High Head Asphalt Polyethylene
151, Mech Jt (restrained) Base encasement
(2 layers) per
Sect. 15251
Exposed 3 To 18 Ductile iron, AWWA C 15251 Class 53 Grooved-End 105 PSIG High Head Asphalt Epoxy
151, Grooved-End base polyurethane
per Div. 9
150407
SECTION 15116
PLUG VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Lubricated, non-lubricated, and multi-port plug valves.
2. Section 11381 - Digester Accessories.
3. Section 15110 - Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NON-LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

1. DeZurik, "PEC".
2. Clow Valve
B. Design:
1. Type: Non-lubricated eccentric type.
2. Plug Face: Resilient material which operates satisfactorily at a temperature of
180 degrees Fahrenheit continuous and 215 degrees Fahrenheit intermittent,
except for valves in compressed air or digester gas service.
a. Valves in Compressed Air Service: Resilient material suitable for
continuous duty at 250 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Valves in Digester Gas Service: Resilient material suitable for petroleum
or digester gas at continuous duty at 180 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Compression Washer: Provide flat compression washer made of Teflon, or of
a material having equal physical characteristics on valve stem between plug
and bonnet.
4. Stem Seals: Provide stem seals serviceable without unbolting the valve bonnet
assembly.
5. Clearly mark valves to indicate their open and closed positions.
6. Provide valves with ends as required by piping details indicated on the
Drawings.
C. Materials:
1. Body and Plug: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast-iron with plug face of neoprene or
Buna N material suitable for the intended service as specified under paragraph
"Design" above.
2018 15116-1 150407

2. Body Seats in Valves 3 Inch Size and Larger: Provide with overlay of not less
than 90 percent nickel and minimum thickness of 1/8 inch on surfaces
contacting the plug face.
3. Stem Bearing and Bottom Bearing: Stainless steel Type 316.
4. Internal Parts, Except the Body and Plug: Type 316 stainless steel, Monel, or
nickel.
5. Exposed Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: Zinc plated. Exception: exposed nuts,
bolts, and washers for buried service: stainless steel.
2.02 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

1. Nordstrom.
2. Walworth.
B. Type: Semi-steel tapered plug valves.
C. Design:
1. Plug removable through top of valve.
2. Combined lubricant screw and grease gun fitting, of the type where the
pressure of the grease can be used to raise the plug slightly off its seat.
D. Where indicated on the Drawings or specified, provide plug valves with high head
extension and floor stand with indicator. Provide worm gear-operated valves with
worm shaft extension and floor stand, and with indicator supplied by manufacturer of
plug valve.
1. Equip floor stands serving plug valves with individual operating wrenches.
2.03 MULTI-PORT PLUG VALVES FOR SLUDGE SERVICE

1. DeZurik, Figure 202, for 3-way valve, and Figure 204 for 4-way valve.
2. Keystone, equivalent product.
B. Design: Non-lubricated tapered plug type including plugs faced with neoprene, body
of cast-iron, and stainless steel bearings in the upper and lower journal areas.
C. Furnish valves with single, double, or transfer style plug as indicated on the
Drawings or as required.
2.04 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Furnish valves with an operating wrench or worm gear operator.

1. Equip valves 4 inch nominal size and smaller with a lever operator.
2. Equip valves 6 inch nominal size and larger with a worm gear operator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves so that in the closed position the pressure in the pipeline applies a
seating head on the valves.
B. Install valve so that valve stem is in horizontal position.
2018 15116-2 150407

C. Lubrication: Lubricate plug valves and fill extended lubricant pipes with lubricant
suitable for service intended.
END OF SECTION
2018 15116-3 150407

SECTION 15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Piping specialties including:

1. Flexible rubber connections.
2. Expansion joints.
3. Pipe saddles.
4. Pressure gauges.
1. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers

(ANSI/ASME).
B. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association

(ANSI/AWWA):
1. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - Ductile-iron Compact Fittings.
2. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-iron and Gray-
iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
3. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-iron and Gray-iron Fittings.
4. ANSI/AWWA C213 - Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel
Water Pipelines.
5. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1. ASTM A148 - Specification for steel castings, high- Strength, for Structural
Purposes.
2. ASTM A536 - Specification For Ductile Iron Castings.
D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
A. Expansion Joints and Vibration Control Joints:

1. Protect joint bellows and sliding surfaces against damage during packing,
shipping and installation, and also during pressure test.
2. Lock expansion joints against movement until pressure tests are completed.
3. Replace damaged expansion joints with new and undamaged expansion joints.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish 4 complete spare sets of gaskets for each size and type of
ball joint.
2018 15120-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLEXIBLE RUBBER CONNECTIONS

1. Mercer Rubber Company, Type 150 Vibraflex.
2. Red Valve Company, Inc., Part Number P-5.
B. Provide flexible rubber connections with 3/8 inch thick neoprene rubber tube with full
faced flanged ends suitable to withstand a pressure of 150 pounds per square inch
gauge.
C. Provide complete flexible rubber connections, including galvanized retaining rings

and control rods.
2.02 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion Joints for General Service:

1. Expansion Joints: Flexible bellows type with equalizing rings, except as
otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Expansion Joints: One of the following or equal:
1) Flexonics Inc., Controlled Flexing Expansion Joint.
2) Flex-Weld Inc., Keflex, Series 308.
b. Pipe Alignment Guides: One of the following or equal:
1) Flexonics Inc.
2) Flex-Weld, Inc.
c. Intermediate Supports: Provide with protective saddles. One of the
following or equal:
1) Unistrut Corporation, Roller-type.
2) Bergen-Paterson Pipesupport Corp.
3. Design:
a. Expansion Joint Rating: 150 pounds per square inch gauge, at
b. Bellows: Laminated stainless steel, equipped with a self-draining liner
guide.
c. Axial Travel of Expansion Joints: Not less than 1.50 inches.
d. Ends: 150 pound ANSI flanges, or plain suitable for welding connections,
as required for piping in which installed.
2.03 VIBRATION CONTROL JOINTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Braided Bronze Flexible Vibration Joints 2 Inches and less in Size: One of the
following or equal:
a. Flexonics, Inc., Type Vibra Sorber.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc, Keflex, Type KFCB.
2. Flexible Vibration Joints Larger than 2 Inches: One of the following or equal:
a. Flexonics, Inc., Type TCS.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Series 151-TR-1215.
3. Corrugated Stainless Steel with Stainless Steel Braid Flexible Vibration Joints:
One of the following or equal:
a. Flexonics, Inc., Type FCS.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Type USFNSS-31.
2018 15120-2 150407

B. Design:
1. Flexible Vibration Joints 2 Inches and Smaller: Braided bronze, suitable for
pressures of not less than 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
2. Flexible Vibration Joints Larger than 2 Inches: Flexible bellows type, suitable
for pressures of not less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, at
70 degrees Fahrenheit, except as follows:
a. Provide vibration joints in piping subject to test pressures higher than
150 pounds per square inch gauge, suitable for such higher pressures.
b. Bellows: Stainless steel, equipped with a stainless steel liner.
c. Ends: ANSI Class 150 flanges.
3. Vibration Joints in High Pressure Air Piping and in Digester Gas Piping:
Corrugated Type 316 stainless steel with stainless steel braid, suitable for
pressures of not less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
a. Ends: ANSI Class 150 flanges.
C. Protection: Protect vibration absorbers against end loading and torsional stresses by
anchoring attached piping.
2.04 PIPE SADDLES

1. BTR Inc./Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 317.
2. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 202S.
B. Materials:
1. Pipe Saddles: Ductile iron.
2. Straps, Bolts, and Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel with Teflon coating on nuts.
3. Gaskets: Refer to Section 15052..
2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Design:
1. Provide dual-range, liquid filled gauges with ranges indicated in the Pressure
Gauge Schedule.
2. Size: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified:
a. For 1 Inch Pipe and Larger: 4-1/2 inch diameter.
b. For Smaller than 1 Inch Pipe: 2-1/2 inch diameter.
3. Provide gauges with Type 304 stainless steel, wetted parts phenolic cases with
threaded ring, except for panel mounting, in which case provide gauge with
front flanged aluminum case with threaded ring. Apply black epoxy coating to
cases.
4. Provide case fitted with a rupture disc which shall relieve out the back of the
case.
5. Window: Shatterproof glass or high temperature acrylic.
6. Provide gauges with Type 316 stainless steel socket and bellows or bourdon
tube, depending on pressure range.
a. Where the maximum pressure is less than or equal to 15 pounds per
square inch the gauge shall use bellows as the measuring element.
b. Where the maximum pressure is greater than 15 pounds per square inch,
the measuring element shall be a bourdon tube.
7. Socket Tips:
a. Socket Tips for Bellows and Bourdon Tube: Type 316 Stainless steel.
b. Size: 1/2 inch for 4-1/2 inch diameter gauges, 1/4 inch for 2-1/2 inch
diameter gauges.
2018 15120-3 150407

8. Mount gauges on diaphragm seals where indicated on the Drawings.
a. Provide diaphragm seals with Type 316 stainless steel top housing,
bottom housing, and bolt assemblies.
1) Bottom housing shall be fitted with a 1/4 inch flushing connection.
2) This flushing connection shall be fitted with a Type 316 stainless steel
close nipple and a brass shutoff cock.
3) Diaphragm Seal: Removable.
a) For pressure less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch,
provide viton diaphragm seal.
b) For pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch, provide
Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm seal.
b. Fit diaphragm seal gauge assembly with a snubber.
1) Snubber shall have porous metal disc sized to dampen pressure
fluctuations in the filled system.
2) Snubber: Stainless steel.
3) Snubber filter disc shall be sized to prevent the gauge from pulsating.
c. Provide diaphragm seal gauge assemblies filled with silicon.
9. Pressure gauges, except gauges with diaphragm seals, shall have pulsation
dampeners installed between the gauge and the shut-off valve.
a. Pulsation Dampeners: Stainless steel.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Pressure Gauges: One of the following or equal:
a. U.S. Gauge Division of Ametek, Inc., Solfrunt Gauges, Figure
Number 1931T.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc., Ashcroft Figure Number 1379.
2. Diaphragm Seal: One of the following or equal:
a. For pressure less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch:
1) Ashcroft, Type 301.
2) Mansfield and Green, Type LG.
b. For pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch:
1) Ashcroft, Type 101.
2) Mansfield and Green, Type RG.
3. Snubber: One of the following or equal:
a. Ashcroft.
b. Chemiquip.
4. Pulsation Dampeners: One of the following or equal:
a. Dresser Industries, Inc., Ashcroft Figure Number 1106S.
b. Operation and Maintenance Specialties, Charlotte, N.C., Ray Pressure
Snubbers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Expansion and Vibration Control Joints:

1. Prevent equipment vibration transmitted through piping system, and prevent
damaging stresses due to normal expansion and contraction with temperature
changes in piping and connected equipment.
a. Where anticipated expansion is greater than can be absorbed by the
normal piping configuration, install loops, bends, and expansion joints as
indicated on the Drawings, to absorb excess expansion.
2018 15120-4 150407

2. Install expansion joints so as to allow 2-1/4 inch expansion per 100 linear feet
of piping.
3. Where possible, install expansion joints adjacent to an anchor, and provide
one concentric guide on piping within 12 pipe diameters, but not more than
5 feet, from the end of the joint opposite the anchor.
a. Locate a similar guide approximately 30 diameters but not more than
10 feet from the first.
4. For expansion joints not installed adjacent to an anchor provide 2 concentric
guides similarly located at each end of the joint.
5. Provide control rods and additional guides where indicated on the Drawings,
but at no greater intervals than recommended by the joint manufacturer in
published instructions.
6. Space intermediate supports a minimum of 10 feet, and tack weld the
protective saddles to the pipe.
B. Vibration Control Joints:

1. For piping running to or from mechanical equipment, provide flexible vibration
joint at equipment connection.
C. Pipe Saddles:
1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
D. Tapping Sleeves:
1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
E. Pressure Gauges:
1. Install pressure and compound gauges as indicated on the Drawings, in the
Pressure Gauge Schedule, and as specified.
2. Install gauges as specified, and as recommended by the manufacturer in
F. Thermometers:
1. Drill and tap piping for the thermometers as generally indicated on the
Drawings. Select final position in the field with the objective of achieving best
readability.
G. Spray Nozzles:
1. Install spray nozzles so that elevation of the nozzles is 18 inches above the
water surface.
2018 15120-5 150407

A. Testing: Field test gauges with a calibrated test gauge, in the presence of
ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
2018 15120-6 150407

SECTION 15121
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Flexible couplings, flanged coupling adapters.
1.02 REFERENCES

(ANSI/ASME).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded, and Seamless.
2. A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
3. A512 - Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing.
4. A536 - Ductile Iron Castings.
C. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

1. C213 - Fusion - Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings detailing dimensions and materials.
B. Piping Layout Drawings: Coordinate preparation of required piping layout drawings

such that coupling center sleeve sizes are clearly identified on drawings.
C. Manufacturer's published installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE COUPLINGS IN DUCTILE IRON PIPING
A. Flexible Couplings:
a. Dresser Industries, Style 153.
b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 501.
c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 441.
d. Victaulic
2. Materials:
a. Center Sleeve: Ductile iron, ASTM A536.
b. Follower Flanges: Ductile iron, ASTM A536.
c. Bolts and Hex Nuts:
2018 15121-1 150407

1) Above ground: High strength, low alloy steel.
2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Coating and Lining: Provide product with shop-applied primer which is
compatible with finish coating to be applied in the field.
4. Center Sleeve Dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance
with following table:
Nominal Pipe Size, Inches Buried Condition Aboveground Condition

3 inch and smaller manufacturer’s standard manufacturer’s standard
4 inch to 8 inch, inclusive 7" 5"
Greater than 16" use steel flexible coupling per use steel flexible coupling per
Paragraph 2.02 Paragraph 2.02
B. Flanged Coupling Adapters, 12 inch size and smaller:

a. Dresser Industries, Style 127.
b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FCA501.
2. Materials:
a. Flanged Body: Ductile iron, ASTM A126 or ASTM A536.
b. Follower Ring: Ductile iron, ASTM A536.
1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel.
2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts.
3. Flange Design: In accordance with AWWA Class D with ANSI 150 pound
drilling.
C. Flanged Coupling Adapters, greater than 12 inch size:

a. Dresser Industries, Style 128-W.
b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FC400.
2. Materials:
a. Flange and Flanged Body: Steel, ASTM A53 or ASTM A512.
b. Follower Ring: Rolled steel.
drilling.
D. Bolted, Split-Sleeve Couplings:

1. Split-sleeve type pipe coupling with double arch cross section. Coupling shall
be designed to close around the pipe ends, confining the gaskets beneath the
arches of the sleeve. A water-tight, axial seal is created by tightening the bolts
to pull the coupling against the outside wall of the pipe.
2. Coatings: Couplings shall be epoxy-coated on the inner diameter and outer
diameter prior to delivery. Buried couplings shall receive additional protection
2018 15121-2 150407

against corrosion that matches the pipe as specified in Section 09960.
3. Couplings. Wall thickness that is adequate for the test pressure as specified in
the Piping Schedule in Section 15052.
a. Provide split-sleeve type coupling in a shouldered, “expansion x
expansion” configuration where indicated on the Drawings.
4. Gaskets: The sealing members are comprised of 2 “O” ring gaskets. Internal
pressure shall not be required to affect the seal. For water service, the gasket
supplied shall be Isoprene or Buna-N in accordance with ASTM D 2000 for
design pressure within temperature range of minus 20 to 180 degrees
Fahrenheit. Elastomers shall have properties in accordance with ASTM D
2000.
a. “Expansion x Expansion” Configuration:
1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, E x E, Type 2 Coupling.
6. Materials:
a. Couplings: Steel in accordance with ASTM A 36.
b. Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 563.
7. Pipe Preparation: Pipe ends shall be smooth for expansion or contraction
requirements.
2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS IN STEEL PIPING
A. Flexible Couplings:
a. Dresser Industries, Inc. Style 38.
b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 411.
c. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 511 or Style 400.
2. Materials:
a. Center Sleeve and Follower Flanges: Ductile iron or steel.
b. Bolts and Hex Nuts:
3. Coating and Lining:
a. Buried Installations and Underwater:
1) When ductile iron coupling components are provided, provide product
with shop-applied primer which is compatible with finish coating to be
applied in the field.
2) When steel coupling components are provided, line and coat sleeve
and flanges with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA
C213. Epoxy coating shall be a minimum 0.012 inches thickness.
b. Aboveground Installations: Provide product with shop-applied primer
which is compatible with finish coating to be applied in the field.
4. Center Sleeve Dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance
with following table:
5.
Nominal Pipe Size, Inches Buried Condition Aboveground Condition

2-1/2 inch and smaller manufacturer’s standard manufacturer’s standard
Greater than 14" 10" 7"
B. Flanged Coupling Adapters:
2018 15121-3 150407

a. Dresser Industries, Style 128-W.
b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FCA501 (10 inch and smaller) or Style
FC400 (12 inch and larger).
2. Materials:
a. Flange and Flanged Body: Steel, ASTM A53 or ASTM A512.
b. Follower Ring: Rolled steel.
drilling.
2.03 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dresser Industries, Style 38.
2.04 TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. Application: Use transition couplings with function and design similar to flexible
couplings and flanged coupling adapters for connecting piping having different
outside diameters.
B. Install transition coupling products specifically designed and manufactured for that
application.
2.05 GASKETS FOR FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS AND FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS
A. Provide gasket materials for process piping applications as follows:

1. Low Pressure and High Pressure Air, Steam, Hot Water: EPDM.
2. All Other Process Piping Applications: Neoprene rubber or Buna-N or EPDM.
2.06 EXTERIOR COATINGS - UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERSED APPLICATIONS

1. Tapecoat Company, Inc., T.C. Mastic.
2. Kop-Coat Company, Inc., Bitumastic Number 50.
3. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. In underground and underwater installations, coat the coupling exterior after

installation with a protective coating.Install pipe couplings with gap between pipe
ends in accordance with the following table. Install flexible coupling with pipe gap
located in middle of center sleeve. Install flanged coupling adapter with end of plain
end pipe in middle of flanged coupling body. Maximum gap tolerance shall be plus
or minus 1/8-inch.
2018 15121-4 150407

Center Ring Length Gap Dimension and Tolerance
4 inch through 6 inch 3/8-inch plus or minus 1/8-inch
7 inch 5/8-inch plus or minus 1/8-inch
10 inch and greater 7/8-inch plus or minus 1/4-inch.
B. Provide joint harnesses for flexible couplings unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings with a written note.
1. Design joint harnesses on steel and stainless steel piping for the test
pressures specified with the Piping Schedule in Section 15052.
C. Bolted, split-sleeve coupling shall only be used where shown on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
2018 15121-5 150407

SECTION 15251
DUCTILE IRON PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Ductile iron piping, joints, fittings, gaskets, and pipe lining and
coating.
1. Section 02318 - Trenching.
2. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings
1.02 REFERENCES

(ANSI/ASME):
1. B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

1. A 47 - Specifications for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
2. A 183 - Specifications for Carbon Steel Tank Bolts and Nuts.
3. A 283 - Specifications for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates.
4. A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings.
5. A 674 - Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or
Other Liquids.
6. D 792 - Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement.
7. D 1248 - Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion
Materials.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C 104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.
2. C 105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
3. C 110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inches Through 48 Inches, for
Water and Other Liquids.
4. C 111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
5. C 115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded
Flanges.
6. C 150 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
7. C 151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids.
8. C 153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 Inches Through 24 Inches, and 54
Inches Through 64 Inches, for Water Service.
9. C 600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
10. C 606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
2018 15251-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div15\15251_Ductile Iron Pipe.doc
1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves,
fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, connections to structures and
thrust restraint system layouts.
2. Thrust Restraint Systems: Layouts and supporting calculations for restrained
joint thrust restraint systems.
B. Pipe Design Calculations: Calculations for required wall thickness in accordance

with AWWA C 150.
C. Product Data: Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets,

couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, pipe linings, and coatings.
D. Test Reports:
1. Manufacturer's test reports for polyethylene lining certifying successful
performance of the wet sponge spark tests.
2. Manufacturer’s test results for glass lined pipe certifying compliance with
specified material requirements for glass lining.
E. Certificates: Submit certified documentation of holiday detection testing results with

all glass lined pipe shipments. This documentation shall identify each piece by mark
designation and show the actual test results during the final inspection by the
manufacturer prior to shipment. Acceptance criteria shall be as specified under Field
Quality Control.
A. Block piping material for shipment, prevent damage to castings and linings.
B. Carefully handle piping material during loading, unloading, and installation. Do not
drop piping material from cars or trucks. Lower piping material by mechanical
means. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade.
C. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of
original lining in accordance with AWWA C 104. When lining cannot be repaired or
repairs are defective, replace defective piping with undamaged piping.
D. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long term exposure to sunlight.
E. Store fittings and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold
rainwater, dirt, and debris.
A. Qualifications of Lining Manufacturers: For piping specified to receive glass lining or

polyethylene lining use only a manufacturer having a minimum of 5 years experience
supplying this type of product to the wastewater and water treatment industry.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Install work of this Section in accordance with local, state,
and federal regulations.
1.06 THRUST RESTRAINT SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Assume responsibility for the restrained joint thrust restraint system design.
2018 15251-2 150407

B. Determine the length of pipe that must be restrained on each side of the focus of a
thrust load in accordance with the procedures and criteria established by the Ductile
Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA) and the following additional criteria:
1. Design Pressure: Test pressure or 100 pounds per square inch, whichever is
greater.
2. Laying Condition: Type 3 as defined by AWWA C150.
3. Soil Type: CL as defined by DIPRA.
4. Unit Friction Resistance: Based upon polyethylene encasement of pipe.
5. Safety Factor: 1.5 (for thrust restraint calculations only).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ductile Iron Piping:

1. Type, Typical: AWWA C 150 and AWWA C 151 with minimum pressure class
wall thickness of Class 51, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Type with Screw-on Flanges or grooved joints: AWWA C 115 with minimum
special thickness Class 53 wall thickness.
3. Laying Condition: Type 3 as defined by AWWA C 150.
B. Joints:
1. Flanged Joints:
a. Flanges, Screw-on: Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and
other characteristics in accordance with ANSI B 16.1. In addition, comply
with the following requirements:
1) Ductile iron.
2) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe.
3) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and
flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
b. Bolt Holes on Flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe.
c. Cap Screw or Stud Bolt Holes: Tapped.
d. Bolts and Nuts: As specified in ANSI/ASME B 16.1 except when
connecting flanges underground, in concrete pipe valve boxes, or
underwater, use Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Cut and finish bolts
to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond nut when joints are assembled.
e. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052.
2. Mechanical Joints: In accordance with AWWA C 111/ANSI A 21.11.
3. Restrained Mechanical Joints:
a. Design: Integral retainer weldment type or lugged type joint with Type 304
stainless steel rods and nuts.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe Company, Lock Mechanical Joint.
2) American Cast Iron Pipe Company, MJ Coupled Joint.
4. Push-on Rubber Gasket Joints: AWWA C 111/ANSI A 21.11.
5. Restrained Push-on Joints:
1) United States Pipe and Foundry Company, TR Flex.
2) Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe Company, Perma Lock.
3) American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Flex Ring or Lok-Ring.
b. Design: Suitable for the following working pressures:
1) For 4 Through 24 inch Pipe: 350 pounds per square inch gauge.
2018 15251-3 150407

2) For 30 Through 54 inch Pipe: 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
6. Grooved Joints: AWWA C 606, as complemented and modified below, radius-
cut type, with following components:
a. Couplings: Rigid type, cast from ductile iron in accordance with
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron in accordance with
ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.
b. Bolts and nuts in accordance with ASTM A 183, Grade 2.
c. Gaskets: Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to
provide for an improved seal with the internal piping pressure; material for
following services:
1) For Liquid Service: Halogenated butyl.
2) For Air Service: Fluoroelastomer.
3) For Hot Water Service: EPDM
d. Fittings: AWWA C 606, rigid radius-cut groove.
1) Center-to-center Dimensions: AWWA C 110/ANSI A 21.10.
2) Wall Thickness and Other Characteristics: AWWA C 153.
e. Flanged Unit Connections: Flanged to grooved joint adapters or a long
enough spool with 1 end flanged and the other grooved to prevent
interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings: Ductile iron conforming with AWWA C 110/ANSI A 21.10 or

AWWA C 153/ANSI A 21.53.
B. Joint Type: Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 15052.
C. Plain end-to-flanged joint connectors using set screws are not acceptable.
2.03 PIPE LININGS AND COATINGS
A. Asphaltic Base Coating: Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of
pipes which will not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA
C151/ANSI A21.51.
B. Cement-mortar Lining: AWWA C 104/ANSI A 21.4, apply on clean bare metal

surfaces; extended to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs.
C. Polyethylene Lining:
a. U. S. Pipe, polylined.
b. American Ductile Iron Pipe, polybond.
2. Material: ASTM D 1248, blend of high-density and low-density polyethylene
powders; compounded with an inert filler and carbon black; minimum 30 mils
thick; resistant to ultraviolet light.
3. Application:
a. Remove minimum 75 percent of high temperature oxide film.
b. Sandblast fittings to commercial grade.
c. Uniformly preheat pipe and fittings to a temperature adequate to provide a
uniform fusing of the polyethylene powders and proper bonding to pipe
and fittings.
4. Coverage:
a. Push-on Joints: Extend lining from spigot end to edge of gasket sealing
area.
b. Mechanical Joints: Extend lining from spigot end to edge of gauging ring.
2018 15251-4 150407
5. Source Quality Control: Test pipe and fitting lining with a 400 volt wet sponge
spark tester. Discard piping or reline piping when pinholes or discontinuities
are found.
D. Glass Lining:
a. Water Works Manufacturing, Ferrock MEH-32 Lining.
b. Vitco Corporation, SG-14 Lining.
2. Material: Special glasses and inorganic materials suited for lining of sewage,
sludge, and scum piping with the following characteristics:
a. Thickness: 0.008 to 0.012 inch.
b. Hardness: 5 to 6 on the Mohs Scale.
c. Density: 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter, measured in accordance
with ASTM D 792.
d. Thermal Shock Resistance: Capable of withstanding
350 degrees Fahrenheit change from 430 degrees Fahrenheit to
80 degrees Fahrenheit without crazing, blistering, or spalling.
e. Gloss Retention: Capable of retaining gloss after immersion of an
8 percent sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes.
f. Weight Loss: Maximum 3 milligrams per square inch when tested in
3. Fabrication:
a. Use piping that is suitable for glass lining with minimum Class 53 wall
thickness after application of glass lining.
b. Machine interior of pipe (bore or grit blast to near white metal) prior to
application of glass lining.
c. Screw factory assembled flanges on pipe and align bolt holes and flange
faces, unless otherwise specified.
d. Apply lining to surfaces free of chemicals.
E. Place piping in especially designed furnaces and heat piping until glass melts and
fuses with a integral molecular bond to the base metal.
2.04 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene Encasement Sheets or Tubes:

1. 8 mil thickness low density polyethylene, or
2. 4 mil thickness high density, cross laminated polyethylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C 600, modified as
2. Lay mechanical joint or bell and spigot pipe with 1/8 inch space between the
spigot and shoulder of the pockets.
B. Polyethylene Encasement:
1. Wrap ductile iron pipe to be buried with polyethylene encasement in
accordance with ASTM A 674 and AWWA C 105.
2. Repair tears and make joints with two layers of plastic tape.
2018 15251-5 150407

3.02 JOINTS
A. Install types of joints as specified in piping schedule in Section 15052.
3.03 GROOVED JOINTS
A. Install piping with grooved joints where specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Assemble grooved joints in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Support grooved-end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

Install at least 1 support between consecutive couplings.
D. Grooved joints may be installed where flanged joints are scheduled, except under
the following conditions:
1. In underground and underwater installations.
2. In piping subject to test pressure of 150 pounds per square inch gauge or
more.
3. In steam and in combustible gas piping systems.
4. In sludge and scum piping designed to be steam cleaned as indicated on the
Drawings.
5. When wall thickness of pipe is less than the minimum recommended in
published instructions by the manufacturer of the grooved end coupling.
E. Make connections to flanged valves, pumps and piping appurtenances by either:

1. Flanged-to-grooved joint adapters.
2. Flanged-by-grooved end pipe spool of sufficient length to prevent interference
with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps or other items.
3. Integrally cast flanged-by-grooved end pipe fittings.
A. Test ductile iron piping as specified in Section 15052.

1. Do not test sections longer than 1/2 mile in total pipe length.
B. Verify that interior surfaces of glass lined pipe and fittings have continuous
coverage. Verify with low voltage wet sponge holiday detector. Discard glass lined
ductile iron piping and fittings with voids or casting anomalies that represent more
than 0.01 percent of the total glassed surface (no more than 1-2 pinholes per fitting
or an average of 5 or less per 20 feet of pipe). Discard lined piping and fittings found
to have pinholes, crazing, or fishscales which expose the metal substrate.
END OF SECTION
2018 15251-6 150407

2018 15251-7 150407
SECTION 15265
PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings.
2. Section 15251 - Ductile Iron Piping.
3. Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. B 16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Screwed Drainage Fittings.

1. D 648 - Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural
Load.
2. D 1248 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion
Materials.
3. D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
4. D 1785 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
5. D 1869 - Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe.
6. D 2412 - Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of
Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
7. D 2466 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40.
8. D 2467 - Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
9. D 2513 - Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and
Fittings.
10. D 2564 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems.
11. D 2661 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
12. D 2665 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings.
13. D 2680 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping.
14. D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
15. D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-cemented Joints with Poly
(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
16. D 3034 - Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
2018 15265-1 150407

17. D 3212 - Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
18. D 3261 - Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings
for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing.
19. D 3350 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fittings Materials.
20. D 4101 - Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials.
21. F 439 - Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
22. F 441 - Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80.
23. F 477 - Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
24. F 483 - Test Method for Total Immersion Corrosion Test for Aircraft
Maintenance Chemicals.
25. F 493 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
26. F 645 - Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water
Pressure Piping Systems.
27. F 679 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic
Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
28. F 714 - Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on
Outside Diameter.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C 900 - Polyvinyl/Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches,
for Water Distribution.
D. Code of Federal Regulations:

1. Title 49 - Transportation.
E. Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI).
F. United States Department of Transportation:

1. Materials Transportation Bureau.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene.
B. CPVC: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride.
C. DWV: Drain, Waste, and Vent.
D. ID: Inside Diameter of piping or tubing.
E. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.
F. NS: Nominal size of piping or tubing.
G. PE: Polyethylene.
H. PP: Polypropylene.
I. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.
2018 15265-2 150407

J. SDR: Standard Dimension Ratio; the Outside Diameter divided by the pipe wall
thickness.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Describe PVC materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets and solvent cement.
B. Polyethylene Pipe Submittals: Include:

1. Product Data.
2. Installation equipment including details on fusion machine used to join
polyethylene pipe sections.
3. Qualifications of installation crew for use of the fusion machine used for joining
polyethylene pipe.
C. Manufacturer's Published Installation Instructions.
D. Certificates:
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate attesting that plastic pipe, tubing, and fitting
types meet specified requirements.
a. PVC gravity sewer piping: Requirements of ASTM D 3034 or ASTM F 679,
as applicable.
2. Manufacturer's certification of date of manufacture of plastic pipe and tubing for
each lot delivered.
3. Copies of solvent cement manufacturer's report and certification in accordance
with ASTM D 2564 for PVC piping, and ASTM F 493 for CPVC piping.
A. Fusion Machine Technician Qualifications: 1-year experience in the installation of

similar PE piping systems from the same manufacturer.
B. Plastic Pipe in Potable Water Applications: Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF
seal.
C. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule or pressure rating,
manufacturer and all markings required by applicable ASTM and AWWA standards.
A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees
Fahrenheit.
C. Store and handle PE pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Extruding and Molding Material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or

rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
2018 15265-3 150407

B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except
that fittings used in drain, waste and vent piping systems need not be pressure
rated.
C. Unions 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions
3 inches and larger of socket flanges with 1/8 inch full-face soft neoprene gasket.
2.02 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE
A. Materials:
1. PVC Schedule Type Piping: Designation PVC 1120 conforming to
ASTM D 1785 and appendices thereto.
a. Pipe and Fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B material
in accordance with ASTM D 1784.
b. PVC Schedule Type Piping: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.
c. DWV Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2665.
3. Solvent Cement: In accordance with ASTM D 2564.
a. For CPVC or PVC pipe in sodium hypochlorite service provide IPS Corp
Type 724 cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for high
strength hypochlorite service.
2.03 PVC PIPING, CLASS TYPE
A. PVC Pipe, Class Type: AWWA C 900, Pressure Class 150 and DR not more than
18.
1. Fittings: Cast or ductile iron fittings as specified under Section 15251, sized for
the dimensions of the pipe being used.
2. Joint Design: Push-on or mechanical joint type as identified in Piping Schedule.
3. Gaskets: Neoprene meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1869 or
ASTM F 477.
2.04 PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPING
A. Materials:
1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: In accordance with
ASTM D 3034 for piping NPS 15 and smaller diameter, and to ASTM F 679 for
piping NPS 18 and larger diameter.
a. Referenced standards apply as complemented and modified herein.
b. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2. PVC Compounds: Class Number 12454-B, as specified in ASTM D 1784.
a. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and
fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the
compound.
3. Pipe NPS 15 and Smaller Diameter: Wall thickness SDR 26.
a. Joints: Push-on joints in accordance with ASTM D 3212.
4. Pipe NPS 18 and Larger Diameter: Class Number 12454-B as specified in
ASTM D 1784 and a SDR not greater than 35.
a. Joints: Integral bell gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM F 679.
b. Bell: Thickened, integral with the pipe wall, and at least as strong as the
pipe barrel.
2018 15265-4 150407

c. Gasket Ring: Locked into the bell.
d. Spigot End of the Pipe: Marked by the manufacturer to identify the final
in-place position of the spigot in the bell.
5. Fittings, Including Wyes, Tees, Elbow Caps, Plug Adapters, and Manhole
Waterstops: Same wall thickness as the pipe.
a. Fittings: Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe.
6. Gasket: Neoprene or Buna N conforming to ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.
a. Keep rubber gasket in place during pipe joining.
7. Gasket for Connection to Manhole: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar
device to seal the penetration.
2.05 CPVC PIPING
A. Materials:
1. CPVC Pipe: Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, as specified, in accordance with
ASTM F 441 and Appendix, CPVC 4120.
a. Pipe: Extruded from Type IV, Grade 1, Class 23447 material in
accordance with ASTM D 1784.
1) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc.
3) Harvel Plastics, Inc.
2. Fittings: Conform to ASTM F 438 or ASTM F 439 for pressure fittings, as
appropriate to the service and pressure requirement.
a. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
1) Colonial Engineering.
2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc.
3) Chemtrol.
4) Spears Manufacturing Company; or equal.
3. Solvent Cement: In accordance with ASTM F 493.
a. For CPVC pipe in sodium hypochlorite service, utilize IPS Corp Type 724
cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for high strength
hypochlorite service.
2.06 PVC PLASTIC IRRIGATION PIPE
A. Materials
1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) Plastic Irrigation Pipe (PIP) and Fittings: In
accordance with NRCD 430-00 and ASTM D2241 for piping 21 and smaller
diameter.
a. Referenced standards apply as complemented and modified herein.
b. Fittings: Supplied by Spears manufacturer.
2. PVC Compounds: Class Number 12454, as specified in ASTM D 1784.
a. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and
fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the
compound.
3. Pipe NPS 21-inch and smaller diameter: Wall thickness SDR 41.
a. Joints: Push-on joints in accordance with ASTM D3139.
b. Bell: Thickened, integral with pipe wall and at least as strong as the pipe
barrel.
c. Gasket ring: locked into bell (Ring-tite joint).
d. Spigot end of pipe: Marked by manufacturer to identify the final in place
position of the spigot in the bell.
2018 15265-5 150407

4. Fittings, including Wyes, Tees, Elbow Caps, Plug Adapters, and Manhole
Waterstops: Same wall thickness as the pipe.
a. Fittings: Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe.
5. Gasket: Neoprene or Buna N conforming to ASTM D3212 or ASTM F 477.
6. Gasket for Connection to Manhole: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar
device to seal the penetration.
A. PVC Piping, Schedule Type:

1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 1785.
B. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 3034. Also mark the
production control code on pipe and fittings.
C. CPVC Piping:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM F 441.
D. PIP Pipe:
1. Mark pipe and fitting in accordance with ASTM 3034.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F 645,
or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable
to the particular type of piping.
2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or
IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe.
3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required
for adequate access and assembly of the piping system.
4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.
B. Installation of PVC Piping, Schedule Type:

1. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
a. For PVC pipe in sodium hypochlorite service use IPS Corp. Type 724
cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Installation of PVC Gravity Sewer Piping.

1. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, as
modified and complemented herein.
2. Install pipe and fittings not later than 4 months after their manufacture.
3. Provide for contraction and expansion at joints with a gasket ring.
4. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals.
5. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
6. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration
and exfiltration through the penetrations.
a. Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent grouting
around the manhole gasket.
2018 15265-6 150407

b. Grout around the manhole gasket and seal the opening.
D. Installation of CPVC Piping:

1. Clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings.
2. Bevel pipe ends in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with
chamfering tool or file. Remove burrs.
3. Use solvent cement and primer formulated for CPVC.
a. For CPVC pipe in sodium hypochlorite service use IPS Corp. Type 724
cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Use primer on pressure and non-pressure joints.
5. Do not solvent weld joints when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees
Fahrenheit or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless solvent cements specially
formulated for these conditions are utilized.
E. Installation of Plastic Irrigation Pipe

1. Check to see that the gasket is properly seated in the bell groove, and that the
bell and spigot are clean before assembly.
2. Apply the approved lubricant supplied with the pipe to the spigot end of the
pipe, paying particular attention to the bevel. The coating should be equivalent
to a brush coat of enamel paint.
3. Assemble the joint only to and not over the assembly mark provided on the
spigot end.
4. If undue resistance to insertion of the spigot is encountered, or the reference
mark does not reach the flush position, disassemble the joint, check the
position of the rubber gasket, and remove any debris.
5. JM Eagle’s recommendations for 15-inch through 27-inch diameter Irrigation
PIP is that the angular deflection at the joint is a maximum of 1.5 degrees. This
produces an offset in a 20-foot section of approximately 6¼ inches. Joint
deflection is achieved after the joint is assembled in straight alignment and to
the reference mark.
6. Curvature of the pipe shall be accomplished through longitudinal bending of
the pipe barrel in accordance with the following table. Deflection of the joint is
not allowed and may cause leakage. For bending of pipe larger than 12 inches,
please contact JM Eagle.
PIPE SIZE (IN) RADIUS (FT)

6 150
8 200
10 250
12 300
7. Prior to backfilling, check to see that the assembly mark is flush with the end of
the bell.
8. All taps performed on JM Eagle’s pressure products, shall be in accordance
with Uni-Bell Publication UNI-PUB-08-07, “Tapping Guide for PVC Pressure
Pipe.”
A. Leakage Test for PVC Piping, Class Type:

1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) Piping, Class Type: Subject to visible leaks test and to
pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, as specified in Section 15956.
2018 15265-7 150407

2. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance: Perform test after
backfilling.
a. Pressure: 125 pounds per square inch, gauge.
b. Maximum leakage allowance as follows, wherein the value for leakage is
in gallons per 100 joints per hour:
NPS, Inches 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 6 8 10 12
Leakage 0.41 0.52 0.63 0.76 0.98 1.45 1.88 2.35 2.80
B. Mandrel Tests for PVC Gravity Sewer Piping and Plastic Irrigation Piping:
1. Perform Initial Mandrel Test:
a. After cleaning and completion of other tests.
b. After placement and compaction of backfill.
c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing.
d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation.
e. Not later than 60 days after installation.
2. Perform Final Verification Mandrel Test:
a. Not sooner than 30 days before the end of the warranty period.
b. Not later than 10 days before the end of the warranty period.
c. Consider the final verification mandrel test a warranty service, and include
the costs related to final verification mandrel test in the Contract Price.
3. Utilize a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as
follows:
Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Diameter, inches
6 5.50
8 7.37
10 9.21
12 10.96
15 13.56
4. Test Procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by one person, by
hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
5. Failing Test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the
section of piping with the obstruction, and test the piping again, including
visible leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel
tests, and other specified tests.
a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than
removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with
new piping will not be accepted.
END OF SECTION
2018 15265-8 150407

SECTION 15268
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, TUBING, AND HOSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Hose.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating service type, sizes, materials, and
required accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HOSE
A. Hose Material: Neoprene or acceptable oil resistant material suitable for a working
pressure of minimum 150 pounds per square inch, gauge.
B. Size as indicated on the Drawings fit ends with appropriate combination clamped
nipples and threaded ends as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Hose Larger than 1-1/2 Inches in Size: Industrial fire hose. Provide one 50 foot long
hose for each utility station provided.
a. Goodyear Rubber Products Corp.
b. Uniroyal, Inc.
c. Goodall Rubber Company.
D. Hose 1/2 Inch Through 1-1/2 Inch Nominal Diameter: General purpose hose.
Provide one 75 foot long hose for each utility station provided.
a. Goodyear Rubber Products Corp.
b. Uniroyal.
c. Goodall Rubber Company.
E. Equip and fit hose ends with appropriate combination clamped nipples and threaded
ends to make up the assembly indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install hose in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
END OF SECTION
2016 15268-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Version2016\Div15\15268.doc
SECTION 15956
PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Test requirements for piping systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
B. National Fuel Gas Code: ANSI Z 223.1 or NFPA 54.
C. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers

(ANSI/ASME):
1. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
2. B31.1 - Power Piping.
3. B31.3 - Process Piping.
D. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC).
1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in
the Piping Schedule in Section 15052; are specified in the specifications
covering the various types of piping; and are specified herein.
2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of
Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are
more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower
leakage allowances.
3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the Uniform
Plumbing Code, and UL requirements.
4. Test Natural Gas or Digester Gas Piping:
a. For less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge working pressure, test in
accordance with Uniform Mechanical Code or the National Fuel Gas
Code, whichever is more stringent.
b. For 125 pounds per square inch gauge or greater working pressure, test
per ANSI/ASME B31.3 or ANSI/ASME B31.8, whichever is more stringent.
5. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the
pressure at the highest point of the piping section under test. Lower test
pressure as necessary to prevent testing the lowest point above a safe test
pressure.
B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads,

restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and
other means and facilities required to perform tests.
2018 15956-1 150407

C. Water for Testing, Cleaning, and Disinfecting:
1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in
Section 01500.
D. Pipes to be Tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as
part of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to
existing piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to
isolate new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead.
E. Unsuccessful Tests:
1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and
appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the
specified requirements.
2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.
F. Test Completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.
G. Test Water Disposal: Dispose of testing water at headworks in accordance with

requirements of federal, state, county, and city regulations governing disposal of
wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and Notification of Tests:

1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding
the date of the scheduled tests.
2. Notification of Readiness to Test: Immediately before testing, notify
ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping. Have
personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting
notification of readiness.
1.05 SEQUENCE
A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests.
B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before
backfilling and compacting.
C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not
indicated or specified otherwise.
D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement
before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.
E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with
slab, structure, or permanent improvement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
2018 15956-2 150407

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION
A. Alignment and Grade:

1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light, or
laser beam.
2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or
poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no
other defects are observed.
B. Deflection Test:
1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test.
2. Perform the test not sooner than 30 days after installation and not later than
60 days after installation.
3. Use a 9 rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal
diameter of the pipe within one percent plus or minus.
4. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping with
reasonable effort by 1 person, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another
nonflammable or inert gas.
B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the
air test method.
1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus 40
degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air driers as necessary.
C. Test at pressure as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 15052.

1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test. Set at the lesser
of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over
the test pressure.
2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum
allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of
ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME B31.3, ANSI/ASE B31.8, or the pipe
manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure.
3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of
one-half the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge.
4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage.
5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure.
Check for leakage at each step increase until test pressure reached.
6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks
with soap solution.
7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test
pressure for 15 minutes without losses.
3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING
A. Test Gravity Flow Piping Indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as Follows:
1. Unless Specified Otherwise, Subject Gravity Flow Piping to the Following
Tests:
a. Alignment and grade.
b. For plastic piping test for deflection.
2018 15956-3 150407

c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for
storm drains and culverts.
2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling. Provide temporary restraints
when needed to prevent movement of piping. Pressure test piping with
maximum leakage allowance after backfilling.
3. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to
escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at
least 24 hours.
a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no
visible leaks are observed.
b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of
24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance.
c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping
has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for
minimum of four hours while accurately measuring the volume of water
added to maintain the test pressure.
1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the
following maximum leakage allowances:
a) For Concrete Piping with Rubber Gasket Joints: 80 gallons per
day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test.
(1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket
joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage
allowance.
b) For Vitrified Clay and Other Piping: 500 gallons per day per inch
of diameter per mile of piping under test.
3.04 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds
per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated
"HH" in the Piping schedule.
B. General:
1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the
piping.
2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure
exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide
blinds or other means to isolate test sections.
3. Do not include valves, equipment or piping specialties in test sections if test
pressure exceeds the valve, equipment or piping specialty safe test pressure
allowed by the item's manufacturer.
4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus
or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test
pressure.
5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the
same piping material and test pressure.
6. When Test Results Indicate Failure of Selected Sections, Limit Tests to Piping:
a. Between valves.
b. Between a valve and the end of the piping.
c. Less than 500 feet long.
7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for
the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
2018 15956-4 150407

C. Testing Procedures:
1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air. Use potable
water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule
2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for
a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for
leaks. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are
observed.
D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance:

1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe
Thread threaded and welded joints.
2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.
3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged threaded or welded
joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the
pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period.
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is
less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and
appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during
the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage
to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following
formula:
L = S x D x P1/2 x 133,200-1
wherein the terms shall mean:

L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of the test section in feet.
D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches.
P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square
inches, gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected
for elevation of the pressure gauge.
x = The multiplication symbol.
3.05 TESTING LOW-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square
inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping
Schedule.
B. General:
1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 15052.
2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus
or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test
pressure.
3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures,
including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping.
4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for
the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
2018 15956-5 150407

C. Visible Leaks Test:
1. Subject piping under test to the specified pressure measured at the lowest end.
2. Fill piping section under test slowly with potable water while venting air.
3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for
the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for
leaks. Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.
D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance:

1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.
2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in
the piping section under test during the pressure test period.
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is
less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal
diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours and no
damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when
the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no
damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
E. Optional Joint Test:

1. When Joint Testing Is Allowed by Note in the Piping Schedule, the Procedure
Shall Be as Follows:
a. Joint testing will be allowed only for low head pressure piping.
2. Joint testing may be performed with water or air.
3. Joint test piping after completion of backfill and compaction to the top of the
trench.
4. Joint Testing with Water:
a. Measure test pressure at the invert of the pipe. Apply pressure of 4 feet
plus the inside diameter of the pipe in water column within 0.20 feet in
water column.
b. Maintain test pressure for one minute.
c. Base the allowable leakage per joint on 80 gallons per inch nominal
diameter, per mile of piping, per 24 hours equally distributed to the actual
number of joints per mile for the type of piping.
d. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is
less than the allowable leakage.
e. Successful completion of the joint test with water shall have been
achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable
leakage.
5. Joint Testing with Air:
a. Apply test pressure of 3 pounds per square inch gauge with a maximum
variation of plus 0.20 and minus 0.00 pounds per square inch.
b. Maintain test pressure for 2 minutes.
c. Consider the pressure test to be complete when the test pressure does
not drop below 2.7 pounds per square inch for the duration of the test.
END OF SECTION
2018 15956-6 150407

SECTION 16010
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
Materials, installation, testing, start-up and training of the electrical system complete with
Switchboard/MCC, Control Panels, and all equipment specified and shown on the
Contract Drawings.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
1.02 REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall

conform to the latest provisions of the following agencies:
1. National Fire Protection Association Standard 70 - National Electrical

Code.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
3. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
4. Local authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required.
5. California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 3, California

Electrical Code.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Materials, appliances, equipment and

devices shall conform to the applicable UL standards.
C. Standards: Where referenced in these Specifications or on the Drawings, the

publications and standards of the following organizations apply:
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
6. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
2018 16010-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div16\16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL.doc
SECTION 16010
7. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. – Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems
(NETA ATS).
1.03 UTILITY COMPANY COORDINATION
NOT USED
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate submittals with the work so that the project will
not be delayed. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to
properly schedule submittals.
B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal

Procedures.
C. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section

01700.
D. Submit shop drawings for all equipment and materials within 30 days after
contract drawings approved.
E. Submit shop drawings by Specification section, unless listed otherwise. Separate

sub-sections by either tab dividers or separately bound booklets. Each section
submittal shall be complete, with shop drawings provided for all components.
Partial shop drawings for specification sections shall be rejected.
F. Shop drawings returned to the contractor with a "Revise as Noted and Resubmit"
status shall be resubmitted within fifteen (15) days.
G. Submit shop drawings for review at least 20 days before reviewed drawings will
be required for commencing the work.
H. The following submittals should be assembled and delivered in separate binders:
1. Switchboard/MCC circuit breakers

2. Control Panels
3. Conduits, Pull Boxes, Handholes, Cable and Wiring Devices
4. Instruments
I. Each submittal shall be bound in a three ring binder, which is sized such that
when all material is inserted, the binder is not over 3/4 full. Binder construction
shall allow easy removal of any page without complete manual disassembly.
Spiral ring type binders are not acceptable.
2018 16010-2 150407

SECTION 16010
1. Each binder shall be appropriately labeled on the outside spine and front
cover with the project name, contract number, equipment supplier's
name, specification section(s), and major material contained therein.
2. An index shall be provided at the inside of the front cover. This index shall
itemize the contents of each tab and sub tab section. Also list the project
name, contract number and equipments supplier's name, address and
phone number on the index page.
3. Field equipment shop documents, panel equipment shop documents,

drawings, and bill of materials shall be grouped under separate tabs.
Shop documents shall be ordered in the same sequence as their
corresponding Contract specification subsection. Failure to mark
applicable products and to cross out non-applicable products shall cause
rejection of the entire submittal.
4. Data summary sheets shall be provided to sub tab all shop documents for
each individual piece of equipment. Data summary sheets shall be on
blue paper.
The data summary sheets shall have the following information:

1) Product identification; name used herein and on the
Contract Drawings.
2) The manufacturer's model number, part number or other

designation. This shall include the specific numbers of all
options.
3) Tag number per the Drawings.
J. Do not commence any work until the required submittals are approved by
Engineer according to Section SP-3: Submittals.
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The manuals shall describe the
equipment and meet all the requirements in the Special Provisions and include
the following:
1. Operating instructions and start-up procedures including receiving and

installation requirements.
2. Maintenance instructions listing preventive and corrective maintenance

procedures. Corrective maintenance procedures shall identify the most
probable failures and the appropriate repairs. Test measurement levels
shall be referenced to specific test points on the installed equipment.
3. Spare parts data shall be furnished for each item of material and
equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and
supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. A list and itemized
2018 16010-3 150407
SECTION 16010
price breakdown of spare parts recommended for stocking shall be

furnished. The parts selected shall be those, in the manufacturer's
judgment, will be involved in the majority of maintenance difficulties
encountered.
4. A table listing the tag number, manufacturer and manufacturer's model

number shall be provided to summarize the Bill of Material.
5. Control schematics, ladder diagrams and interconnection drawings.
6. Catalog cuts and technical manuals for all components of the system.
7. Originals of all guarantees and warranties issued for the various items of
equipment, showing all dates of expiration.
8. Originals of all factory and field test results.
9. Final as-builts of all shop drawings, incorporating manufacturing and field

changes. All drawings will be by 11x17 inch sheet size and also electronic
format, AutoCAD on CD.
10. For items referenced under AutoCAD Record Drawings included in this
Specification, provide a CD with files as required in "AutoCAD Record
Drawings."
11. All catalog cut information, warranties, testing results and technical
manuals shall be provided on CD in PDF format, in addition to hardcopy.
12. Operation and maintenance manuals to be delivered and approved prior

to final approval and project completion.
1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During progress of job, keep up-to-date one set of electrical drawings stamped
with "As-Built". Dimension from the following readily obtained base lines:
1. Exact location, type and function of concealed control equipment and

devices.
2. Exact elevation and locations and size of underground conduits.
3. Show the dimensions, location and routing of electrical work which will
become concealed.
B. Maintain "As-Built" drawings weekly in conjunction with the actual progress of

installation. Accurate progress drawings shall be available on site for examination
by the Owner's representative.
C. At completion of the project, deliver "As-Built" drawings to the Owner's

representative.
2018 16010-4 150407
SECTION 16010
D. The Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the "As-Built" record drawings,
and the AutoCAD record drawings for a period of one year after the Owner has
accepted the project. During this time, the Contractor shall bear all costs
associated with correcting deficiencies and inaccuracies of these Drawings.
During this time, the Contractor shall also bear all costs necessary to field
investigate any deficiencies, or inaccuracies and field trace wires if required by
Project Engineer.
1.07 AUTOCAD RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide two identical copies of the record drawings CD using AutoCAD drafting
software.
B. These drawings shall include information as described. The drawings shall

reference wire numbers, wire colors, terminal block numbers and also tag names
coded for all cables, conduits, wireways and all components and equipment.
Methodology for assigning tag numbers for components and equipment shall be
based on ANSI Standard 5.1-1984.
C. The Contractor shall resubmit two identical copies of the entire AutoCAD drawing
files for each revision necessitated.
D. Provide AutoCAD record drawings for the following:
1. Electrical Record Drawings, including schematic, and interconnect

drawings with wire labels.
2. Power Distribution including Switchboard/MCC
3. Conduit and Cable Routing Drawings, including labels
4. P & ID Drawings
5. SCADA Panel wiring schematics and panel layout and Bill of Materials
1.08 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS NOTIFICATION
A. Provide written notification to Engineer one week prior to the start of the following
construction events. Acceptable delivery methods for this notification shall
include hand delivery at the weekly construction meeting, or by mail or by fax.
1. Installation of underground work. Obtain Inspector's approval prior to

backfill. The Inspector may direct uncovering of any work not so
approved.
2. Installation of Control Panels.
3. Start of wire pulling.
2018 16010-5 150407

SECTION 16010
4. Connection of motors.
5. Scheduled start date for field test, startup and training.
1.09 ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
A. Provide the electrician supervisor services at the job site for the man-days and
requirements listed below, travel time excluded, at no extra cost to the Owner:
1. Three man-days to assist the Owner's Representative in the start up and

verification of system operation.
2. Additional time as required to attend construction meetings when either:
a. Electrical submittals are being reviewed.
b. Electrical work, testing, or startup is being done.
3. Additional time as required to maintain and update the field copy of the
"As Built" drawings at least on a weekly basis when electrical work is
being done. Each weekly update to the "As-Built" drawings shall be
completed prior to the weekly construction meeting.
PART 2 - PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
PART 3 - Similar materials and equipment shall be the

product of a single manufacturer.
PART 4 - Provide and install equipment and materials shown

on the Drawings and as specified unless noted as "Not in
Contract", "Future" or as "Existing to Remain". Provide only
products which are new, undamaged and in the original
cartons or containers.
PART 5 - Materials and equipment shall be the standard

products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's
current design.
PART 6 - Materials and equipment shall be suitable for

storage, installation and operation in an ambient of 0C to
40C except where more stringent conditions are stated in
individual equipment specifications.
PART 7 - Factory finished electrical equipment, wireways and

panels with manufacturer's standard primer and enamel
2018 16010-6 150407
SECTION 16010
topcoats, unless stated otherwise in the individual equipment

specifications. Provide 1 pint of the equipment
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
PART 8 - Concrete housekeeping pads are required for the

Electric Equipment lineup. Housekeeping pads shall be 3
inches above finished grade, 6 inches longer on sides and 3
inches in front, than the supported equipment, unless
otherwise shown on drawings.
8.01 TESTING LABORATORY APPROVALS
A. Electrical materials and equipment shall be listed, certified or found acceptable

by a recognized testing laboratory. Results of tests and inspections by the testing
laboratory shall be submitted for review and approval to the local authorities
having jurisdiction upon request. In testing the equipment, the following shall be
considered:
1. Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of the
NEC.
2. Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to

enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus
provided.
3. Wire bending and connection space.
4. Electrical insulation.
PART 9 - Heating effects under normal conditions of use and

also under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service.
PART 10 - Arcing effects.
PART 11 - Classification by type, size, voltage, current

capacity and specific use.
PART 12 - Other factors which contribute to the practical

safeguarding of persons using or likely to come in contact
with the equipment.
PART 13 - Recognized testing laboratories are as follows:
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
2. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).
3. Other testing laboratories will be acceptable if approved in writing by the

local authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
2018 16010-7 150407

SECTION 16010
PART 14 - Provide the testing laboratory label on equipment

material and devices.
14.01 WARRANTY
PART 15 - Equipment materials and installation shall be

guaranteed for a period of one year after the date of final
acceptance of the work by the Owner. Repair or remove and
replace any and all work that is found to be defective in
workmanship and/or materials within said one year periods,
without expense whatsoever to the Owner.
15.01 B. Respond to repairs within 48 hours after notice from the Owner.
PART 16 - Warranties, Guarantees, Certificates, etc: Shall

be furnished for all equipment and materials under this
Division, and shall be properly filled out as of date of
acceptance and delivered to the Owner.
PART 17 - The Owner reserves the right to perform

maintenance with their own staff, as necessary to meet
Owner operational requirements, without voiding warranties.
17.01 NAMEPLATES
17.02 Nameplates shall be fabricated from black-letter, white-face laminated plastic phenolic
engraving stock, Formica type ES-1, or equal. Each shall be fastened securely using
fasteners of stainless steel screws, screwed into inserts or tapped holes as required, or
attached by adhesive cement glue. Engraved characters shall be block style with no
characters smaller than 1/8-inch high. All electrical equipment shall have a nameplate
attached. This applies to exterior conduits, pullboxes, splice boxes, manholes, MCCs,
control panels, transformers, switches, etc. Exterior conduits shall have phenolic tags
adhesive epoxied to the interior of manholes. Interior conduits shall have stainless steel
stamped tags with stainless steel tie wire. Every conduit shall be labeled, both ends.
PART 18 - PART 3 EXECUTION
PART 19 - 3.1 INSTALLATION
PART 20 - Terminate wires and cables at the proper

termination point per the manufacturer's recommendations.
The Drawings indicate connections for typical equipment
only. If the equipment or connections are different from what
is shown, provide the modifications necessary for a safe and
properly operating installation in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
2018 16010-8 150407

SECTION 16010
PART 21 - The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the

desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs,
equipment and other items. Verify field conditions to
determine exact location based on physical size and
arrangement of equipment, finished elevations and
obstructions.
PART 22 - Work or equipment not indicated or specified

which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of
the Electrical systems shall be accomplished without
additional cost or delays to the Owner.
PART 23 - 3.2
DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 24 - Demonstration of the functionality of the systems

shall not be construed as acceptability of the complete
system. Acceptance will only be made on satisfactory
demonstration of the functionality of the system as a whole.
PART 25 - If, in the opinion of the Engineer, test results show

improper adjustment, operation, or performance of any
equipment, the Contractor shall remedy the situation at no
additional cost.
25.01 END OF SECTION
2018 16010-9 150407

SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic electrical materials and methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. A 525 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized), by Hot-Dip Process.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
1. Connections of electrical equipment to supports shall be designed to resist the
operating forces plus seismic forces.
2. Seismic design shall conform to the requirements of Section 01612.
Calculations shall be by a registered civil or structural engineer in the state
where the Project is located.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Structural calculations for electrical equipment anchorage.
B. Shop drawings and product data.
1.05 WARRANTY
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install a minimum of 25 percent spare terminal blocks in each

terminal/junction box.
2018 16050-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unless specified otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the fabricator of major

electrical equipment, such as lighting and distribution panelboards, switchgear,
variable frequency drives, and motor control centers, shall also be the manufacturer
of the major devices herein.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising any unit or part thereof specified or
indicated on the Drawings shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of
highest grade consistent with the industry standards. Damaged materials,
equipment, and parts are not considered to be new and unused and will not be
accepted.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Support Channels: Steel, hot-dip galvanized with G90 coating in accordance with
ASTM A 525, or stainless steel.
a. Unistrut.
b. Superstrut.
c. Globe Strut.
B. Support Channel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.
C. Non-Fused Terminal Blocks: Sized as required for conductors.

a. Square D Company.
b. Buchanan.
D. Fused Terminal Blocks: Circuit isolation, fused switch type, sized as required for
conductors. Fuse size shall be based upon actual load and conductors to be
protected.
b. Buchanan.
E. Control Relays:
1. Industrial 600-volt, 10 ampere type with contact arrangement and operating
coils of proper voltage as required by control circuit sequence; with minimum
of four reversible-pole contacts; coils sealed by pressure molding.
2. Non-industrial or plug-in type control relays shall be prohibited unless
accepted in writing.
b. Cutler-Hammer.
F. Intrinsically Safe Relays:

1. Factory Mutual approved to allow the use of every type of remote pilot device
located in Class 1, Division 1 or 2, hazardous areas by providing a pilot circuit
2018 16050-2 150407

incapable of releasing sufficient electrical energy to ignite gases and vapors
classified in Groups A, B, C, and D.
2. Output relay with double pole, double throw contacts continuous rating of 10
amperers at 120-volts alternating current, capable of operating on the voltage
indicated.
a. B/W - Controls Series 53.
b. Cutler-Hammer - Powered Relay.
G. Reset Timers and Repeat Cycle Timers:

1. Industrial type; 120-volts alternating current, 60 hertz operating power;
6 amperes minimum at 120-volts alternating current output unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings or specified.
2. In enclosure as indicated on the Drawings or specified; plug-in or non-
industrial timers shall be prohibited unless accepted in writing.
a. Eagle.
b. Paragon.
H. Twenty-Four Hour Timers:

1. Heavy-duty industrial, 120-volts, 60 hertz alternating current operating power,
electronic type; 15 amperes at 120-volts alternating current output, single
channel type; lithium battery-backed; single pole double throw.
2. In NEMA 1 or NEMA 3 enclosure as shown on the Drawings; plug-in or non-
industrial timers shall be prohibited unless accepted in writing.
a. Paragon, EC Series
b. Tork, equivalent model.
I. Timing Relays: Heavy-duty industrial, 600-volt, 10 amperes.

b. Cutler-Hammer.
J. Area Lighting Control Timers:

1. Electromechanical type; astronomic dial to automatically turn lights ON at dusk
and OFF at dawn with day omitting device; with SPDT contacts rated for
40 amperes per pole; 120-volts, 60 hertz alternating current operating power.
2. Housed in a NEMA 1 or NEMA 3 enclosure as shown on the Drawings. Plug-in
or non-industrial timers shall be prohibited unless accepted in writing. The
timers shall be Z series.
a. Tork.
b. Paragon.
K. Area Lighting Control Timers:

1. Housed in an NEMA 1 enclosure; plug-in or non-industrial timers shall be
prohibited unless accepted in writing.
a. Paragon, EC Series Suntracker.
b. Tork.
2018 16050-3 150407

L. Buzzers: Capable of producing an adjustable audible sound which shall be
minimum 70 decibels at 10 feet from the buzzer.
a. Edwards Signaling.
b. Federal Signal.
M. Alarm Horns: Capable of producing an adjustable audible sound which shall be

minimum 100 decibels at 10 feet from the horn, accepting up to 8 different plug-in
tone modules, and having distinct tones so no two horns have the same tone;
receiving 120 volt power from its respective control panel as specified or as
a. Edwards Signaling.
b. Federal Signal.
N. Thermostats: Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the

thermostats shall be:
1. Heavy-duty type with full load rating of 120-volts, 16 amps.
2. Provided with a clear plastic splash-proof protective thermostat cover to inhibit
corrosion and moisture damage.
a. Honeywell, T6051 Series.
b. Rockwell, equivalent.
O. Warning Lights:
1. Warning rotating lights, 40 watt, suitable for indoor and outdoor use, corrosive
environment.
2. Red color lens.
3. Shall direct light in a 360 degree pattern.
4. With all necessary accessories for wall-mounting or as specified otherwise
elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
5. Voltage: To match the equipment requirements.
a. Federal Signal Model 121.
b. Edwards Signaling equivalent.
P. Nameplates:
1. Type: Black lamicoid with white letters.
2. Fastener: Round head stainless steel screws.
Q. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Warning Signs:

1. Type: Suitable for exterior use and meeting OSHA regulations.
R. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels: Vinyl plastic.

a. Brady.
b. Seton.
S. Underground Hazard Tape: 6-inches wide.

a. Panduit.
2018 16050-4 150407

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Actual locations, distances, and levels
will be governed by actual field conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall also review
information indicated on the Drawings for architectural, structural, yard, mechanical,
and other specialties, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings,
and shall adjust his work to conform to all conditions indicated thereon.
B. Coordinate for consistency lens colors of all pilot lights included in all equipment
assemblies specified in DIVISIONS 11 through 16 (subject to ENGINEER's
acceptance).
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Anchor electrical equipment to building floors, electrical equipment foundations, or

other supports by bolts and anchor bolts and studs.
B. Anchor electrical equipment with concrete anchors or flush shells only when
C. Anchor each piece of electrical equipment with minimum 1/2-inch diameter

Type 316 stainless steel bolts, anchor bolts, or studs. Acceptable connectors shall
be furnished in each corner of each section of electrical equipment, minimum.
D. Where plates are embedded in concrete supporting electrical equipment, fasten

electrical equipment to the embedded plates with minimum 1/2-inch diameter
welded studs. Where required, the number of studs connecting the embedded
plates to floors shall be increased as required based upon the calculations of
seismic forces in order to resist the forces from the electrical equipment supplied.
The additional studs shall be deemed as part of these Contract Documents.
3.03 TORQUING
A. After installing and before energizing electrical equipment, torque each bolted bus
and cable connection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with
calibrated torque wrenches. Include each bolt at each connection, both factory and
field installed, for motor control centers, variable frequency drives, bus ducts,
switchgear, switchboards, and other equipment installed.
3.04 CONDUCTOR FASTENERS
A. Use screw type conductor fasteners and other permanent, such as epoxy conductor
adhesives, in junction or pull boxes, termination cabinets, panels, panelboards,
switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, or other
enclosures containing electrical devices and/or conductors. Do not use glue-on type
conductor fasteners.
3.05 SUPPORT CHANNELS
A. Install channels, as required for support of raceways, cable trays, device

enclosures, and other electrical equipment.
2018 16050-5 150407

B. Separate iron or steel supports from aluminum with 1/4-inch neoprene or other non-
metallic gaskets.
C. Paint field cuts and scratches of galvanized steel channels with a cold galvanizing
spray paint.
3.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Furnish and install terminal blocks in control panels, cabinets, terminal/junction

boxes, variable frequency drives, motor control centers, switchgear, and similar
equipment and identify the terminal blocks by numbering and labeling in accordance
with accepted shop drawings. The terminal blocks shall be circuit isolation fused-
switch type where indicated on the Drawings and as required.
3.07 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates where indicated on the Drawings or specified.
B. Each disconnect means for service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors and
pushbutton stations shall have nameplates indicating its purpose or identifying the
load.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust, set timers and contacts for proper equipment operation in accordance with
Section 01756.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of equipment.
END OF SECTION
2018 16050-6 150407

SECTION 16060
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Grounding
B. Related Work:
1. Section 16010: General Electrical Requirements
2. Section 16123: Wire and Cables
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
B. Submit material list and catalog cuts for all grounding materials and
equipment. Indicate size, material and manufacturer.
A. Include test results as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in

accordance with Section 16010.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials shall comply with Section 16010.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Provide copper-clad steel, ¾-inch diameter, minimum 10 feet long, with

hardened steel points.
2018 16060-1 150407

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\Div16\16060 - GROUNDING.doc
2.3 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Products shall be listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the

materials used.
B. Above ground installations: Mechanical and/or compression type

connectors.
C. Below ground installations: Compression type connectors only.
2.4 GROUND CONDUCTORS
D. Underground ground conductors not in conduit shall be annealed bare

standard copper conforming to ASTM B8. Size shall be #3/0 copper
minimum unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
E. Ground conductors in conduit shall comply with Section 16123 for Power
Wire and have green insulation.
2.5 GROUND WELLS
A. Ground wells shall be 10-1/2” x 17-1/2” pull boxes with steel bolt down
type cover, inscribed “GROUND”.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GROUND ELECTRODE
A. Bond the metallic piping system to the grounding system in accordance

with NEC Article 250-80 and Table 250-95. Bond all structural steel, water
pipes, rebar mats and as shown on the Drawings for a complete ground
electrode system.
B. All ground rods shall be enclosed in ground wells.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Connect the ground buses of panelboards, switchboards, and motor

control centers to the ground bus within the main service switchboard with
a grounding conductor.
B. Install insulated throat grounding bushings on all conduits. Ground

raceways and non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment in
accordance with NEC Article 250. Use the metallic conduit system for
2018 16060-2 150407

equipment and enclosure grounding in addition to the grounding conductor
installed in each conduit. Grounding as part of the conduit system shall be
in addition of any ground conductors shown on the drawings. Connect
each conduit grounding bushing to the equipment ground bus with a
ground conductor sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95.
C. Ground transformer enclosure and wye transformer’s secondary.
D. Ground all gates, fences, and handrails, even if not shown on Drawings.
Grounding conductor from ground grid to gates, fences and handrails shall
be #2 AWG minimum.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Before placement of sidewalks, landscape and paving, measure the

resistance of each electrode to ground using a ground resistance tester.
Perform the test not less than two days after the most recent rainfall and in
the afternoon after any ground condensation (dew) has evaporated.
Submit readings as part of System Ground Test defined in Section 16030.
B. After all individual ground electrode readings have been made,

interconnect ground grid as required and measure the system's ground
resistance at the Switchboard/MCC ground bus, at the emergency
generator ground bus, and at each ground electrode.
C. Do not energize the electrical power system unless the system ground
resistance is less than 5 ohms at all points tested. For system ground
resistance greater then 5 ohms and for individual electrode ground
resistance of 5 ohms or more, notify the Engineer.
D. Test per Section 16950.
E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
2018 16060-3 150407

SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Identification of electrical conductors, raceways and equipment,

and electrical equipment signs.
1. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC):

1. Article 110-22 - Disconnecting Means.
2. Article 210-4 - Multiwire Branch Circuits.
3. Article 200 - Use and Identification of Grounded Conductors.
4. Article 384 - Switchboards and Panelboards.
5. Article 300 - Wiring Methods.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit Shop Drawings for electrical equipment room layouts, drawn
at a minimum at 3/8-inch = 1 foot, scale.
2. Cross Reference: Diagram shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire
numbers and terminal block numbers to permit cross-referencing between the
Contract Document Drawings, the Drawings prepared by the CONTRACTOR,
and equipment O&M Manual Drawings.
3. Drawing number cross references and continuation references shall also be
provided. CONTRACTOR-prepared Drawings shall reference applicable
CONTRACTOR Drawings such as P&IDs, control and logic diagrams,
interface wiring diagrams, Panel Drawings, etc. CONTRACTOR-prepared
Drawings shall also reference applicable Drawings provided by equipment
manufacturers.
4. On any Drawing prepared for this project, if a wire, circuit, enclosure, panel, or
device is continued on another Drawing, the continuation Drawing shall be
referenced (and vice-versa). Wherever wires are shown connected to
terminals, the Drawings which show the continuation of the circuits on those
terminals must be referenced.
5. Interconnection Diagrams: Cables shall not be installed into raceways until the
wiring interconnection diagrams are reviewed by the design engineer.
6. Sample schematics and diagrams are indicated on typical detail Drawings for
reference and understanding of minimum information required for submittal of
Shop Drawings schematics and diagrams, and submittal of O&M schematics
and diagrams.
7. Include tagging system, labels, markers, hazard tape, nameplates, and signs.
2018 16075-1 150407

B. Product Data: Include tagging system, labels, markers, and hazard tape.
C. Project Record Documents:

1. Document wire, cable, and conductor tags, and bundle tags installed in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Document installed wire, cable, and conductor tags and bundle tags when not
specifically indicated.
3. Indicate on Record Drawings deviations from accepted Shop Drawing
conductor identification.
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Conduct in accordance with Section 01312.
2. Purpose: To clearly define requirements specified for circuit/cable/conductor
identification, hold a meeting including representatives of CONTRACTOR,
OWNER, and ENGINEER prior to significant cable or conductor purchase and
installation/termination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LABELS

1. Brady.
2. Seton.
B. Type: Sleeve type.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MARKERS

1. Brady.
2. Seton.
B. Type: Slip-on PVC sleeve or strap-on type.
C. Printed using Brady marker "XC PLUS," or equal.
D. Markers used in tunnels or other wet locations shall be on heat-shrinkable marking

sleeves.
E. Use self-laminating vinyl on white background for markers within electrical

equipment such as panels, termination cabinets, motor control centers.
2.03 RACEWAYS IDENTIFICATION (TAGS)
A. Conduit numbers shall be pressure stamped into a noncorrosive 2-inch long,

1/2-inch wide stainless steel tape, Dymo marking system or equal. A tag with
number shall be fixed with No. 18 AWG or larger Type 304 stainless steel wire, to
each conduit segment and at the end of each conduit and within three feet of each
pull box, panelboard, and switchboard.
2018 16075-2 150407

2.04 NAMEPLATES, LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Nameplates:
1. Type: Black lamicoid with white letters.
2. Fastener: Round head stainless steel screws.
B. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Warning Signs:

1. Type: Suitable for exterior use and meeting OSHA regulations.
C. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels: Vinyl plastic.

a. Brady.
b. Seton.
D. Underground Hazard Tape: 6-inches wide.

a. Panduit.
b. Thomas and Betts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify 3-phase system conductors and cables as Phases A, B, and C and identify
1-phase system conductors and cables at electrical equipment including, but not
limited to, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and
motors.
1. Match OWNER's existing electrical system identification scheme or meet
requirements of the authority responsible for the project.
2. 3-Phase 480 Volts AC System Conductors: Phase A, brown; Phase B, orange;
Phase C, yellow.
3. Single-Phase Conductors for 120/240 VAC Circuits: Phase A, black; Phase B,
red; Phase C, blue.
4. Neutral Conductor: White for 120 VAC and gray for 277 VAC.
5. Insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green.
6. General Purpose AC Control Conductors: Purple.
7. General Purpose DC Control Conductors: Purple with white stripes.
8. Identify 15 kilovolt class cables with three stripes of color tape specified in item
three above.
9. Identify 5 kilovolt cable with two stripes of color tape specified in item three
above.
B. Use color coding and phasing consistent throughout the site. Bus bars at
panelboards and motor control centers to be connected Phase A-B-C, top to
bottom, or left to right facing connecting lugs.
C. Conductors No. 2 American Wire Gauge (AWG) and smaller to be factory color
coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used
consistently throughout the system. Larger cables to be coded by the use of colored
tape.
2018 16075-3 150407

D. In addition to color coding, for all 1-phase and 3-phase systems, identify each cable
(single or multi-conductor) and conductor at each end, in each manhole, pullbox,
cable tray, or other component of the raceway system. This identification is
applicable to all power, control, alarm, signal, instrumentation cables, and
conductors.
E. Identify each cable (single or multi-conductor) and groups or bundles of individual

single conductors in each manhole, pullbox, cable tray, or other component of the
raceway system with circuit identification markers. Implement a "from-to"
cable/conductor bundle tagging system as part of this identification effort.
F. Identify each individual conductor at each termination. This includes such locations
as switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives,
control panels, junction/terminal boxes, all field devices, and all other locations
where conductors are terminated. Identify the termination of these conductors in
accordance with the accepted Shop Drawings. Tag conductors with sleeve type
labels.
G. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists, identify each ungrounded
system conductor by phase and system. Permanently post means of identification
at each branch-circuit panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, motor control center, or
other type of power distribution equipment.
H. Include the following minimum information for wire and cable identification.
1. Circuit number or load identification tag number.
2. Origin (from source).
3. Destination (to load).
3.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates for all electrical equipment indicated on the
Drawings or specified.
B. Each disconnect means for service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors and
pushbutton stations shall have nameplates indicating its purpose or identifying the
load.
3.03 AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT WARNING AND HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNS
A. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment which may be started

automatically or from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head
stainless steel screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to
ENGINEER.
B. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on (front and back) equipment,
doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, where the voltage exceeds
600-volts.
C. Label exposed medium voltage circuit raceways at 50 foot intervals with 1-inch
letters stating the voltage; example - 12,470 volts.
D. Place a warning ribbon or other effective means suitable for conditions above
ductbank underground installations.
2018 16075-4 150407

E. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has more than one source of
power. Provide panel and circuit number of conductor tag of the power source
disconnect.
F. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage
source used for interlocking. Provide panel, circuit number, and conductor tag of
control voltage source disconnect.
END OF SECTION
2018 16075-5 150407

2018 16075-6 150407
SECTION 16123
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Wires and cables, 600 volts and less
B. Related Work:
1. Section 260000: General Electrical Requirements
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit catalog cuts and material list for each conductor type. Indicate insulation material,
conductor material, voltage rating, manufacturer and other data pertinent to the specific
cable, such as shielding type, number of pairs and applicable standards.
PART 2- MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Wires and cables shall comply with Section 260519.
2.02 POWER WIRE
A. Conductor material: Class B stranded, soft annealed copper per ASTM B-3.
B. Insulation: THHN/THWN 600-volt insulated, color coded per Part 3: Identification.
C. Minimum conductor size: No. 12 AWG.
2.03 CONTROL WIRE (EXTERNAL TO SCADA PANEL)
A. Conductor: Class B stranded soft annealed copper per ASTM B-3.
B. Insulation: THHN/THWN, 600-volt insulated, color coded per Part 3: Identification.
C. Minimum Conductor Size: No 14 AWG.
2018 16123-1 150407

2.04 CONTROL WIRE (CONNECTIONS WITHIN SCADA CONTROL PANEL)
A. Conductor: Stranded Soft Annealed Copper.
B. Insulation: Type THHN or THW, color code shown on Drawings of the RTU control panel.
C. Minimum Conductor Size: No. 14 AWG.
2.05 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE – ALL LOCATIONS
A. Provide PVC coated shielded twisted pair, No. 16 AWG, 600 volt rated, Belden 8719 or
equivalent.
2.06 CONDUCTOR CONNECTOR/SPLICES
A. Aboveground Dry and Damp Locations, #10 AWG and Smaller: Wire nuts, 3M
"Scotchlock", Ideal "Super Nut", Buchanan "B-Cap", or equivalent.
B. Aboveground Dry and Damp Locations, #8 AWG and Larger:

1. Use one piece, standard length barrel, copper compression splice. Provide Thomas
and Betts two way connectors, Burndy "Hylink", Teledyne "Penn-Union Penn Crimps"
or equivalent.
C. In-ground Handholes and Pull Boxes, #10 AWG and smaller: As specified above plus
sealing with individual sealing packs of Scotchcast 400 Resin or equivalent.
2.07 MOTOR TERMINATIONS
A. Splice conductors to motor leads with copper compression terminal lugs bolted together
and insulated with an EPDM rubber slip on lug cover. Provide 3M electrical products
1000V or less non shielded cable motor lead splicing kits, Thomas & Betts #MSC or
equivalent.
2.08 PULLING COMPOUND
A. Use only cable pulling compound that is approved by the manufacturer of the cable as
being compatible with cable insulation and jacket materials.
2.09 CONDUCTOR TAGS
A. Wire identification - all wires, field and internal to equipment, shall be identified with heat
shrinkable machine printed sleeve markers or clip-on markers covered with clear plastic
heat shrinkable tubing. Hand lettered wire labels are not acceptable and shall be replaced at
the Contractor's expense. All wires that are electrically the same (connected to common
termination points) and do not pass through a contact or other switching device shall have
the same wire identification.
2018 16123-2 150407

B. The wire labeling code for each end of the same wire shall be identical. Tubing shall be
sized for the wire and shrunk into place with the properly sized heat gun. The wire
identification code for field and panel wiring shall be the number/letter designated on the
"elementary" (schematics) and "loop" diagrams. Wire labels shall be T&B SM series,
Raychem Thermofit TMS or approved equal.
2.10 ELECTRICAL TAPE/SHRINKABLE INSULATORS
A. Vinyl Tape: 7 mil, 600 volt rated, flame retardant, hot and cold weather resistant vinyl tape
conforming to UL 510. Provide 3M Super 33+ Scotch vinyl tape or equivalent.
B. Vinyl Tape for Color Coding: 7 mil, 3/4" wide, hot and cold weather resistant vinyl tape
conforming to UL 510. Provide 3M 35 Scotch vinyl tape or equivalent.
C. Vinyl Mastic: 90 or 125 mil self fusing, rubber based insulating vinyl mastic laminated to
PVC. Provide 3M 2200 or 2210 or equivalent.
D. Rubber Tape: EPR rubber, 90 degrees C continuous rated. Provide 3M 130C Scotch Tape
or equivalent.
E. Varnished Cambric Type: Adhesive backed, 9-mil, bias cut cotton tape, coated with yellow
insulating varnish.
F. Shrinkable Insulators: Provide heat or cold shrinkable insulator tubing. Provide Thomas and
Belts "Shrink-Kon" heat shrink insulators, 3M thick wall heat shrinkable cable sleeves, 3M
8420 series cold shrink cable sleeves or equivalent.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 WIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring and cable in conduit unless otherwise noted.
B. To reduce pulling tension in long runs, coat cables with pulling compound.
C. Remove debris and moisture from the conduits, boxes and cabinets prior to cable
installation.
D. Group conductors in panelboards, motor control centers, cabinets, pull boxes and
switchboard wireways; tie with plastic ties; and fan out to terminals.
E. Terminate phase conductors A, B and C reading left to right, front to back or top to bottom
looking into the front of the equipment.
F. Install control wire and instrument cable between devices without splices.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION (EXTERNAL TO SCADA PANEL)
A. Color Coding of Power Wire: Provide color coding throughout the entire network of feeders
and circuits (600 volts and below) as follows:
2018 16123-3 150407

240/120 208/120 480/277
Phase Volts Volts Volts
Phase A Black Black Brown
Phase B Red Red Orange
Phase C --- Blue Yellow
Neutral White White Gray
Ground Green Green Green
B. Conductors used for 24 VDC shall be blue. Conductors designated as foreign voltage shall
be yellow.
C. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall have factory color-coding with solid color
insulation.
D. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall have factory color coding with solid color insulation
or shall have black insulation with on-site application of colored tape at conductor
terminations and at splices.
E. Control wires shall have colored insulation. Provide separate color codes for each wire in
conduit that has up to seven wires. Conduits with more than seven wires shall have at least
seven types of colored insulation.
F. Tagging of Conductors: Tag control wires and instrument cable in panels, pullboxes,
handholes, wireways and at control devices. Tag control wires and instrument cables with
wire numbers as shown on the shop drawing submittals or contract drawings. Tag power
wires in pullboxes, handholes and wireways with motor control center or panelboard
number and circuit numbers. In panelboards, tag conductors with circuit numbers one inch
from termination at circuit breaker.
3.03 WIRE SPLICING AND CONNECTING
A. Tighten electrical connections and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B, or NETA Standards.
B. Retighten bolt-type connectors 24 to 48 hours after initial installation and before taping.
C. Insulate splices with tape or shrinkable insulators. Tape connections as follows: Step 1 -
apply a minimum of 4 layers of varnished cambric tape. Step 2 -apply a minimum of six
layers of rubber tape half-lapped. Step 3 - apply a minimum of six layers of vinyl tape half-
lapped.
3.04 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS (CIRCUITS BELOW 600 VOLTS)
A. Perform insulation resistance test for each feeder and motor circuit prior to energizing per
Section 260800.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, Section 7.3.
C. Perform insulation resistance test of all systems up to 600V. Each complete circuit,
including the feeder and everything connected thereto, shall be tested and shall have an
2018 16123-4 150407

insulation resistance between conductors and between each conductor and ground of not
less than 2,000,000 ohms (2 megohms). All circuits which do not pass this test shall be
inspected for grounds; and if required, the Contractor shall replace the wires or cables and
repeat the test until insulation resistance of 2 megohms is obtained.
END OF SECTION
2018 16123-5 150407

2SECTION 16133
CONDUITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit:
a. Flexible conduit, polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduit, and rigid
nonmetallic polyvinyl chloride conduit.
2. Related Sections:
a. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
b. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES

1. C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
C. National Electrical Code (NEC):

1. Article 348 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.
2. Table 300-5 - Minimum Cover Requirements (0 to 600-volts, Nominal).
3. Article 500 - Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
4. Table 10-4(b) - Minimum Cover Requirements (over 600-volts, Nominal).
D. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc (UL):

1. JUL 6 - Rigid Metal Conduit.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Installation drawing including individual conduit numbers, routing,

conduit sizes, circuit numbers contained in each conduit, and number and size of
wires in each conduit.
C. Manufacturer's Quality Control Data: Include how products are inspected at work
stations, defining quality process from receipt of raw material through shipping, and
providing means to trace conduit and fittings from raw material through shipping,
when requested by the ENGINEER.
2018 16133-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. Domestic raw steel, made smooth, clean, and free of burrs and rough spots to
enhance wire pulling; interior and exterior surfaces coated with solid, unbroken
layer of zinc; threads hot dip galvanized after cutting; entire surface finish
coated with secondary bichromate treatment applied over galvanizing able to
extend surface protection and prevent oxidation; threads protected by color
coded end caps to provide quick trade size identification.
a. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company, Galvite.
b. Triangle PWC, Inc.
c. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation.
B. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: Grounding type, weatherproof, watertight, maximum

60-inch lengths.
a. Southwire.
2. Flexible Metal Conduit: Aluminum with minimum trade size of 1/2-inch,
maximum length allowed 60-inches.
a. ALFLEX
b. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. Galvanized rigid steel conduit with coating conforming to ANSI C80.1 and
UL 6; bendable without damage to coatings.
a. Perma Kote by Robroy Industries.
b. OCAL, Inc.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit:

1. High density, Schedule 40, 90 degrees C, heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride, made
from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound; maximum 6 grams per 100 grams
smoke emission.
a. Carlon.
b. Triangle Conduit and Cable.
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Couplings, Connectors, and Fittings:

1. Threaded.
2. Manufactured with same materials and process as corresponding conduit.
B. Condulet Fittings:
1. With wedge nut covers, weathertight when located outdoors or in wet or
corrosive locations indicated on the Drawings, matching type for
corresponding conduit systems.
a. Crouse-Hinds.
2018 16133-2 150407

b. Appleton.
C. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings for Exposed Locations:

a. O-Z/Gedney, Type AX with jumper.
b. Appleton, Type XJ with jumper.
D. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings at Structural Expansion Joints:

a. Spring City, Type D.
b. Crouse-Hinds, Type D.
c. 0-Z/Gedney
E. Conduit Seals:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit Couplings: One provided loose with
each length of conduit.
G. Fasteners for Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Polyvinyl chloride-

coated steel fasteners with Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and hardware.
H. Fasteners for Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized steel fasteners with
Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and hardware.
I. Conduit Mounting Strut:

1. Type 316 stainless steel for mounting of polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel
conduit.
2. Hot-dip galvanized for other conduit types.
J. Conduit Thruwall Seals:

1. Hot-dip galvanize.
2. Polyvinyl chloride oversize sleeve.
a. O-Z/Gedney, Type "WSK."
2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT FABRICATION
A. Coat rigid steel conduit, conduit fittings, and hangers with polyvinyl chloride.
B. Conduit:
1. Surfaces, including galvanizing, are to remain intact and undisturbed on both
inside and outside of conduit throughout preparation and application
processing.
2. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surfaces of conduit except threads.
3. Provide bond between polyvinyl chloride coating and conduit surface that is
greater than tensile strength of plastic.
4. Provide minimum 40-mil thick coating on conduit.
5. Coat interior of conduit and condulet fittings with nominal 2-mil thick corrosion-
resistant urethane finish.
6. Coat threads with clear urethane finish.
2018 16133-3 150407

C. Couplings:
1. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surfaces of couplings.
2. Extend polyvinyl chloride sleeve equal to outside diameter of uncoated conduit
beyond both ends of coupling approximately one pipe diameter or 1-
1/2-inches, whichever is smaller.
3. Provide minimum 40-mil thick coatings on couplings and sleeves.
4. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surface of conduit bodies and fittings.
5. Extend polyvinyl chloride sleeves from hubs.
6. Provide same coating thickness on conduit bodies, fittings, and sleeve walls as
on couplings in length and thickness.
7. Coat covers on conduit bodies on both sides so covers are completely
interchangeable.
8. Coat interior of conduit couplings, sleeves, and conduit bodies with
corrosion-resistant urethane finish.
D. The inside of conduit bodies are to remain undisturbed during processing and retain
manufacturer's finish.
E. Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated, Mounting Hardware, and Associated Fittings:

1. All mounting hardware and associated fittings shall be polyvinyl
chloride-coated in accordance with the intent of reference NEMA RN-1.
2. The polyvinyl chloride exterior coating shall have a normal thickness of 40-mils
(.040 inch) except where part configuration or application otherwise dictate.
3. All fasteners for polyvinyl chloride-coated fittings and mounting hardware shall
be of the Type 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified. Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted
by the ENGINEER.
B. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on
the Drawings, for circuit numbers indicated on the Drawings.
C. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets,
and bends. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with condulet
fittings.
D. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of
equipment and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment
removal hatches.
E. Expose conduit runs in buildings and structures, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Securely fasten exposed conduits with clamps or straps. Run exposed conduit on
walls and ceilings only, parallel to planes of walls or ceilings. Do not run conduit
diagonally. Securely fasten exposed polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduits
with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps.
2018 16133-4 150407

G. Use flexible conduit for short lengths required to facilitate connections between rigid
conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, or control equipment.
H. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls 1-inch away from wall on an accepted
channel. Use hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel channels, consistent with
type of conduit being installed. Do not run conduit in water-bearing walls unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
I. Encase underground conduit runs, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade, in

a concrete envelope as specified in Section 03300 and indicated on the Drawings.
J. Install underground installations of direct buried cable, conduit, or other raceways to

meet minimum cover requirements of NEC Table 300-5 and Table 710-4(b). Exceed
minimum NEC requirements where indicated on the Drawings or specified.
K. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. Seal joints
with accepted conductive sealant compound and make watertight. Set up joints
tight. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
L. Install runs between pull boxes or junction boxes with total bends equaling not more
than 270 degrees. Install NEC required pull boxes at locations acceptable to the
ENGINEER. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. Cap spare conduits and
provide plastic pulling tape below threaded cap. Provide bonding bushing and bond
wire.
M. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit

applications.
N. After complete installation of 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with
conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than
85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace conduits through
which mandrel will not pass.
O. Existing conduit runs are to be cleaned and not crushed or creased. Verify internal
dimensions of existing conduit prior to installation of conductors. Verify that no
foreign objects or obstructions are present in conduit prior to installing conductors.
P. Install conduit system to provide firm mechanical assemblies with electrical

conductivity throughout.
Q. Install expansion fittings across expansion joints and at other locations where
necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction as
R. Install conduits complete between outlets, boxes, and circuit source before
conductors are installed.
S. Install minimum 2-inch ductbank raceways, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings.
T. Make ductbank raceway to external conduit size transitions at pullboxes and

manholes.
2018 16133-5 150407

U. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs to allow
for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes
and pullboxes.
V. Install conduit thruwall seals where required or indicated on the Drawings.
3.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE-COATED RIGID STEEL
A. Attach cover to conduit body with Type 316 stainless steel screws.
B. Where patching is required, apply 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride coating in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
A. Reinforce encasement as indicated on the Drawings. Install conduit supports at

30-inch intervals.
3.04 CONDUIT SEALS
A. Install conduit entering or leaving NEC Article 500 hazardous areas with conduit
seals.
B. Install conduit seals in other hazardous locations as required by NEC.
C. Provide drains on conduit seals in locations where water accumulation is likely to

enter a device or enclosure.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Conduit Sizes: In accordance with NEC, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings or specified as follows:
1. Concealed conduit in partitions or accessible ceilings: Minimum 3/4-inch.
2. Exposed Conduit: Minimum 3/4-inch.
3. Rigid Steel Encased In Concrete: Minimum 1-inch.
4. Rigid Non-Metallic Polyvinyl Chloride Encased In Concrete: Minimum
2-inches.
5. Direct Buried Conduit Size: Minimum 2-inches.
B. Conduit Uses and Applications:

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Typical, exposed conduit runs in dry and non-corrosive
locations, unless otherwise noted.
2. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: final motor and instrument connection in non-
hazardous areas.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Allowed only within accessible ceilings at
Administration Building, for the connection of lighting fixtures.
4. Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:
a. Entering or exiting concrete including minimum 12-inches above and
below grade or finished floor.
b. In corrosive NEMA 4X designated areas, NEMA 6 designated areas, and
NEMA 7 designated areas.
c. In exposed outdoor locations.
2018 16133-6 150407

5. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Allowed only within partitions and accessible
ceilings at Administration Building. No other application will be allowed.
6. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Runs concealed or concrete
encased in walls, floors, and underground duct banks.
7. Explosion Proof Flexible Conduit: Final connection of equipment in hazardous
areas.
3.06 RACEWAYS ALLOWANCES
A. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways and supports to

provide any and all motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication
outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of location shown on the
Drawings.
B. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways, trench, excavation,

backfill, and related materials to provide any and all pull boxes, manholes, and
ductbanks within 30 linear feet of location shown on the Drawings.
C. Prior to installation of any raceway or related items identified in paragraphs A and B

above, the OWNER shall have the right to make changes related to preferred
location, at no additional cost.
D. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance to provide necessary raceways for all

equipment specified, identified in wiring schedules, equipment schedules, panel
boards schedules, electrical single line diagrams, block diagrams, process and
instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs), fixtures schedules, and devices. Said necessary
conduits may not be shown on the Drawings, but they shall be sized by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with requirements specified and the National
Electrical Code, and include in this allowance, the raceways necessary for the
installation of the conductors and for the complete operation of the included device
or equipment.
E. In addition to the above, include the following allowance for extra items not specified
or identified on the documents.
1. Two thousand (2,000) feet of 3/4-inch exposed rigid steel conduit with fittings
and supports, in locations up to 20 feet above finish floor.
2. One thousand (1000) feet of 1-inch exposed rigid steel conduit with fittings and
supports, in locations up to 20 feet above finish floor.
3. One thousand (1000) feet of 1-inch PVC coated rigid steel conduit with fittings
and supports, in locations up to 20 feet above finish floor.
4. Five hundred (500) feet of 2-inch PVC-schedule 40 conduit, encased in
concrete, including necessary excavation.
5. Twenty (20) equipment terminations with 3/4-inch flexible liquid tight conduit,
36 inch minimum length, including boxes and fittings.
3.07 RACEWAYS IDENTIFICATION
A. Each new conduit, new wireway, and new boxes shall be identified by a specific
number. The numbering system shall be in accordance with identification named on
the Drawings or the process equipment identification. Products for identification of
raceways are specified in Section 16075.
2018 16133-7 150407

END OF SECTION
2018 16133-8 150407

SECTION 16134
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Outlet boxes, device boxes, metallic pull boxes, junction boxes, termination
boxes.
2. Concrete pull boxes.
3. Fasteners used with wiring devices.
3. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association

(ANSI/NEMA):
1. OS1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
2. OS2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
B. National Electrical Code (NEC):

1. Article 370 - Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and
Fittings.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA FB1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies.
2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000-Volts Maximum).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Include identification and sizes of pull boxes for ENGINEER's
acceptance prior to fabrication and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Device Boxes, Metallic Pull Boxes, and Junction Boxes: One of the following or
equal:
1. Crouse-Hinds.
2. Appleton.
2018 16134-1 150407

3. Hoffman
4. O-Z/Gedney
B. Floor Outlet Boxes with 1-Inch Conduit Knockouts: One of the following or equal:
1. Steel City, 640 Series.
2. Hubbell.
C. Concrete Pull Boxes with Covers: One of the following or equal:

1. Quickset.
2. Utility Vault Company.
2.02 DEVICE BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Materials: Heavy-duty rigid steel or stainless steel, compatible with the location and
conduit system being used, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
B. For Indoor or Non-Corrosive Areas: Provide cast FD type device boxes with epoxy
finish, and compatible with the location and conduit system being used.
C. For Outdoor Locations, Corrosive Areas, or Wet Process Locations: Provide cast
FD type boxes with PVC coating for outdoor locations, corrosive areas, and wet
process locations compatible with the location and conduit system being used.
D. Coverplates:
1. Indoor: Provide lighting switch and receptacle boxes of Type 302 stainless
steel cover plates with cover gaskets, except where otherwise specified or
indicated on the Drawings. Provide other boxes with Type 304 stainless steel
cover screws and with cover gaskets.
2. Outdoor and Corrosion Resistant: Provide lighting switch and receptacle
boxes, weatherproof with yellow fiberglass lift cover plates with cover gaskets.
2.03 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES
A. Suitable for receptacles, communications and data outlets as specified and

indicated on the Drawings, complete with gaskets and cover plates.
B. Dual-gang, heavy-duty cast iron, suitable for wiring devices to be installed to make
a complete and operable system and installation.
2.04 CONCRETE PULL BOXES
A. Precast concrete pull boxes in locations indicated on the Drawings and as required
by NEC.
B. Designed for heavy traffic conditions, with pull box and cover designed for heavy
traffic bridge loading.
C. Minimum 3 feet by 4 feet by depth as necessary for ductbank depth, required with
3/4-inch diameter pulling irons located at each end. Constructed of reinforced Class
A concrete.
D. Identification: Furnish covers with "Electrical" engraved on top side.
2018 16134-2 150407

2.05 METALLIC PULL BOXES
A. Boxes for Applications in Dry and Non-Corrosive Location:

1. Fabricated from 14- or 16-gauge (minimum) steel or stainless steel, completely
weatherproof with gasketed removable covers; compatible with type of conduit
systems being used; manufactured, furnished, and installed complete with
grounding lug.
B. Boxes for Applications in Wet Areas, Outdoor Locations, and NEMA 4X Designated
Areas: Fabricated from 14- or 16-gauge, 316 stainless steel, with gasketed covers
and labeled NEMA 4X.
C. Boxes in Locations Subject to Flooding, Temporary Submersion, or for Applications

in NEMA 6 Designated Areas: Boxes shall be fabricated of cast aluminum with
gasketed cover, stainless steel cover screws, ground flange and listed NEMA 6.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.
B. Screws, Nuts, Bolts, and Other Threaded Fasteners: Stainless Steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the National Electrical Code.
B. Install Terminal blocks in junction/terminal boxes as specified in Section 16050.
C. Install concrete pull boxes on 12-inches of compacted clean aggregate base course
as specified in Section 02722, and in such a manner that the cover of the pull box
will be flush with finish grade.
D. Provide weatherproof conduit hubs for all conduit connections to metallic pull boxes.
E. Phosphatize and prime with rust-resistant paint metallic pull box surfaces. Finish
shall be two coats of ANSI 61 gray enamel paint.
F. Size pull boxes to meet National Electrical Code requirements and to provide
sufficient room for the future conduits and cables indicated on the Drawings.
G. Furnish and install pull boxes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Install
additional pull boxes as required to meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension
requirements.
H. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted by obstructions such as
pipes, valves, ladders.
I. Secure metallic pull box covers with Type 316 stainless steel screws or bolts with
coated threads.
2018 16134-3 150407

J. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for boxes to be located above ground or
above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box mounting.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust equipment as specified in Section 01756.
END OF SECTION
2018 16134-4 150407

SECTION 16135
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Cabinets and enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, terminal
blocks, and similar equipment.
1. Section 16010 - Electrical Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, enclosures to house
electrical controls, instruments, terminal blocks, and similar equipment shall be
NEMA 12 for indoor, dry, and non-corrosive locations, and NEMA 4X for
outdoor installations, wet locations, and corrosive designated areas, and shall
be compatible with the conduit system being used.
2. Specific control panel enclosures shall be as specified in DIVISION 13 of these
Specifications or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
B. Submit product data and mounting supports.
C. Calculations:
1. Conditioning System Sizing: Submit calculations.
1.05 WARRANTY

1. Enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, and equipment shall be
NEMA 7 in hazardous-classified areas.
2018 16135-1 150407

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures: One of the following or equal:

1. Hoffman Engineering Company.
2. Rittal.
B. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures: One of the following or equal:

2. Henessy Products Inc.
3. Carlon.
C. NEMA 7 Enclosures:
1. O-Z Gedney.
2. Crouse Hinds
D. Enclosure Air Conditioner: One of the following or equal:

2. PROAIR.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures:

1. Fabricate enclosures from 14-gauge steel with continuous welded seams.
2. Doors: Doors shall have full-length piano hinges with the door removable by
pulling the hinge pin.
3. Provide a rolled lip around three sides of the door and around all sides of the
enclosure opening.
4. Gaskets: Attach gasket with oil-resistant adhesive and hold it in place with
steel retaining strips.
5. Provide hasp and staple for padlocking.
6. Provide a print pocket for each enclosure.
B. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures:

1. Provide enclosures that consist of base and cover which shall be of Type 316
stainless steel with minimum thickness of 14- or 16-gauge. The enclosures
shall be provided with cover hinges to form a weathertight seal between the
cabinet and door.
C. NEMA 7 Enclosures:
1. Enclosures shall be of cast iron construction with o-ring gasket, hinges, and
stainless steel cover bolts.
2. Enclosures shall be custom built for specific application and provided with
ample space for mounting and wiring electrical equipment.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Steel Enclosures:
1. Do not paint NEMA 4X enclosures. Door fronts shall be ground smooth.
a. Print pockets and interior panels shall be steel with a white enamel finish.
2018 16135-2 150407

2. Provide NEMA 12 enclosures with white enamel interior finish: The finish shall
be light gray enamel, ANSI 61 exterior, over phosphatized surfaces. Panels
shall be white enamel.
3. Special finishes and colors shall be furnished for wet locations.
B. Other portions of these Contract Documents shall be checked for special conditions.
2.04 ENCLOSURE AIR CONDITIONERS
A. Provide electrical equipment enclosures with complete air conditioning system as

indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1. Enclosures to be climate controlled, equipped with integral self-contained air
conditioning units complete with thermostats.
2. The industrial grade air conditioners to constantly cool and recirculate the
internal enclosure air, which is kept completely separated from the external or
ambient air (closed-loop system).
3. Provide units suitable for operation in the environment as specified in
Section 16010. The units to be complete with all gaskets, mounting hardware,
and air inlet filter.
B. Electrical Requirements:
1. Power supply to the air conditioners to be as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Make adjustments to the power supply circuits (conduits and wires and other
components) as necessary to accommodate the air conditioning equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports
at each corner. Install in accordance with Section 16050.
C. Top mounted air conditioning units installation shall not allow condensation to
damage electrical equipment or enclosure.
D. Provide size of pull boxes to meet National Electric Code requirements and ample
space for conductors and devices.
E. Provide adequate supports and anchors to resist seismic forces.
F. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for cabinets to be located above decks, above
slabs, or where there are no structural wall or surface for cabinet mounting.
END OF SECTION
2018 16135-3 150407

2018 16135-4 150407
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Wiring devices including the following:

1. Snap switches and toggle switches.
2. Fluorescent dimmer switches.
3. Plugs and receptacles.
4. Control and pushbutton stations.
5. Pilot devices.
2. Section 16134 - Boxes.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
A. Provide industrial grade products for wiring devices. Commercial grade products are
not acceptable, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Coordinate lighting fixture ballasts with dimming switches.
1.04 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SNAP OR TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following gray in color, or equal:

1. Hubbell.
2. General Electric.
3. Leviton.
4. Bryant.
B. Number of Poles: As indicated on the Drawings.
C. Rating: 20 amperes, 125-volt.
D. Special Switches and Covers: As specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2018 16140-1 150407

2.02 120-VOLT RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following gray in color, or equal:

1. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
4. Bryant.
B. Duplex Receptacles: 2-pole, 3-wire, grounded, 125-volts, industrial, rated at

20 amperes.
1. Special Receptacles and Covers: As specified in Section 16134 or as
C. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles (GFI): Rated at 20 amperes at 125-volts

alternating current.
2.03 240-VOLT RECEPTACLES

1. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
4. Bryant.
B. Types: Single and 3-phase; suitable for equipment served.
C. Rating: 30 amperes at 250-volts alternating current, unless otherwise indicated on

the Drawings.
2.04 480 VOLT PLUGS AND RECEPTACLES

1. Killark W Series.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
3. Leviton.
4. Bryant.
B. Types: Heavy-duty, 3-phase, weather resistant, grounding type, 4-wire, 4-pole

device, suitable for equipment served.
C. Rating: 30 amperes at 480-volts alternating current, unless otherwise indicated on

the Drawings or specified.
2.05 LOCAL PUSHBUTTON MOTOR CONTROL STATIONS

1. Square D Company.
2. Allen-Bradley.
3. Siemens.
4. Cutler-Hammer.
B. Components: Selector switches, pilot light, and pushbuttons, as specified below.
2018 16140-2 150407

C. Enclosures: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified:
1. For Nonhazardous Indoor Locations: NEMA 4.
2. For Hazardous Indoor Locations: NEMA 7.
3. For Outdoor Locations: NEMA 4X.
4. For Hazardous Outdoor Locations: NEMA 4 and NEMA 7.
D. Field Located Maintained Pushbuttons: Red mushroom head, push-to-stop, pull-to-

reset, with maintained contacts.
2.06 PILOT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following 30.5MM in size, or equal:

2. Allen-Bradley.
3. Siemens.
4. Cutler-Hammer.
B. Type: Heavy-duty, suitable for mounting in control stations, on switchgear,

switchboards, variable frequency drives, motor control centers, control panels, and
other electrical equipment.
C. Components: Oiltight/watertight pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot light, and

incidental items.
D. Casting: Durable one piece with chrome plated octagonal mounting nuts.
E. Pushbuttons: Heavy-duty plastic.
F. Pilot Light Lenses: Shatter resistant plastic, push-to-test.
G. Color: As directed by OWNER.
2.07 CORD CONNECTOR GRIPS
A. Non-Hazardous Areas:
a. Killark, Series Z.
2. Aluminum cord connector.
3. Stainless steel mesh grip.
B. Hazardous Areas:
a. Killark, Series ZE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings.
2018 16140-3 150407

1. Provide adequate supporting pillars for wiring devices to be located above
ground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box
mounting.
3.02 LOCAL PUSHBUTTON MOTOR CONTROL STATION INSTALLATION
A. Install Start-Lockout-Stop pushbutton control stations adjacent to every motor

3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust wiring devices as specified in Section 01756.
3.04 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
2018 16140-4 150407

SECTION 16144
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fusible and nonfusible disconnect switches.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and description.

1. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage,
capacity, horsepower, and short circuit.
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.03 WARRANTY
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts: Furnish one set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Disconnect Switches: One of the following or equal:

2. Cutler-Hammer.
2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Type:
1. Heavy-duty safety switches with a quick-make, quick-break operating
mechanism, full cover interlock, and indicator handle.
2. Where required, furnish with fuses where indicated on the Drawings.
B. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect

switches shall be in NEMA 12 enclosures for indoor installations and in NEMA 4X
enclosures for outdoor installations.
2018 16144-1 150407

1. Disconnect switch enclosures shall be compatible with type of conduit system
being used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and accepted shop

drawings.
B. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches to be located above

ground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box
mounting.
END OF SECTION
2018 16144-2 150407

SECTION 16212
METERING AND RELAYING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Instruments, relays, potential transformers, current transformers,

and other devices installed in motor control centers, variable frequency drives,
switchboards, switchgear, and similar engineered equipment.
B. Related Section:
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330.
1.03 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Instruments: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. General Electric Company.
2. Cutler-Hammer.
4. Allen Bradley Company.
B. Relays:
1. Solid-State Type: Manufacturers: The following:
a. S.E.L. (Schweitzer Relay Co.).
C. Potential Transformers: Manufacturers: The following or equal:

2. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse.
D. Current Transformers: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

2. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse.
2018 16212-1 150407

2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Instruments, Relays, and Other Devices for Panels: Utility grade, flush or semi-flush
mounted with cases of similar design.
B. Relays: Microprocessor based.
C. Instruments: Antiglare glass fronts, antiparallax scales, and white faces with black
numerals and markings.
1. Select with the full-load reading at approximately 75 percent of full scale,
unless otherwise specified.
2. Accuracy of instruments: One percent of full scale values.
D. Potential Transformers: Indoor, dry type, single phase, 60 hertz, with a 0 to 120-volt
secondary, and rated as required for the equipment furnished.
1. Furnish with current limiting fused disconnects.
2. Equip with resistors as required to limit the fault current to a value which the
fuse is able to interrupt without damage.
3. Transformer Accuracy: Suitable for meters and relays.
E. Medium Voltage Potential Transformers: As specified in the respective Section of

the medium voltage equipment Specifications.
F. Current Transformers: Indoor, dry type insulated for the voltage for which it is used
and rated as required for the equipment furnished with a 0 to 5 ampere secondary.
1. Rated for sufficient thermal and mechanical capacity to withstand the
maximum momentary short circuit current rating of the associated circuit
breaker.
2. Transformer Accuracy: Meter Class CT’s for CT’s dedicated to meter circuits
and a minimum accuracy class of C400 CT’s in protective relay circuits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Calibrate relays and verify settings and operational characteristics using relay
testing equipment manufactured by Multi-Amp Corporation. Test shall be performed
by qualified personnel experienced in operation of the equipment and adjustment of
relays, subject to witnessing by the ENGINEER. Furnish three copies of test reports
to the OWNER. In the event the system should require resetting or recalibration of
relays, perform such settings and testing without additional cost to OWNER.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT
A. Set adjustable protective relays to operate at time, current, voltage, and other
appropriate values as determined by the coordination study as accepted by
ENGINEER.
B. Install a calibration sticker with the date of calibration, due date of next calibration,
settings, name of firm, and qualified test personnel.
C. Provide data sheet for each device calibrated.
2018 16212-2 150407

D. Perform calibration with secondary standards with the appropriate certificates for
calibration.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of equipment.
3.04 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
2018 16212-3 150407

2018 16212-4 150407
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, poles, and accessories.
2. Section 01614 - Wind Design Criteria.
3. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 1029 - High-Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Applicable coefficients of utilization tables, isolux chart of illumination on a
horizontal plane, beam efficiency, horizontal and vertical beam spread, beam
lumens.
2. Submit pole seismic and wind-load design calculations before fixtures and
poles are manufactured.
B. Samples: Include finish Sample for lighting fixtures and poles.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lighting Fixtures: As noted on Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B. Lamps: One of the following or equal:

2. GTE Sylvania Lighting.
3. Philips Lighting Company.
C. Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps: One of the following or equal:

1. Advance.
2. Universal.
3. GTE Sylvania Lighting.
D. Ballasts, HID Lamps: One of the following or equal:
2018 16500-1 150407

1. Advance.
2. Holophane.
3. GTE's Sylvania Lighting.
E. Plugs and Receptacles: As specified in Section 16140.
2.02 FIXTURES
A. Lighting Fixtures: As described in Lighting Fixture Schedule, as specified, and as

1. Fixtures shall include lamps, ballasts, poles, mounting hardware, and
appurtenances to provide complete operating units.
B. Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start type.
2. T8 type, 32W; 2900 lumens.
2.03 BALLASTS
A. General:
1. Energy saving type suitable for use with energy saving lamps.
2. High power factor type, with power factor not less than 90 percent.
3. Cold weather (low temperature) rated for outdoor use.
4. Internally fused ballast.
B. Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps:

1. Bear CBM and ETL labels certifying that ballasts meet pertinent requirements.
a. Electronic ballasts for T8 32W.
b. Energy saving ballasts for T12 40W lamps.
2. Contain a built-in thermal protector to disconnect ballast permanently prior to
failure, or be fused.
3. High efficiency and constant wattage type.
4. Of two windings where required by applicable codes.
5. Use dimming ballasts with dimmer controlled fluorescent fixtures where
6. Rated for location of installation.
C. Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge Lamps:

1. Meet requirements of UL 1029.
2. UL listed, UL labeled, or UL recognized.
3. Copper windings.
4. Be internally fused.
2.04 POLES
A. Design for wind design criteria as specified in Section 01614.
B. Design for seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01612 for the project site
without structural damage.
C. Anchor Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Stainless steel.
2018 16500-2 150407

2.05 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Silver-cadmium-oxide, double-break contacts.
B. 20 ampere rating for lighting circuits.
C. Mechanically held.
D. Number of poles as indicated on the Drawings with a minimum of two poles and a
maximum of 12 poles for each contactor provided.
E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Square D Company, Type LX.
2. ASCO, Model 917.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Surface and Flush Mounted Fixtures: Solidly connected to a junction box.
B. Suspended Fixtures: Hung utilizing pendant mounting or stainless steel chains and
hooks. Electrically connect each fixture, or row of fixtures, by a length of Type SO
flexible cord, three conductor No. 14 American Wire Gauge minimum, with a twist-
lock plug to a twist-lock receptacle mounted in an individual junction box by conduit
as specified elsewhere herein.
C. Pole Mounted Fixtures: Mount on steel, aluminum, or fiberglass poles as described

in Lighting Fixture Schedule and as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Ground or bond metal poles to the plant grounding system.
2. Poles shall have adequate handholes in accordance with NEC requirements.
3. Poles shall have weatherproof switches, receptacles, photo cells where
3.02 SPARES
A. Fixtures and Mounting Accessories: one spare for each type.
3.03 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until accepted by OWNER.
END OF SECTION
2018 16500-3 150407

2018 16500-4 150407
SECTION 16950
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acceptance testing of electrical system, wiring, equipment, and

grounding.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

1. ATS-(Current Version): Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.
B. ANSI: Test Procedures for Electrical Equipment.
C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
D. ANSI/IEEE: Recommended Practices for Testing: Machinery, Ground Impedance,

Cables and Terminations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-Test Submittals:
1. Testing service qualifications.
2. Test personnel qualifications (resumes).
3. Equipment testing schedule.
4. Test data forms, custom edited for difference types of electrical equipment.
B. Post-Test Submittals: Summary Test Report consists of the following:

1. Summary of testing for the project.
2. Description of the equipment tested.
3. Description of the test and test procedures.
4. Test results for each apparatus and motorized equipment.
5. Conclusions and recommendations.
6. Completed test forms, including witness's signatures.
7. List of test equipment and calibration documents.
8. Date and time.
9. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check marked
indicating compliance or marked with explicit deviations.
2018 16950-1 150407

C. Submit Equipment Testing Schedule no later than seven days prior to scheduled
date of testing.
D. Project Record Documents: Submit as specified in Section 01770. Note or indicate

wiring deviations from Contract Documents on Project Record Documents.
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:

1. Obtain the services of an independent testing service, not affiliated with the
equipment manufacturer, that meets the Federal OSHA criteria for
accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1910.7 and has a work
history and qualifications acceptable to ENGINEER.
2. Prequalified Testing Services and Manufacturing Firms:
a. General Electric Company.
b. Cutler-Hammer.
c. Square D Company Technical Service Divisions.
d. Electro-Test Inc.
e. Siemens/Westinghouse Technical Services.
f. Electrical Engineering and Testing Services, Inc.
g. Power Systems Testing.
3. Testing service or testing personnel may be accepted or rejected based upon,
but not limited to, the testing equipment intended to be used, the qualifications
of the firm, and personnel.
B. Test Equipment Traceability:

1. Testing firm shall have a calibration program to maintain test instrumentation
and equipment within rated accuracy, including stickers with calibration dates
record.
2. Equipment and instruments used to evaluate electrical performance shall be
calibrated to a standard traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
3. Test equipment operating instructions and procedures shall be with the test
equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Testing firm shall perform tests following a safe practice in accordance with OSHA
and accident prevention procedures by National Safety Council and applicable
codes.
2018 16950-2 150407

B. Tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized, except as necessary for
equipment performance and functional test.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that electrical work is free from improper grounds, short circuits, and
overloads.
B. Verify correctness of wiring first by visual comparison of the conductor connections

with connection diagrams.
C. Make individual circuit continuity checks by using electrical circuit testers.
D. Verify correctness of wiring by actual electrical operation of electrical and

mechanical devices in both manual and automatic modes of operation.
3.03 IMPLEMENTATION OF POWER SYSTEMS STUDIES
A. Prior to perform acceptance testing, the testing firm shall inspect and verify
adequate short circuit rating of electrical equipment as determined by the short
circuit study specified in Section 16305.
B. The testing firm shall implement the adequate settings and calibration of protective
relays, circuit breakers, fuses and other applicable protective devices as
recommended in the protective devices coordination study in Section 16305.
3.04 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
1. Perform testing and allow OWNER and ENGINEER to witness testing.
2. Perform tests to assure that electrical equipment will operate within industry
and manufacturer's published tolerances, and will perform safely. Record test
result data, to be used as a baseline for future tests.
3. Test motorized equipment to verify conformance with the Contract Documents
and for acceptance.
4. Equipment for which acceptable test data has not been submitted, or has been
submitted but rejected, shall be deemed as not meeting Contract
requirements.
5. All testing shall be provided and completed in conformance with the latest
NETA standards and requirements.
B. Equipment and Materials Inspection and Test Procedures. Complete test reports for
each individual piece of equipment and systems:
1. Switchgear Assemblies (Medium Voltage and Low Voltage):
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Compare equipment nameplate and data with drawings and
specifications.
2) Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.
3) Confirm correct application of manufacturer’s recommended
lubricants.
2018 16950-3 150407

4) Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, physical
damage, and correct alignment.
5) Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit,
and missing hardware.
6) Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to
drawings and coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker’s
address for microprocessor-communication packages.
7) Verify that current and potential transformer ratios correspond to
drawings.
8) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
9) Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and
mechanical interlock systems.
a) Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open
locked-closed devices.
b) Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal
positions.
10) Clean switchgear.
11) Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated
surfaces.
12) Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13) Exercise all active components.
14) Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
15) Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
16) Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer
withdrawal disconnects, current-carrying and grounding.
17) Inspect control power transformers.
a) Inspect physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads,
tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general
condition.
b) Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit
breakers match drawings.
c) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and
grounding contacts and interlocks.
b. Electrical Tests:
1) Perform tests on all instrument transformers.
2) Perform ground-resistance tests.
3) Perform resistance tests through ball bus joints with a low-resistance
ohmmeter. Any joints that cannot be directly measured due to
permanently installed insulation wrap shall be indirectly measured
from closet accessible connection.
4) Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground.
5) Perform an overpotential or megger test on each bus section, each
phase-to-ground with phases not under test grounded, in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
6) Perform control wiring performance test.
2018 16950-4 150407

7)Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each
section of switchgear.
8) Determine accuracy of all meters and calibrate.
9) Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to insure correct
bus phasing from each source.
10) Perform the following tests on control power transformers.
a) Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements
from winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
b) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Disconnect transformer
at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to correct
secondary voltage. Confirm correct potential at all devices.
c) Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in
switchgear with multiple power sources.
11) Potential Transformer Circuits:
a) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Disconnect transformer
at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to correct
secondary voltage. Confirm potential at all devices.
12) Verify operation of switchgear/switchboard heaters.
2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers - Vacuum Type:
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
specifications.
2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
lubricants.
4) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
5) Perform all mechanical operational tests on both the circuit breaker
and its operating mechanism.
6) Measure critical distances such as contact gap as recommended by
manufacturer.
published data.
8) Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.
b. Electrical Tests:
1) Perform a contact-resistance test.
2) Verify trip, close, trip-free, and antipump function.
3) Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device.
4) Perform insulation-resistance tests pole-to-pole, pole-to-ground, and
across open poles at 2500 volts minimum.
5) Perform vacuum bottle integrity (overpotential) test across each
vacuum bottle with the breaker in the open position in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not exceed
maximum voltage stipulated for this test. Provide adequate
barriers and protection against x-radiation during this test. Do not
perform this test unless the contact displacement of each interrupter
is within manufacturer’s tolerance. (Be aware that some dc high-
potential test sets are half-wave rectified and may produce peak
2018 16950-5 150407

voltages in excess of the breaker manufacturer’s recommended
maximum.)
6) Perform an overpotential test in manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Test Values
1) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with data by manufacturer.
2) Compare contact resistance to adjacent poles and similar breakers.
Investigate deviations of more than 25 percent. Investigate any value
exceeding manufacturer’s tolerance.
3) Contact displacement shall be in accordance with factory recorded
data marked on the nameplate of each vacuum breaker or bottle.
4) The interrupter shall withstand the overpotential voltage applied.
3. Protective Relays: All relays installed on switchgear shall be tested regardless
if the units are not indicated on the subsequent list.
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1) Compare equipment nameplate data with drawing and specifications.
2) Inspect relays and cases for physical damage. Remove shipping
restraint material.
3) Tighten case connections. Inspect cover for correct gasket seal.
Clean cover glass. Inspect shorting hardware, connection paddles,
and/or knife switches. Remove any foreign material from the case.
Verify target reset.
4) Inspect relay for foreign material, particularly in disc slots of the
damping and electromagnets. Verify disk clearance. Verify contact
clearance and spring bias. Inspect spiral spring convolutions. Inspect
disk and contacts for freedom of movement and correct travel. Verify
tightness of mounting hardware and connections. Burnish contacts.
Inspect bearings and/or pivots.
5) Set relays in accordance with coordination study supplied by owner.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame.
Determine from the manufacturer’s instructions the allowable
procedures for this test for the microprocessor-based relays.
2) Inspect targets and indicators
a) Verify operation of all light-emitting diode indicators.
b) Set contrast for liquid-crystal display readouts.
c. 25 Sync Check Relay
1) Determine closing zone at rated voltage.
2) Determine maximum voltage differential that permits closing at zero
degrees.
3) Determine live line, live bus, dead line and dead bus set points.
4) Determine time delay.
5) Verify dead bus/live line, dead line/live bus, and dead bus/dead line
control functions.
d. 27 Undervoltage Relay
1) Determine dropout voltage.
3) Determine the time delay at a second point on the timing curve for
inverse time relays.
e. 32 Directional Power Relay
2018 16950-6 150407

1) Determine minimum pickup at maximum torque angle.
2) Determine closing zone.
3) Determine maximum torque angle.
5) Verify the time delay at a second point on the timing curve for inverse
time relays.
f. 46 Current Balance Relay
1) Determine pickup of each unit.
2) Determine percent slope.
g. 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays
1) Determine pickup.
2) Determine dropout.
h. 51 Time Overcurrent Relays
1) Determine minimum pickup.
2) Determine time delays at two points on the time current curve.
i. 59 Overvoltage Relays
1) Determine overvoltage pickup.
2) Determine time delays to close the contact with sudden application of
percent of pickup.
j. 63 Transformer Sudden Pressure Relay
1) Determine rate-of-rise or the pickup level of suddenly applied
pressure in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
2) Verify operation of the 63 FPX seal-in circuit.
3) Verify trip circuit to remote breaker.
k. 81 Frequency Relay
1) Verify frequency set points.
3) Determine undervoltage cutoff.
l. Control Verification
1) Verify that each of the relay contacts performs its intended function in
the control scheme including breaker trip tests, close inhibit tests, 86
lockout tests, and alarm functions.
4. Instrument Transformers
specifications.
3) Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements.
4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and
secondary circuit wiring.
published data.
6) Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide
contact.
7) Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and
grounding operation.
2018 16950-7 150407

8) Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential
transformers.
b. Electrical Tests - Current Transformers
1) Perform insulation-resistance test of the current transformer and
wiring-to-ground at 1000 volts dc. Do not perform this test on solid-
state devices.
2) Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
3) Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method in
accordance with ANSI C57.13.1 (IEEE Guide to Field Testing of
Relaying Current Transformers).
4) Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals and
determine the total burden.
c. Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers
1) Perform insulation-resistance test winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground. Do not perform this test with solid-state devices
connected.
2) Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity
marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable.
3) Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions, if applicable.
5. Metering
specifications.
3) Verify tightness of electrical connections.
4) Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, conditions of spiral spring, disc
clearance, contacts, and case-shorting contacts, as applicable.
5) Verify mechanically for freedom of movement, correct travel and
alignment, and tightness of mounting hardware.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Check calibration of meters at all cardinal points.
2) Verify all instruments multipliers.
3) Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer
secondary circuits are intact.
6. Pad Mount Transformers
specifications.
3) Verify removal of any shipping bracing after final placement.
4) Inspect impact recorder prior to unloading, if applicable.
5) Verify that alarm, control, and trip settings on temperature indicators
are as specified.
6) Verify that cooling fans and pumps operate correctly and that fan and
pump motors have correct overcurrent protection.
7) Verify operation of all alarm, control, and trip circuits form
temperature and level indicators, pressure relief device, and fault
pressure relay.
2018 16950-8 150407

published data.
9) Verify correct liquid level in all tanks and bushings.
10) Verify that positive pressure is maintained on nitrogen-blanketed
transformers.
11) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended
by manufacturer.
12) Verify correct equipment grounding.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground with test voltage. Test duration shall be for ten
minutes with resistances tabulated at thirty seconds, one minute, and
ten minutes. Calculate polarization index.
2) Perform a turns-ratio test on all no-load tap-changer positions and all
load tap-changer positions. Verify that tap setting is as specified.
Verify that winding polarities are in accordance with nameplate.
3) Measure resistance of each high-voltage winding in each no-load
tap-changer positions. Measure resistance of each low-voltage
winding in each load tap-changer position, if applicable.
4) If core ground strap is accessible, measure core insulation resistance
at 500 volts dc.
c. Test Values
2) Insulation-resistance test values.
3) The polarization index should be compared to manufacturer’s factory
test results. If manufacturer’s data is not available, acceptance test
results will serve as baseline data.
4) Turns-ratio test results shall not deviate more than one-half percent
from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio.
5) Consult manufacturer if winding-resistance measurements vary more
than one percent from adjacent windings.
6) Consult manufacturer if core insulation is less than one megohm at
500 volts dc.
7. Surge Arresters: Medium-Voltage
specifications.
3) Inspect for correct mounting and adequate clearances.
published data.
5) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to
a ground bus or ground electrode.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Test grounding connection.
2) Perform an insulation-resistance test.
c. Test Values
2018 16950-9 150407

2) Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and the ground
system shall be less than 0.5 ohms.
3) Insulation-resistance values.
8. Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
specifications.
lubricants.
4) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. Inspect are chutes.
Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and
alignment.
5) Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and
operating the breaker.
6) Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions
vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct.
7) Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both
the breaker and its operating mechanism.
calibrated torque-wrench method. Refer to manufacturer’s
instructions.
9) Check cell fit and element alignment.
10) Check racking mechanism.
b. Electrical Tests
2) Perform an insulation-resistance test at 1000 volts dc from pole-to-
pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across
open contacts of each phase.
3) Make adjustments for the final settings in accordance with the
coordination study supplied by owner.
4) Determine minimum pickup current by primary current injection.
5) Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.
6) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
7) Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.
8) Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.
9) Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or
undervoltage relays, to insure operation of shunt trip devices. Check
the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their cubicles.
10) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and
pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip
operation, trip-free and antipump function.
11) Check charging mechanism.
c. Test Values
1) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with data specified by
manufacturer.
2) Compare microhm or millivolt drop values to adjacent poles and
similar breakers. Investigate deviations of more than 25 percent.
2018 16950-10 150407

3)Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
Investigate values less than 100 megohms.
4) Trip characteristics of breakers shall fall within manufacturer’s
published time-current tolerance bands.
9. Motor Control Centers and Motor Starters: Low Voltage
specifications.
published data.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Insulation Tests
a) Measure insulation-resistance of each combination starter,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground, with the starter contacts
closed and the protective device open. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for devices with
solid-state components.
b) Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary
current through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of
the overload element.
Note: Test times for thermal trip units will, in general, be longer
than manufacturer’s curve if single-pole testing is performed.
Optionally test with all poles in series for time test and each pole
separately for comparison. (Refer to NEMA ICS 2-1993, Part 4.)
c. Test Values
manufacturer.
2) Insulation-resistance values.
3) Overload trip times shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
d. Motor Control Center Bus
1) See section switchgear assemblies for inspection and tests of MCC
bus.
10. Circuit Breakers: Low-Voltage Molded Case - 100 Amp or Larger Only
specifications.
2) Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.
3) Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.
4) Inspect case for cracks or other defects.
published data.
b. Electrical Tests
2018 16950-11 150407

2)
Perform an insulation-resistance test at 1000 volts dc from pole-to-
pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across
open contacts of each phase.
3) Perform adjustments for the final settings in accordance with the
coordination study.
4) Perform long-time delay time-current characteristics tests by passing
300 percent through each pole separately unless series testing is
required to defeat ground fault functions.
5) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
6) Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current
injection.
7) Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using
run-up or pulse method.
8) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and
pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip
operation, trip-free, and antipump function.
c. Test Values
manufacturer.
2) Compare microhm or millivolt drop values to adjacent poles and
similar breakers. Investigate deviations of more than 25 percent.
Investigate any value exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations.
3) Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
4) Trip characteristics of breakers shall fall within manufacturer’s
published time-current tolerance bands, including adjustment factors.
11. Rotating Machinery: AC Motors
specifications.
3) Inspect for correct anchorage, mounting, grounding, connection, and
lubrication.
published data.
5) When applicable, perform special tests such as air gap spacing and
pedestal alignment.
6) Verify the absence of unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs
of overheating during initial test run.
b. Electrical Tests: Induction Motors
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
Standard 43.
a) Motors larger than 200 horsepower: Test duration shall be for
ten minutes. Calculate polarization index.
b) Motors 200 horsepower and less: Test duration shall be for one
minute. Calculate the dielectric-absorption ratio.
2) Test motor starter in accordance with Section 7.16 of these
specifications.
2018 16950-12 150407

3)
Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to
drawings. Verify that metering or relaying devices using the RTD’s
have the correct rating.
4) Verify that the motor space heater is functional.
5) Perform a rotation test to insure correct shaft direction.
6) Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and
nameplate full-load amperes.
12. Capacitors
specifications.
3) Inspect capacitors for correct mountings and required clearances.
4) Verify that capacitors are electrically connected in their specified
configuration.
13. Engine Generator System: Note: The prime mover is not addressed in these
specifications.
specifications.
3) Inspect correct anchorage and grounding.
b. Electrical and Mechanical Tests
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
Standard 43. Calculate polarization index.
2) Test protective relay devices.
3) Perform phase-rotation test to determine compatibility with load
requirements.
4) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure,
overtemperature, overspeed, and other features as applicable.
5) Verify correct functioning of governor and regulator.
c. Test Values
1) Polarization index values shall be in accordance with IEEE Standard
43.
2) Performance tests shall conform to manufacturer’s published data.
14. Battery Systems
specifications.
published data.
4) Measure electrolyte specific gravity and temperature and visually
check fill level.
5) Verify adequacy of battery support racks, mounting, anchorage, and
clearances.
6) Verify ventilation of battery room or enclosure.
7) Verify existence of suitable eyewash equipment.
2018 16950-13 150407

b.
Electrical Tests
1) Measure each cell voltage and total battery voltage with charger
energized and in float mode of operation.
2) Measure intercell connection resistances.
c. Test Values
1) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
2) Specific gravity shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommended values.
3) Electrolyte level shall be within normal limits.
4) Cell voltage should be within 0.05 volt of each other or in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
15. Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices
specifications.
3) Inspect for correct mounting and adequate clearances.
published data.
5) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to
a ground bus or ground electrode.
16. Dry Type Transformers
a. Air-Cooled, 600 Volt and Below (167kVA Single-Phase, 500 kVA Three-
Phase and Smaller)
specifications.
3) Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets
have been removed.
4) Perform insulation-resistance test. Calculate polarization index.
Measurements shall be made from winding-to-winding and each
winding-to-ground. Test voltages and minimum resistance.
5) Verify that winding turns-ratio measurements and polarities are in
accordance with nameplate.
6) Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
17. Grounding Systems
1) Verify ground system is in compliance with drawings and
specifications.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Perform fall-of-potential test or alternative in accordance with IEEE
Standard 81-1991 on the main grounding electrode or system.
2) Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the
main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames,
system neutral, and/or derived neutral points.
c. Test Values
2018 16950-14 150407

1)
The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground
should be no greater than five ohms for commercial or industrial
systems and one ohm or less for generating grounds unless
otherwise specified.
2) Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm.
18. Ground-Fault Protection Systems
specifications.
2) Visually inspect the components for damage and errors in polarity or
conductor routing.
3) Verify tightness of all electrical connections including control circuits.
4) Verify correct operation of all functions of the self-test panel.
5) Verify that the control power transformer has adequate capacity for
the system.
6) Set pickup and time-delay settings in accordance with the settings
provided in the coordination study. Record appropriate operation and
test sequences as required by NEC Article 230-95.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Verify that relay does not operate at 90 percent of the pickup setting.
19. Medium-Voltage Cables
1) Compare cable data with drawings and specifications.
2) Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage.
published data.
4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
5) Inspect for shield grounding, cable support, and termination.
6) Verify that visible cable bends meet or exceed ICEA and/or
manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending radius.
7) If cables are terminated through window-type current transformers,
make an inspection to verify that neutral and ground conductors are
correctly terminated for operation of protective devices.
8) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
9) Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Perform a shield-continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter
method.
2) Perform a dc high-potential test on all cables. Adhere to all
precautions and limits as specified in the applicable NEMA/ICEA
Standard for the specific cable. Perform tests in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE Standard 400. Test procedure shall be as follows, and
the results for each cable test shall be recorded as specified herein.
Test voltages shall not exceed 80 percent of cable manufacturer’s
factory test value or the maximum test voltage.
a) Insure that the input voltage to the test set is regulated.
2018 16950-15 150407

b)
Current-sensing circuits in test equipment shall measure only
the leakage current associated with the cable under test and
shall no include internal leakage of the test equipment.
c) Record wet- and dry-bulb temperatures or relative humidity and
temperature.
d) Test each section of cable individually.
e) Individually test each conductor with all other conductors
grounded. Ground all shields.
f) Terminations shall be adequately corona-suppressed by guard
ring, field reduction sphere, or other suitable methods as
necessary.
g) Insure that the maximum test voltage does not exceed the limits
for terminators specified in IEEE Standard 48 or manufacturer’s
specifications.
h) Apply a dc high-potential test in at least five equal increments
until maximum test voltage is reached. No increment shall
exceed the voltage rating of the cable. Record dc leakage
current at each step after a constant stabilization time consistent
with system charging current.
i) Raise the conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and
hold for 15 minutes on shielded cable and five minutes on
nonshielded cable. Record readings of leakage current at
30 seconds and one minute and at one minute intervals
thereafter.
j) Reduce the conductor test potential to zero and measure
residual voltage at discrete intervals.
k) Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation
stored charge.
c. Test Values
1) Shielding must exhibit continuity. Investigate resistance values in
excess of ten ohms per 1000 feet of cable.
20. Low-Voltage Cables: 600 Volt
1) Compare cable data with drawings and specifications.
2) Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection in accordance with single-line diagram.
published data.
4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
5) Verify cable color coding with applicable engineer’s specifications
and National Electrical Code standards.
b. Electrical Tests
1) Perform a insulation resistance test on all cables.
21. Systems Function Tests
a. Perform system function tests upon completion of equipment tests. It is
the purpose of system function tests to prove the correct interaction of all
sensing, processing, and action devices.
2018 16950-16 150407

b. Develop test parameters for the purpose of evaluating performance of all
integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design
requirements. Perform these tests.
c. Verify the correct operation of all interlock safety devices for fail-safe
functions in addition to design function.
d. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating
devices.
3.05 SUMMARY TEST REPORT
A. Upon completion of testing of all electrical equipment, submit summary test report.
B. Contractor shall provide a Service contract from a third party testing organization to
conduct infrared thermography of all electrical equipment provided under this
contract. This test will be conducted 6-9 months following Final Completion. The
Service contract is to be issued in the Owner’s name. Any deficiencies noted during
this test are to be corrected by the Contractor within 14 days of receipt of the
service report from the testing organization.
END OF SECTION
2018 16950-17 150407

2018 16950-18 150407

Specifications WWTP Parshall Flume

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Specifications WWTP Parshall Flume

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CITY OF ARVIN

WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

4540 California Avenue, Suite 550

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\TitlePage.doc

F:\proj\2015\150407\2 Project Management\Specifications\Sept2018\TitlePage.doc

DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,

PART I - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2018 TOC-1 150407

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02084 UTILITY STRUCTURES

2018 TOC-2 150407

02312 CONTROLLED DENSITY BACKFILL

05140 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

06611 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS

2018 TOC-3 150407

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13410 BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

2018 TOC-4 150407

15268 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, TUBING, AND HOSE

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

2018 TOC-5 150407

For completing the Wastewater Treatment Plant Parshall Flume Installation.

ARTICLE 1 - BID OPENING

ARTICLE 2 - DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

There is no charge for these documents.

3.02 Bidding Documents may be examined at the following locations:

Veolia Water/City of Arvin WWTP

2018 00100-1 150407

3.03 Project Manager:

ARTICLE 4 - BID SECURITY

ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE

ARTICLE 6 - OWNER'S RIGHTS (VEOLIA WATER)

ARTICLE 7 - LAWS AND REGULATIONS

2018 00100-2 150407

ARTICLE 8 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE

The Engineer’s estimate for this project work is $185,000.

Date August 30, 2018

2018 00100-3 150407

ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

2018 00200-1 150407

ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE

4.01 Subsurface and Physical Conditions:

A. The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to

2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and

4.02 Underground Facilities:

4.03 Hazardous Environmental Condition:

A. The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings relating to

B. Copies of reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions will be made

2018 00200-2 150407

4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

2018 00200-3 150407

H. Promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE

ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS

ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

2018 00200-4 150407

No. _ Dated ____